Owner’s Manual
EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guar-
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS
UNIT!
antee that interference will not occur in all installations. If
this product is found to be the source of interference,
which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and
“ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of
the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon
lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.
This product, when installed as indicated in the instruc-
tions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements.
Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may
void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the prod-
uct.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to acces-
sories and/or another product use only high quality
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST
be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to fol-
low instructions could void your FCC authorization to use
this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to com-
ply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part
15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these
requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance
that your use of this product in a residential environment
will not result in harmful interference with other electronic
devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequen-
cies and, if not installed and used according to the
instructions found in the users manual, may cause inter-
ference harmful to the operation of other electronic
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to dis-
tribute this type of product. If you can not locate the
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation
of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangetho-
rpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products dis-
tributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsid-
iaries.
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
(class B)
COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT
(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)
Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America
Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620
Telephone : 714-522-9011
Type of Equipment : Professional Audio Workstation
Model Name : AW2400
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following conditions:
1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
2) this device must accept any interference received including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation.
See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is sus-
pected.
* This applies only to products distributed by
YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
(FCC DoC)
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM
Connecting the Plug and Cord
WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED
IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance
with the following code:
GREEN-AND-YELLOW
BLUE
BROWN
:
:
:
EARTH
NEUTRAL
LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not
correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your
plug proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured GREEN-and-YELLOW must be connected to
the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety
earth symbol
or colored GREEN or GREEN-and-YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal
which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal
which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
(3 wires)
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol
within an equilateral triangle is intended to
alert the user to the presence of
uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of
sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of
electric shock to persons.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The exclamation point within an
equilateral triangle is intended to alert the
user to the presence of important operating
and maintenance (servicing) instructions
in the literature accompanying the product.
The above warning is located on the rear of the unit.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus
(including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug
has two blades and a third grounding prong.The wide
blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult
an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
12 Use only with the cart, stand,
tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer,
or sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use
caution when moving the cart/
apparatus combination to
avoid injury from tip-over.
8
9
13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or
when unused for long periods of time.
14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or
plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has
been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate
normally, or has been dropped.
10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience
receptacles, and the point where they exit from the
apparatus.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
(98-6500)
This product contains a high intensity lamp that contains a small amount of mercury.
Disposal of this material may be regulated due to environmental considerations.
For disposal information in the United States, refer to the Electronic Industries Alliance web site:
www.eiae.org
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
(mercury)
3
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from
electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not
limited to, the following:
Power supply/Power cord
Water warning
• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the device. The required
voltage is printed on the name plate of the device.
• Do not expose the device to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet
conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill
into any openings.
• Use only the included power cord.
• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or
radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord,
place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could
walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it.
If you notice any abnormality
• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a
sudden loss of sound during use of the device, or if any unusual smells
or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the
power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the
device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• Be sure to connect to an appropriate outlet with a protective grounding
connection. Improper grounding can result in electrical shock.
Do not open
• If this device should be dropped or damaged, immediately turn off the
power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the
device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• Do not open the device or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or
modify them in any way. The device contains no user-serviceable parts. If
it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and
have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or
damage to the device or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Do not place the device in an unstable position where it might
accidentally fall over.
Power supply/Power cord
• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the device is not to be
• The plastic side panels do not provide a secure grip, and should not be
used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.
used as handles when moving or transporting the unit. Carrying the unit
• When removing the electric plug from the device or an outlet, always
by the plastic side panels can result in the unit being dropped, which
hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.
could damage the unit and/or cause personal injury.
• Do not block the vents. This device has ventilation holes at the top/front/
Location
rear to prevent the internal temperature from becoming too high. In
particular, do not place the device on its side or upside down. Inadequate
ventilation can result in overheating, possibly causing damage to the
device(s), or even fire.
• Before moving the device, remove all connected cables.
• When setting up the device, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is
easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately
turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet.
• Do not use the device in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,
mobile phone, or other electric devices. Doing so may result in noise,
both in the device itself and in the TV or radio next to it.
• Avoid setting all equalizer controls and faders to their maximum.
Depending on the condition of the connected devices, doing so may
cause feedback and may damage the speakers.
• Do not expose the device to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold
or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the
day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the
internal components.
(5)-4 1/2
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Handling caution
• Before connecting the device to other devices, turn off the power for all
devices. Before turning the power on or off for all devices, set all volume
levels to minimum.
• When turning on the AC power in your audio system, always turn on the
power amplifier LAST, to avoid speaker damage. When turning the power
off, the power amplifier should be turned off FIRST for the same reason.
• Be sure to connect to a properly grounded power source. A ground screw
is provided on the rear panel of this device for maximum safety and
shock prevention. If the mains outlet is not grounded, be sure to connect
the ground screw to a confirmed ground point before plugging the device
into the mains. Improper grounding can result in electrical shock.
• Do not insert your fingers or hands in any gaps or openings on the
device (vents, disc slots, etc.).
• Avoid inserting or dropping foreign objects (paper, plastic, metal, etc.)
into any gaps or openings on the device (vents, disc slots, etc.) If this
happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from
the AC outlet. Then have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha
service personnel.
• Do not use headphones for a long period of time at a high or
uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing
loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a
physician.
• Do not rest your weight on the device or place heavy objects on it, and
avoid use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
XLR-type connectors are wired as follows (IEC60268 standard): pin 1: ground, pin 2: hot (+), and pin 3: cold (-).
Insert TRS phone jacks are wired as follows: sleeve: ground, tip: send, and ring: return.
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the device, or data that is lost or destroyed.
Always turn the power off when the device is not in use.
The performance of components with moving contacts, such as switches, volume controls, and connectors, deteriorates over time. Consult qualified Yamaha
service personnel about replacing defective components.
(5)-4 2/2
5
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Caution for Laser
This product utilizes a laser.
Use of control, adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in haz-
ardous radiation exposure.
Do not open covers and do not repair yourself. Refer servicing to qualified personnel.
Laser properties of the Drive
Laser Class : Class 1 (HHS and IEC 825-1)
Wavelength : for CD 784 nm
for DVD 662 nm
The label shown below is located on the rear of this product.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
The label shown below is located on the top of the internal CD-RW drive.
CAUTION
CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID EXPOSURETO BEAM.
ATTENTION CLASSE 3B RAYONNEMENT LASER VISIBLE ET INVISIBLE EN CAS D’OUVERTURE.
EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU.
VORSICHT
KLASSE 3B SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG,WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET.
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
ADVARSEL KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING VED ÅBNING. UNDGÅ UDS/ETTELSE FOR STRÅLING.
ADVARSEL KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING NÅR DEKSEL ÅPNES. UNNGÅ EKSPONERING FOR STRÅLEN.
VARNING
VARO!
KLASS 3B SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD. STRÅLEN ÄR FARLIG.
KURSSI 3B NÄKYVÄ JA NÄKYMÄTÖN AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LASERSÄTEILYLLE, ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEN.
CAUTION: CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
Handling the CD-R/RW media
Please observe the following points when handling the disc.
Failure to do so may cause problems such as the recorded data being lost, the drive to malfunction, or the
printed label to become blurred.
• Do not place the disc in locations of direct sunlight, high temperature, or high humidity.
• Do not touch the recording surface of the disc.
Hold the disc at the edges.
• Gently wipe dust or dirt off of the recording surface of the disc.
Use an air duster or cleaner to remove dust. Vigorously rubbing the surface of the disc with a dry cloth may
scratch the disc.
• If the disc surface needs cleaning, wipe gently from the center to the outside of the disc with a soft damp
cloth, then gently wipe off remaining moisture in the same way with a clean dry cloth.
• Do not write on the disc or affix labels to it.
• Do not wipe the disc with chemicals or detergents.
• Do not bend or drop the disc.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Internal Hard Disk Precautions
• During some hard disk operations a small amount of vibration might be felt at the control panel and you
might hear some mechanical noises. This is normal.
• Do not subject the unit to strong physical shock. Excessive physical shock can damage the internal hard
disk.
• Always turn the power off when moving the unit from one location to another. Data on the internal hard disk
can be lost or corrupted if the unit is moved while the power is on.
Copyright Notice
Copyright and other intellectual property laws in various countries permit reproduction of copyrighted materi-
als under certain requirements. The observance of applicable laws for use of this product, however, is your
responsibility. Yamaha disclaims any liability for violation of such laws in association with the use of this
product.
Although this product is designed for original music production, it can be utilized to make reproduction of
copyrighted music and other sound products. While certain reproduction and use of reproduced materials are
permitted under applicable laws, such reproduction and use without license may constitute copyright infringe-
ment and other violation of laws. Since violation of such laws can have serious consequences, you may wish
to consult a legal expert about your planned use of this product.
This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or
with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without lim-
itation, all computer software, styles files, MIDI files, WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use
of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of
copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.
The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may
appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.
7
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Repeat playback of a specific region
Finding a location while monitoring the sound
Assigning input signals to tracks
Assigning input signals to tracks
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Displaying the mix parameters
Editing the name of a virtual track
9
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Types of media that you can use
Exchanging Song Data
Command Editing Automix data
Fine Adjustment Of Overall
Copying Exported WAV Files
Importing Copied WAV Files
Synchronizing the AW2400
Switching AW2400 scenes
Recording/playing AW2400
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
Before you start
1
This chapter explains what you should know before you begin using the
AW2400.
Introduction
■ Check the included items
■ Trademarks
The AW2400 package contains the following items. If any
are missing, please contact your dealer.
• Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer,
Inc. USA in the United States and other countries.
• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corpora-
tion USA in the United States and other countries.
• The AW2400
• Power cord
• Cubase SX and Nuendo are trademarks of Steinberg
Media Technologies AG.
• Owner’s manual (this book)
• CD-ROM
• Logic is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
USA in the United States and other countries.
• SONAR is a registered trademark of Twelve Tone Sys-
tems, Inc.
■ Copyright
Copying of commercially available music sequence data
and/or digital audio files for any purpose other than your
own personal use is strictly prohibited.
• ProTools is a trademark or registered trademark of Avid
Technology, Inc. and affiliated companies.
• Other company names and product names in this docu-
ment are the trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective owners.
■ Yamaha Website (English only)
http://www.yamahasynth.com/
■ Yamaha Manual Library
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/
Remember to back up your data
■ Storing produced data
■ Responsibility for loss of data, etc.
Produced data can be lost due to breakdown or mistaken
operation. We recommend that you store all important
data on your computer, CD-R/CD-RW discs, or other
external storage medium.
Yamaha will accept no responsibility for any damages
(including consequential or incidental) incurred by the
customer or any third party as a result of loss or impair-
ment of the data stored on the hard disk or CD-R media,
regardless of whether such loss could have been or actu-
ally was foreseen by Yamaha.
Nor does Yamaha guarantee the media against any defect
that may render it unusable.
11
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the built-in CD-RW drive
1
A built-in CD-RW drive is a device that lets you create or
play audio CDs, backup and restore data from the internal
hard disk, and read data from a CD-ROM.
■ Handling
1 Never touch the objective lens.
IMPORTANT
B Be careful that the objective lens does not become
dusty or dirty.
• Even if a CD-RW drive is operating normally, it may fail a read
or write operation approximately once in five hundred times.
C If the objective lens becomes dusty, use a commer-
cially available blower etc. to blow the dust off with
clean air.
• Yamaha will take no responsibility for any damages, direct or
consequential, that may result from the use of the above CD-
RW drive.
D Since the inside of the drive contains powerful mag-
netic circuitry, do not allow any magnetic material to
come near the drive. (In particular, any metallic frag-
ments, screws, or pins that enter the drive mechanism
will cause operation to fail.)
Using the CD-RW drive
To insert a disc into the CD-RW drive, press the eject
switch. The disc tray will open. Place the disc on the tray,
and gently push the disc tray in.
■ Removing a CD in an emergency
If you are unable to remove the disc by pressing the eject
switch, insert a wire of less than 2 mm diameter (such as a
straightened paper clip) into the eject hole, and push gen-
tly. However, pressing the eject switch will not eject the
disc when the AW2400 is in the following states, so do not
use this method in such cases.
NOTE
• The disc tray is ejected electrically. If the disc tray is not ejected
when you press the eject switch, turn on the power of the AW2400
and press the eject switch once again.
• When the AW2400’s power is “OFF”
• When the disc is being accessed (data is being read,
written, or erased)
• While in CD PLAY mode
CAUTION
• This removal method is for use in emergencies such as when
you cannot remove the disc due to a malfunction of the disc
tray or a power failure. Do not use this method unnecessarily,
since doing so will damage the CD-RW drive.
Eject hole Eject switch
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing an optional card
Installing an optional card
1
To install an optional mini-YGDAI card, proceed as
follows.
■ Available optional cards
By installing a separately sold mini-YGDAI card in a rear-
panel slot, you can add analog input/output jacks to the
AW2400 or allow connection of external digital devices.
The following types of cards can be used.
Make sure that the power is turned off.
1
2
Loosen the screws that hold the slot cover
in place, and remove the slot cover.
Keep the removed slot cover in a safe place.
Number of
channels
Digital
format
Bit
depth
Card type
Model
MY4-AD
4
24 bit
20 bit
MY8-AD
AD card
—
—
MY8-AD24
MY8-AD96
MY4-DA
8
24 bit
4
8
20 bit
24 bit
DA card
MY8-DA96
MY8-AE
MY8-AE96
MY8-AE96S
MY16-AE
MY8-AT
8
AES/EBU
16
8
Digital I/O card
24 bit
ADAT
MY16-AT
MY8-TD
16
8
TASCAM
MY16-TD
16
Waves Plug-in
DSP card
Y96K
8
ADAT
24bit
24bit
mLAN card
MY16-mLAN
16
IEEE1394
Align the edges of the card with the guard
rails inside the slot, and insert the card into
the slot.
Push the card all the way into the slot so that the con-
nector at the end of the card is correctly mated with the
connector inside the slot.
3
Refer to the Yamaha Pro Audio global website for the
most recent information on I/O cards.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com
■ Installing an optional card
Before installing a card, you must check theYamaha web-
site to make sure that this device is compatible.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com
Use the screws included with the card to
fasten the card in place.
4
Malfunctions or incorrect operation may occur if the
card is not fastened.
13
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Introducing the AW2400
This chapter describes the features of the AW2400, the name of each part
and its function, and introduces terminology you need to know when using
the AW2400.
2
Features of the AW2400
The AW2400 is an audio workstation that combines a digital mixer, multi-effect processor, hard
disk recorder, and CD-RW drive.
The following diagram shows the signal flow within the AW2400.
Mixer
×2
[MIC/LINE
INPUT]
jacks 1–8
×8
×16
×2
Sound clip
×2
×4
Input channels 1–16
Track channels 1–24
Effect return channels 1–4
[OMNI OUT] jacks 1-4
×16
×2
I/O slot
I/O card
I/O card
[DIGITAL STEREO OUT] connector
[STEREO OUT] jacks
[MONITOR OUT] jacks
[PHONES] jack
×2
×2
Bus1 L/R, Bus2 L/R
AUX buses 1–4
Effect buses 1–4
Stereo buses L/R
[DIGITAL
STEREO IN]
connector
×2
×2
×2
×2
Effect 1
Effect 2
Effect 3
Effect 4
×2
×2
×2
×2
Metronome
Stereo output channel
Internal Effects
×2
Recorder input
patching
CD Play
×2
×24
×24
CD Write
Data Backup/Restore
WAV File Import
Recorder
CD-R/RW drive
Now let’s take a more detailed look at each section of the AW2400.
The 8 AD input ([MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8), chan-
nels 1–16 on an optional I/O card installed in I/O slot, or
the stereo [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector can be
selected for input.
■ Mixer section
● Plenty of input channels with professional
features
The track channel 1–24 inputs are permanently assigned
to tracks 1–24, and the effect return channel 1–4 inputs are
permanently assigned to the outputs of internal effect pro-
cessors 1–4.
The AW2400 digital mixer features 24-bit AD/DA conver-
sion with 32-bit internal processing for uncompromised
sound quality. 16 input channels, 24 track channels, and 4
stereo effect return channels provide plenty of input
capacity for most mixing situations.
15
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features of the AW2400
● Totally redesigned operation
● Trigger track function
The AW2400 is designed to be operated directly by the
musician (guitarist, vocalist, drummer etc.). Input signal
track assignment, mixdown and bounce recording set-
tings, tracking with effects/EQ/dynamics, compressor set-
tings, and much more can be easily handled with simple,
straightforward operation.
The “Trigger Track” function allows the track [ON] keys
and faders to be used to start and stop playback of
recorded tracks. This is ideal for performance situations in
which you want to switch phrases or patterns in real time,
or when you need to start background music on cue, for
example.
2
● Four-band EQ and dynamics processors on
● Versatile editing functionality
each channel
Audio data recorded on a track can be copied, moved, or
edited using a variety of commands. You can make
detailed edits, or even make radical changes to the struc-
ture of the song by using the same riff repeatedly or
increasing the number of choruses.
Four-band full-parametric EQ and dynamics processing is
provided on virtually every channel. You can recall the
desired preset from the library, and use the panel knobs
and keys to quickly adjust the settings.
“Time Compression” lets you compress or expand the
time axis of the audio data over a range of 50%–200%.
“Pitch Change” lets you modify the pitch over a range of
up or down one octave. You can use the Undo function to
undo the results of as many as the last fifteen editing oper-
ations.
● Four high-quality multi-effect units built-in
The four built-in effect units deliver a wide variety of
effects including ambience effects such as reverb and
delay, modulation type effects such as chorus and flanger,
and guitar-type effects such as distortion and amp simula-
tion. These effects can be used either via send/return, or
inserted into a desired channel.
● A variety of Locate methods, and auto
punch-in/out
Eight locate points (start/end, relative zero, A/B, in/out,
quick locator) and 99 markers can be assigned at any
desired point in the song for quick access via Locate oper-
ations. Auto punch-in/out and A-B repeat playback func-
tions are also provided. The AW2400 also has a
metronome that follows the tempo map.
● Automix capability
Full automix production power is provided with 13 motor
faders for comprehensive fader control, pan control, scene
recall and library recall capability.
● I/O slot for expansion with optional I/O cards
Expanded inputs and outputs can be provided in ADAT,
TASCAM, AES/EBU, and other formats. Optional DSP
cards can also be used to provide extra signal processing
capability via the I/O slot.
● Sound Clip function
The Sound Clip function lets you record and play back an
input signal without using the recorder tracks.You can use
this function to make quick sketches of song or arrange-
ment ideas. You can transfer recorded sound clip data to
the recorder as required.
■ Recorder section
● 16-track Simultaneous Recording & 24-track
● Vocal Editing with Pitch Fix
A Pitch Fix function is provided to allow precise adjust-
ment of the pitch of a vocal track as well as the generation
of chorus parts from a main vocal line. This feature can
also be used to change the character of a vocal sound.
Simultaneous Playback (16-bit songs)
You can record multiple instrument tracks one by one, or
set up multiple mics to record a drum set or a live perfor-
mance by an entire band. A stereo track for direct mix-
down of all 24 tracks is also provided, letting you manage
the multi-track audio and the two-track mix as a single
data package.
8 virtual tracks are available for the recorder tracks as well
as the stereo track. When recording parts or when doing a
mix, you can switch virtual tracks to record multiple takes
and select the best take later.
The “bit depth” (number of quantization bits) of the audio
data recorded on each track can individually be set to 16
or 24 bits for each song. 16-bit songs allow simultaneous
recording of up to 16 tracks, and simultaneous playback of
up to 24 tracks. 24-bit songs allow simultaneous recording
up to 8 tracks, and simultaneous playback of up to 12
The recording sampling frequency can also be set to either
44.1 kHz or 48 kHz (the selected sampling has no effect
on the number of simultaneous record or playback tracks).
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ CD-RW drive
■ Connecting to a Computer
A dedicated CD-RW drive is installed in the AW2400.You
can produce an audio CD containing the stereo mixes of
songs recorded on the hard disk. Markers assigned within
a song can also be used as the CD track numbers.You can
even use advanced techniques such as assigning more than
one track number within a single song. The CD-RW drive
can also be used to backup/restore songs, to play back
audio CDs, and to load WAV data from a CD-ROM.
The AW2400 can be directly connected to a computer via
the built-in USB interface, which enables transferring
audio files as well as MIDI messages. This allows WAV-
format audio files to be copied between the AW2400 and
computer for convenient management and processing in
computer-based applications, and “backup” song files can
be stored on the computer’s memory media.
2
AW2400 terminology
Here’s a quick overview of terminology used with the AW2400.
● Virtual tracks
Each of the 24 audio tracks and the stereo track consists of
Recorder section
■ Tracks
A location where data is recorded is called a “track.” The
AW2400’s recorder section uses the following types of
track.
eight “virtual” tracks. For the audio tracks and the stereo
track, only one virtual track can be recorded or played at
any time. However, you can switch virtual tracks to con-
tinue recording other takes while preserving the previ-
ously-recorded content.
The diagram below shows the concept of virtual tracks.
The horizontal rows indicate audio tracks 1–24, and the
vertical columns correspond to virtual tracks 1–8. The
shaded areas indicate the virtual track that is currently
selected for recording or playback.
● Audio tracks
The physical tracks used to record and play back audio
data are called “audio tracks,” or simply “tracks.” The
AW2400 has 24 audio tracks. You can record 16 tracks
simultaneously, and play back 24 tracks simultaneously
(16-bit songs).
Audio tracks
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
21 22 23 24
● Stereo track
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The AW2400 has a “stereo track” that is independent from
audio tracks 1–24, and which records and plays a stereo
audio signal. The stereo track is used mainly as a dedi-
cated mixdown track for recording the final mix.
Stereo track
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
● Trigger tracks
The “Trigger Track” function allows the track [ON] keys
and faders to be used to start and stop playback of
recorded tracks. When the Trigger Track function is
engaged and you press a track channel [ON] key, the cor-
responding track will playback one time from the begin-
ning of the song to the end of the recorded data.
17
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AW2400 terminology
● AUX send master channels 1–4
Provide final level adjustment for the AUX buses, as well
as EQ and dynamics processing.
■ Locate points/markers
Locations within a song that you specified in order to exe-
cute a function such as auto punch-in/out or A-B repeat
playback are called “locate points.” Locate points include
in/out points and the A/B points. You can use the Locate
section keys to move instantly to these points.
● Effect send master channels 1–4
Provide final level adjustment for the effect buses, as well
as dynamics processing.
2
You can assign “markers” at desired locations within a
song independently of the locate points so that you can
find these locations quickly. The AW2400 lets you set up
to ninety-nine markers (1–99). By using the keys Locate
section you can move instantly to the previous or next
marker.
■ Mixing Layers
In order to efficiently handle numerous input channels the
AW2400 mixer section channels are organized in “mixing
layers”. The diagram shows an overview of the AW2400’s
6 mixing layers.
Mixer section
■ Channels
A signal path that processes a single signal within the
mixer and sends it to various sections is called a “chan-
nel.”
A
B
C
D
E
F
The mixer section of the AW2400 provides the following
channels.
● Input channels 1–16
Input channels provide level control, EQ, and dynamics
processing for signals that are input via the [MIC/LINE
INPUT] jacks 1–8, the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connec-
tor, and/or an I/O card installed in the rear-panel slot, and
send them to the recorder tracks or to the [STEREO OUT]
jacks.
The channels available in each of the mixing layers are as
follows.
● Track channels 1–24
1 Mixing Layer IN 1-8
These channels provide level adjustment, EQ, and dynam-
ics processing for the audio playback signals from audio
tracks 1–24 of the recorder, and send the signals to the ste-
reo track and the [STEREO OUT] jacks. You can also per-
form “bounce recording” by sending these channels to
different tracks.
Input channels 1–8 and effect return channels 1–4.
B Mixing Layer IN 9-16
Input channels 9–16 and effect return channels 1–4.
C Mixing Layer MASTER
Bus master channels 1/2, AUX send master channels 1–4,
and effect send master channels 1–4.
● Effect return channels 1–4
These channels send the signals returned from the internal
effects to the stereo track and the [STEREO OUT] jacks.
D Mixing Layer TRACK 1-12
Track channels 1–12.
E Mixing Layer TRACK 13-24
Track channels 13–24.
● Stereo output channel
This channel provides level adjustment, EQ, and dynamics
processing for the stereo bus signal (which carries the mix
of the other channels), and sends it to the stereo track or to
the [STEREO OUT] jacks. The same signal is also output
from the [MONITOR OUT] jacks and from the
[PHONES] jack.
F REMOTE Layer
A special layer for remote control of external MIDI
devices.
● Bus master channels 1/2
Provide level adjustment, EQ, and dynamics processing
for the signals from bus 1 and bus 2, and sends the signals
to the audio tracks.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AW2400 terminology
■ Mix Parameters
Overall
■ Songs
Channel pan, EQ, dynamics processor and other settings
are known as “mix parameters”. All mix parameters can
be saved together as “scenes” that can be recalled when-
ever necessary. Furthermore, specialized libraries are pro-
vided for various parameter groups – EQ, effects, etc. –
that can be saved and recalled individually for each chan-
nel.
The smallest unit by which the AW2400 manages a com-
position is called a “song.” When you save a song on the
hard disk, all data necessary for reproducing that song will
be saved; i.e., not just the audio data, but also the mixer
settings and the automix settings. You can return to the
original state at any time by loading the saved song.
2
■ Paired channels
For effect return channels 1–4, stereo output channel, and
bus master channel 1–2, the parameters (except for pan)
are always linked for adjacent pairs of channels. These are
called “paired channels.”
For input channels 1–16, track channels 1–24, and AUX
send master channels 1–4, you can also assign adjacent
odd-numbered/even-numbered channels to function as
paired channels. The parameters (except for pan and
phase) of paired channels will be linked, so that adjusting
one parameter will cause the same parameter of the other
channel to be adjusted accordingly.
■ Scenes and scene memories
A “scene” is a stored set of settings for the mixer section
and effects. The area of memory that holds the scenes is
called “scene memory,” and 99 scenes can be stored for
each song. Scene memories are saved on the hard disk as
part of the song.
■ Libraries
A “library” is an area of memory that stores individual set-
tings such as for EQ or dynamics. The AW2400 has sepa-
rate libraries for EQ, dynamics, effect, channel, and
mastering settings.
■ Buses
Recalling a scene affects all mixer section settings, while
the libraries allow only specified settings to be recalled as
required. You can also save the settings from one channel
and copy them to other channels, for example.
A signal route that mixes the signals from multiple chan-
nels and sends them to an output jack or recorder track
input is called a “bus.”
Unlike channels, which handle only a single signal, a bus
can combine multiple signals into one or two (stereo) out-
puts and send them to a destination.
Each library is saved on the hard disk as part of the song.
The AW2400’s mixer section provides the following
buses.
■ Tempo map
The “tempo map” records changes in tempo and time sig-
nature that occur during the course of a song. The tempo
map is saved on the hard disk as part of the song.
● Stereo bus
This bus mixes the input signals to stereo, and sends them
via the stereo output channel to the stereo track of the
recorder or to the [STEREO OUT] jacks. Normally the
same signal output via the [STEREO OUT] jacks is also
output via the [MONITOR OUT] and [PHONES] jacks.
■ System data
Various global settings that apply to all songs are collec-
tively referred to as “system data.” System data is stored
on the hard disk independently of the individual songs.
● AUX buses 1–4
These buses mix the signals from the track, input, and
effect return channels and send them to the specified out-
put connector. Use these when you will use an external
effect processor, or to create a mix differing from the ste-
reo channel for musicians to monitor.
● Effect buses 1–4
These buses combine the signals from the track and input
channels, and input them to built-in effects 1–4.
● Bus 1, Bus 2
These buses mix track, input, and effect return channels
and send them to the inputs of free tracks. Bus 1 and bus 2
are used for bounce (ping-pong) recording.
19
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts of the AW2400 and what they do
■ Analog Input section
1
2
2
C
C [INPUT SEL] keys 1–8
1 [GAIN] knobs 1–8
These keys select the mixer input channel that you will
These adjust the sensitivity of the rear panel MIC/LINE
operate.
INPUT jacks 1–8 to input signals.
B [PEAK] Indicators
These indicators will light red if the peak signal level after
the [GAIN] knob reaches or exceeds 3-dB below clipping.
To set the optimum record level, set the [GAIN] knob so
that the indicator flashes only briefly on the highest peaks
that will be encountered during the recording.
■ Work Navigate section
C [TRACK] key
This key accesses the TRACK screen, where you can
check whether each track contains data, and switch the
virtual tracks that will be used for recording and playback.
1
3
5
G
2
4
6
H
D [EDIT] key
This key accesses the EDIT screen, where you can copy or
erase tracks.
E [MIDI] key
Accesses the MIDI screen where you can set up MIDI
synchronization, scene change, and other settings.
F [UTILITY] key
Press this key to access the UTILITY screen with settings
for the unit’s test tone oscillator, digital inputs and out-
puts, and other utility parameters.
1 [SONG] key
This key accesses the SONG screen, where you can save
or load songs, and perform the shut-down procedure.
G [PATCH] key
Accesses the PATCH screen where you can patch output
B [CD] key
signals as required.
This key accesses the CD screen, where you can write or
play an audio CD, and backup or restore data.
H [DIO] key
The [DIO] key accesses the DIO screen which includes
the clock source and I/O card settings.
■ Quick Navigate section
1 [RECORD] key
This key accesses the RECORD screen, where you can
quickly assign the signal to be recorded to the input of
each track, and make settings for recording.
1
2
B [MONITOR] key
The MONITOR screen, accessed by this key, includes set-
tings for fader grouping, the solo function, and more.
21
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts of the AW2400 and what they do
■ Display section
2
2
C
1
E 4
6
G
F [F1]–[F4] keys
1 Display
These keys operate the “tabs” shown at the bottom of the
display screen. They can access other pages in a group of
functions, or in some cases execute specific functions.
The backlit display screen provides easy visual access to
all functions and parameters.
B Stereo Meters
G [SHIFT] key
These 12-segment levels meters show the final output sig-
“Shifts” the function of the tabs at the bottom of the dis-
play to show additional functions, when applicable. “Shift
functions” can be executed by pressing the appropriate
functions key – [F1] to [F4] – while holding the [SHIFT]
key.
nals levels on the stereo bus.
C [METER] key
Calls the METER screen which includes the channel, bus,
and other level meters.
D Contrast
Adjusts the brightness of the display.
E Access indicator
This indicator indicates the access status of the internal
hard disk. When the hard disk is being read or written, this
indicator will light.
CAUTION
• Never turn off the power of the AW2400 when the access indi-
cator is lit. Doing so will not only damage the data on the
internal hard disk, but may also damage the hard disk itself.
When you want to turn off the power of the AW2400, you must
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts of the AW2400 and what they do
■ Mixer section
C
1
B D
G
2
E
6
E Faders 1–12
The faders adjust recorder track playback levels, input
1 [SEL] keys 1–12
B [STEREO SEL] key
channel input levels, and effect return channel input levels
according to the mixing layer currently selected via the
LAYER section.
Selects the channel to be operated. The [SEL] key of the
currently selected channel will light.
C [ON] keys 1–12
D [STEREO ON] key
F [STEREO] fader
Adjusts the output level of the stereo bus.
Turns the corresponding channel ON or OFF. The [ON]
key will be lit when the corresponding channel is ON, and
out when the channel is OFF. The [ON] keys are also used
to specify solo channels when the solo function is on.
NOTE
• The [STEREO SEL] keys, [STEREO ON] keys, and [STEREO]
faders always operate stereo channels.These keys and faders are
not affected by the LAYER section settings.
HINT
• When Trigger Track mode is engaged, the [ON] key can be used to
start/stop playback of the corresponding track.
G [SOLO] key
Turns the solo function ON or OFF.
23
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts of the AW2400 and what they do
■ Selected Channel section
C [AUX] key
Calls the AUX screen for the currently selected channel.
You can then press any of the SELECTED CHANNEL
knobs — 1 through 4 — to access the corresponding AUX
parameters.
2
1
B
C
D
E
D [EFFECT] key
Calls the EFFECT screen for the currently selected chan-
nel. You can then press any of the SELECTED CHAN-
NEL knobs — 1 through 4 — to access the corresponding
EFFECT parameters.
E [PAN/EQ] key
Calls the PAN/EQ screen for the currently selected chan-
nel. After pressing the [PAN/EQ] key, you can press any
of the Selected Channel knobs 1 through 4 to switch the
PAN/EQ screen pages.
F
G
F SELECTED CHANNEL knobs 1–4
These knobs are used to adjust the various parameters for
the selected channel. Press any of these knobs after press-
ing the [DYN], [AUX], [EFFECT] or [PAN/EQ] key to
call the corresponding parameter screen.
1 [VIEW] key
This key accesses the CH VIEW screen, where you can
check the level of each channel, or perform on-screen
adjustments to the faders and other mix parameters of
each channel.
G [LOW], [LO-MID], [HI-MID], and [HIGH] keys
These keys specify the EQ band to be adjusted by the
SELECTED CHANNEL knobs when the EQ screen EQ
page is showing.
B [DYN] key
Calls the DYNAMICS screen for the currently selected
channel. You can then press any of the SELECTED
CHANNEL knobs — 1 through 4 — to access the corre-
sponding dynamics parameters.
■ Monitor section
1 [MONITOR] knob
This knob adjusts the level of the signal that is output from
the [MONITOR OUT] jacks.
1
2
B [PHONES] knob
This knob adjusts the level of the signal that is output from
the [PHONES] jack.
■ Scene/Automix/USB section
1 [SCENE] key
This key accesses the SCENE screen, where you can save
or recall scene memories.
B [AUTOMIX] key
This key accesses the AUTOMIX screen which allows
control and editing of automix operations.
1
2
3
C [USB] key
The [USB] keys calls up the USB screen with parameters
related to USB operation.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts of the AW2400 and what they do
■ Data entry/control section
1 [INC] key
Increments (increases) the selected value by 1.
B
A
B [DEC] key
2
Decrements (decreases) the selected value by 1.
C [Cursor] keys ([ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] keys)
These keys move the cursor (the blinking frame) around
the screen to select a specific item.
D [JOG ON] key
C
This key is an on/off switch for the Nudge function which
uses the [DATA/JOG] dial. When this function is on, the
key will light.
E [UNDO/REDO] key
This key cancels the results of a recording or track editing
operation (Undo), or re-executes a cancelled operation
(Redo).
D
E
G
HINT
• This key will light if Undo is possible.
F
• If you press and hold this key, the UNDO LIST screen will appear.
Here you can turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to revert to as many as the
F [ENTER] key
Use this key to operate an on-screen button, or to execute
a specific function.
G [DATA/JOG] dial
Use this dial to change the value of a parameter. If the
[JOG ON] key is on, this dial operates the Nudge function.
■ Locate/Number section
1 [LOCATE] keys
These keys allow you to move directly to preset “locate”
points. These keys are also used for character and number
entry.
B [NUM.LOCK] key
This key allows you to specify a destination locate point in
measures/beats.
1
B
25
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts of the AW2400 and what they do
■ Layer section
A
B
C
● [MASTER] key
Bus Master 1–2
AUX Send Master 1–4
2
D
5
F
1 [IN 1-8] key
B [IN 9-16] key
C [MASTER] key
D [TRACK 1-12] key
E [TRACK 13-24] key
No Control
Effect Send Master 1–4
Select the mixing layer to be operated by the [SEL] 1–12
keys, the [ON] 1–12 keys, and faders 1–12. The mixing
layers that can be controlled when each of these keys are
engaged are as follows:
● [TRACK 1-12] key
Track channels 1–12
● [IN 1-8] key
Input channels 1–8
Effect Return channels 1–4
● [TRACK 13-24] key
Track channels 13–24
● [IN 9-16] key
Input channels 9–16
Effect Return channels 1–4
F [REMOTE] key
This key accesses the REMOTE screen, where you can
use the front panel faders and [ON] keys to control an
external MIDI device or sequencer software on your com-
puter.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts of the AW2400 and what they do
■ Locate section
E [IN]/[OUT] keys
These keys specify the points at which auto punch-in/out
recording will begin (the In point) and end (the Out point).
These keys can also be used as locate keys to move
directly to the In point or Out point.
1
B
C
2
F [SET] key
E
Sets the in/out or A/B points in conjunction with the [IN]/
[OUT], [A]/[B], and [LOCATE] keys. Also sets the rela-
tive zero time point when pressed simultaneously with the
D
7
F
RTZ [
] key.
I
G [REPEAT] key
This key switches the A-B repeat function on/off, letting
you repeatedly play a specified region.
H
H [A]/[B] keys
These keys specify the points at which the Repeat function
will begin (point A) and end (point B). These keys can
also be used as locate keys to move directly to point A or
point B.
1 [SOUND CLIP] key
This key accesses the SOUND CLIP screen, where you
can record or play sound clips.
B MARK SEARCH [
These keys search for markers placed within the song.
]/[
] keys
I [CANCEL] key
Use this key in conjunction with the [IN]/[OUT] keys, the
[A]/[B] keys or the [LOCATE] key to cancel a locater that
you registered.
C [MARK] key
This key places a marker at the current location of the
song.
D [AUTO PUNCH] key
This key switches the audio punch-in/out function on/off,
letting you automate recording.
■ Transport section
C FF [
] key
1
B
C
This key fast-forwards the song location. Press the key
repeatedly to alternate between 8x speed and 16x speed.
Press the STOP[■] key or PLAY[ ] key to stop fast-for-
ward.
D STOP [■] key
This key stops playback, recording, fast-forward, or
rewind. Trigger track playback will also stop.
E PLAY [ ] key
4
E
F
If you press this key while the recorder is stopped, play-
back will begin. If you press this key while holding down
the REC [●] key, recording will begin. If you press this
key during fast-forward or rewind, normal-speed playback
will begin. If you press this key during recording, record-
ing will stop and playback will resume (“punch-out”).
1 RTZ [
] key
This key moves directly to the absolute zero time location
or the relative zero time location. Used in conjunction
with the [SET] key, this registers the current location as
the relative zero time.
F REC [●] key
If you hold down this key and press the PLAY [ ] key
while the recorder is stopped, recording will begin. If you
hold down this key and press the PLAY [ ] key during
playback, you will switch from playback to recording
(“punch-in”).
B REW [
] key
This key rewinds the song location. Press the key repeat-
edly to alternate between 8x speed and 16x speed.
Press the STOP[■] key or PLAY[ ] key to stop rewind.
27
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts of the AW2400 and what they do
Rear panel
G
F
E
4
1
B
C
2
Q
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
1 (ground)
Ring (cold)
1 [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8 (XLR)
These are XLR-3-31 type balanced input jacks. Nominal input level is
from -46 dBu to +4 dBu. Connector wiring is as shown below.
Male XLR connector
3 (cold)
2 (hot)
Tip (hot)
B [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8 (TRS phone)
These are TRS phone type balanced input jacks. Nominal input level is
1/4" TRS phone plug
from -46 dBu to +4 dBu. Connector wiring is as shown below.
C [INSERT I/O] jacks 1–2
Sleeve (ground)
These TRS phone jacks allow external signal processing gear to be inserted
into the signal received at the [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–2. Nominal
input level is 0 dBu, and the pin assignments are as follows:
1/4" TRS
phone plug
Tip (OUT)
Sleeve (ground)
To the input jack of the
external processor
OUT
1/4" TRS
phone plug
IN
Sleeve (ground)
Tip (IN)
To the INSERT I/O
jack of the AW2400
1/4" TRS
phone plug
To the output jack of the
external processor
Sleeve (ground)
D [STEREO OUT] jacks
H [POWER] switch
These are TRS phone type balanced output jacks that out-
put the signals of the stereo bus. Nominal output level is
+4 dBu.
Switches the power ON and OFF.
NOTE
• When switching the power of the AW2400 ON or OFF, always fol-
E [MONITOR OUT] jacks
These are TRS phone type balanced output jacks that out-
put the monitor signals of the stereo bus or the solo bus.
Nominal output level is +4 dBu.
I [AC IN] connector
Connect the supplied power cord to this connector.
F [OMNI OUT] jacks 1–4
The unbalanced phone jacks output the signals specified in
the PATCH screen Output page. Nominal output level is 0
dBu.
CAUTION
• Use only the supplied power cord for this unit.The use of an
inappropriate replacement may be a fire and electrical shock
hazard.
G [PHONES] jack
This is a 1/4" TRS phone output jack for connecting your
headphones for monitoring. This jack always outputs the
same signal as the [MONITOR OUT] jacks.
J Ground Screw
For maximum safety the ground screw should be properly
connected to a confirmed ground point. Proper grounding
will also ensure minimum hum, noise, and interference.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts of the AW2400 and what they do
K PHANTOM +48V [CH1-4] and [CH5-8] switches
Independent phantom power switches are provided for the
XLR-type [MIC/LINE INPUT] jack groups 1 through 4
(CH1-4) and 5 through 8 (CH5-8). Turn phantom power to
the appropriate jacks ON when using one or more phan-
tom-powered condenser microphones.
is selected WAV files and song files can be transferred
between the AW2400 and the computer. In the “normal”
mode the USB connection can be used for MIDI control.
The USB interface does not directly handle audio signals.
NOTE
2
• The USB interface cannot be directly connected to external hard
disks or CD-R/RW drives.
CAUTION
• The AW2400 can be connected to either a USB 2.0 or USB 1.1
interface, but data transfer will be slower if a USB 1.1 interface is
used.
• Be sure to turn the phantom power switches off when phan-
tom power is not required.
• Make sure that no equipment other than phantom-powered
microphones is connected to the XLR inputs of the input
group for which phantom power is turned on. Applying phan-
tom power to devices that are not phantom-powered can
cause damage. Balanced dynamic microphones, however,
can usually be connected without adverse effect.
• When connecting via USB 2.0 be sure to use a cable specified for
USB 2.0 use.
• The USB MIDI driver provided on the supplied CD-ROM must be
properly installed to allow MIDI message transmission and recep-
tion.
• To prevent speakers damage turn power amplifiers (or pow-
ered speakers) off when switching phantom power on or off.
It’s also a good idea to turn all master faders and output vol-
ume controls down to minimum.The noise generated when
phantom power is switched on or off can damage system
components and may even cause hearing damage if ampli-
fied to sufficiently high levels.
Caution when using the USB connector
You must observe the following points when connect-
ing the AW2400 to your computer via the USB con-
nector. If you fail to observe these points, your
computer or the AW2400 may stop operating (“hang
up”), causing data to be corrupted or lost. If the com-
puter or the AW2400 stops working, turn the power
off and then on again, and restart the computer.
L [MIDI IN] connector
M [MIDI OUT/THRU] connector
These connectors allow MIDI messages to be exchanged
with external devices.
• Before connecting the computer via the USB con-
nector, disable the power management mode (sus-
pend/sleep/standby/hibernate) on your computer.
MIDI IN receives MIDI messages.
MIDI OUT/THRU can be internally switched to function
either as a MIDI OUT (which transmits MIDI messages
generated within the AW2400) or MIDI THRU (which re-
transmits messages that are received at the MIDI IN con-
nector).
• Connect the USB connector to the computer before
you power-on the AW2400.
• Execute the following before turning the power to the
AW2400 on/off, connecting/disconnecting the USB
cable, or turning the USB Storage mode on/off.
N FOOT SW jack
An optional foot switch (Yamaha FC5) can be connected
here to control transport operations such as start/stop, or to
perform punch-in/out operations.
• Close all application programs.
• If the USB Storage mode is off, make sure that data is
not being transmitted from and to the AW2400.
• If the USB Storage mode is engaged, make sure that
no read or write operations are in progress.
• If the USB Storage mode is engaged, safely remove
the AW2400 from the Windows taskbar or drag the
AW2400 icons from the Macintosh desktop to the
trash after closing all AW2400 windows.
NOTE
• The appropriate operation may not occur if you use a foot switch
other than the Yamaha FC5 (or equivalent).
O [DIGITAL STEREO IN/OUT] connectors
This RCA pin jack allows digital-audio connection to
external equipment via coaxial cable. The connector sup-
ports IEC-60958 consumer-format digital audio.
• Leave an interval of at least six seconds between
powering the AW2400 on and off, or between dis-
connecting and connecting the USB cable.
P USB connector
This connector allows the unit to be directly connected to
a USB-equipped computer via a standard USB cable
(compatible with USB 2.0). When the USB Storage mode
Q SLOT
An optional card can be installed here.
Front panel
■ CD-RW drive
1 Eject switch
This switch ejects the disc tray.
B Eject hole
This hole allows you to open the disc tray manually.
C Access indicator
This indicator will light while the CD inserted in the drive
3 2 1
is being accessed.
29
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation of the AW2400
Basic operation of the AW2400
This section explains basic operation of the AW2400.
2
● Cursor
The blinking frame within the dis-
play is called the “cursor.” When an
object in the screen is enclosed by
the cursor, that object is selected for
operation.
Viewing the display
The display of the AW2400 shows the following informa-
tion.
B
A
C
D
E
F
G
● Buttons
Buttons in the display are used to
switch a parameter on/off, to select
one of multiple choices, or to execute
a specific function. A button that is
currently on will be displayed in
“inverse” form (black background
with white text). A button that is cur-
rently off will be displayed in normal
form (black text against a white
background).
Off
On
H
● Knob/parameter display area
The knob/parameter display area
within the display is used to edit the
value of the corresponding parame-
ter.
Knob
I
parameter
display area
1 Screen name
This is the name of the currently selected screen.
I Tabs
When a screen includes a number of pages, corresponding
tabs will appear along the bottom of the display. The tabs
are used to switch between the various pages related to the
current screen.
B Selected channel
This indicates the mixer channel that is selected for opera-
tion.
C Song name
The name of the currently selected song.
D Counter (left side)
In some cases the tabs also become “additional function
buttons” when the [SHIFT] key is pressed. When addi-
This indicates the current location within the song. The
current-time display format can be selected via the SONG
screen Setting page. The choices are standard time (hours
: minutes : seconds . milliseconds) or timecode (hours :
minutes : seconds : frames . sub-frames)
tional functions are available an
the lower left corner of the display.
mark will appear in
E Counter (right side)
This indicates the current location within the song in mea-
sures/beats. The measures/beats are calculated according
to the tempo and time signature specified in the tempo
map for the song. The current tempo and time signature
are displayed above this value.
F Scene information
The number and name (first eight characters) of the cur-
rently selected scene.
G Sampling Rate/Quantization Bits
The sampling rate and quantization bits (bit depth) of the
currently selected song.
H Main screen
The information displayed in this area will depend on the
key/knob that was last pressed. The following types of
object are displayed in the main screen.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation of the AW2400
Accessing a screen/page
Switching a button on/off
When you want to edit an internal setting of the AW2400,
or to edit a parameter that cannot be operated by a fader or
knob on the top panel, you will need to access the desired
screen and page.
Here’s how to switch a button in the screen on/off.
Use the [CURSOR] keys to
move the cursor to the
desired button in the screen.
1
2
Press the key or knob for the desired
screen.
1
Press the [ENTER] key.
2
The button will be switched on/off.
If you move the cursor to a button
that executes a specific function and
then press the [ENTER] key, that
function will be executed.
The keys and knobs of various sections listed below
have their own screens, and the corresponding screen
will be displayed when you press a key or knob.
• All keys in the Work Navigate section
• All keys in the Quick Navigate section
• The [METER] key in the Display section
• The [VIEW]/[DYN]/[AUX]/[EFFET]/[PAN/EQ] keys of
the Selected Channel section
Editing a value in the display
• All knobs of the Selected Channel section
• All keys of the Scene/Automix/USB section
• The [REMOTE] key of the Layer section
• The [SOUND CLIP] key of the Locate section
Here’s how to edit the value of a knob or parameter shown
in the display.
Use the [CURSOR] keys to
1
move the cursor to the
desired knob or parameter
value.
HINT
• Press a SELECTED CHANNEL knob after pressing the
SELECTED CHANNEL [DYN], [AUX], [EFFECT, or [PAN/EQ]
key to access the related display screen.
Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial or
press the [INC]/[DEC] keys to
edit the value.
• When you switch screens, the page that was last used in that
screen will be displayed.
2
Use the [F1]–[F4] keys to select different
pages within a screen.
2
The [F1]–[F4] keys correspond to the tabs as follows.
Using Additional Function Buttons
When an
mark appears in the lower left corner of the
display the tabs shown along the bottom of the display can
be switched to provide additional functions.
[F1] key
[F2] key
[F3] key
[F4] key
Press the [SHIFT] key when any screen with
1
HINT
an
mark in the lower left corner is
• You can access the pages in sequence by repeatedly press-
ing the key referred to in step 1, above.
showing.
The additional function buttons will appear in place of
the tabs along the bottom of the display while the
[SHIFT] key is held.
Additional Function Buttons
While holding the [SHIFT] key press the
[F1]–[F4] button to execute the correspond-
ing function.
2
31
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation of the AW2400
G DEL button
Entering text
Deletes the character at the inverted edit position. All
characters following the delete are moved to the left.
Pressing the [DEC] key has the same effect as the DEL
button.
When you create a new song or save a scene memory or
library setting, a popup window will appear allowing you
to assign a name for the song or setting.
2
H Text palette
This displays the characters, numbers, and symbols that
can be input in the text input box. To enter a new character
at the inverted edit position, move the cursor to the desired
character in the text palette and press the [ENTER] key.
The available characters and symbols are as follows:
C
B
A
E
D
F
A–Z a–z SPC(space) , . ! " # & / * + - < > : ;
I Number Palette
Selects the number to be entered in the text entry box. To
enter a number at the inverted edit position, move the cur-
sor to the desired number in the palette and press the
[ENTER] key.
By repeatedly pressing the [ENTER] key you can sequen-
tially select and enter the characters displayed for each
number button. For example, if you move the cursor to “1”
in the number palette and then repeatedly press the
[ENTER] key you will sequentially select the following
number/characters for entry: 1 → P → Q → R → S → p →
q → r → s → 1, and then the cycle repeats.
H
I
G
This popup window contains the following items and
functions.
1 Text input box
This box lets you input characters, numbers, and symbols.
The character currently selected for editing is shown
inverted (white on black). When you save the data for the
first time, the box will contain a default name. The
inverted highlight can be moved as required by using the
[DATA/JOG] dial.
■ Using the [LOCATE] Keys
To Enter Characters & Numbers
The [LOCATE] keys in the LOCATE/NUMBER section
can be used to enter characters and numbers in the same
way as the number palette. Repeatedly press the appropri-
ate [LOCATE] key (0–9) to select the required number or
character.
B CANCEL button
If you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, you will return to the previous screen with-
out changing the name.
The numbers and characters selected by each key are as
follows:
C OK button
If you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, the scene/library will be saved or the new
song will be created.
[LOCATE]
Selected Number/Character
Key Number
(Arrows indicate selection sequence)
D SHIFT LOCK button
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Switches between upper or lower case characters, or the
type of symbol to be entered at the current edit position in
the text entry box.
1 → P → Q → R → S → p → q → r → s
2 → T → U → V → t → u → v
3 → W → X → Y → Z → w → x → y → z
4 → G → H → I → g → h → i
5 → J → K → L → j → k → l
6 → M → N → O → m → n → o
7
E
/
buttons
Move the inverted edit position left or right.
HINT
• The inverted edit position can also be moved left or right by using
the [DATA/JOG] dial.
8 → A → B → C → a → b → c
9 → D → E → F → d → e → f
F INS button
Inserts an under-bar space (“_”) at the inverted edit posi-
tion. All characters following the insert are moved to the
right. Pressing the [INC] key has the same effect as the
INS button.
NOTE
• To add characters to a name that has less than the maximum
number of characters, move the cursor to the INS button and
press the [ENTER] key to insert “_”, then change the name as
required.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation of the AW2400
Switching Mixing Layers
Switching mixing layers affects the functions of [ON] keys 1–12, [SEL]
keys 1–12, and faders 1–12, allowing efficient control in a variety of signal-
routing configurations. Remote control of external equipment is also possi-
ble.
2
Different mixing layers are selected via the keys in the LAYER section. The
key corresponding to the currently selected mixing layer will be lit.
Layer Section
The mixer section controls correspond to the various mixing layers as fol-
lows:
Fader Section
LAYER
Section Key
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
STEREO
[IN 1-8]
Input Channels 1–8
Input Channels 9–16
Effect Return Channels 1–4
Effect Return Channels 1–4
[IN 9-16]
Bus Masters
1–2
[MASTER]
No Control
AUX Send Masters 1–4
Effect Send Masters 1–4
Stereo Output
Channel Control
[TRACK 1-12]
[TRACK 13-24]
[REMOTE]
Track Channels 1–12
Track Channels 13–24
*
For example, if the LAYER section [IN 1-8] key is engaged and the [SEL] 1
key is pressed, input channel 1 will be selected. If the LAYER section
[TRACK 1-12] is then engaged and the same [SEL] 1 key is pressed, track
channel 1 will be selected.
HINT
• The [STEREO SEL] key, [STEREO ON] key, and [STEREO] fader always control the
stereo output channel. These controls are not affected by layer switching.
Using the Selected Channel section
You can use the knobs and keys of the Selected Channel section to directly
operate the mix parameters (EQ, dynamics, pan, etc.) of the currently
selected channel.
Use the [SEL] keys or [STEREO SEL] key to select the
channel that you want to operate.
1
The currently selected channel is indicated in the upper left of the
screen. The channels correspond to each key as follows.
• [SEL] keys 1–12............ Input channels 1–16, Track channels 1–24,
Currently selected channel.
Effect Return channels 1–4
• [STEREO SEL] key....... Stereo output channel
HINT
• The channels to be selected by [SEL] keys 1–12 are switched via the LAYER
section.
33
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation of the AW2400
Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section [DYN], [AUX],
[EFFECT], or [PAN/EQ] key so that its indicator light,
according to the parameters you want to control.
2
With the default settings the screen corresponding to the pressed key will
appear automatically. The display will not change if the UTILITY screen
2
The parameters that can be controlled by the SELECTED CHANNEL
knobs are as follows:
Selected Key (Lit)
Knob 1
Knob 2
Knob 3
Knob 4
Multiple compressor parame-
ters, or the last parameter
operated, depending on the
control status.
[DYN]
Compressor threshold.
Compressor ratio.
Compressor gain.
Send level from channel to
AUX 1.
Send level from channel to
AUX 2.
Send level from channel to
AUX 3.
Send level from channel to
AUX 4.
[AUX]
Send level from channel to
EFFECT 1.
Send level from channel to
EFFECT 2.
Send level from channel to
EFFECT 3.
Send level from channel to
EFFECT 4.
[EFFECT]
[PAN/EQ]
Pan
Equalizer Q.
Equalizer frequency.
Equalizer gain.
HINT
• After selecting a channel, press the SELECTED CHANNEL [VIEW] key to call
the CH VIEW screen where you can edit the channel signal routing and all of the
NOTE
• The parameter controlled by SELECTED CHANNEL knob 1 when the [DYN] key
• If you operate SELECTED CHANNEL knob 1 immediately after recalling a setup
from the compressor preset library, multiple compressor parameters will be
adjusted simultaneously, changing the overall effect of the compressor (the type
of change depends on the recalled preset library setup).
• When individual compressor parameters for a channel have been adjusted via
the DYNAMICS screen, the last parameter adjusted is assigned to SELECTED
CHANNEL knob 1 (the last-adjusted parameter is individually retained for each
channel).
Rotate SELECTED CHANNEL knobs 1–4 to adjust the cor-
responding parameters as required.
3
If the UTILITY screen Preference pageAUTO DISPLAY button is set to
OFF, a popup window showing the corresponding parameter name and
the value will appear while the knob is being operated.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation of the AW2400
If you want more precise editing control over the parame-
ter selected in step 2, above, press the corresponding
SELECTED CHANNEL knob (1–4) to call up the screen
containing the related parameters.
4
Selected Key (Lit)
[DYN]
Knob 1
DYNAMICS Screen
AUX1 Screen
Knob 2
DYNAMICS Screen
AUX2 Screen
Knob 3
DYNAMICS Screen
AUX3 Screen
Knob 4
DYNAMICS Screen
AUX4 Screen
2
[AUX]
[EFFECT]
[PAN/EQ]
EFFECT1 Screen
PAN/EQ Screen
EFFECT2 Screen
PAN/EQ Screen
EFFECT3 Screen
PAN/EQ Screen
EFFECT4 Screen
PAN/EQ Screen
NOTE
• The display will not change if the SELECTED CHANNEL knob is simply rotated.
To switch screens the knobs must be pressed.
• Other gate functions can be accessed via the DYNAMICS screen, but only
pages and parameters related to compressor operation can be accessed via the
SELECTED CHANNEL knobs.
Move the cursor in the screen to the desired parameter,
and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [ENTER] key to oper-
ate the parameter.
5
35
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
Connection and Setup
This chapter will describe the AW2400 setup process from connection to
instruments and other external equipment up to getting sound from a monitor
system.
3
Connection
The following connection diagram shows a typical AW2400 setup. Connect your microphones,
instruments, and other external gear as shown in the diagram.
DAW system
Monitor system
Audio interface
[USB] connector
[MONITOR OUT] jacks
[DIGITAL STEREO
IN/OUT] connectors
HDR
[PHONES] jack
Headphones
[OMNI OUT] jacks
I/O card
I/O SLOT
Effect processor
[INSERT I/O] jacks
[MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks
Effect processor
Rhythm machine
MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER
Microphones
Synthesizer
37
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning the power on/off
Turning the power on/off
Follow the procedure outlined below when turning the AW2400 power ON and OFF. Failure to fol-
low this procedure can result in damage to the internal hard disk or your external monitor system.
Call the SONG screen Song List page by
1
■ Turning the power on
In a system that includes the AW2400, turn the power to
each device on in the following order.
3
pressing theWork Navigate section [SONG]
key located in the upper left of the top panel
as many times as necessary.
1 External devices such as audio sources and effect
processors connected to the input/output jacks of
the AW2400
B The AW2400 itself
C The monitor system connected to the AW2400’s out-
put jacks
CAUTION
• Before you turn on the power, make sure that the power cord
is securely connected to the AW2400 and to the AC outlet. If
the power is disconnected while the AW2400 is in use, the
AW2400 or it’s internal hard disk may be damaged.
When you turn on the AW2400 power a startup screen will
appear briefly, and then the following screen will appear.
SHUTDOWN button
Using the CURSOR keys located in the
upper right of the top panel, move the cur-
sor (the blinking area in the screen) to the
SHUTDOWN button.
2
3
Press the [ENTER] key located in the mid-
dle right of the top panel.
A popup window will ask you whether you want to
save the current song.
■ Turning the power off (shut down)
In a system that includes the AW2400, turn the power to
each device off in the following order.
1 The monitor system connected to the AW2400’s out-
put jacks
Move the cursor to theYES button if you
want to save the current song, or to the NO
button if you do not want to save it.Then
press the [ENTER] key.
4
5
B The AW2400 itself
C External devices such as audio sources and effect
processors connected to the input/output jacks of
the AW2400
When the “Now safe to turn off...” message
appears, turn off the [POWER] switch
located on the rear panel.
When turning the AW2400 power off, be sure to perform
the following “shut-down” procedure.
IMPORTANT
• If you turn off the AW2400 power without performing the
above shutdown procedure, not only will any unsaved
changes be lost, but you also risk damaging the data on
the hard disk, and damaging or drastically shortening the
lifespan of the hard disk itself as well as the internal CD-
RW drive. Please use caution.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the input level
Adjusting the input level
Here’s the basic procedure for setting up an input channel to which a microphone or instrument
is connected via [MIC/LINE INPUT] jack 1–8, and adjusting the input level while monitoring the
signal via the stereo bus.
These connectors will also accept unbalanced output
from instruments such as synthesizers or rhythm
machines via standard mono 1/4" phone ↔ 1/4" phone
jack cables.
Turn down the [GAIN] knob for the [MIC/
LINE INPUT] jack to which your instrument/
mic is connected. Also lower the [STEREO]
fader to the –∞ position.
3
1
Connect a microphone or instrument to the
appropriate [MIC/LINE INPUT] jack.
1/4" phone ↔ phone cable
Synthesizer/
2
rhythm machine
[MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8 can be used with the
following sources.
● [MIC/LINE INPUT (XLR)] jacks 1–8
These are XLR-type balanced input jacks. Use a male
XLR ↔ female XLR cable to connect your micro-
phone, direct box, or a guitar/bass preamp that has a
balanced output jack.
[MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks
1–8 (TRS phone)
NOTE
Balanced cable
(male XLR ↔ female XLR)
Mic
• The XLR and TRS phone jacks for the same channel cannot
be used simultaneously. Connecting sources to both inputs
on the same channel at the same time can result in interfer-
ence and a severely degraded input signal.
Preamp or effect proces-
sor with balanced output
Direct box
While playing the connected
3
instrument or supplying
appropriate sound to the
connected microphone,
rotate the corresponding
[GAIN] knob clockwise to
adjust the input sensitivity
so that the [PEAK] indicator
lights only occasionally.
[MIC/LINE INPUT]
jacks 1–8 (XLR)
Electric
guitar/bass
HINT
• When using condenser microphones or direct boxes that
require phantom power, turn on the rear-panel [CH1-4] switch
which supplies phantom power to [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–
4, and/or the [CH5-8] switch which supplies phantom power to
[MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 5–8 as required.
HINT
• The [GAIN] knobs adjust the gain (sensitivity) of the analog
input stage. In order to make recordings with the greatest
dynamic range and minimum noise, set the [GAIN] knob as
high as possible without causing clipping.
● [MIC/LINE INPUT (TRS phone)] jacks 1–8
These are TRS-type balanced input jacks. Use a 1/4"
TRS phone ↔ female XLR cable to connect your
microphone, direct box, or a guitar/bass preamp that
has a balanced output jack.
Mic
1/4" TRS phone ↔
female XLR cable
Preamp or effect proces-
sor with balanced output
Direct box
[MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks
1–8 (TRS phone)
Electric
guitar/bass
39
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the input level
Call the METER screen Input/RTN page by
4
HINT
either pressing the Display section
[METER] key as many times as necessary,
or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing
the [METER] key.
• If the level meter goes into the “OVER” region, check that the
corresponding input fader is set to 0dB and reduce the level of
the [GAIN] knob.
The input channel input levels are displayed at the top
of this screen.
While playing the connected instrument,
raise the [STEREO] fader to the 0 dB posi-
tion.
8
3
Input channel input level display
With the initial default settings the
input channels are patched to the
AW2400’s stereo bus. Signals sent to
the stereo bus are output via the
[STEREO OUT], [MONITOR
OUT], and [OMNI OUT] jacks after
being adjusted by the [STEREO]
fader. When the [STEREO] fader is
raised the level of the stereo bus sig-
nal will be displayed on the Display
section stereo meter. You can now
rotate the [MONITOR] or
[PHONES] knob clockwise to hear
sound from your monitor system or
headphones.
NOTE
Move the cursor to the POST FADER button
in the lower area of the screen and press
the [ENTER] key.
When the POST FADER button is turned on the signal
levels immediately following the fader are displayed
on the meters.
5
6
• If the stereo meter does not respond even though the input
channel level meter is showing the presence of a signal when
the [STEREO] fader is raised, check that the input channel is
Press the Layer section [IN 1-8] so that it’s
indicator lights to switch to the IN 1-8 mix-
ing layer.
You can now use [ON] keys 1–8, [SEL] keys 1–8, and
faders 1–8 to operate input channels 1–8.
That completes the initial setup and level adjustment pro-
cedure required to begin recording on the AW2400. Levels
will have to be readjusted whenever you change the
microphone or instrument input connections or change the
output level of an instrument (level changes will often
occur when you change synth patches).
By using the [GAIN] knob to raise the level as far as pos-
sible without allowing distortion to occur, you can ensure
that the input signal is converted into digital form with the
highest possible quality before it is input to the mixer sec-
tion.
HINT
• With the initial default settings the signals from [MIC/LINE
INPUT] jacks 1–8 are assigned to the corresponding input
channels 1–8.You can change these settings as required.
for details.
Make sure that the [ON] key for the channel
receiving the microphone or instrument
signal is engaged and its indicator is lit,
then raise the channel fader to the 0dB
position.
7
If you play the instrument or
play into the microphone you
should see the level meter on
the display respond accord-
ingly, but you won’t hear any
output from your monitor sys-
tem yet because the [STE-
REO] fader is still all the way
down.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Listening to the demo song
When the AW2400 is shipped from the factory, its hard disk contains a demo song. This chapter
explains how to load and play back the demo song.
4
Loading the demo song
Here’s how to load the demo song from the hard disk.
Press the Work Navigate section [SONG]
key.
The SONG screen will appear, where you can save or
load songs.
Move the cursor to the song list, and then
use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys
to select the song “The_Only_One.”
1
3
Call the Song List page by either pressing
the [SONG] key as many times as neces-
sary, or by pressing the [F1] key after
pressing the [SONG] key.
2
In this page, you can select a song on the hard disk,
and load or delete it.
B
Move the cursor to the LOAD button in the
screen, and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window like the following will appear. This
window asks you whether you want to save the current
song.
4
5
A
1 Song list
This area lists the songs that are saved on the hard
disk. The line enclosed by the dotted frame in the cen-
ter of the list indicates the song that is selected for
operations. The highlighted line indicates the song that
is currently loaded into the AW2400. (This is called
the “current song.”)
Move the cursor to eitherYES (save the cur-
rent song) or NO (don’t save the current
song), and press the [ENTER] key.
The song data will be loaded, and “The_Only_One”
will become the current song.
NOTE
• Each row of the list will display the song name, data size, bit
depth (16/24 bit), and sampling rate (44.1/48 kHz).
NOTE
• If you select NO, any changes that you made to the current
song since you last saved it will be lost.
B LOAD button
Loads the selected song.
“You’re the Only One”
© Timothy Akers
41
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing the demo song
Playing the demo song
Here’s how to play back the demo song you loaded, and adjust the monitor level.
Make sure that the AW2400’s [MONITOR]
knob, [PHONES] knob, and the volume of
your monitor system are turned down.
1
Press the PLAY [ ] key.
2
4
The demo song will begin playing.
To adjust the monitor level appropriately,
3
use the AW2400’s [MONITOR] knob,
[PHONES] knob and the volume control of
your monitor system.
HINT
• The demo song uses the Scene function to switch the settings
of the mixer. This means that playback will occur using the
pre-specified balance — you do not need to operate the fad-
ers.
To stop the song, press the STOP [■] key.
4
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
Recording to a sound clip
The AW2400 has a Sound Clip function that lets you record and play back
independently of the recorder section.You can use a sound clip to quickly
record and play back your performances on an audio source connected to
the AW2400.This is an ideal way to capture ideas for a song or arrangement,
or to record a simple accompaniment for practicing a part.
This chapter explains how sound clips can be recorded using an instrument
or microphone connected to an input jack.
5
Recording a sound clip
The post-fader signal of the stereo output channel can be recorded directly to a sound clip. For
playback, the signal will be sent to the stereo output channel immediately before the stereo fader
(EQ and dynamics cannot be applied to sound clip playback).
● Signal flow when using a sound clip
Metronome
[MIC/LINE INPUT]
jacks
Sound
clip
Stereo
output
channel
Input
channels
Stereo bus
Mixer section
43
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording a sound clip
Connect the required instrument and/or
To use the metronome, move the cursor to
the metronome button and press the
[ENTER] key.
1
2
3
4
microphone input sources and set up the
To change the tempo of the metronome,
move the cursor to the tempo value and
turn the [DATA/JOG] dial.
Press the Locate section [SOUND CLIP]
key.
The SOUND CLIP screen will appear, where you can
record and play sound clips.
NOTE
• The time signature of the metronome is determined by the
tempo map setting that was active prior to accessing the
SOUND CLIP screen. Please be aware that the setting can-
not be edited from this screen. (For details on tempo map set-
B
F E
G
A
5
Hold down the Transport section REC [●]
key and press the PLAY [ ] key.
The metronome will start and the counter display will
advance. The SOUND CLIP screen counter always
starts from 0 and indicates the current time in minutes/
seconds/milliseconds. This counter is separate from
the normal song counter.
5
6
C
D
Play the part to be recorded in time with the
metronome.
HINT
• The metronome sound will not be recorded. If necessary, you
can move the cursor to the metronome knob and turn the
[DATA/JOG] dial to adjust the volume of the metronome
sound.
1 Tempo
Sets the tempo of the metronome used when recording
sound clips.
B Time signature
Shows the time signature of the metronome.
• The knobs/keys of the selected channel are active even while
the SOUND CLIP screen is showing. If necessary, you can
apply EQ and dynamics processing to the signal being
recorded.
C Metronome button
Switches the metronome on/off.
Press the STOP [■] key to stop recording.
and symbols on the display indicate the start and
end point.
D Metronome knob
Adjusts the volume of the metronome. The value
above the knob shows the current setting in dB.
7
E START button
Specifies the current location as the start point of the
sound clip (the location at which playback will begin).
The current location is shown in minutes/seconds/mil-
liseconds to the left.
HINT
F END button
• With the default AW2400 settings a maximum of 30 seconds
can be recorded to a sound clip. If you continue recording for
longer than 30 seconds, the last 30 seconds recorded will be
retained (the counter display during recording will continue to
advance).
Specifies the current location as the end point of the
sound clip (the location at which playback will end).
The current location is shown in minutes/seconds/mil-
liseconds to the left.
• You can specify up to 180 seconds as the maximum length
that can be recorded in a sound clip.You are free to make this
setting before creating a new song, but this cannot be
G CLIP button
Turn this button on to enable the START button (E)
and END button (F) settings.
NOTE
• The Recorder section cannot be used for recording and play-
back while the SOUND CLIP screen is showing.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing a sound clip
Playing a sound clip
Press the PLAY [ ] key to hear the
recorded sound clip.
Stop playback, move the cursor to the CLIP
button, and press the [ENTER] key.
1
3
The sound clip will play repeatedly from the start
point to the end point. To stop playback press the
STOP [■] key. If you record again, the previous data
will be overwritten.
The CLIP button will be engaged, and the specified
Start point and End point will be enabled.
NOTE
• The START button, END button, and CLIP button are disabled
while the sound clip is playing.
The Transport section keys will have the following
functions while the SOUND CLIP screen is showing.
Key
Function
HINT
5
Returns to the location at which you
began recording. If the CLIP button is on,
this returns to the Start point.
• The data region between the specified Start and End points
can be copied to an audio track of the Recorder section by
RTZ [ ] key
Rewinds the current location toward the
beginning.You will stop when you reach
the location at which you began recording
or the Start point.
REW [
FF [
] key
To exit the SOUND CLIP screen, press the
Work Navigate section (except for [PATCH]
key) or Quick Navigate section keys,
[AUTOMIX] key, [USB] key, [REMOTE] key,
or [SOUND CLIP] key.
A popup window will ask you for confirmation. Move
the cursor to the OK button to exit the SOUND CLIP
screen, or to the CANCEL button to cancel, then press
the [ENTER] key.
4
Fast-forwards the current location.You will
stop when you reach the location at which
you stopped recording or the End point.
] key
Stops playback, recording, rewind, or fast-
forward.
STOP [■] key
Starts playback. Pressing this key during
playback does nothing.
PLAY [ ] key
If you hold down this key while stopped
and press the PLAY [ ] key, recording
will begin. Pressing this key during play-
back does nothing.
REC [●] key
You can return to the SOUND CLIP screen by press-
ing the [SOUND CLIP] key even after having exited
the screen, then play back the previously recorded
content or record a new performance.
HINT
• You will not hear the metronome while a sound clip is playing,
but you can still monitor the signals of input channels 1–16.
NOTE
• When you record a new sound clip, the previous recorded
sound clip will be erased. Please be aware that the Undo
function cannot be used to recover a deleted sound clip. Even
if you save the song immediately prior to recording a new
sound clip, the previous sound clip will not be restored if you
recall the song data.
The playback region of a sound clip can be
changed by specifying new Start and End
points as described below.
2
● Specifying the Start point
Stop at the location that you want to specify as the
Start point, move the cursor to the START button, and
press the [ENTER] key.
HINT
• The recorded contents of the sound clip are stored individu-
ally for each song.
The START button will be engaged and the current
location will be registered as the Start point.
● Specifying the End point
Stop at the location that you want to specify as the End
point, move the cursor to the END button, and press
the [ENTER] key.
The END button will be engaged and the current loca-
tion will be registered as the End point.
45
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
Track recording
This chapter explains how to record the audio signal from an instrument or
microphone connected to the AW2400 to the tracks of a song.
Creating a new song
Before you can begin recording on the AW2400 you need to create a new song.
6
HINT
• When you start up the AW2400 for the first time, an empty song will be loaded automatically.
If you use this automatically-loaded song, the procedure described here is not necessary.
Call the SONG screen Song List page by
either pressing the Work Navigate section
[SONG] key as many times as necessary, or
by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the
[SONG] key.
Move the cursor toYES (to save the current
song) or NO (if you don’t want to save the
current song) and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window containing the various settings for
the new song will appear.
1
3
The currently selected song in the Song List will be
highlighted (inverted).
NEW button
The following settings can be made via this popup
window.
• Fs ............................... The sample rate of the new
song can be set to either
44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.
• Recbit ........................ The bit depth of the new
song can be set to either 16
or 24 bits.
• Sound Clip Time ....... The sound clip record time
can be set to between 30–
Move the cursor to the NEW button and
press the [ENTER] key.
2
180 seconds.
A popup window will ask you whether you want to
save the current song.
NOTE
• Songs recorded with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz cannot
be written to an audio CD.
47
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a new song
When each parameter has been set as
required, move the cursor to the OK button
and press the [ENTER] key.
Next, a popup window will appear allowing you to
specify settings that will be carried over from the cur-
rent song.
Enter a name for the song (for details on
name entry refer to page 32).
4
6
7
NOTE
• A new song cannot be given the same name as an existing
song.
To create the new song, move the cursor to
the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
A new song will be created, and you will return to the
SONG screen Song List page.
If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button
(instead of the OK button) and press the [ENTER] key,
you will return to the SONG screen Song List page
without creating a new song.
6
The following items are available:
• SCENE button............Scene memories
• TEMPO button ...........Tempo map
• LIBRARY button........EQ, dynamics, effects, and
channel libraries
For example, if you have saved effect settings in a
library for the current song and would like to use these
settings for the new song as well, you would turn on
the LIBRARY button.
Select the buttons of the items you want to
carry over from the current song, move the
cursor to the OK button, and press the
[ENTER] key.
5
The NAME EDIT popup window will appear, allow-
ing you to enter a name for the song.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Direct recording and Mixed recording
Direct recording and Mixed recording
Instruments and/or microphones connected to the AW2400 can be recorded to tracks in one of
the following two ways.
■ Direct recording
With this method only one input channel is assigned to each recorder track. Although
direct recording requires the same number of tracks as the number of input channels
you use, it has the advantage that you will be free to adjust the volume, pan (stereo posi-
tion), and EQ of each individual instrument after it has been recorded.
6
[MIC/LINE INPUT]
jacks
Stereo
output
channel
Input
channels
Mixer section
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
Track 5
Recorder section
49
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Direct recording and Mixed recording
■ Mixed recording
With this method, you can send multiple input channels to Bus 1 or Bus 2, and assign
the mixed signal to one through four tracks. Mixed recording requires fewer tracks, but
you will need to decide on the final volume, pan, and tone of each instrument at the time
of recording (you will not be able to adjust these parameters independently after record-
ing.)
6
[MIC/LINE INPUT]
jacks
Stereo
output
channel
Input
channels
Track 1
Bus 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
Track 5
Bus 2
Track 6
Mixer section
Recorder section
NOTE
• The way in which you assign the input signals to tracks will depend on the
method you choose.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Direct recording and Mixed recording
Check that “AD1–8” appears in the input
select field on the left side of the page.
4
5
Assigning input signals to tracks
(Direct recording)
This section describes the patching procedure to assign
instruments and/or microphones connected to [MIC/LINE
INPUT] jacks 1–8 to independent tracks for direct record-
ing.
Input channels 1–8 or 9–16 can be selected as the
input source via the input select field. When “AD1–8”
is showing the AW2400’s AD inputs ([MIC/LINE
INPUT] jacks 1–8) are selected as the input source. If
a different input source is selected move the cursor to
the input select field and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or
[INC]/[DEC] keys to select “AD1–8”.
HINT
Press the [INPUT SEL] key for the input
channel to which your instrument/micro-
phone is connected.
The corresponding [INPUT SEL] key will light red,
and the remaining [INPUT SEL] keys will go dark.
Lower the [STEREO] fader to the –∞ posi-
tion.
1
6
If, for example, you have selected input channel 1 as
your record source the top panel keys will appear as
follows.
page 37, connect your instruments and/or
microphones and set up the input levels.
2
Call the RECORD screen Direct page by
3
either pressing the Quick Navigate section
[RECORD] key as many times as necessary,
or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing
the [RECORD] key.
lit
Input channel signals can be directly patched to the
recorder’s tracks via the RECORD screen Direct page.
When this page is called the [INPUT SEL] keys in the
upper area of the top panel will flash red.
The display will appear as shown here.
HINT
• You can also select an input channel by
moving the cursor to the
desired input channel and pressing the
[ENTER] key.
symbol of the
Input channels
Input select
NOTE
• To select the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] con-
nector as the record source you will need
to assign the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] con-
nector to an adjacent pair of odd- and
even-numbered tracks via the DIGITAL IN
Press the Layer section [TRACK 1-12] key
so that its indicator lights.
This selects the TRACK 1-12 mixing layer so you can
use [ON] keys 1–12, [SEL] keys 1–12, and faders 1–
12 to operate track channels 1–12. At this point faders
1–12 will move to the current level settings for track
channels 1–12.
6
7
Tracks
Press the [SEL] key of the track channel on
which you want to record.
The selected input channel and track will be connected
internally. At this time, only the selected [INPUT
SEL] key and [SEL] key will be flashing red. The
flashing [SEL] key indicates that the corresponding
track is in record-ready mode.
If, for example, you have patched input channel 1 to
track 1 the top panel keys will appear as follows.
51
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Direct recording and Mixed recording
Check that the Layer section [TRACK 1-12]
key is lit, then raise the fader of the track
selected as the record destination to an
appropriate monitor level.
10
Normally when recording you don’t monitor the input
channel signal before it is recorded, but rather via the
track channel after it has passed through the recorder.
This lets you monitor the signal that is actually being
recorded as well as adjust the volume and tone of the
monitor signal without affecting the signal that is
being recorded.
flash
Track channels
(Layer section [TRACK 1-12] key lit)
● To Adjust Volume/Balance
Set the fader of the corresponding track channel as
required.
6
The display will appear as shown here.
● To Adjust Pan
HINT
After pressing the [SEL] key of the corresponding
channel press the Selected Channel section [PAN/EQ]
key so that its indicator lights. Selected Channel knob
1 can now be used to adjust panning for the channel
currently selected via the [SEL] keys. For more details
• Input channels that are patched to tracks
will be automatically disconnected from the
stereo bus and their signal will not be out-
put via the [STEREO OUT] or [MONITOR
OUT] jacks (the signals being recorded can
be monitored via the track channel being
recorded).
NOTE
• When an input is disconnected from a
track, that input is automatically re-patched
to the stereo bus.
• In the direct-record mode adjusting the pan of the record
source input channel has no effect.
• You can also select a track by moving the
cursor to the
and pressing the [ENTER] key.
symbol of the desired track
To check the level of a signal being applied
to a record-ready track press the [METER]
key and then the [F2] key.
11
NOTE
This calls the METER screen Track page. In this page
you can monitor the levels of the signals at the inputs
of track channels 1–24, sent from the input channels to
the recorder tracks.
• The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as
(mute), but you can still record to muted tracks.
p. 165), tracks 13–24 are muted and will not play back.
If you want to record more than
one instrument or microphone
simultaneously, assign other
input channels to tracks in the
same way.
8
9
HINT
• To cancel a patched connection press the
[INPUT SEL] key so that it lights red, then
press the [SEL] key of the track that is
selected as the record destination. To can-
cel all connections, move the cursor to the
SAFE button and press the [ENTER] key.
Raise the [STEREO] fader to the 0 dB posi-
tion.
Move the cursor to the PRE EQ button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The input levels of the track channels corresponding to
the record-ready tracks will be displayed. If any of the
signals reach the “OVER” level the input level setting
will need to be reduced. Refer to “Connection and
12
At this point the track channel faders are set to –∞, so
no sound will be heard from the monitor system.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Direct recording and Mixed recording
● Monitor signal flow during recording
Recorder section
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
Track 5
from the input
channels
6
Stereo
output
channel
Track
channels
Stereo bus
Mixer section
This completes the patch setup for direct recording.
NOTE
• If you switch the RECORD display page after doing the patch setup all your patch
settings will be undone and lost (a confirmation popup window will appear).
Remember to stay on the same RECORD page until recording is finished.
53
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Direct recording and Mixed recording
Press the [INPUT SEL] key for the input
channel to which your instrument/micro-
phone is connected.
The currently selected [INPUT
SEL] key will light orange, and
that input channel will be selected
for operation.
5
6
Assigning input signals to tracks
(Mixed recording)
Use the following procedure to set up the patching so you
can mix and record the signals from multiple instruments/
mics connected to [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8 to one
or more tracks.
The
symbol for the correspond-
ing input channel will be high-
lighted in the screen, and a line
will appear indicating that this
channel is connected to the bus.
HINT
ing.
Lower the [STEREO] fader to the –∞ posi-
tion.
Repeatedly press the same [INPUT SEL]
key to select the bus to which you want to
send the signal from that input channel.
Each time you press the [INPUT SEL] key the screen
will change as follows.
1
6
page 37, connect your instruments and/or
microphones and set up the input levels.
2
AOff
EBus 2 L/R
On
Call the RECORD screen Mixed page by
3
either pressing the Quick Navigate section
[RECORD] key as many times as necessary,
or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing
the [RECORD] key.
BBus 1 L/R
FBus 2 L
On
On
Via the RECORD screen Mixed page you can patch
multiple input channels to either of the AW2400’s ste-
reo buses (Bus1 and Bus2), allowing mixed signals to
be assigned to up to four tracks.
CBus 1 L
On
GBus 2 R
On
Input channels
Input select
To A
DBus 1 R
On
HINT
• Input channels that are patched to Bus1 or Bus2 will be auto-
matically disconnected from the stereo bus and their signal
will not be output via the [STEREO OUT] or [MONITOR OUT]
jacks (the signals being recorded can be monitored via the
track channel being recorded).
• When an input is disconnected from Bus1 or Bus2, that input
is automatically re-patched to the stereo bus.
Tracks
• You can also switch to Bus1/Bus2 by moving the cursor to the
symbol of the desired input channel and pressing the
[ENTER] key.
Check that “AD1–8” appears in the input
4
select field on the left side of the page. If a
different input source is selected move the
cursor to the input select field and use the
[DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to
select “AD1–8”.
Use the same procedure to specify other
input channels as recording sources as
required.
7
NOTE
• To select the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector as the record
source you will need to assign the [DIGITAL STEREO IN]
connector to an adjacent pair of odd- and even-numbered
details.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Direct recording and Mixed recording
Press the Layer section [TRACK 1-12] key
so that its indicator lights.
This selects the TRACK 1-12 mixing layer so you can
use [ON] keys 1–12, [SEL] keys 1–12, and faders 1–
12 to operate track channels 1–12. At this point check
that all faders are set to their minimum –∞ positions.
8
9
NOTE
• The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as
(mute), but you can still record to muted tracks.
p. 165), tracks 13–24 are muted and will not play back.
Raise the [STEREO] fader to the 0 dB posi-
tion.
Press the [SEL] key(s) for the record-desti-
nation track(s).
10
11
You can select up to four tracks for recording. Bus1 L
and Bus2 L can be assigned to odd-numbered tracks,
while Bus1 R and Bus2 R can be assigned to even-
numbered tracks. The [SEL] keys of track channels to
which buses have been assigned will flash red and the
record-ready mode will be engaged.
Check that the Layer section [TRACK 1-12]
key is lit, then raise the fader of the track
selected as the record destination to an
appropriate monitor level.
The signal sent to the track via Bus1/Bus2 will be out-
put via the [STEREO OUT] and [MONITOR OUT]
jacks.
6
For example, the display will change as shown when
the track channel 1 [SEL] key is pressed repeatedly.
To set the level and pan for input channels
1–8 press the Layer section [IN 1-8] key so
that its indicator lights.
12
A Connected to Bus1 L
If multiple input channels are patched to the same bus
the individual level and pan settings for each input
cannot be changed after recording. For this reason it is
necessary to set up the individual channel levels and
pan applied to Bus1/Bus2 as required before record-
ing.
B Connected to Bus2 L
● To Adjust Volume/Balance
Set the input channel 1–8 faders as required.
● To Adjust Pan
After pressing the [SEL] key of the corresponding
input channel press the Selected Channel section
[PAN/EQ] key so that its indicator lights. Selected
Channel knob 1 can now be used to adjust panning for
the channel currently selected via the [SEL] keys. For
more details refer to “Pan Control” on page 147.
C No Connection
NOTE
• When the outputs from multiple channels are mixed and
recorded it may be necessary to adjust the input channel fad-
ers to prevent the combined signal level from getting too high.
• We recommend that you not use the [GAIN] knob to adjust
the volume balance of the input channels. This will degrade
the S/N ratio, and may cause the sound to distort.
To A
HINT
• To hear the input channel pan settings via the monitor system
the track channels corresponding to the two record-destina-
tion tracks should be assigned as a pair.
• This operation can also be carried out by moving the cursor to
the
mark of the record track and repeatedly pressing the
[ENTER] key.
nation the pan settings of the odd- and even-numbered tracks
will automatically be set to left and right, respectively, allowing
the pair to be used as a stereo track.
• When a single track is selected as the record destination the
pan of the corresponding track channel will automatically be
set to center.
• To cancel all connections, move the cursor to the SAFE but-
ton and press the [ENTER] key.
55
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To monitor the signal levels sent from
Move the cursor to the POST FADER button
14
and press the [ENTER] key.
13
Bus1/Bus2 to the record-ready tracks press
the [METER] key and then the [F3] key.
The post-fader signal levels will be displayed.
This calls the METER screen Master page, allowing
visual monitoring of the output levels from Bus1 and
Bus2.
If the signal levels reach “OVER” on the meters press
the Layer section [MASTER] key so that it lights to
select the MASTER mixing layer, and use fader 1
(Bus1) and fader 2 (Bus2) to adjust the master levels
for Bus1 and Bus2 as required.
Bus1 and Bus2 output level.
NOTE
• If you switch the RECORD display page after doing the patch
setup all your patch settings will be undone and lost (a confir-
mation popup window will appear). Remember to stay on the
same RECORD page until recording is finished.
6
Recording on a track
Now that the necessary preparations have been completed, let’s record on a track.
Call the TRACK screen View page by either
pressing the Work Navigate section
[TRACK] key as many times as necessary,
or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing
the [TRACK] key.
This page can be used to confirm which tracks do and
do not contain recorded data. You can also make any
required metronome settings via this page (refer to
Press theTransport section RTZ [
return to the beginning of the song.
] key to
1
2
3
Hold down the Transport section REC [●]
key and press the PLAY [ ] key to start
recording.
Recording will begin on the track set up as the record
destination. In the track view within the screen, the
vertical line that indicates the current location will
advance towards the right.
Track view
NOTE
• Recording will not begin if no track is in the record-ready
mode.
To stop recording, press the STOP [■] key.
The recorded audio data will appear in bar-graph form
in the track view.
4
5
The data entry/control section [UNDO/REDO] key
will light. This indicates that you can press the
[UNDO/REDO] key to execute the Undo function.
To hear the recording from the beginning,
press the RTZ [
counter display to zero and press the PLAY
] key.
] key to return the
[
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to redo the recording, press the
[UNDO/REDO] key.
The [UNDO/REDO] key will go out, and you will
return to the state prior to recording. Repeat steps 2–5.
When you finish recording, press the Quick
Navigate Section [RECORD] key once
again, move the cursor to the SAFE button,
and press the [ENTER] key.
When the confirmation popup window appears so
move the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key. The input-to-track assignments will be
cancelled. The REC [●] key will be disabled to pre-
vent accidental recording.
6
7
8
If you are satisfied with the recorded con-
tent, save the song. (For details on saving,
refer to “Saving the current song”.)
Please be aware that the recorded content will be lost
if you turn off the AW2400 power before saving the
song.
6
Saving the current song
This section explains how to save the current song to the hard disk. If you accidentally turn off
the AW2400 power without saving the song, all recordings or operations that you performed
since last saving the song will be lost.You should make a habit of saving the song at appropriate
breaks in your work.
Call the SONG screen Song List page by
either pressing the Work Navigate section
[SONG] key as many times as necessary, or
by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the
[SONG] key.
To save the song, move the cursor to the
YES button and press the [ENTER] key.
If you move the cursor to the NO button (instead of the
YES button) and press the [ENTER] key, the Save
operation will be cancelled.
1
3
SAVE button
NOTE
• The song save operation always saves the current song,
regardless of the song that is selected in the list.
• You cannot save a song that is protected. If, for example, you
have edited the mixer settings and need to save the song, you
must disable the protect setting and then save the song. (For
HINT
• A number of other operations are available in the SONG
page 167 for details.
• In the following situations a popup window will ask whether
you want to save the current song: when you load an existing
song from the hard disk, when you create a new song, or
when you shut-down the AW2400.
• We recommend that you frequently save the song you are
safeguard against accidents such as the AW2400’s power
cable being accidentally disconnected.
Move the cursor to the SAVE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm that you
want to save the current song.
2
57
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pairing channels
Pairing channels
Adjacent odd- and even-numbered input channels (1/2–15/16), track channels (1/2–23/24), and
AUX send master channels (1/2 and 3/4) can be set as pairs. When channels are paired most of
their parameters are linked for optimum efficiency and easy when handling stereo signals.
Channels can be set as pairs either via the MONITOR screen or by using the panel [INPUT SEL]
or [SEL] keys.
NOTE
• When channels are paired always operate only the fader of one channel. Attempting to
operate both faders at once can result in damage to the faders’ motor drive system.
Move the cursor to the MONOx2 button of a
channel you want to assign as a stereo pair
and press the [ENTER] key.
A pairing confirmation popup window will appear.
2
6 ■ Pairing Channels via
the MONITOR Screen
Call the MONITOR screen Pair page by
1
either pressing the Quick Navigate section
[MONITOR] key as many times as neces-
sary, or by pressing the [F1] key after
pressing the [MONITOR] key.
This page contains the following items.
D
E
The popup window contains the following items.
A
B
• INPUT (TRACK, AUX OUT) x → y
(x= odd number, y= even number)
.................. Copy the settings of channel x
to y, and pair them.
• INPUT (TRACK, AUX OUT) y →x
(x= odd number, y= even number)
.................. Copy the settings of channel y
to x, and pair them.
C
• RESET BOTH ....... Initialize both channels, and
pair them.
• CANCEL ............... Cancel pairing.
1 INPUT field
Pairs or disengages pairing for input channels 1–16.
Move the cursor to the appropriate button
in the popup window and press the
[ENTER] key.
The MONOx2 button will change to a STEREO but-
ton. The following parameters are linked for paired
channels.
3
B TRACK field
Pairs or disengages pairing for track channels 1–24.
C AUX OUT field
Pairs or disengages pairing for AUX send channels 1–
4.
● Input Channels
All mix parameters other than the [GAIN] knob and
phase/pan settings.
D MONOx2 buttons
Indicate that the adjacent channels are functioning as
independent mono channels.
E STEREO buttons
Indicate that the two channels are functioning as a ste-
reo pair.
● Track Channels
All mix parameters other than the phase/pan settings.
● AUX Send Master Channels
All mix parameters.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pairing channels
To disengage a pair, move the cursor to the
corresponding STEREO button and press
the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm that you
want to disengage the pair.
4
5
■ Channel Pairing Using
the Panel Keys
Use the Layer section keys to select the mix
layer containing the channels you want to
pair.
1
2
While holding the [SEL] key of one channel
that you want to pair, press the [SEL] key of
the adjacent channel.
6
Move the cursor to the OK button and press
the [ENTER] key to confirm and disengage
the pair.
A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm
the pairing.
The STEREO button will change to a MONOx2 but-
ton. If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button
rather than the OK button and press the [ENTER] key
the disengage-pair operation will be aborted and the
channels will remain paired.
The popup window contains the same items as the
MONITOR screen used for channel pairing.
HINT
• The [INPUT SEL] 1–8 keys can also be used to pair input
channels 1–8.
HINT
• All channel pairs can be disengaged at once by pressing the
[F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key.
Move the cursor to the appropriate button
in the popup window and press the
[ENTER] key.
The channels specified via the [SEL] keys will be
paired.
3
4
5
• For paired channels set the pan control to either full left or
right to achieve nominal level (i.e. the same level before and
after the pan control). For channels that are not paired nomi-
nal level is achieved with the pan control set to center.
To disengage pairing, press the [SEL] key
of one of the paired channels while holding
the [SEL] key of the other channel.
A popup window will ask you to confirm that you
want to disengage the pair.
To disengage the pair, press the OK button.
If you decide not to disengage the pair,
move the cursor to the CANCEL button and
press the [ENTER] key.
59
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applying EQ To an Input Signal
Applying EQ To an Input Signal
The AW2400 provides versatile 4-band equalizers on every channel that can be directly operated
via the Selected Channel section keys and knobs.
This section describes the procedure for applying EQ to input channels 1–8.
Press the Layer section [IN 1-8] key so that
its indicator lights, the press the [SEL] key
for the channel to which EQ is to be
applied.
To turn the EQ on, move the cursor to the
EQ ON/OFF button and press the [ENTER]
key.
1
4
5
6
Press the Selected Channel section [LOW],
[LO-MID], [HI-MID] or [HIGH] key to select
the EQ band to be adjusted.
HINT
• The [INPUT SEL] 1–8 keys can also be used to select an
input channel for equalization.
6
Use Selected Channel section knobs 2–4 to
adjust the EQ as required.
When the [PAN/EQ] key is lit, Selected Channel
knobs 2–4 perform the following functions: knob 2
adjusts the Q, knob 3 adjusts the center frequency, and
knob 4 adjusts the gain of the selected band.
Press the Selected Channel section [PAN/
EQ] key so that its indicator lights. Press
Selected Channel knob 1, 2, 3, or 4 and the
PAN/EQ screen will appear.
2
3
Press the Display section [F3] key to call
the EQ/Att. page.
The EQ settings are available via this page.
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to set all bands as
required.
7
HINT
EQ ON/OFF button
• In addition to the ability for fine EQ control as described
above, the supplied EQ library contains preset EQ setups for
a variety of instruments that can be recalled and used or
edited as required. Refer to “Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Pro-
cessing” on page 147 for details.
HINT
• Pages can also be selected by repeatedly pressing Selected
Channel section knobs 1–4.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applying Compression to an Input Signal
Applying Compression to an Input Signal
The AW2400 provides dynamics processing capability on all input and track channels: compres-
sion on the track channels, and both compression and gating on the input channels. The dynam-
ics processor parameters are adjusted manually via the Selected Channel section in the same
way as the EQ parameters. A range of dynamics presets for a variety of instruments is also pro-
vided in the dynamics library.
In this section we’ll see how to recall dynamics processor preset from the library and apply com-
pression to the channel 1–8 signals.
Press the Layer section [IN 1-8] key so that
its indicator lights, the press the [SEL] key
for the channel to which compression is to
be applied.
Move the cursor to the COMP ON/OFF but-
ton and press the [ENTER] key to turn the
compressor on.
This activates the compressor for the corresponding
input channel.
1
4
6
HINT
HINT
• The [INPUT SEL] 1–8 keys can also be used to select an
input channel for compression.
• If necessary the individual compressor parameters can be
adjusted via this page. Refer to “Using the Compressors” on
page 152 for details.
Press the Selected Channel section [DYN]
key so that its indicator lights.
The DYNAMICS screen will appear.
2
Press the Display section [F4] key.
The DYNAMICS screen Comp Lib. page will appear.
5
NOTE
Compressor library presets can be recalled via this
page. The currently selected compressor type and its
graphic response curve are shown at the top of the dis-
play.
• If the AUTO DISPLAY function is set to OFF, the DYNAMICS
screen will not appear automatically when the [DYN] key is
pressed. In this case press one of the Selected Channel
knobs (1–4) after pressing the [DYN] key so that its indicator
lights. For details about the AUTO DISPLAY function refer to
List
RECALL button
Press the Display section [F3] key, or press
the [DYN] key as many times as necessary
until the Comp Edit page appears.
3
The compressor settings are available via this page.
COMP ON/OFF button
Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]
keys to select the library setting to be
recalled.
6
The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently
selected for recall.
Each setting has a name that indicates the instrument
or application it is intended to be used for. The com-
pressor types and response curves are displayed to the
left of the list.
HINT
• Pages can also be switched by repeatedly pressing a
Selected Channel knob.
61
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Move the cursor to the RECALL button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window confirming the recall operation will
appear.
Use Selected Channel knob 1 to change the
overall effect of the compressor.
7
8
9
When the knob is operated the DYNAMICS screen
Comp Edit page will appear. If Selected Channel knob
1 is operated while the [DYN] key is engaged, multi-
ple compressor parameters are adjusted simulta-
neously to change the overall effect of the compressor
(the actual change will depend on the preset selected
from the library).
To actually recall the selected setting move
the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
The selected setting will be recalled and the compres-
sor type and parameters will change accordingly.
Repeat steps 6–8 as necessary to select various presets
until you find one that best suits your application.
NOTE
• If a Selected Channel knob is operated while the AUTO DIS-
PLAY function is OFF, rather than the display switching to the
Comp Edit page a popup window containing the relevant
parameters will appear. For details about the AUTO DISPLAY
function refer to “AW2400 Preferences” on page 210.
6
Handy Recording Functions
This section describes a number of functions that are handy for recording.
Move the cursor to the metronome button
and press the [ENTER] key.
The metronome will be turned on. In this state the
metronome will sound during recording and playback.
2
3
Using the Metronome
Activating the metronome and setting the tempo and vol-
ume.
The metronome will begin sounding when
the PLAY [ ] key is pressed to begin play-
back.
Move the cursor to the metronome knob and use the
[DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to adjust the
metronome level as required.
Call the TRACK screen View page by either
1
pressing the Work Navigate section
[TRACK] key as many times as necessary,
or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing
the [TRACK] key.
To change the tempo or time signature, first
press the STOP [■] key to stop the
recorder. Call the EDIT screen Tempo Map
page by either pressing the Work Navigate
section [EDIT] key as many times as neces-
sary, or by pressing the [F2] key after
pressing the [EDIT] key.
4
The Tempo Map page lets you create a tempo map that
specifies the tempo and time signature of the song.
The tempo and time signature that you specify here
will be the basis for the measure/beat display counter,
the internal metronome, and the MTC (MIDI Time
Code) transmitted and received by the AW2400.
A
B
1 Metronome button
Switches the metronome on/off.
B Metronome knob
Adjusts the metronome volume level. The current
value is shown above the knob in dB units.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Handy Recording Functions
A
Switching virtual tracks
Each audio track contains eight virtual tracks. After over-
dubbing a solo part, you can switch the virtual track for
that track, and record a different take while preserving the
previously-recorded content.
Call the TRACK screen Virtual TR page by
1
either pressing the Work Navigate section
[TRACK] key as many times as necessary,
or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing
the [TRACK] key.
A
6
1 Tempo map events
These are the events recorded in the tempo map. When
you create a new song, a tempo map event of time sig-
nature = 4/4 and tempo = 120 will be created at the
beginning of the song (measure 1, beat 1).
Move the cursor to the TEMPO field of the
event, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/
[DEC] keys to set the tempo value.
5
6
The tempo can be set from 30 to 250 (BPM).
If necessary, move the cursor to the METER
field and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/
[DEC] keys to change the time signature.
B
The time signature can be set from 1/4 to 8/4.
1 Virtual tracks
Indicates the status of virtual tracks 1–8. The virtual
track that is currently selected for each track is indi-
cated by a “●” symbol. Of the virtual tracks that are
currently not selected, those that have been recorded
are indicated by “ ”, and those that have not yet been
recorded are indicated as “–”.
HINT
• It is also possible to change the tempo or time signature dur-
B Tracks
Use the cursor keys to select the virtual
track number that you want to assign to the
desired track.
2
Press the [ENTER] key.
3
The “●” symbol will be displayed at the position of
the newly-selected virtual track. This virtual track will
now be used for recording/playback.
63
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Handy Recording Functions
Move the cursor to the EXIT button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The popup window will close, and you will return to
the previous screen.
4
Using the Undo List
By using the AW2400’s Undo list, you can not only cancel
the most recent recording or editing operation, but even
backtrack through your work for as many as fifteen opera-
tions.
HINT
• Please note that if you record or edit after “undoing” back to a
certain step, the undo/redo data subsequent to that step will
be erased. For example if you “undo” the previous three
steps, and then perform a recording or editing operation, the
undo/redo data for the previous steps 1 and 2 will be erased.
This is convenient when, for example, after performing
several overdubs you decide that you would rather go back
to the state immediately after you had recorded the third
solo.
• If you press the [UNDO/REDO] key while it is lit the previous
operation will be undone without opening the Undo List (the
key indicator will go out when the UNDO operation is per-
formed). Press the [UNDO/REDO] key a second time to
“redo” the undone operation.
Press and hold the [UNDO/REDO] key.
The UNDO LIST popup window will appear.
1
6
A
1 Undo list
This is a list of the previous recording and editing
operations. From the left, the list shows a step number
that indicates the order in which the operations were
performed, the content of the operation, and the track/
virtual track that was affected by the recording or edit-
ing operation.
The current song is now in the state of the step that is
highlighted.
The step enclosed by a dotted frame indicates the step
to which the song will be returned by the Undo func-
tion.
NOTE
• If you have already cancelled recent operations using the
Undo function before displaying the Undo list, previous steps
may not remain at all.
Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]
keys to select a step number.
2
Move the cursor to the OK button and press
the [ENTER] key.
3
The current song will revert to the state of the step you
selected.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
Overdubbing
This chapter explains how you can record additional performances on other
tracks while you listen to the previously-recorded tracks.
About overdubbing
“Overdubbing” is the process of recording additional performances on other tracks while you
monitor the playback of previously-recorded tracks.
The diagram below shows the signal flow when you play back tracks 1–4 and overdub track 5. In
this example, the signal that is input from [MIC/LINE INPUT] jack 1 is routed through recorder
track 5 and sent to track channel 5.This signal is then sent to the stereo bus, mixed with the play-
back sound of track channels 1–4, and output from the [STEREO OUT] jacks and the [MONITOR
OUT] jacks / [PHONES] jack.
7
● Signal flow when overdubbing
Recorder section
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
Track 5
[MIC/LINE
INPUT] jacks
Input
channels
Track
channels
Stereo output
channel
Stereo bus
Mixer section
65
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Assigning the input signal to a track
Assigning the input signal to a track
In order to overdub, you must first assign the mic or instrument to a new track. The basic proce-
dure is the same as when recording the first track.
Lower the [STEREO] fader to the –∞ posi-
Assign the input channel to which your
instrument/mic is connected to a new track,
and adjust the level.
For details on this step, refer to “Assigning input sig-
1
2
3
4
tion.
Connect your instrument or mic to a [MIC/
LINE INPUT] jack.
The diagram below shows an example of when input
channel 1 is assigned to track 5.
Call the RECORD screen Direct page by
either pressing the Work Navigate section
[RECORD] key as many times as necessary,
or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing
the [RECORD] key.
7
HINT
• In this example we will use “direct recording,” in which one
input channel is assigned to one track. However, you may
also use “mixed recording,” in which multiple input channels
are sent to the Bus 1/2 and recorded on one through four
tracks.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the mix balance and pan
Setting the mix balance and pan
Here’s how to set the volume balance and pan for the previously-recorded tracks and the tracks
that you now will be overdubbing.
While you play back the song, raise the
track channel faders for the previously-
recorded tracks to an appropriate monitor-
ing level.
Press the [SEL] key for the recording-desti-
nation track channel, and press the
Selected Channel section [PAN/EQ] key so
that its indicator lights.
1
5
6
HINT
Rotate the Selected Channel knob 1 to
adjust the pan.
In the same way as for the input channel signal, you
can also use EQ and dynamics (compressor) to process
the track channel.
• For example if you’ve already recorded tracks 1–4, press the
Layer section [TRACK 1-12] key to make it light, and use the
top panel faders 1–4 to control track channels 1–4.
Press the [SEL] key for a previously-
recorded track, and press the Selected
Channel section [PAN/EQ] key so that its
indicator lights.
2
3
4
By operating the track channel you’ve selected as the
recording-destination, you can adjust the panning or
tone of the monitor signal without affecting the signal
that is actually recorded.
7
Rotate the Selected Channel knob 1 to
adjust the pan.
Adjust the pan in the same way for the other track
channels.
HINT
• For details on how to adjust the pan, EQ, and dynamics pro-
Stop the recorder, and while producing
sound on your instrument, adjust the fader
of the recording-destination track channel
so that the monitoring level is appropriate.
The track channel for the recording-destination track
will send the input signal to the stereo bus while
recording or stopped, and will send the track playback
signal to the stereo bus during playback. This means
that in order to monitor the input signal, you must stop
the recorder.
HINT
• The position of the track channel faders will not affect the
recording level. However if you set the faders to 0 dB, the
playback volume will be the same as when you recorded the
tracks.
67
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overdubbing
Overdubbing
Now you can overdub onto the track that you selected as the recording-destination.
Call the TRACK screen View page by either
pressing the Work Navigate section
[TRACK] key as many times as necessary,
or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing
the [TRACK] key.
This page displays all tracks side by side, making it
easy to see the relationship between tracks and the cur-
rent location within the song.
While monitoring the previously-recorded
tracks, play the instrument that you want to
overdub.
1
3
4
5
To stop recording, press the STOP [■] key.
The [UNDO/REDO] key in the data entry / control
section will light.
To listen to the recorded performance from
the beginning, press the RTZ [
] key to
return the counter display to zero, and
press the PLAY [ ] key.
7
HINT
• If you recorded from the middle of the song, you can press the
[IN] key to move to the location at which you began recording.
If you are satisfied with the recorded perfor-
mance, save the song. (For details on sav-
6
If you decide to re-do the recording, press the [UNDO/
REDO] key to cancel the recording, and repeat steps
2–6.
In the transport section, hold down the REC
[●] key and press the PLAY [ ] key.
2
Recording will begin.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Punch-in/out
Punch-in/out
If you make a mistake while overdubbing, you can re-record just the region in which you made
the mistake. This process is called “punch-in/out.”
Punch-in/out can be performed either as “manual punch-in/out” in which you switch between
recording and playback manually, or as “auto punch-in/out” in which recording and playback will
switch automatically when you reach the locations you specify beforehand.
To stop playback, press the STOP [■] key
(or press the foot switch).
The [UNDO/REDO] key in the data entry / control
section will light.
7
Manual punch-in/out
Here’s how to perform punch-in/out using the keys of the
transport section or a foot switch.
HINT
If you want to perform punch-in/out using a
1
• If no track has been enabled for recording, the foot switch will
alternate between Play and Stop operations.
foot switch, connect a separately sold foot
switch (Yamaha FC5 or equivalent) to the
rear panel FOOT SW jack.
7
To listen to the newly-recorded content,
locate to a point just before the punch-in
point, and press the PLAY [ ] key.
8
Call the RECORD screen Direct page, and
make sure that your instrument/mic is
assigned to the track on which you want to
punch-in.
2
3
If you are satisfied with the newly-recorded
content, save the song. (For details on sav-
If you decide to re-do the recording, press the [UNDO/
REDO] key to cancel the recording, and repeat steps
3–7.
9
Locate to a point earlier than where you
want to punch-in.
For details on Locate operation, refer to “Move To a
You may find it convenient to register a marker at a
location one or two measures earlier than the point at
which you want to punch-in, so you can quickly return
to that point. (For details on registering a marker →
The following diagram shows the manual punch-in/out
procedure.
1
2
3
4
5
Press the Transport section PLAY [ ] key.
(Alternatively, press the foot switch.)
4
5
24
The song will begin playing. At this time, the track
playback sound of the recording-destination track
channel will be sent to the stereo bus, so you will not
be able to monitor the input signal.
play
record
play
At the point where you want to begin
recording, hold down the PLAY [ ] key
and press the REC [●] key (or press the
foot switch once again), and begin playing
your instrument.
punch-in
punch-out
The recording-destination track will switch from play-
back to recording (“punch-in”).
At the point where you want to stop record-
ing, press the PLAY [ ] key (or press the
foot switch).
6
The recording-destination track will switch from
recording back to playback (“punch-out”).
69
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Punch-in/out
To rehearse the auto punch-in/out, press
the PLAY [ ] key.
When you press the PLAY [ ] key while the [AUTO
PUNCH] key is lit, the following will occur.
7
Auto punch-in/out
Auto punch-in/out is a function that performs the punch-in
and punch-out operations automatically. In order to use
this function, you must first specify the punch-in location
(the In point) and the punch-out location (the Out point).
1 The PLAY [ ] key will light, and playback will
begin from the pre-roll point.
Call the RECORD screen Direct page, and
B When you reach the auto punch-in point, the REC
[●] key will begin blinking, and the signal that you
are monitoring from the recording-destination
track channel will switch from the track playback
to the input signal (recording-source). (However,
recording will not actually occur.)
1
make sure that your instrument/mic is
assigned to the track on which you want to
punch-in.
Locate to the point at which you want to
punch-in.
2
C When you reach the auto punch-out point, the
REC [●] key will go dark, and the signal that you
are monitoring from the recording-destination
track channel will return to the track playback.
Hold down the Locate section [SET] key
and press the [IN] key.
The current location will be registered as the In point.
3
7
D When you reach a point that is a specific distance
(the “post-roll time”) after the Out point (this point
is called the “post-roll point”), you will return to
the pre-roll point and stop.
Locate to the point at which you want to
punch-out.
4
Hold down the Locate section [SET] key
and press the [OUT] key.
HINT
5
• If you turn the Locate section [REPEAT] key on before step 7,
operations 1–4 of step 7 will be repeated up to fifteen times.
(The A-B Repeat function is disabled during this time.) If you
want to stop repeating the rehearsal, press the [REPEAT] key
once again or press the STOP [■] key.
The current location will be registered as the Out
point.
HINT
• With the initial settings of the AW2400, the pre-roll and post-
roll times are each set to four seconds.You can adjust these
• If you want to set the In and Out points more precisely, you
a short region before or after the current location, or use the
the contents of the track as a waveform.
To perform the actual auto punch-in/out,
stop the recorder, then hold down the REC
[●] key and press the PLAY [ ] key.
When you press the REC [●] key + PLAY [ ] key
while the [AUTO PUNCH] key is lit, the following
will occur.
8
• The In point and Out point will be updated each time you
record.The location at which you last started recording will be
registered as the In point, and the location at which you last
stopped recording will be registered as the Out point.
Press the Locate section [AUTO PUNCH]
6
key.
1 Only the PLAY [ ] key will light, and playback
The [AUTO PUNCH] key will light, and the Auto
Punch-in/out function will be enabled. You will auto-
matically locate to a point a specific distance (the “pre-
roll time”) ahead of the In point. This point is called
the “pre-roll point.”
will begin from the pre-roll point.
B When you reach the auto punch-in point, the REC
[●] key will light, and recording will begin
(“punch-in”).
C When you reach the auto punch-out point, the
REC [●] key will go dark, recording will stop, and
you will return to playback mode (“punch-out”).
NOTE
• If the auto punch-in/out region is too short or too long (less
than approximately 100 msec or greater than one hour), an
error message will appear, and you won’t be able to specify
the Out point.
D When you reach the post-roll point, you will return
to the pre-roll point and stop. At this time, the
[UNDO/REDO] key in the data entry / control sec-
tion will light.
• You can’t change the In/Out points if the [AUTO PUNCH] key
is lit. If you need to change the In/Out points, you must first
defeat the Auto Punch-in/out function.
To check the newly-recorded content, press
the [AUTO PUNCH] key to make it go dark,
and then press the PLAY [ ] key.
9
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Punch-in/out
If you are satisfied with the newly-recorded
content, save the song. (For the Save pro-
10
If you decide to re-do the recording, you can go back
to the best take using the Undo list after performing
The following diagram shows the auto punch-in/out
procedure.
Pre-roll
point
Auto punch-in Auto punch-out Post-roll
point
point
point
1
2
3
4
5
24
locate
play
rehearsal
play
7
rehearsal
punch-in
punch-out
actual recording
71
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Mixdown and bounce operations
This chapter explains mixdown operations, in which you mix previously-
recorded tracks and record the result on the stereo track. This chapter also
explains how bouncing (ping-pong recording), in which you combine multiple
tracks into one to four tracks.
About mixdown and bouncing
“Mixdown” is the process by which the signals recorded on the recorder tracks are mixed to ste-
reo, and recorded on the internal stereo track to complete the song. The contents of the stereo
track can be used without further processing as material to create an audio CD.
The diagram below shows the signal flow during mix-
down. The playback of each track is sent to the stereo bus,
passes through the stereo output channel, and is recorded
on the stereo track. At this time you can also add the sig-
nals from input channels.
8
● Signal flow during mixdown
Recorder section
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
Track 5
Effect
send
Internal Effects
[MIC/LINE
INPUT]
jacks
Stereo
track
Effect
return
Stereo bus
Mixer section
73
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About mixdown and bouncing
“Bouncing” is the action of mixing the signals recorded
on multiple tracks, and recording the mixed result into one
to four vacant tracks. (This action is also called “ping-
pong recording.”) For example if you’ve recorded individ-
ual instruments of a drum set on multiple tracks, you can
bounce these tracks down to two tracks, and then switch
the bounce-source tracks to different virtual tracks so that
they will be free to record new instruments.
The diagram below shows the signal flow during bounc-
ing. This diagram shows an example in which the track 1–
8 signals are bounced to tracks 9–12. After bouncing, you
can switch the virtual tracks for tracks 1–8, and use these
tracks to record other instrumental performances.
Bouncing differs from mixdown in the following ways.
• The destination of the track channels is Bus 1/Bus 2
rather than the stereo bus.
• The recording-destination will be a vacant audio
track (or tracks).
• You can’t add the signals of input channels.
● Signal flow during bouncing
8
Effect send
Recorder
section
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
Track 5
Track 6
Track 7
Track 8
Track 9
Track 10
Track 11
Track 12
Internal Effects
Bus 1
Effect return
Bus 2
Mixer section
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mixdown procedure
Mixdown procedure
In this procedure you will select the channels that you want to mix down (track channels, input
channels, and effect return channels), and record them to the stereo track.
B Input Select
Lower the [STEREO] fader to the –∞ posi-
1
2
Here you can select the input sources that will be
patched to input channels 1–8 or 9–16. You can select
the following input sources.
tion.
Call the RECORD screen Mixdown page by
either pressing the Quick Navigate section
[RECORD] key as many times as necessary,
or by pressing the [F4] key after pressing
the [RECORD] key.
The Mixdown page is where you can perform mix-
down operations. In this page you can select the chan-
nels that will be recorded via the stereo bus onto the
stereo track.
• AD1–8 .................The input signals from the AD
inputs ([MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks
1–8)
• SLOT1–8............. The input signals from inputs
1–8 of the digital I/O card
• SLOT9–16........... The input signals from inputs
9–16 of the digital I/O card
• ----........................Not selected
C Stereo bus
A B
8
Indicates the on/off status of the channels being sent to
the stereo bus. The numbers within the screen corre-
spond to the following channels.
• INPUT 1–16......... Input channels 1–16
• RETURN 1–4 ...... Effect Return channels 1–4
• TRACK 1–24....... Track channels 1–24
D Tracks
C
D
This is the track channel number. Move the cursor to
the number and press the [ENTER] key to switch track
muting on/off.
E LIBRARY button
Accesses the mastering library, where you can recall
EQ and dynamics settings specifically for the stereo
output channel.
E
F
G
H
I
F DITHER ON/OFF button
This is an on/off switch for “dithering,” which is a pro-
cess that reduces the perceived quantization noise
when you convert a digital audio signal to a lower bit
depth.
1 DIGITAL IN
This lets you assign an input channel to the [DIGITAL
STEREO IN] connector.
Here you can choose from the following items.
G REC button
Puts the stereo track in record-ready mode.
• 1.2–15.16...... The signal from the [DIGITAL STE-
REO IN] connector will be assigned
to adjacent odd-numbered/even-
H SAFE button
numbered input channels 1/2–15/16.
Defeats the record-ready state of the stereo track. This
will also execute MUTE CLEAR (I).
• ---- ................. The [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connec-
tor will not be used.
HINT
HINT
• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the SAFE button.
• In order for the digital audio signal sent from an external
device to the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector to be assigned
to an input channel, the clock of the external device and the
I MUTE CLEAR button
This clears the Mute status of all tracks.
• The DIGITAL IN setting takes priority over the setting of the
Input Select field. If you assign DIGITAL IN to an input chan-
nel, a
input numbers in the Input Select field. This symbol indicates
that DIGITAL IN is assigned.
However depending on the bit depth of the song, there
may be cases in which some tracks cannot be
unmuted. If so, tracks will be muted consecutively
starting with the last-numbered track.
symbol will be displayed for the two corresponding
• If the STEREO BUS CASCADE button in the DIO screen Set-
ting page is set to ENABLE, “ST BUS” will appear as the DIG-
ITAL IN assignment, and the assignment can’t be changed.
75
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mixdown procedure
Use the Layer section keys, the [INPUT
If you want to use the mastering library,
move the cursor to the LIBRARY button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The MASTERING LIBRARY popup window will
appear.
3
7
SEL] keys, and the [SEL] keys to select the
channels that you want to send to the ste-
reo bus.
For example, repeatedly pressing [INPUT SEL] key 1
(or the [SEL] key of input channel 1) will make the
screen change as follows.
You can use the mastering library to quickly recall
dedicated settings for the stereo output channel. These
settings include EQ and dynamics processor settings
that are appropriate for application to the final mix.
Library numbers 0–13 are read-only, and library num-
ber 0 is data to initialize the stereo output channel.
NOTE
• The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as
(mute).
8
p. 165), tracks 13–24 are muted and will not play back.
• You can switch track muting on/off by moving the cursor to the
track channel number and pressing the [ENTER] key.
Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]
keys to select the desired library data, then
move the cursor to the RECALL button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The mastering library settings will be recalled. Play
back your song while you try various settings to find
the best one.
8
9
• If you’re using effects via an effect bus, the mixdown will not
include the effect sound unless you add the corresponding
effect return channel to the stereo bus. For details on using
HINT
To exit the MASTERING LIBRARY popup window,
move the cursor to the EXIT button and press the
[ENTER] key.
• All channels will be turned on by default. However in order to
obtain the best S/N ratio, you should turn off any channels
that you are not using.
If necessary, you can press the [STEREO
SEL] key to select the stereo output chan-
nel, and use the Selected Channel section
to make fine adjustments to the EQ and
dynamics processor settings.
Raise the [STEREO] fader to the 0 dB posi-
tion.
4
5
6
While you play back the song, raise the
track channel faders to an appropriate level.
Operations are the same as for an input channel,
except for the fact that the EQ and dynamics processor
of the stereo output channel always operate in stereo,
and that the dynamics processor has no gate.
Adjust the mix parameters of each channel,
such as EQ, dynamics, and pan.
HINT
• You can use the CH VIEW screen View page to view a list of
the mix parameters (EQ, pan, effect send etc.) of a desired
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mixdown procedure
To check the level of the signal that is being
output to the stereo track, press the
[METER] key, then press the [F3] key.
Move the cursor to the REC button, and
press the [ENTER] key to turn the button
on.
10
13
The METER screen Master page will appear.
The top panel [STEREO SEL] key will blink red. This
blinking indicates that the stereo track is in record-
ready mode.
Indicates the output level of
the stereo output channel
Press the RTZ [
Then hold down the REC [●] key and press
the PLAY [ ] key.
The song will begin playing, and the playback will be
recorded on the stereo track.
] key to rewind the song.
14
15
When you reach the end of the song, move
the cursor to the SAFE button in the screen
and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm that you
want to cancel record-ready mode. Move the cursor to
the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
8
HINT
• Instead of using the AW2400’s internal stereo track, you can
also mixdown to an external recorder connected to the [STE-
REO OUT] jacks or [DIGITAL STEREO OUT] connector. In
this case, start playback on the AW2400 after you’ve put your
external recorder in record mode.
Move the cursor to the POST FADER button
and press the [ENTER] key.
The post-fader signal level will be displayed.
11
12
If the level meter reaches the “OVER” position, lower
the [STEREO] fader.
Save the song.
If the song is not saved after it has been recorded as a
stereo track, it cannot be selected for burning to a CD.
16
Press the [RECORD] key to return to the
RECORD screen Mixdown page.
77
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing back the stereo track
Playing back the stereo track
When you’ve finished the mixdown, you can play back the stereo track as follows.
Call the TRACK screen Stereo TR page by
either pressing the Work Navigate section
[TRACK] key as many times as necessary,
or by pressing the [F3] key after pressing
the [TRACK] key.
Press the RTZ [
and press the PLAY [ ] key.
The stereo track will be played back. Use the [STE-
REO] fader to adjust the monitor level.
] key to rewind the song,
1
3
When you are ready to return to normal
recording/playback of the audio tracks,
switch the ST TR MODE ON/OFF button off.
4
ST TR MODE ON/OFF button
8
Switch the STTR MODE ON/OFF button ON.
2
When this button is on, the stereo track output will be
sent to a point directly before the [STEREO] fader,
and can be monitored from the [STEREO OUT] jack,
the [MONITOR OUT] jack, or the [PHONE] jack. At
this time, the record-ready status of all tracks will be
cancelled.
HINT
• If any audio tracks are in record-ready mode, a popup window
will ask you to confirm that you want to defeat the record-
ready status. If you want to play back the stereo track, move
the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
NOTE
• The EQ and dynamics processor of the stereo output channel
are disabled while the stereo track is playing back.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bounce (ping-pong) recording procedure
Bounce (ping-pong) recording procedure
Here’s how to bounce (ping-pong) multiple tracks down to one to four tracks.
G SAFE button
Lower the [STEREO] fader to the –∞ posi-
1
2
When you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, all bounce-source and bounce-destina-
tion assignments will be cancelled. This will also exe-
cute the MUTE CLEAR (F) operation.
tion.
Call the RECORD screen Bounce page by
either pressing the Quick Navigate section
[RECORD] key as many times as necessary,
or by pressing the [F3] key after pressing
the [RECORD] key.
HINT
• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the SAFE button.
In the Bounce page you can select the bounce-source
tracks, and then record them via bus 1 or bus 2 onto
one to four tracks.
In the PLAY TRACK area, select a bounce-
source track, move the cursor to the
symbol for that track, and press the
[ENTER] key.
3
Each time you press the [ENTER] key, the screen will
change as follows.
8
A
B
C
AOff
EBus2 L/R
On
D
BBus1 L/R
FBus2 L
On
On
E
F
G
CBus1 L
On
GBus2 R
On
1 PLAY TRACK
Selects the bounce-source tracks.
B Bus 1, Bus 2
The four horizontal lines indicate the Bus1 L/R and
Bus2 L/R signal route. This lets you see the on/off sta-
tus of the signals that are sent from the bounce-source
tracks, and see the selected bounce-destination
track(s).
To A
DBus1 R
On
C RETURN
Selects the bounce-source effect return channels.
HINT
D RECORD TRACK
Here you can select the bounce-destination track(s).
• If a track channel is selected as a bounce-source, its assign-
ment to the stereo bus will automatically be turned off.
E PITCH FIX button
• The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as
(mute), but you can still record to muted tracks.
Position the cursor at this button and press [ENTER]
to engage the PITCH FIX mode. Use PITCH FIX to
correct the pitch and other properties of a vocal track
p. 165), tracks 13–24 are muted and will not play back.
• To switch track muting on/off, move the cursor to a track chan-
nel number and press the [ENTER] key.
F MUTE CLEAR button
This button clears the mute status of all tracks.
However depending on the bit depth of the song and
on the number of tracks that are enabled for recording,
there may be cases in which some tracks cannot be
unmuted. If so, tracks will be muted consecutively
starting with the last-numbered track.
79
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bounce (ping-pong) recording procedure
If you want to add an effect return channel
as a bounce-source, press the [SEL] key of
that effect return channel.
4
HINT
• You can also select a track by repeatedly pressing the [SEL]
key of a track channel.
In the same way as for PLAY TRACK in step 3, you
can repeatedly press the [SEL] key to select the bus to
which the signal is sent.
• If you move the cursor to the SAFE button and press the
[ENTER] key, all connections will be cancelled.
• The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as
(mute), but you can still record to muted tracks.
NOTE
• If an unpaired track is selected as a recording-destination, the
pan of the corresponding track channels will be set to the cen-
ter. If two paired tracks are selected, the pan of the corre-
sponding odd-numbered/even-numbered track channels will
be spread to left and right respectively.
• If you are using an effect via an effect bus, the bounce opera-
tion will not include the effect sound unless you add the signal
of the corresponding effect return channel to the bounce-des-
tination bus. For details, refer to “Applying Effects via Send
Raise the [STEREO] fader and the faders of
the track channel(s) you selected as the
bounce-destination to the 0 dB position.
6
7
HINT
• To control the effect return channels, make the Layer section
[IN 1-8] key (or [IN 9-16] key) light.
Press the RTZ [
] key to rewind the song.
In the RECORD TRACK area, select a
bounce-destination track, move the cursor
to the
the [ENTER] key.
Then hold down the REC [●] key and press
the PLAY [ ] key.
The song will begin playing back, and will be
recorded on the bounce-destination track(s).
5
8
symbol for that track, and press
You can select up to four bounce-destination tracks.
The odd-numbered tracks can be connected to Bus1 L
or Bus2 L, and the even-numbered tracks can be con-
nected to Bus1 R or Bus2 R. The [SEL] key will blink
red, indicates that the corresponding track is selected
as the bounce-destination.
While you record the song, raise the faders
of the bounce-source track channels and
effect return channels to an appropriate
level. Adjust the pan, EQ, and dynamics of
each channel as necessary.
8
In the same way as for the PLAY TRACK, you can
repeatedly press the [ENTER] key to select the signal
of the desired input bus.
NOTE
• The bounce-destination faders and pans will not affect the
content that is recorded.
For example if you move the cursor to the
symbol
• When Auto Punch-in/out is engaged, you can monitor the
bounce source track channels during playback even when not
recording.
for RECORD TRACK 1 and repeatedly press the
[ENTER] key, the screen will change as follows.
A Connected to BUS1 L
To check the level that is being output from
Bus 1/Bus 2 to the bounce-destination
tracks, press the [METER] key and then the
[F3] key.
9
The METER screen Master page will appear.
Here you can check the output levels for Bus 1 and
Bus 2.
B Connected to BUS2 L
Bus 1 and Bus 2 output levels
C No connection
To A
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bounce (ping-pong) recording procedure
Move the cursor to the POST FADER but-
ton, and press the [ENTER] key.
10
The post-fader signal levels will be displayed.
If the level meter reaches the “OVER” position, press
the Layer section [MASTER] key to make it light (the
MASTER mixing layer is selected), and lower fader 1
(Bus 1) and fader 2 (Bus 2).
NOTE
• All of the current patch settings will be erased if you switch the
RECORD screen page after making signal assignments. (A
popup window will ask you whether you really want to erase
the assignments.) Be careful not to switch the RECORD
screen page until you’ve finished recording.
To stop bounce-recording, press the STOP
[■] key.
11
12
To hear the bounce-recorded results from
the beginning, press the RTZ [
] key to
8
return the counter display to zero, and then
press the PLAY [ ] key.
When playing back the bounce-destination tracks, be
careful not to switch the RECORD screen to a page
other than the Bounce page or to defeat the bounce set-
tings.
If you do so, the connection from the bounce-source
track channels to the stereo bus will automatically be
restored. This will cause the bounce-source and
bounce-destination signals to be duplicated.
HINT
• If desired, you can use the [UNDO/REDO] key to cancel the
track of the bounce-destination and record another take (→
When you’ve finished the bounce opera-
tion, press the Quick Navigation section
[RECORD] key once again, move the cursor
to the SAFE button in the screen, and press
the [ENTER] key.
13
A popup message will ask you for confirmation. Move
the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER]
key to defeat all bounce settings.
81
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Convenient functions for mixdown/bounce
Convenient functions for mixdown/bounce
Here we will explain some functions that you will find convenient when performing mixdown or
bounce operations.
Use the Layer section keys, the [INPUT
SEL] keys, and the [SEL] keys to select the
channels that you want to assign to this
fader group.
3
Fader Group assignments
Fader Grouping is a function that links the fader opera-
tions of multiple channels. For example if you’ve recorded
The assignment to the fader group will alternately be
switched on or off each time you press the [INPUT
SEL] key or [SEL] key.
multiple track channels of drums or chorus, you can
assign these drum channels or chorus channels to the same
fader group so that moving any one of the faders in the
group will adjust all of the levels together.
HINT
• If you want to defeat all assignments for the fader group
you’re currently operating, hold down the Display section
[SHIFT] key and press the [F1] key.
Call the MONITOR screen Fader Grp. page
1
by either pressing the Quick Navigate sec-
tion [MONITOR] key as many times as nec-
essary, or by pressing the [F2] key after
pressing the [MONITOR] key.
• If you want to defeat all assignments in the Fader Grp. page,
hold down the [Display section [SHIFT] key and press the [F2]
key.
8
This page contains the following items.
Repeat steps 2–3 to make assignments for
other fader groups.
4
A
B
C
NOTE
• You can’t assign a single channel to more than one fader
group.
To enable a fader group, move the cursor to
the A–D buttons and press the [ENTER]
key.
5
6
Buttons A–D can be turned on/off independently.
Operate a channel that is assigned to a
fader group.
The faders of all channels assigned to that fader group
will move in tandem.
1 ENABLE field
NOTE
Use these buttons to switch fader groups A–D on/off.
The A–D buttons will be highlighted to indicate fader
groups that are turned on.You will also use this field to
select the fader group that you want to operate.
• When operating channels that are assigned to a fader group,
you must use only one fader. If you attempt to move two or
more faders simultaneously, the motor faders will be stressed,
and possibly damaged.
B INPUT field
C TRACK field
HINT
These areas indicate the fader group to which each
input channel 1–16 and track channel 1–24 is
assigned. The “●” symbol indicates channels that are
assigned, and the “...” symbol indicates channels that
are not assigned.
• If you want to adjust the fader value for only a specific channel
that is assigned to a fader group, operate its fader while hold-
ing down the [SEL] key or [INPUT SEL] key for that channel.
• The fader group assignments are available even when Trigger
Track mode is engaged.
• The fader group assignments in the Fader Grp. page can be
copied to the Mute Grp. page by holding down the Display
section [SHIFT] key and pressing the [F4] key.
In the ENABLE field, move the cursor to the
button A–D of the fader group that you want
to operate.
2
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Convenient functions for mixdown/bounce
Use the Layer section keys, the [INPUT
SEL] keys, and the [SEL] keys to select the
channels that you want to assign to this
mute group.
The assignment to the mute group will alternately be
switched on or off each time you press the [INPUT
SEL] key or [SEL] key.
3
4
Mute Group assignments
Mute Grouping is a function that links the [ON] key oper-
ations of multiple channels. This lets you mute multiple
instruments by pressing a single [ON] key, or press a sin-
gle key to alternate the on/off status of multiple track
channels.
HINT
Call the MONITOR screen Mute Grp. page
1
• If you want to defeat all assignments for the mute group you’re
currently operating, hold down the Display section [SHIFT]
key and press the [F1] key.
by either pressing the Quick Navigate sec-
tion [MONITOR] key as many times as nec-
essary, or by pressing the [F3] key after
pressing the [MONITOR] key.
• If you want to defeat all assignments in the Mute Grp. page,
hold down the [Display section [SHIFT] key and press the [F2]
key.
This page contains the following items.
A
B
C
Repeat steps 2–3 to make assignments for
other mute groups.
NOTE
8
• You can’t assign a single channel to more than one mute
group.
To enable a mute group, move the cursor to
the E–H buttons and press the [ENTER] key.
Buttons E–H can be turned on/off independently.
5
6
Operate a channel that is assigned to a
mute group.
The [ON] keys of all channels assigned to that mute
group will operate simultaneously.
1 ENABLE field
HINT
Use these buttons to switch mute groups E–H on/off,
or to select the mute group that you want to operate.
The E–H buttons will be highlighted to indicate mute
groups that are turned on.
• If you make mute group assignments while the [ON] keys of
the assigned channels are in a mixed state (some on, some
off), the on/off setting of each channel will alternate.
• The mute group assignments in the Mute Grp. page can be
copied to the Fader Grp. page by holding down the Display
section [SHIFT] key and pressing the [F4] key.
B INPUT field
C TRACK field
These areas indicate the mute group to which each
input channel 1–16 and track channel 1–24 is
assigned. The “●” symbol indicates channels that are
assigned, and the “...” symbol indicates channels that
are not assigned.
In the ENABLE field, move the cursor to the
button E–H of the mute group that you want
to operate.
2
83
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Convenient functions for mixdown/bounce
Use the SOLO MODE field to choose the
operating mode for the Solo function.
You can turn on one or the other of the following but-
tons.
3
Using the Solo function
Solo is a function that lets you monitor only a specific
channel. The AW2400 provides a versatile Solo function
that lets you make Solo settings that are best for your situ-
ation.
• RECORDING SOLO button
If this button is on, the soloed signal(s) will be sent
via the dedicated Solo bus and output from the
[MONITOR OUT] jacks and [PHONES] jack. This
will not affect the signals that are being output from
the stereo bus or Bus 1/Bus 2. With this setting,
even channels that are not assigned to the stereo
bus or Bus B/bus 2, or channels whose [ON] key is
off, can be monitored from the [MONITOR OUT]
jacks or [PHONES] jack.
Call the MONITOR screen Solo page by
1
either pressing the Quick Navigate section
[MONITOR] key as many times as neces-
sary, or by pressing the [F4] key after
pressing the [MONITOR] key.
This page contains the following items.
This setting is convenient when you want to monitor
only specific channels without affecting the
recorded content while recording tracks or during
mixdown.
A
B
C
• MIXDOWN SOLO button
If this button is on, only the soloed signal(s) will be
sent via the stereo bus and output from the [STE-
REO OUT] jacks, [MONITOR OUT] jacks, and
[PHONES] jack; other channels will be muted. With
this setting, you won’t be able to monitor channels
that are not assigned to the stereo bus, or channels
whose [ON] key is turned off.
8
This setting is convenient when you want everything
except for the specified channel(s) to be muted.
If you selected RECORDING SOLO mode in
step 3, use the SOLO MODE field to select
the point from which the soloed signal will
be sent.
Use the following two buttons of the SOLO MODE
field to select the send point.
4
1 SEL MODE field
This selects how you will select the signal(s) to be
monitored when the Solo function is on.
B SOLO MODE field
This selects the mode in which the Solo function will
operate.
• PRE FADER button
If this button is on, the pre-fader signal will be sent
to the Solo bus. In this case, the fader and pan set-
tings of each channel will be ignored, and the signal
that is output from the [MONITOR OUT] jacks and
the [PHONES] jack will be monaural.
C SOLO SAFE CHANNEL field
Here you can select channels that will be excluded
from the Solo function if MIXDOWN SOLO mode is
selected in the SOLO MODE field.
• AFTER PAN button
If this button is on, the post-fader post-pan signal
will be sent to the Solo bus. In this case, the fader
and pan setting of each channel will affect the signal
that is sent from the [MONITOR OUT] jacks and the
[PHONES] jack.
In the SEL MODE field, choose the way in
which the signal(s) to be monitored will be
selected when the Solo function is on.
You can turn on one or the other of the following but-
tons.
2
HINT
• LAST SOLO button
If this button is on, you will be monitoring only the
single channel whose [ON] key was last pressed.
• If RECORDING SOLO mode is selected, you can turn the
SOLO MODE field’s TRIM knob to adjust the signal level sent
to the Solo bus.
• MIX SOLO button
If this button is on, you will be monitoring all chan-
nels whose [ON] key was pressed after enabling the
Solo function.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Convenient functions for mixdown/bounce
If you selected MIXDOWN SOLO mode in
step 3, you can (if desired) select channels
that will be excluded from Solo operations.
5
Use the buttons in the SOLO SAFE CHANNEL field
to specify the channels that will be excluded from Solo
operations. Move the cursor to a desired button and
press the [ENTER] key (you may select more than
one). These buttons correspond to the following chan-
nels.
• INPUT .........................Input channels 1–16
• EFFECT RETURN......Effect return channels 1–4
• TRACK........................Track channels 1–24
The channels you select here will not be muted even if
you turn on the Solo function. If you select effect
return channels 1–4 here, you’ll be able to monitor
with effects even when the Solo function is on.
To activate the Solo function, press the
Mixer section [SOLO] key.
The [SOLO] key and the [ON] key of the selectable
channels will blink.
6
7
8
Use the Layer section keys and [ON] keys
to select the channels that you want to
solo.
The operations that are valid while Solo is activated
will depend on the settings in the MONITOR screen
Solo page.
To defeat the Solo function, press the
[SOLO] key once again.
8
85
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
Transport/Locate Operation
This chapter covers transport key operation, use of the locate/marker functions, and a range of
other playback features.
The Transport Section Keys
The functions of the Transport section keys change according to the current state of the recorder
(playback, stopped, etc.), as listed in the chart below.
Recorder Status
Key
Playing
—
Stopped
Play
Rewinding
Fast Forwarding
Play
Recording
Stop record and play
(Punch Out)
PLAY[ ] key
Play
STOP[■] key
Stop
—
Stop
Stop
Stop
9
Rewind speed
(8x ↔ 16x)
REW[
FF[
] key
] key
Rewind
Rewind
Rewind
—
Fast forward speed
Fast forward
Fast forward
Fast forward
—
—
(8x ↔ 16x)
Return to zero and play Return to zero and play
or stop (depending on or stop (depending on
Play/Stop status prior to Play/Stop status prior to
rewind) fast forward)
RTZ[ ] key
Return to zero and play Return to zero and stop
Press simultaneously
Press simultaneously
with PLAY [ ] key to
with PLAY [ ] key to
begin recording (Punch
begin recording
REC[●] key
—
—
—
In)
The REC [●] key has no effect if no tracks are set to the record standby mode.
Move To a Specified Location
The AW2400 allows you to move directly to any location in a song by numerically specifying the
desired locate point.
With the recorder stopped, press the
Locate/Number section [NUM.LOCK] key so
that its indicator lights.
Enter the locate point in measures/beats.
You can use either of the following two methods to
enter the locate point.
1
2
A popup window will appear into which you can enter
the destination locate point.
● Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]
keys
Move the cursor to the measure or beat field, and use
the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to set as
required.
87
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Use the [LOCATE] keys
When the locate point has been specified
press the [ENTER] key.
As long as the cursor is not on the CANCEL button
pressing the [ENTER] will execute the move to the
specified location. If you move the cursor to the CAN-
CEL button and press the [ENTER] key no change in
location will occur and the popup window will close.
3
The locate point can also be numerically entered
directly using the [LOCATE] keys 1–9. Move the cur-
sor to the measure or beat field and use the [LOCATE]
1–9 keys to enter the locate point numerically.
The “.” key can be used to quickly move the cursor
between the beat and measure fields.
Using the locator
“Locate points” can be specified within a song in order to execute functions such as auto punch-
in/out and A-B repeat.You can use this function to “locate” (move the current location of the
song) to one of these points just by pressing a single key. On the AW2400, you can use the fol-
lowing locate points.
● In/Out points
These locate points are used to specify the region for auto
of the recording you last performed will be automatically
set as the In point and Out point. However, you may
change these points as desired.
9
Start point = 00:00:00:00.00
Counter
display format
00:00:00:00.00
00:00:00:00.00
00:00:00:00.00
00:00:05:00.00
00:00:05:00.00
00:00:05:00.00
00:00:10:00.00
00:00:10:00.00
00:00:10:00.00
ABS
SECOND
TIME CODE
● A/B points
S
These locate points are used to specify the region for the
can be set to any point in a song, either via the panel keys
or on-screen editing.
= 00:00:05:00.00
Start point
Counter
display format
00:00:00:00.00
00:00:05:00.00
00:00:10:00.00
00:00:05:00.00
00:00:05:00.00
ABS
SECOND
● Quick Locator points
–00:00:05:00.00 00:00:00:00.00
Locate/Number section [LOCATE] keys 1–9 can be
assigned to specific locations within a song, and then you
can move directly to the assigned locations simply by
pressing the corresponding [LOCATE] keys.
23:59:55:00.00
00:00:00:00.00
TIME CODE
S
● Start/end points
HINT
These locate points normally correspond to the beginning
and end of the song. When you create a new song, the
Start point will initially be set to absolute time
00:00:00.000. When you record, the end of the song will
automatically be set as the End point. If you record past
the previously-set End point, the End point will automati-
cally be adjusted to the new song end point.
• When you create an audio CD, the Start and End points can be
used to specify the region of the stereo track that will be written to
• When the AW2400 transmits MTC to an external device, the Start
point will be the origin (“zero point”) of the time code that is gener-
ated. The Start point will also serve as the origin (measure 1 beat
1) for the measures displayed in the counter.
If you select SECOND or TIME CODE as the counter dis-
play format, the Start point will be the origin (“zero
point”) of the time and time code that are displayed. This
means that if you change the Start point, the display will
change accordingly, depending on the counter display for-
mat.
● Relative zero point
This locate point stores the relative zero position.You will
move to this location when you press the RTZ [
in the transport section. Initially the relative zero point
will be the same as absolute time 00:00:00.000, but you
can change this if desired via the panel controls or on-
screen editing.
] key
If you select RELATIVE as the counter display format,
the current location will be displayed with the Relative
Zero point as 0.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the locator
The procedure for registering the current location in one
of the locate points, and then moving to that locate point is
as follows.
To move to a registered locate point, press
the corresponding key while the song is
stopped or playing.
3
The song will move to that location.
Move the song to the point that you want to
register as a locate point.
You can set locate points while the song is playing or
stopped.
1
Registered locate points are displayed in the TRACK
screen Track View page as shown below.
Hold down the [SET] key and press the key
for the desired locate point.
2
Locator icons
The characters/numbers shown on the display corre-
spond to the locate types are as follows:
Displayed Character/
Locate Type
Number
I
In point
O
Out point
9
The locate points correspond to the following keys.
A
A point
B
L1–L9
S
B point
E
A
B
Quick Locator points
Start point
End point
E
R
Relative Zero point
HINT
• Locate point settings are stored on the hard disk as part of
the song.
points other than the Start point and End point may also be
C
D
F
1 [IN] key ......................... In point
B [OUT] key ..................... Out point
C [A] key .......................... A point
D [B] key .......................... B point
E [LOCATE] key 1–9........ Quick Locator points
F RTZ [
] key ............... Relative Zero point
NOTE
• The In point and Out point will be updated automatically when
you perform a record operation.
• If you want to change the Start point or End point, use the
EDIT screen Mark Adj. page. These points cannot be set
directly via the panel controls.
89
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using markers
Using markers
“Markers” are symbols that you assign to desired locations in a song so that those points can be
quickly located later.You can assign up to 99 markers in each song. Use the MARK SEARCH
[
]/[
] keys to find and move to markers.
Move to the position in the song at which
you want to assign a marker.
You can assign markers while the song is playing or
stopped.
Press the [ ] key to locate to the previous
marker, or press the [ ] key to locate to
the next marker.
1
3
The song will move to that location.
Assigned markers will appear as numbers 1–99 in the
TRACK screen Track View page.
Press the [MARK] key.
2
Marker icon
9
HINT
The display will briefly indicate “MARK POINT
SET.” This indicates that a marker has been set. A new
marker will be added each time you press the [MARK]
key. Markers are automatically numbered 1–99 start-
ing at the beginning of the song. If you register a new
marker between two existing markers, markers follow-
ing the insert will be automatically renumbered.
• When creating an audio CD, you can use markers to divide
the stereo track into individual tracks that will be written to the
Register a new marker
HINT
• Marker settings are stored on the hard disk as part of the
song.
desired.
• If you press the [MARK] key at a location in which a marker
has already been registered, the display will indicate “CAN-
NOT SET MARK,” and a new marker will not be created.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the position of a locate point or marker
Adjusting the position of a locate point or marker
Here’s how you can adjust the position of a previously-registered locate point or marker. These
operations are performed via the EDIT screen Mark Adj. page.
To call this page press the Work Navigate section [EDIT]
key as many times as necessary, or press the [F3] key after
pressing the [EDIT] key.
Adjusting the position of
a locate point
Call the EDIT screen Mark Adj. page by
either pressing the Work Navigate section
[EDIT] key as many times as necessary, or
1
by pressing the [F3] key after pressing the
[EDIT] key.
A
The Locator Position field is used to edit
the various locate points (not including the
Quick Locator points).
2
B
E
C
D
The positions for each locator are displayed in the
Locator Position field.
9
1 Locator Position field
Shows the various locate points (Quick Locator points not
included).
B Quick Locator/Marker field
Shows the Quick Locator or Marker points.
A
B
C
C LOCATOR button
D MARKER button
These buttons determine whether the Quick Locator or
1 Locate points
Shows the type of locate point and its abbreviation.
Marker points appear in the Quick Locator/Marker field.
B Position
E DELETE button (Marker display only)
Shows the position of each locate point in time code or
the current counter display format.
Deletes the currently selected marker.
C Measure/beat
Shows the position of each locate point as measures/
beats. This value is calculated based on the tempo and
The format in which the position is displayed will
depend on the locate point. The following table shows
the display format for each locate point.
Locate point
Position
Time code
Measure/Beat
--
REL.ZERO
START
END
IN
Time code
Measure/beat
Measure/beat
Measure/beat
Measure/beat
Measure/beat
Measure/beat
Time code
Counter display format
Counter display format
Counter display format
Counter display format
OUT
A
B
HINT
• If a locate point has not been registered “--” will appear in the
numerical field.
91
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the position of a locate point or marker
Move the cursor to the locate point value
3
that you want to adjust, and use the [DATA/
JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to change the
value.
Adjusting the position of a
marker
A “Change START Position?” popup window will ask
you for confirmation when you attempt to change the
Start point value. Move the cursor to the OK button
and press the [ENTER] key, and then change the
value.
Call the EDIT screen Mark Adj. page by
1
either pressing the Work Navigate section
[EDIT] key as many times as necessary, or
by pressing the [F3] key after pressing the
[EDIT] key.
NOTE
If you want to adjust the position of a
marker, move the cursor to the MARKER
button in the Quick Locator/Marker field.
When the MARKER button is on, the Quick Locator/
Marker field will list the markers that have been regis-
tered.
2
• Changing the Start point will cause locations already
recorded in a track to move relative to the measure lines
defined by the tempo map. Please keep this in mind if you are
using measure display for the metronome.
To adjust the location of a quick locator
4
point, move the cursor to the LOCATOR
button in the Quick Locator/Marker filed
and press the [ENTER] key.
A
When the LOCATOR button is on, the Quick Locator/
Marker field will list the quick locate points that have
been registered.
9
B
C
D
A
1 List
Lists the markers that have been registered. The line
that is enclosed by a dotted frame is selected for edit-
ing.
B
C
D
B Markers
These are the marker numbers 1–99.
1 List
C Position
Shows the position of each marker using the counter
display format.
Lists the quick locator points that have been regis-
tered. The line that is enclosed by a dotted frame is
selected for editing.
D Measure/beat
Shows the position of each marker in measure/beat
units.
B Quick locator points
These are the quick locator point numbers 1–9.
C Position
Shows the position of each quick locator point using
the counter display format.
Move the cursor to the marker numbers,
and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]
keys to scroll through the list so that the
dotted frame encloses the marker number
that you want to edit.
3
4
D Measure/beat
Shows the position of each quick locator point in mea-
sure/beat units.
Move the cursor to the value that you want
to edit, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or
[INC]/[DEC] keys to edit the value.
Move the cursor to the quick locator point
numbers, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or
[INC]/[DEC] keys to scroll through the list
so that the dotted frame encloses the quick
locator point number that you want to edit.
5
6
Move the cursor to the value that you want
to edit, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or
[INC]/[DEC] keys to edit the value.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Erasing a locate point or marker
If necessary, you can erase a registered locate point (except for the Relative Zero, Start, and End
points) or marker.
NOTE
• A locate point that has been erased cannot be recovered.
■ Erasing a locate point
■ Erasing a marker
To erase a locate point, hold down the Locate section
[CANCEL] key and press the corresponding locate key
([IN]/[OUT] key, [A]/[B] key or [LOCATE] key 1–9). The
selected locate point will be erased, and the “LOCATE
POINT ERASED” message will be displayed briefly.
To erase a marker, locate to the marker that you want to
erase, and then press the [MARK] key while holding
down the Locate section [CANCEL] key. The correspond-
ing marker will be erased, and the “MARK POINT
ERASED” message of will be displayed briefly.
Markers can also be erased by using the DELETE button
in the EDIT screen Mark Adj. page.
9
Repeat playback of a specific region (the A-B Repeat function)
The AW2400 provides an “A-B Repeat” function that repeatedly plays the region between the A
point and B point. This is useful when you want to repeatedly play back a certain region of the
song while adjusting the mix.
Register the A point and B point at the loca-
tions at which you want to start and end
repeat playback.
1
HINT
• Playback will stop automatically when the A/B region has
been repeated 99 times.
For details on how to set the A point and B point, refer
• If you press the [REPEAT] key while the song is playing,
repeat playback between the A and B points will begin auto-
matically, regardless of the current position.
HINT
• If you set the B point earlier than the A point, the B → A region
will play repeatedly.
To stop playback, press the STOP [■] key.
4
5
Playback will stop, but the A-B Repeat function will
remain active. When the A-B Repeat function is on,
pressing the PLAY [ ] key will immediately resume
repeat playback regardless of the current position.
Press the [REPEAT] key while the transport
is stopped.
The [REPEAT] key will light and the A-B Repeat
function will be engaged. The song will automatically
locate to the A point.
2
3
Press the [REPEAT] key to cancel repeat
playback.
The [REPEAT] key indicator will go out and the A-B
Repeat function will be cancelled. If you cancel the A-
B Repeat function during repeat playback, normal
playback will continue from that point.
NOTE
• The A and B points must be at least one second apart. If they
are closer than one second a “REPEAT POINTS TOO
CLOSE” message will appear when you press the [REPEAT]
key and repeat playback will not be possible.
HINT
• If you perform a record operation while the A-B Repeat func-
tion is engaged, the A-B Repeat function will be temporarily
disabled.
Press the PLAY [ ] key to begin repeat
playback.
Playback will begin from the A point. When the B
point is reached playback will automatically begin
again from the A point.
93
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding a location while monitoring the sound (the Nudge function)
Finding a location while monitoring the sound (the Nudge function)
“Nudge” is a function that repeatedly plays a short region before or after the current location. By
using the Nudge function, you can find a precise location while listening to playback. This is use-
ful when you need to specify a location precisely, such as when specifying auto punch-in/out
points, or when editing the contents of a track.
Locate to the vicinity of the point you want
to find.
To turn off the Nudge function, press the
[JOG ON] key or the transport section
STOP [■] key.
The [JOG ON] key indicator will go out, and the
Nudge function will be cancelled.
1
2
4
Press the [JOG ON] key while the transport
is stopped.
The [JOG ON] key will light, and the Nudge function
will be engaged. A fixed region (referred to as the
“nudge time”) starting at the current location will play
repeatedly.
To move the current location forward, turn
the [DATA/JOG] dial to the right.To move
the current location backward, turn the
[DATA/JOG] dial to the left.
If time display is selected as the counter display for-
mat, you can move the current location forward or
backward in millisecond units. If time code display is
selected, you can move in sub-frame units.
3
9
Current
location
Song
track
Nudge time
HINT
• You can use locate points or markers to change the location,
or register locate points or markers while using the Nudge
function.
• The nudge direction and time can be adjusted as required.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding a location while viewing the waveform
Finding a location while viewing the waveform
The AW2400 lets you find a location while viewing the waveform of the sound recorded on a
track.
Locate to the vicinity of the point you want
to find.
1 TRACK
1
2
Indicates the currently selected track number. You can
also move the cursor to this field and use the [DATA/
JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to switch tracks.
Call the TRACK screen Track View page by
either pressing the Work Navigate section
[TRACK] key as many times as necessary,
or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing
the [TRACK] key.
B Counter
Displays the location of the vertical line (pointer) indi-
cating the current location in the WAVE DISPLAY
popup window. You can move the cursor to this field
and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to
move the current location forward or backward.
TRACK field
WAVE button
C SCALE
By moving the cursor to this area and using the
[DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys you can
expand or shrink the waveform display along the time
axis. The value of this field indicates the length of time
displayed in the WAVE DISPLAY popup window.
9
If you select 1SEC, the distance from the left to right
edge of the screen will correspond to one second.
Selecting SAMPLE will produce the highest magnifi-
cation, and each horizontal pixel will correspond to
one sample.
D AMP
By moving the cursor to this area and using the
[DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys you can
expand or shrink the waveform display along the
amplitude axis. The value of this field indicates the
level range of the waveform displayed in the WAVE
DISPLAY popup window. If you select 0 dB, the top
and bottom edges of the screen will correspond to the
maximum level.
Move the cursor to the TRACK field, and
use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys
to select the number of the track corre-
sponding to waveform you want to view.
3
4
Move the cursor to the WAVE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The WAVE DISPLAY popup window will appear.
This popup window displays the waveform of the
audio data recorded in the track selected in step 3 (1–
24 or ST-L/R).
E LISTEN button
If you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key the waveform in the display area of the
WAVE DISPLAY popup window will be played once.
During playback the vertical line (pointer) that indi-
cates the current location will move, and the counter
value will change accordingly.
Normal transport operation is disabled while using the
LISTEN button.
B
A
C
F EXIT button
Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]
key to exit the WAVE DISPLAY popup window and
return to the previous Track View page.
D
E
F
HINT
• The WAVE DISPLAY popup window cannot be displayed
while the recorder is running.
• You can use the Mixer section [SEL] or [STEREO SEL] keys
to switch the track being viewed even after displaying the
WAVE DISPLAY popup window.
95
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding a location while viewing the waveform
Move the cursor to the SCALE/AMP fields
5
and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]
keys to adjust the vertical and horizontal
scale of the waveform display as required.
To specify a location within the popup win-
dow, move the cursor to the counter and
turn the [DATA/JOG] dial.
6
Turning the dial to the right will move the pointer for-
ward, and turning the dial to the left will move it back-
ward. If necessary, you can use the LISTEN button to
play the waveform region shown in the WAVE DIS-
PLAY popup window, and check the location by lis-
tening.
HINT
• The locators and markers within a song can also be used to
• The current counter location can be saved to a locater or
When you have finished specifying the
location, move the cursor to the EXIT but-
ton and press the [ENTER] key.
7
9
You will return to the previous Track View page, and
the location that you specified in the popup window
will remain the current location. Register the location
as a locate point or marker as required.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10
Meters
This section describes how the level meters can be shown on the display
screen, and how they can be used to the check levels of various signals
through the system.
Level Meter Types
Four display pages accessible via the METER screen are used to access the various level meter
displays. Press the [METER] key to call the METER screen, and then either press the [METER]
key as many times as necessary until the desired page appears, or press the function key ([F1]–
[F4]) corresponding to the desired page.
The contents of the various METER displays are as fol-
lows:
● Track Page
Displays the input and fader levels for track channels 1–
24.
10
■ METER screen Input/RTN page ([F1] key)
■ METER screen Track page ([F2] key)
● Input/RTN Page
Displays the input and fader levels for input channels 1–
16 as well as effect return channels 1–4.
C
A
B
D
E
F
G
The following items are displayed:
1 Input channel 1–16 input levels
B Effect return channel 1–4 input levels
C Track channel 1–24 input levels
The level meters display the input levels for the corre-
sponding channels, while the numbers below the level
meters show the fader levels in dB.
D
E
F
G
D PRE EQ button
Pre-EQ levels (levels prior to the EQ stage) are displayed
when this button is on.
E PRE FADER button
Pre-fader levels (levels prior to the faders) are displayed
when this button is on.
F POST FADER button
Post-fader levels (levels after the faders) are displayed
when this button is on.
97
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Level Meter Types
G PEAK HOLD button
HINT
This button switches the level meter peak hold function
on/off. When this button is on, an indicator will show the
signal peaks.
• These PRE EQ/PRE FADER/POST FADER settings are indepen-
dent from those on other pages.
• The PEAK HOLD button setting affects all METER pages.
HINT
• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT]
key has the same effect as the PEAK HOLD button.
• The Input/RTN page and Track page PRE EQ/PRE FADER/POST
FADER button settings are linked, while the Master page settings
are independent.
• The PEAK HOLD button setting affects all METER pages.
• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT]
key has the same effect as the PEAK HOLD button.
■ METER screen Output page ([F4] key)
Displays the output and fader levels for a digital I/O card
installed in the card slot, the [OMNI OUT] 1–4 outputs,
and the [DIGITAL STEREO OUT] outputs.
■ METER screen Master page ([F3] key)
A
Displays the output and fader levels for BUS1 L/R, BUS2
L/R, AUX bus 1–4, effect bus 1–4, and the stereo bus.
A
B
C
10
D
B
C
D
The following items are displayed:
E
F
G
H
1 Output levels for the card installed in the
slot
B [OMNI OUT] 1–4 output levels
C [DIGITAL STEREO OUT] output levels
The level meters display the output levels for the corre-
sponding channels, while the numbers below the level
meters show the fader levels in dB.
The following items are displayed:
1 BUS1 L/R, BUS2 L/R output levels
B AUX bus 1–4 output levels
C Effect bus 1–4 output levels
D Stereo bus output level
The level meters display the output levels for the corre-
sponding channels, while the numbers below the level
meters show the fader levels in dB.
D PEAK HOLD button
This button switches the level meter peak hold function
on/off.
HINT
E PRE EQ button
Pre-EQ levels (levels prior to the EQ stage) are displayed
• The PEAK HOLD button setting affects all METER pages.
when this button is on.
• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT]
key has the same effect as the PEAK HOLD button.
F PRE FADER button
Pre-fader levels (levels prior to the faders) are displayed
when this button is on.
G POST FADER button
Post-fader levels (levels after the faders) are displayed
when this button is on.
H PEAK HOLD button
This button switches the level meter peak hold function
on/off.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11
Patching and signal flow
This chapter explains patching and channel signal flow.
Input signal patching
To record a mic or instrument connected to the AW2400, you can use either of two recording
methods; Direct Recording or Mixed Recording. The patching method will depend on the record-
ing method you use.
■ Direct Recording
Patching for Direct Recording
With this method only one input channel is assigned to
This section explains how to patch the signals of input
each recorder track. Although direct recording requires the
channels to tracks when you’re using the Direct Recording
same number of tracks as the number of input channels
method.
you use, it has the advantage that you will be free to adjust
the volume, pan (stereo position), and EQ of each track
Call the RECORD screen Direct page by
1
after it has been recorded.
either pressing the Quick Navigate section
[RECORD] key as many times as necessary,
or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing
the [RECORD] key.
This page contains the following items.
Input channel 1
Input channel 2
Input channel 3
Input channel 4
Audio track 1
Audio track 2
Audio track 3
Audio track 4
11
E
F
G
Input channel 15
Input channel 16
Audio track 23
Audio track 24
A
B
■ Mixed Recording
C
D
With this method, you can send multiple input channels to
Bus 1 or Bus 2, and assign the mixed signal to one through
four tracks. Mixed recording requires fewer tracks, but
you will need to decide on the final volume, pan, and tone
of each instrument at the time of recording (you will not
be able to adjust these parameters independently after
recording.)
H
I
1 Input Select
Here you can select the inputs (input signals) that will
be patched to input channels 1–8 or 9–16. You can
choose from the following inputs.
Input channel 1
Input channel 2
Input channel 3
Input channel 4
Audio track 1
Audio track 2
Audio track 3
Audio track 4
• AD 1–8 ........... Analog input signals from [MIC/LINE
INPUT] jacks 1–8
Bus 1
L/R
• SLOT 1–8....... Input signals from inputs 1–8 of an
I/O card installed in the slot
• SLOT 9–16..... Input signals from inputs 9–16 of an
Bus 2
L/R
Input channel 15
Input channel 16
I/O card installed in the slot
• ----................... Not selected
Audio track 23
Audio track 24
99
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input signal patching
B Input channels
I SAFE button
This area indicates the connection state of input chan-
nels 1–16. When you move the cursor to the sym-
bol and press the [ENTER] key, the symbol will be
highlighted and the corresponding input channel will
be selected as a recording source.
When you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, all input channel and track channel
assignments will be cancelled. This will also execute
the MUTE CLEAR (H) operation.
HINT
C Tracks
• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the SAFE button.
This area indicates the connection state of tracks 1–24.
When you move the cursor to the
symbol and press
the [ENTER] key, the symbol will be highlighted and
the corresponding track will be selected as a recording
destination.You can switch a track’s mute status on/off
by moving the cursor to the number that indicates the
track number and pressing the [ENTER] key.
Move the cursor to the Input Select field,
and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/
[DEC] keys to select the input that will be
patched to each input channel.
For example if you want mics/instruments connected
to [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8 to be patched to
input channels 1–8, you would make settings as shown
below.
2
3
D REMAIN
This indicates the remaining recordable time. The
remaining time will depend on the number of tracks
that are enabled for recording.
E DIGITAL IN
This assigns the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector to
an input channel. Here you can select from the follow-
ing items.
• 1.2–15.16........Assign the signal of the [DIGITAL
STEREO IN] connector to a pair of
adjacent odd-numbered/even-num-
bered input channels (1/2–15/16).
Move the cursor to the
symbol for the
11
• ---- ...................The [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connec-
record-source input channel, and press the
[ENTER] key.
tor will not be used.
The DIGITAL IN setting takes priority over other inputs
selected in the Input Select area. When you assign the
DIGITAL IN to an input channel, the corresponding
input number in the Input Select area will change to a
symbol. This indicates that a signal has already been
assigned to the corresponding input channel.
The symbol will be highlighted, and the corresponding
input channel will be selected as a recording source.
The corresponding [INPUT SEL] key (or the [SEL]
key of the corresponding input channel) will light red,
and the remaining [INPUT SEL] keys (or the [SEL]
keys of the remaining input channels) will go dark.
If the selected input channel is not yet assigned to a
track, all [SEL] keys for the track channels will blink
red, indicating that they can be selected as the record-
ing destination.
NOTE
• If you enable cascade connection, the digital audio signal
received from the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector will be
sent directly to the stereo bus. While this state exists, the DIG-
ITAL IN field will indicate “ST BUS,” and cannot be changed
until you disable cascade connection.
If the selected input channel has already been assigned
to a track, only the [SEL] key of the corresponding
track channel will blink red.
F DIRECT OUT
For example if you selected input channel 1 as the
recording source, the top panel keys will be as follows.
Here you can select the send position from which the
signal of an input channel or track channel is sent to
direct output.
• PRE FADER................The pre-fader signal
• POST FADER .............The post-fader signal
G MULTI CONNECTION ON/OFF button
If this button is on, you can connect a set of eight input
channels and eight tracks in a single operation.
lit
flash
H MUTE CLEAR button
This button clears the mute status of all tracks.
However depending on the bit depth of the song and
on the number of tracks that are enabled for recording,
there may be cases in which some tracks cannot be
unmuted. If so, tracks will be muted consecutively
starting with the last-numbered track.
Tr ack channels
(Layer section [TRACK 1-12] key lit)
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input signal patching
The indication in the screen will be as
follows.
NOTE
• Input channels and tracks are always connected one-to-one.
HINT
• The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as
(mute), but you can still record to muted tracks.
• You can also select the record-source input
channel by pressing an [INPUT SEL] key
(or the [SEL] key of an input channel).
p. 165), tracks 13–24 are muted and will not play back.
• The [INPUT SEL] keys always control input
channels 1–8, regardless of the settings of
the Layer section
If you want to record multiple instruments
or mics simultaneously, assign other input
channels to other tracks in the same way.
5
Move the cursor to the
symbol for the
4
recording-destination track, and press the
[ENTER] key.
HINT
• To cancel a connection you established, simply repeat the
same operation you did when establishing the connection.
The selected input channel and track will be internally
connected.
• To change a recording-destination (track) that you’ve already
connected, move the cursor to the recording-source and
press the [ENTER] key; then move the cursor to a different
track and press the [ENTER] key.
At this time, the connected [INPUT SEL] key (or the
input channel’s [SEL] key) and the track channel’s
[SEL] key will change to blinking red.
• To change a recording-source (input channel) that you’ve
already connected, move the cursor to the recording-destina-
tion and press the [ENTER] key; then move the cursor to a
different input channel and press the [ENTER] key.
The blinking track channel [SEL] key indicates that
the corresponding track is in record-ready mode.
For example if input channel 1 and track 1 are con-
nected, the top panel keys will be as follows.
• To cancel all connections, move the cursor to the SAFE but-
ton and press the [ENTER] key.
• If a recording-source input channel and the recording-destina-
tion track are both paired, two adjacent odd-numbered/even-
numbered channels will be assigned to two adjacent odd-
numbered/even-numbered tracks.
11
If you want to connect a set of eight input
channels and eight tracks in a single opera-
tion, turn the MULTI CONNECTION ON/OFF
button on.
6
flash
For example if the MULTI CONNECTION ON/OFF
button is on, and you select any one of input channels
1–8 as a recording-source and any one of tracks 1–8 as
a recording-destination, the following popup window
will appear.
Tr ack channels
(Layer section [TRACK 1-12] key lit)
The indication in the screen will be as
follows.
HINT
• You can also select the record-destina-
tion track by pressing a track channel’s
[SEL] key.
Move the cursor to the YES button and press the
[ENTER] key to execute the connection; input chan-
nels 1–8 will be connected to tracks 1–8. Move the
cursor to the NO button and press the [ENTER] key to
connect the selected input channel and track.
• The same internal connection will be
established even if you perform steps 3
and 4 in the reverse order.
• The fader will automatically be set to 0
dB for input channels that are internally
connected to a track.
• If an input channel is selected as a recording-source, its
assignment to the stereo bus will automatically be turned off.
If you want to monitor the signal you’re recording, you’ll need
to raise the fader of the recording-destination track channel.
• EQ and dynamics settings will be set to a flat state for track
channels corresponding to tracks selected as recording-desti-
nations.
101
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input signal patching
Similarly if you specify input channels 9–16 as the
F Bus 1, Bus 2
recording-source, input channels 9–16 will be con-
nected to tracks 1–8. If you specify any one of tracks
9–16 (or 17–24) as the recording destination, the spec-
ified input channels will be connected to tracks 9–16
(or 17–24).
These four lines indicate the bus 1 L/R and bus 2 L/R
signal routes. This shows the recording-source input
channels whose signals are being sent to bus 1/bus 2,
and the recording-destination tracks to which the bus
1/bus 2 signal are being sent.
G MUTE CLEAR button
This button clears the mute status of all tracks.
However depending on the bit depth of the song and
on the number of tracks that are enabled for recording,
there may be cases in which some tracks cannot be
unmuted. If so, tracks will be muted consecutively
starting with the last-numbered track.
Patching for Mixed Recording
This section explains patching when you’re using the
Mixed Recording method.
Call the RECORD screen Mixed page by
H SAFE button
1
either pressing the Quick Navigate section
[RECORD] key as many times as necessary,
or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing
the [RECORD] key.
When you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, all input channel and track channel
assignments will be cancelled. This will also execute
the MUTE CLEAR (G) operation.
The RECORD screen Mixed page lets you send the
signals of the input channels via two stereo buses (bus
1 and bus 2) to one to four tracks you specify.
HINT
• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the SAFE button.
This page contains the following items.
Move the cursor to the Input Select area,
and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/
[DEC] keys to select an input that you want
to patch to an input channel.
E
F
2
3
11
Move the cursor to the
symbol for the
A
B
desired recording-source input channel,
and press the [ENTER] key.
The symbol will be highlighted, and the corresponding
input channel will be connected to bus 1.
Press the [ENTER] key repeatedly at the
same cursor location as in step 3 to select
the send-destination for the signal of that
input channel.
C
D
4
Each time you press the [ENTER] key, the screen will
change as follows.
G
H
1 Input Select
AOff
EBus 2 L/R
Here you can select the inputs that will be patched to
input channels 1–8 or 9–16. You can choose from the
same inputs as in the RECORD screen Direct page.
On
B Input channels
This area indicates the connection status of input chan-
nels 1–16.
BBus 1 L/R
On
FBus 2 L
On
C Tracks
This area indicates the connection status of tracks 1–
24.
CBus 1 L
On
GBus 2 R
On
You can switch track muting on/off by moving the cur-
sor to the track number and pressing the [ENTER] key.
D REMAIN
This indicates the remaining recordable time.
To A
E DIGITAL IN
DBus 1 R
On
Here you can assign the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] con-
nector to an input channel. The available choices and
operations are the same as in the RECORD screen
Direct page.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input signal patching
A Connected to Bus 1 L
B Connected to Bus 2 L
C No Connection
HINT
• You can also perform steps 3–4 by repeatedly pressing the
[INPUT SEL] key (or the input channel’s [SEL] key).
• The [INPUT SEL] keys always control input channels 1–8,
regardless of the settings of the Layer section.
• If an input channel is selected as a recording-source, its
assignment to the stereo bus will automatically be turned off,
and it will be connected via bus 1 or bus 2 so that it can be
monitored by the track channel.
In the same way, select other input chan-
nels as recording-sources.
5
6
Move the cursor to the
desired recording-destination track, and
press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm
whether you want to initialize the channel parameters.
symbol for the
To A
11
HINT
Move the cursor to the OK button and press
the [ENTER] key.
7
• You can also perform this operation by repeatedly pressing
the track channel’s [SEL] key.
You can select up to four tracks as recording-destina-
tions. Bus 1L/bus 2L can be connected to odd-num-
bered tracks, and bus 1R/bus 2R can be connected to
even-numbered tracks. The [SEL] key of the con-
nected track channels will blink red, indicating that
they are in record-ready mode.
• EQ and dynamics setting will be set to a flat state for track
channels corresponding to tracks that are selected as a
record destination.
• When a single track is selected as the record destination the
pan of the corresponding track channel will automatically be
set to center. When paired tracks are selected as the record
destination the pan settings of the odd- and even-numbered
tracks will automatically be set to left and right, respectively.
You can select the bus signal to be input by repeatedly
pressing the [ENTER] key in the same way as for the
input channels.
• To cancel all connections, move the cursor to the SAFE but-
ton and press the [ENTER] key.
For example if you move the cursor to the
for track 1 and repeatedly press the [ENTER] key, the
screen will change as follows.
symbol
NOTE
• The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as
(mute), but you can still record to muted tracks.
p. 165), tracks 13–24 are muted and will not play back.
Proceed with recording.
8
103
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Output signal patching
Output signal patching
The PATCH screen Output page lets you select the signals that are assigned to the AW2400’s
[OMNI OUT] jacks, [DIGITAL STEREO OUT] connector, and the output channels of an I/O card
installed in the I/O slot.
To call this page press the Work Navigate section
[PATCH] key.
This page contains the following items.
C D.ST OUT ASSIGN field
Move the cursor to this field and use the [DATA/JOG] dial
or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the signal that will be
assigned to the [DIGITAL STEREO OUT] connector.
Press the [ENTER] key to finalize your selection.
You have the following choices.
C
Display
---
Type of signal
No assignment
ST L&R
Stereo output channel L&R
A
B
AUX 1&2, 3&4
EFF 1&2, 3&4
TR 1&2–23&24
AUX send master 1&2, 3&4
Effect send master 1&2, 3&4
Track channel direct outputs 1&2–23&24
HINT
• The signal of the stereo bus is always assigned to the [STEREO
OUT] jacks.
11
1 OMNI OUT ASSIGN field
Move the cursor to fields 1–4 and use the [DATA/JOG]
dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the signal that will
be assigned to each [OMNI OUT] jack. Press the
[ENTER] key to finalize your selection.
You have the following choices.
Display
---
Type of signal
No assignment
ST L/ST R
AUX 1–4
EFF 1–4
TR 1–24
Stereo output channel L/R
AUX send master 1–4
Effect send master 1–4
Track channel direct outputs 1–24
B OPTION I/O SLOT OUT ASSIGN field
Move the cursor to fields 1–16 and use the [DATA/JOG]
dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the signal that will
be assigned to each output channel of a digital I/O card
installed in the I/O slot. Press the [ENTER] key to finalize
your selection.
You have the following choices.
Display
---
Type of signal
No assignment
ST L/ST R
AUX 1–4
EFF 1–4
TR 1–24
INS*1
Stereo output channel L/R
AUX send master 1–4
Effect send master 1–4
Track channel direct outputs 1–24
Insert send
*1. “INS” will appear only if SLOT1–SLOT16 is selected for INSERT
EFF in the CH VIEW screen View page. If you attempt to change
“INS” to a different item in the PATCH screen Output page, a popup
message (“Used As Effect Insert!”) will appear, and you won’t be
able to execute the change. In order to change this, you will first
have to defeat the selection for the corresponding output channel in
the CH VIEW screen View page.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12
Channel Operation
This chapter describes procedures for displaying and operating the parame-
ters for individual channels as well as for saving and recalling data library
settings for individual settings.
Displaying the mix parameters for individual channels
If you access the CH VIEW screen View page, you can not only see the signal flow for the
selected channel, but also adjust the mix parameters within the displayed signal path.
To call this page press the Selected Channel section
[VIEW] key as many times as necessary, or press the [F1]
key after pressing the [VIEW] key.
■ Track channels 1–24
E
G
H I
Immediately after pressing the [VIEW] key the signal
flow of the currently selected channel will appear on the
display. You can select any other channel to be displayed
by using the Layer section keys to select a mixing layer,
and the [INPUT SEL], [SEL], and [STEREO SEL] keys to
select individual channels.
A
B
F
C
The items included in the individual channel displays are
as follows.
D
12
■ Input channels 1–16
E
G
H I
J
L
K
A
B
F
C
■ Effect return channels 1–4
D
H I
A
F
C
L
K
D
L
K
105
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying the mix parameters for individual channels
■ Stereo output channel
■ Effect send master channels 1–4
E
G
H
E
A
A
F
D
F
K
K
K
K
1 INITIALIZE button
Initializes all parameters for the currently displayed chan-
■ Bus master channels 1, 2
nel.
E
G
HINT
• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT]
key has the same effect as the INITIALIZE button.
A
B Channel Pair Indicator
Indicates whether the displayed channel is part of a pair or
not. You can also move the cursor to this indicator and
press the [ENTER] key to turn pairing on or off.
12
D
F
C PHASE button, GATE button
• PHASE button..... Switches the phase (polarity) of the
input signal. Move the cursor to this
button and press the [ENTER] key
to switch between normal (N : NOR-
MAL) and reverse (R : REVERSE)
polarity.
• GATE button (input channels only)
................. Move the cursor to this button and
press the [ENTER] key to turn the
gate for that channel on or off. Refer
details.
■ AUX send master channels 1–4
E
G
D ATT button, EQ button
• ATT button........... Move the cursor to this knob and
use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/
[DEC] keys to adjust the attenuation
as required (range: -96–+12dB).
A
B
This capability can be used to atten-
uate the pre-EQ signal level to pre-
vent clipping in the EQ stage.
D
F
• EQ button............ Move the cursor to this button and
press the [ENTER] key to turn the
EQ for that channel on or off. Refer
details.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying the mix parameters for individual channels
E COMP
G INSERT EFF
Move the cursor to the symbol below COMP and press
the [ENTER] key to turn the compressor for that channel
on or off or select the compressor insert point.
Press the [ENTER] key repeatedly to sequentially select
the following insert points.
This parameter is used to insert an internal effect to a
specified point in the channel, or to specify an insert point
for insertion of an external effect.
If you move the cursor to the field to the right of INSERT
EFF and press the [ENTER] key, a popup window will
appear allowing selection of an internal effect or I/O chan-
nel on an optional I/O card.
A Before the channel EQ
B Before the channel fader
C After the channel fader
HINT
• When SLOT1–16 is selected the specified channel insert point is
assigned to the corresponding channel on an optional I/O card
installed in the AW2400. This assignment is shown in the PATCH
screen Output page OPTION I/O SLOT OUT ASSIGN field.
• You can move the cursor to the insert point and press the [ENTER]
key to reverse the order of the COMP and an INSERT EFF.
H PAN/BAL knob
Move the cursor to this knob and use the [DATA/JOG]
dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to pan the channel signal to the
stereo bus or bus 1 and bus 2 (for stereo input channels
this functions as a balance control). The effect return
channel L and R signals can be adjusted individually.
D Compressor off
I BUS1, BUS2, ST
Move the cursor to any of these points and press the
[ENTER] key to turn assignment of the channel signal to
the corresponding bus – bus 1, bus 2, or stereo bus – on or
off.
12
To A
J REC TR
Displays the input channel to track assignment, as speci-
fied in the RECORD screen Direct page.
HINT
K Level meter
• You can move the cursor to the insert point and press the [ENTER]
key to reverse the order of the COMP and an INSERT EFF.
The level meters display input channel, track channel and
effect return channel input levels, as well as stereo output
channel, bus master channel, AUX send master channel,
effect send master channel output levels.
NOTE
• Since no EQ is provided on the effect send master channels, the
compressor can be inserted either pre-fader or post-fader.
L AUX, EFFECT
Move the cursor to the appropriate knob and use the
[DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to adjust send lev-
els to AUX bus 1–4 or effect bus 1–4 over a range of from
–∞ to +10dB. You can also move the cursor to one of
these knobs and press the [ENTER] key to turn the corre-
sponding send off. Further, if you move the cursor to the
signal path above the knob and press the [ENTER] key
you can switch between pre-fader (PRE) and post-fader
(POST) send.
F ON/OFF, LVL knob
• ON/OFF ..........Move the cursor to this position and
press the [ENTER] key to turn the chan-
nel on or off. This function is linked to
the channel [ON] keys.
• LVL knob........Move the cursor to this knob and use
the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys
to adjust the channel level.This function
is linked to the channel faders.
These functions are linked to the AUX and EFFECT
NOTE
• Signals cannot be sent to the effect buses from an effect return
channel.
107
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Channel Library Operation
Channel Library Operation
The mix parameters for individual channels can be saved to and recalled from dedicated libraries
as required.This is particularly handy when you want to use the settings made for one channel in
one or more other channels as well. Library numbers 0–1 contain read-only data for channel ini-
tialization, while numbers 2–64 can be used save and recall your own data. The following param-
eters can be saved to the channel library.
• Channel on/off
• Fader position
• Channel attenuator
• AUX bus 1–4 pre-fader/post-fader setting
• AUX bus 1–4 send level
• EQ on/off
• EQ parameter settings
• Dynamics processor on/off
• Dynamics processor parameter settings
• Effect bus 1–4 pre-fader/post-fader setting
• Effect bus 1–4 send level
NOTE
• Pan, effect parameter, and the INSERT EFF settings displayed in the CH VIEW
screen View page are not saved to the channel library.
1 Selected channel
Displays the selected channel.
Calling the Channel Library
screen
B EQ/COMP
Displays the EQ and compressor settings for the selected
channel.
Channel library save and recall operations are carried out
via the CH VIEW screen Library page.
C Input/Output meter
To call this page press the Selected Channel section
[VIEW] key as many times as necessary, or press the [F2]
key after pressing the [VIEW] key.
Displays the input levels for the selected channel and adja-
cent odd-even channel pairs. When the stereo output chan-
nel is selected, however, this meter displays the L/R
output channel levels.
12
This page contains the following items.
C
D Buttons
These buttons execute the RENAME, RECALL, STORE,
and CLEAR functions.
E List
A list of all the settings stored in the library. The row high-
lighted by a dotted frame is the setting currently selected
A
B
for operation. An
tings.
icon indicates read-only library set-
F SOURCE CHANNEL
Displays the source channel for the settings shown in the
library list. “GENERAL” appears for preset data.
NOTE
• When data cannot be recalled to the selected channel the “Recall
Channel Data Conflict!” error message will appear.
F
E
D
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Channel Library Operation
Changing Channel Library Names
Storing Channel Library settings
Here’s how you can change the names of the settings in
the libraries.
The procedure for storing library settings is as follows.
NOTE
• New settings cannot be stored to read-only library settings (those
Call the CH VIEW screen Library page by
1
marked with an
icon).
either pressing the [VIEW] key as many
times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2]
key after pressing the [VIEW] key.
• If you select and store to a library number that contains previously-
stored data, the previous data will be overwritten.
Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]
keys to select the library setting to be
edited.
The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently
selected for editing.
Call the CH VIEW screen Library page by
either pressing the [VIEW] key as many
times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2]
key after pressing the [VIEW] key.
2
1
2
Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]
keys to select the library number to which
the settings are to be stored.
Move the cursor to the RENAME button and
press the [ENTER] key.
3
The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently
selected for storage.
The NAME EDIT popup window will appear.
Move the cursor to the STORE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
3
The NAME EDIT popup window will appear.
12
HINT
• Pressing the [F4] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RENAME button.
Enter a name for the selected library set-
4
HINT
ting, move the cursor to the OK button, and
details on name entry).
• Pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the STORE button.
This confirms and enters the new name.
As required, enter a name for the selected
library setting, move the cursor to the OK
button, and press the [ENTER] key (refer to
page 32 for details on name entry).
4
The library setting will be stored.
109
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Channel Library Operation
Recalling Channel Library settings
Erasing Channel Library settings
The procedure for recalling stored library settings is as
follows.
The procedure for erasing unwanted library settings is as
follows.
NOTE
Call the CH VIEW screen Library page by
1
• Read-only library settings (those marked with an
be erased.
icon) cannot
either pressing the [VIEW] key as many
times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2]
key after pressing the [VIEW] key.
Call the CH VIEW screen Library page by
either pressing the [VIEW] key as many
times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2]
key after pressing the [VIEW] key.
1
2
Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]
keys to select the library setting to be
recalled.
The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently
selected for recall.
2
Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]
keys to select the library setting to be
erased.
The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently
selected to be erased.
Move the cursor to the RECALL button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window confirming the recall operation will
appear.
3
Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and
press the [ENTER] key.
3
A popup window confirming the clear operation will
appear.
HINT
12
• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RECALL button.
HINT
To actually recall the selected setting move
the cursor to the OK button and press the
ENTER] key.
4
• Pressing the [F3] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the CLEAR button.
HINT
To actually erase the selected setting move
the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
4
• Parameters that do not exist in the target channel will be
ignored.
• INSERT EFF settings as shown in the CH VIEW screen View
page are not included in the channel libraries and will not
change.
• When the target channel is a stereo channel or a channel
pair, all parameters except phase and pan will be set to the
same values (phase and pan will not change).
• When data cannot be recalled to the selected channel the
“Recall Channel Data Conflict!” error message will appear.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13
AUX
This chapter describes operation of the AW2400 AUX buses.
About the AUX buses
The AW2400 has 4 auxiliary buses that can be assigned to the [OMNI OUT] jacks, the [DIGITAL
STEREO OUT] connectors, or the outputs of an optional I/O card installed in the I/O slot. This
can be useful for sending signals to external signal processing gear, or for monitoring specific
signals within a mix.
Signals from the following channels can be sent to the AUX buses.
• Input channels
• Track channels
• Effect return channels
HINT
AUX Send Level Adjustment
AUX send levels can be adjusted either by using the graphic knobs in the AUX screen or by using
the Selected Channel section controls.
13
To adjust levels for the AUX1 bus press
Selected Channel knob 1.
The AUX1 screen will appear.
2
■ Adjusting AUX send levels via
the AUX screen
AUX send levels can be adjusted using the graphic knobs
in the AUX screen.
To adjust levels for the AUX2–AUX4 buses press the
corresponding Selected Channel knob (2–4) in the
same way. If the [AUX] key is lit pressing one of the
Selected Channel knobs will take you directly to the
corresponding AUX screen.
Press the Selected Channel section [AUX]
key so that its indicator lights.
1
The AUX screen will appear.
Press the Display section [F1] (Input/RTN
page) or [F2] (Track page) key.
The page displays and the items they contain are as
follows.
3
NOTE
• If the AUTO DISPLAY function is set to OFF, press one of the
Selected Channel knobs (1–4) after pressing the [AUX] key
so that its indicator lights. For details about the AUTO DIS-
111
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUX Send Level Adjustment
● AUX screen Input/RTN page
Move the cursor to a knob and use the
[DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to
adjust the send level.
4
The range is from –∞ – +10 dB.
HINT
• Knobs can also be selected via the Layer section keys,
[INPUT SEL] keys, and [SEL] keys.
A
B
• Move the cursor to a knob and press the [ENTER] key to turn
that AUX send on or off.
To set the point from which the AUX send
signal will be derived in each channel,
move the cursor to the appropriate PRE/
POST button and press the [ENTER] key to
select either PRE (pre-fader: the signal is
sent from a point before the channel fader)
or POST (post-fader: the signal is sent from
a point after the channel fader).
5
6
1 INPUT field
Adjusts the AUX send levels for input channels 1–16.
The PRE/POST buttons below each knob can be used
to select pre-fader or post-fader send.
B RETURN field
To adjust send levels to a different AUX
bus, press the corresponding Selected
Channel knob to switch to the appropriate
screen, then adjust the send levels as
described in steps 4 and 5, above.
Adjusts the AUX send levels for effect return channels
1–4. The PRE/POST buttons below each knob can be
used to select pre-fader or post-fader send.
● AUX screen Track page
■ Adjusting AUX send levels via
the Selected Channel section
Selected Channel section knobs 1–4 can be used to
directly adjust AUX send levels.
13
A
Use the Layer section keys, [INPUT SEL]
keys, and [SEL] keys to select the channel
for which AUX send level is to be adjusted.
1
Press the Selected Channel section [AUX]
key so that its indicator lights.
2
The AUX screen will appear.
Rotate Selected Channel
knobs 1–4.
This will adjust the AUX send
level for the channel selected in
step 1.
3
1 TRACK field
Adjusts the AUX send levels for track channels 1–24.
The PRE/POST buttons below each knob can be used
to select pre-fader or post-fader send.
HINT
HINT
• While the [AUX] key is lit you can press one of the Selected
Channel knobs repeatedly to switch between the display
pages for the corresponding AUX screen. For example, press-
ing Selected Channel knob 1 repeatedly will switch back and
forth between the AUX1 screen Input/RTN page and the Track
page.
• If AUTO DISPLAY function is disabled the AUX screen will not
appear automatically when step 2, above, is performed, but
the AUX send levels can still be adjusted by rotating the
Selected Channel knobs.
• If AUTO DISPLAY function is disabled a popup window will
appear when a value is adjusted for easy visual confirmation,
regardless of the display that is showing at the time.
• By pressing the [F1] or [F2] key while holding the Display sec-
tion [SHIFT] key you can simultaneously set all channels in
the display to PRE ([F1]) or POST ([F2]).
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using external effects with the AUX buses
Using external effects with the AUX buses
External effect processing gear connected via the [OMNI OUT] jacks can be used in place of the
internal effects. The example given in this section describes the procedure for applying an exter-
nal mono-in/stereo-out reverb processor to a track channel via the AUX1 bus.
Lower the [STEREO] fader to the –∞ posi-
Press the Selected Channel section [AUX]
key so that its indicator lights, then press
Selected Channel knob 1.
1
2
5
6
7
tion.
Call the PATCH screen Output page by
pressing the Work Navigate section
[PATCH] key.
This page is used to assign the AW2400’s various
internal signals to the output connectors.
The AUX1 screen will appear.
Press the Display section [F2] key to dis-
play the Track page.
The send levels from the track channels to the AUX1
bus can be adjusted via this page.
Move the cursor to the OMNI OUT ASSIGN 1
field and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the
[INC]/[DEC] keys to select “AUX1”.
This assigns the AUX1 bus signal to [OMNI OUT]
jack 1.
3
Set the knobs for each channel to an appro-
priate level, and set the PRE/POST buttons
as required.
At this point the track channel signals are being sent to
the [OMNI OUT] jack 1 via the AUX1 bus, and are
being fed to the external effect processor’s input.
Use the Quick Navigate section [RECORD]
key to call the RECORD screen Mixdown
page, and set the parameters as shown in
the illustration.
8
HINT
• The AUX bus signals can also be assigned to an I/O card
installed in the I/O slot, or the [DIGITAL STEREO OUT] con-
nector.
13
Referring to the diagram, connect the exter-
nal signal processor to the AW2400.
4
Effect Processor
[MIC/LINE
INPUT] jacks
3/4
[OMNI OUT] jack 1
With these settings track channels 1–24 and the effect
signals returned to input channels 3/4 are mixed and
sent to the stereo bus.
[MONITOR
OUT] jacks
AW2400
113
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using external effects with the AUX buses
● Signal Flow When Using an External Effect Processor
Effect Processor
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
Track 5
[OMNI OUT]
jack 1
[MIC/LINE
INPUT]
jacks 3/4
AUX bus 1
Stereo bus
x Number of
play tracks
x Number of
play tracks
Mixer section
13
Press the Selected Channel section [PAN/
EQ] key so that its indicator lights, then
press Selected Channel knob 1 as many
times as necessary to display the PAN/EQ
screen Input/RTN page.
Raise the [STEREO] fader to the 0-dB level
and, while playing back the song, adjust the
input level of the external effect processor
as well as the input levels of input channels
3 and 4 using the [GAIN] knobs.
9
11
If necessary return to step 7 and readjust the send lev-
els from the track channels to the AUX1 bus as
required. You can also adjust the AUX1 bus master
level by selecting the appropriate layer and fader via
the Layer section [MASTER] key and channel [SEL]
key, or by using the CH VIEW screen View page LVL
knob.
Set the input channel 3 and 4 pan controls
fully left and right, respectively.
This ensures full stereo effect from the stereo effect
processor. You could also pair inputs 3 and 4 for easy
stereo control.
10
NOTE
Turn the RECORD screen Mixdown page
REC button on and begin the actual mix-
down process.
12
• With this setup be sure to set all AUX send levels for input
channels 3 and 4 to –∞ to prevent feedback.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14
Effects
In this section we’ll cover operation of the AW2400’s internal effects.
About the Internal Effects
The AW2400 has four independent multi-effect processors built in (Effect 1–4). The internal
effects can be used in the following two ways.
■ Effect Sends and Returns
■ Channel Insertion
This method uses the mixer section’s effect “sends” and
“returns”. To apply an effect to a channel the channel’s
effect send controls are used to send the signal to the input
of Effect 1–4 via the corresponding effect bus. The output
from the effect processor used is returned to the stereo bus
or bus 1/bus 2 via the corresponding effect return channel
(Effect Return 1–4), and is mixed with the direct sound.
In this case an effect is inserted into a channel’s signal
path in order to apply the effect only to that channel. The
effect sound is mixed with the direct channel signal within
the channel itself and then sent to the stereo bus or a
recorder track. Please note that an effect which has been
inserted into one channel cannot be simultaneously
inserted into another channel or used via the effect sends
and returns.
The following diagram shows the input and output signal
flow for effects 1–4.
Effects can be inserted on the following channels.
• Input channels
• Track channels
Mixer section
• Stereo output channel
• Bus master channels
Effect 1
Effect 2
Effect 3
Effect 4
Effect return channel 1
Effect return channel 2
Effect return channel 3
Effect return channel 4
• AUX send master channels
14
Effects can be inserted at any of the following three points
in a channel (the diagram shows an input channel).
1 Before the EQ stage (pre-EQ).
B Between the EQ stage and fader (post-EQ
pre-fader).
Effect bus 1
Effect bus 2
Effect bus 3
Effect bus 4
C After the fader (post-fader).
Input channels 1–16
Track channels 1–24
A
B
C
PHASE
GATE
EQ
ATT
ON
LVL
PAN
HINT
• In addition to the effects provided by the four effect processors, the
AW2400 provides a “Pitch Fix” function for correcting the pitch of
page 124 for details.
115
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recalling Effect Library settings
Recalling Effect Library settings
The first step in using an effect is to recall a preset from the effect library that uses the required
effect.
HINT
• The effect type for a recalled effect library preset cannot be changed. For this reason even
when you want to program an effect from scratch it is necessary to begin by recalling an
effect library preset that includes the effect type you want to use.
Press the Selected Channel section
[EFFECT] key so that its indicator lights.
The EFFECT screen will appear.
Move the cursor to the List, and use the
[DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to
select the library setting to be recalled.
The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently
selected for recall.
1
2
4
5
Press Selected Channel knob 1–4, corre-
sponding to the effect processor to which
you want to load the effect.
While the EFFECT screen is showing Selected Chan-
nel knobs correspond to effect processors 1–4. So, for
example, the EFFECT1 screen will be selected if you
press Selected Channel knob 1.
Move the cursor to the RECALL button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window confirming the recall operation will
appear.
HINT
EFFECT screen will not appear automatically when step 1,
above, is performed. In this case press one of the Selected
Channel knobs (1–4) will cause the corresponding EFFECT
screen to appear.
HINT
Press the Display section [F4] key to call
the FX Lib. Page.
3
• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RECALL button.
You can select the effect library preset to be loaded
into the effect processor selected in step 2 via this
page.
14
To actually recall the selected setting move
the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
6
List
RECALL button
The library setting will be recalled.
HINT
• Library numbers 1–43 contain pre-programmed read-only
effect presets.
the effect library RENAME, STORE, and CLEAR functions.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applying Effects via Send and Return
Applying Effects via Send and Return
The procedure for applying effects 1–4 via the effect sends and returns is described below.
NOTE
• An effect that has been inserted into a channel cannot be simultaneously used with the effect
sends and returns.
• All effects can be used via the effect sends and returns in new song with the initial default set-
tings. If an effect has been inserted in a specific channel it can be removed and freed for use
with the sends and returns as described in “Inserting an Effect Into a Channel” on page 119.
an effect library preset that is based on the
effect you want to use.
● EFFECT screen FX Track page
1
A
Make sure that the Selected Channel sec-
tion [EFFECT] key is engaged and its indi-
cator is lit.
2
3
Make sure that the EFFECT screen selected
in step 1 is showing.
Selected Channel knobs 1–4 correspond to EFFECT
screens 1–4. Press the appropriate knob to call the
desired screen.
To adjust the send level to an effect bus
start by pressing the Display section [F1]
key to call the FX Input page, or the [F2] key
to call the FX Track page.
4
1 TRACK field
The FX Input page allows adjustment of the input
channel send levels, while the FX Track page allows
adjustment of the track channel send levels. The items
included in the FX Input and FX Track pages are as
follows.
Allows adjustment of the effect send levels for track
channels 1–24. You can also select the point from
which the send signal is derived via the PRE/POST
button below each knob.
14
HINT
● EFFECT screen FX Input page
• When the [EFFECT] key is lit you can repeatedly press a
Selected Channel knob to sequentially select the related
effect pages.
A
• By pressing the [F1] or [F2] key while holding the Display sec-
tion [SHIFT] key you can set all channels within the display to
PRE ([F1]) or POST ([F2]) with one operation.
Move the cursor to an effect send knob and
use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys
to set the effect send level.
5
HINT
• By moving the cursor to an effect send knob and pressing the
[ENTER] key the effect send for that channel can be turned
off or on.
• Effect send levels can also be adjusted while the [EFFECT]
key is engaged by pressing the [INPUT SEL] or [SEL] key for
the target channel and using Selected Channel knobs 1–4 to
adjust the send level to the corresponding effect processor.
1 INPUT field
Allows adjustment of the effect send levels for input
channels 1–16. You can also select the point from
which the send signal is derived via the PRE/POST
button below each knob.
117
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applying Effects via Send and Return
Move the cursor to the PRE/POST button
To adjust the effect return levels press the
Layer section [IN 1-8] or [IN 9-16] key, and
use faders 9–12 to adjust the correspond-
ing return levels.
6
10
and press the [ENTER] key to switch the
location from which the signal will be sent
from each channel to the Effect buses.
Select PRE for pre-fader or POST for post-fader send.
When mixing layer IN 1-8 or IN 9-16 is selected fad-
ers 9–12 control the return levels for effects 1–4,
respectively. You can view and edit the various param-
eters for each return channel by pressing [SEL] key 9–
12 and then calling the CH VIEW screen View page.
To adjust the effect mix balance (the bal-
ance between the effect and direct signals),
press the [F3] key.
7
The EFFECT screen FX Edit page will appear.
HINT
on page 105 for details.
Use MIX BALANCE field knob to adjust the
balance between the direct and effect sig-
nals.
8
When applying an effect via the effect sends and
returns the effect mix level is usually set to 100%
(effect sound only).
HINT
• The effect parameters can be edited as required via the FX
The effect send master levels can be
adjusted via faders 9–12 after pressing the
Layer section [MASTER] key.
9
When the MASTER mixing layer is selected faders 9–
12 control the master send levels for effects 1–4,
respectively. You can view and edit the various param-
eters for each master send channel by pressing [SEL]
key 9–12 and then calling the CH VIEW screen View
page.
14
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inserting an Effect Into a Channel
Inserting an Effect Into a Channel
Effects can be directly inserted into the signal path of specified channels as follows.
an effect library preset that is based on the
effect you want to use.
Move the cursor to the field to the right of
INSERT EFF on the display and press the
[ENTER] key.
A popup window allowing selection of the effect to be
inserted as well as an I/O card channel to and from
which the signal will be sent/received will appear.
1
2
4
Call the CH VIEW screen View page by
either pressing the Selected Channel sec-
tion [VIEW] key as many times as neces-
sary, or by pressing the [F1] key after
pressing the [VIEW] key.
The signal flow and mix parameters for each channel
are displayed in this page.
Use the Layer section keys, [INPUT SEL]
keys, [SEL] keys, or [STEREO SEL] key to
select the channel into which the effect is to
be inserted.
The signal flow for the selected channel will be dis-
played.
3
The popup window includes the following items.
• NONE.............. No effect inserted.
• EFF1–4............ Effect 1–4 inserted.
NOTE
• The same effect number can not be selected for multiple
channels.
To insert an effect that is to be used on just one instru-
ment connected to the AW2400, for example, insert
the required effect into the appropriate input channel.
• Inserted internal effects cannot be used with the effect
sends and returns.
The example diagram shows input channel 1 selected
for effect insertion.
• SLOT1–16....... Select one of these options to
insert an external effect unit via an
I/O card. If SLOT1 is selected, for
example, Output channel 1 of the I/
O card is used to send the signal to
the external effect processor, and
input channel 1 of the same card is
used to return the output from the
external effect processor to the
channel.
INSERT EFF
14
HINT
• When SLOT1–16 is selected for a stereo channel (stereo out-
put or bus master), an odd-even channel pair (“SLOT 1-2” for
example) will be assigned to the stereo channels and
inserted.
When an item other than NONE is selected, an abbre-
viation of the insert destination will appear to the right
of the colon (“ : ”).
NOTE
• Effects cannot be inserted into the effect send master or
effect return channels.
The meanings of the abbreviations are as follows.
Abbreviations
Descriptions
SEND
Effect send/return operation (not inserted in
(EFF1–4 only) any channel).
IN1–IN16
TR1–TR24
STEREO
BUS1–2
Inserted in input channel 1–16.
Inserted in track channel 1–24.
Inserted in stereo output channel.
Inserted in bus master channel 1, 2.
Inserted in AUX send master channel 1–4.
AUX1–4
119
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inserting an Effect Into a Channel
Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]
keys to select the desired effect and/or I/O
card channel, then press the [ENTER] key.
When EFF1–4 is selected the corresponding effect
will be inserted in the signal path.
5
■ Internal effect inserted pre-EQ
(input channel)
To select the insert point move the cursor
6
to the symbol below INSERT EFF on the
display and press the [ENTER] key.
Press [ENTER] repeatedly to sequentially select the
pre-EQ → post-EQ pre-fader → post-fader insert
points.
When an effect and compressor are both inserted at the
same point you can move the cursor directly to the
insert point and press the [ENTER] key to swap the
positions of the effect and compressor.
Insert points
The signal flow is as follows.
● INSERT EFF = EFF 1
Effect 1
Call the EFFECT screen FX Edit page or FX
7
Lib. page to adjust the internal effect mix
balance (the balance between the effect and
direct signals).
PHASE
GATE
EQ
ATT
ON
LVL
Use the MIX BALANCE field knob to bal-
ance the effect and direct sound as
required.
8
■ External effect inserted pre-EQ
A setting of 0% produces only the direct sound while a
setting of 100% produces only the effect sound.
(input channel)
When SLOT1–16 is selected an external effect processor
can be inserted into the channel via the selected I/O card
channel. In this case the signal flow is as follows.
HINT
14
EFFECT screen FX Edit page.
● INSERT EFF = SLOT1
External effect
processor
Output channel = 1
Input channel = 1
I/O card
PHASE
GATE
EQ
ATT
ON
LVL
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing Effects
Editing Effects
The AW2400 internal effect parameters can be edited to create precisely the effect your music
requires.
C MIX BALANCE field
an effect library preset that is based on the
effect type you want to use.
1
• BYPASS button............Switches effect bypass on/
off.
• MIX BALANCE knob....Sets the balance between
the effect and direct sig-
Make sure that the Selected Channel sec-
tion [EFFECT] key is engaged and its indi-
cator is lit.
nals. 0% produces direct
sound only, while 100%
produces effect sound only.
2
3
D USED AS
Make sure that the EFFECT screen selected
in step 1 is showing.
Selected Channel knobs 1–4 correspond to EFFECT
screens 1–4. Press the appropriate knob to call the
desired screen.
Indicates how this effect is being used. “EFF1”–
“EFF4” indicate that the effect is internally connected
to the mixer section via send/return. If the effect is
inserted into a specific channel the name of the chan-
nel into which the effect is inserted will be shown
(e.g., “INPUT 1”).
Press the Display section [F3] key to
access and edit the effect parameters.
The EFFECT screen FX Edit page will appear.
This page contains the following items.
4
E Level Meter
Displays the effect input or output level. Select input
(IN) or output (OUT) via the button above the meters.
F Parameter page
In this area you can edit the various effect parameters.
The content and range of the parameters will depend
on the currently selected effect type.
A
B C
D
Move the cursor to the effect parameter that
you want to edit, and use the [DATA/JOG]
dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to edit the value.
Depending on the effect type, this area may be used to
show multiple parameter pages. In this case repeatedly
press the CURSOR [ ] key to access the parameter
page that contains the parameter you want to edit.
5
6
E
F
14
To switch effect BYPASS on/off, move the
cursor to the BYPASS button and press the
[ENTER] key.
HINT
1 NAME
Indicates the name of the currently selected effect.
B TYPE
Indicates the type of the currently selected effect.
NOTE
• You cannot change the effect type via this page. If you want to
use a different type you will need to recall a library setting that
uses the desired effect type.
121
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effect Library Operations
Effect Library Operations
The AW2400 provides an effect library for storage and recall of effect settings. Effect library oper-
ation is described in this section.
C RECALL button
Call the Effect Library Screen
Recalls the library data that is selected in the list.
Effect library save and recall operations are carried out via
the EFFECT screen FX Lib. page.
D STORE button
Stores the current effect settings into the location
Press the Selected Channel section
1
selected in the list.
[EFFECT] key so that its indicator lights.
The EFFECT screen will appear.
E CLEAR button
Deletes the library data that is selected in the list.
Press one of the Selected Channel section
knobs 1–4.
The corresponding EFFECT screen will appear.
2
F List
This area lists the effect data stored in the library.
Library numbers 001–043 are read-only, and original
settings can be saved to numbers 044–128. The line
enclosed by the dotted frame indicates the data that is
HINT
• The Effect Library is common to all four internal effect proces-
sors, so save and recall operations can be carried out from
any EFFECT screen.
selected for operation. An
only library setup.
icon indicates a read-
Press the [F4] key to access the FX Lib.
page.
3
Changing Effect Library Names
All effect library operations are carried out via the FX
Lib. page. The items in this page are as follows.
Here’s how you can change the names of the settings in
the Effect library.
A
Call the FX Lib. page.
for details.
1
14
Move the cursor to the list, and use the
[DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to
select the library setting to be edited.
2
The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently
selected for editing.
B
C
D
E
Move the cursor to the RENAME button and
press the [ENTER] key.
3
The NAME EDIT popup window will appear.
HINT
F
• Pressing the [F4] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RENAME button.
1 Current effect information
This is the same as the EFFECT screen FX Edit page
Enter a name for the selected library set-
4
ting, move the cursor to the OK button, and
details on name entry).
B RENAME button
Accesses the NAME EDIT popup window, where you
can edit the name of the library selected in the list.
This confirms and enters the new name.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effect Library Operations
Storing Effect Library settings
Erasing Effect Library settings
Save the current effect setting from any one of the effect
processors (1–4) to the effect library.
The procedure for erasing unwanted library settings is as
follows.
NOTE
NOTE
• New settings cannot be stored to read-only library numbers (those
• Read-only library settings (those marked with an
be erased.
icon) cannot
marked with an
icon).
• If store to a library number that contains previously-stored data,
the previous data will be overwritten.
Call the FX Lib. page.
for details.
1
2
Press the Selected Channel section
[EFFECT] key so that its indicator lights.
1
2
Move the cursor to the list, and use the
[DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to
select the library setting to be erased.
The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently
selected to be erased.
Press one of the Selected Channel section
knobs 1–4 to access EFFECT screen for the
effect processor that will be the store
source.
Call the FX Lib. page.
for details.
3
4
Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window confirming the clear operation will
appear.
3
Move the cursor to the list, and use the
[DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to
select the library number to which the set-
tings are to be stored.
The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently
selected for storage.
Move the cursor to the STORE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The NAME EDIT popup window will appear.
5
6
HINT
• Pressing the [F3] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the CLEAR button.
HINT
14
• Pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the STORE button.
To actually erase the selected setting move
the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
4
If necessary enter a name for the selected
library setting, move the cursor to the OK
button, and press the [ENTER] key (refer to
page 32 for details on name entry).
The library setting will be stored.
123
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Correcting a Vocal Track (Pitch Fix)
Correcting a Vocal Track (Pitch Fix)
The Pitch Fix function can be used to “fix” the pitch of a vocal track, or create chorus parts based
on a main vocal part. An Auto Punch-in/out function is also provided which allows a specified
segment of a vocal track to be processed and replaced.
Pitch Fix can be useful in the following situations:
• Correct the pitch of slightly flat or sharp vocals.
• Correct the pitch of a specified segment or phrase of a vocal track using the Auto Punch-in/out function.
• Create a chorus part using an external MIDI keyboard to specify the pitch of the chorus part — a third
above the main vocal, for example.
• Change the key of a vocal track.
NOTE
• If you will be using an external MIDI keyboard to specify the pitch for vocal pitch correction or
a chorus part, the MIDI OUT connector of an appropriate MIDI keyboard must be connected
to the AW2400 [MIDI IN] connector via a standard MIDI cable. In this case the MIDI screen
Setting 1 page PORT RX (reception) parameter must be set to MIDI. Keyboard connection
can also be made via the USB port.
When you want to specify a segment of a
vocal track to be processed and recorded to
another track, it is necessary to specify the
In and Out points and press the [AUTO
PUNCH] key for the Auto Punch-in/out func-
tion.
Move the cursor to the PITCH FIX button
and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will appear which allows you to
select the source edit track.
1
2
3
4
TRACK field
For details on the Auto Punch-in/out function refer to
Call the RECORD screen Bounce page by
either pressing the Quick Navigate section
[RECORD] key as many times as necessary,
or by pressing the [F3] key after pressing
the [RECORD] key.
14
Specify the source edit track in the TRACK
field, then move the cursor to the OK button
and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will appear which allows you to
select the record destination track and the virtual track.
TRACK field
V.TR field
PITCH FIX button
NOTE
• Different tracks must be specified for the source and destina-
tion.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Correcting a Vocal Track (Pitch Fix)
C CONTROL field
Selects the method of pitch correction/shift from the
three listed below.
Specify the record destination track in the
TRACK field and the virtual track in theV.TR
field, then move the cursor to the OK button
and press the [ENTER] key.
5
• SCALE ................. Specify the scale via received
MIDI notes to adjust the pitch.
For example, if you play a chord
on a connected MIDI keyboard,
the pitch is shifted by the notes
included in the chord.
This will select the PITCH FIX display.
B
A
D
E
• NOTE.................... The pitch is changed according
to the received MIDI note.
• PANEL.................. This lets you adjust the pitch by
specifying a scale from the key-
board on the display.
D PARAMETERS field
• TYPE.................... Set this to an appropriate value
to maximize the accuracy of the
pitch correction. Generally this
should be set to Normal, but for
low-pitched vocals it might be
preferable to use the Male set-
ting, and for high-pitched vocals
try the Female setting.
C
F
• KEEP FORMANT button
................. When this button is engaged the
basic character (timbre) of the
voice will not change when the
pitch is corrected.
NOTE
• The following occur when the PITCH FIX mode is engaged:
• No other display can be selected from the panel keys.
• Record track assignments are ignored.
• DETECT knob ..... Determines the pitch detection
speed. The shorter the setting,
the more quickly the pitch is
• No internal effects other than Pitch fix can be accessed.
• The Automix function is temporarily disabled.
detected allowing faster
• MIDI program and control change messages cannot be
received.
response. The longer the set-
ting, the more slowly the pitch is
detected which can result in
1 PITCH FIX field
abrupt, step-like pitch changes.
14
• EXIT button................Move the cursor to this but-
ton and press [ENTER] to
exit from the PITCH FIX
• RATE knob .......... This determines the speed of
pitch change. The faster the set-
ting, the more quickly the pitch is
changed so that pitch correction
more accurately tracks the origi-
nal signal. When this is set to
mode and return to the
Bounce page.
• BYPASS button .........To monitor the vocal track
prior to pitch correction,
“000,” there is no pitch change.
move the cursor to this but-
ton and press [ENTER].
• PITCH knob......... This determines the octave set-
ting of the pitch-adjusted signal.
The range is from -2 to 2
B TRACK field
octaves in semitone steps. The
integer and fraction segments of
the value are set separately.
• FROM TR....................Indicates the track to be
edited (the source track).
This field is only for display,
and cannot be edited.
• FORMANT knob.. This determines the vocal char-
acter (timbre) of the pitch-
• TO TR/TO V.TR ...........Indicates the track and vir-
tual track to which the pro-
cessed source track will be
recorded (the destination
track). This field is only for
display, and cannot be
adjusted signal. Positive (+) val-
ues result in a higher voice char-
acter and negative (–) values
result in a deeper voice charac-
ter.
edited.
125
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Correcting a Vocal Track (Pitch Fix)
E FIX NOTE field
These parameters are only available when PANEL is
NOTE
• The source track (the signal before correction) cannot be
selected in the CONTROL field.
monitored while the PITCH FIX mode screen is showing. Also
note that the record destination (the corrected signal) can
only be monitored when the recorder is set to the record
mode.
• KEY.......................Sets the key of the graphic key-
board on the display.
• SCALE..................Sets the scale of the graphic
keyboard on the display:
• When Auto Punch-in/out is engaged, you can monitor the
destination channel during playback even when not recording.
CHROMATIC, MAJOR, MINOR,
or CUSTOM. When CUSTOM is
selected the keyboard’s buttons
can be used to directly specify a
scale for pitch correction.
• To check the signal before pitch correction, engage the
BYPASS button to temporarily disable the Pitch Fix effect.
Adjust the DETECT, RATE, and PITCH
parameters as required while recording the
song.
If NOTE is selected in the CONTROL field, you can
use a MIDI keyboard to specify the pitches for pitch
correction in real time while recording. This capability
can be useful when creating a harmony vocal track
based on the original vocal melody.
10
F MASTER TUNING field
• IN/OUT knob ........The IN knob sets the reference
pitch before correction, and the
OUT knob sets the reference
pitch after correction. The inte-
ger and fraction segments of the
value are set separately.
NOTE
HINT
• When the BYPASS button is engaged the signal before pitch
correction is output unaffected, regardless of the IN and OUT
knob settings.
• For optimum effect use the DETECT knob in addition to the
RATE knob in order to set the “depth” of the pitch correction
effect.
• You can create “robot voice” type effects by setting the RATE
and DETECT knobs to high values and using a MIDI key-
board to trigger sudden pitch changes.
Raise the [STEREO] fader and the fader of
the source track channel to about 0dB on
the scale.
6
When the end of the song is reached,
11
12
Raise the fader of the destination track
channel to about 0dB on the scale.
rewind the song and press the PLAY [
key.
]
7
The recorded pitch-corrected track will play back with
the other recorded tracks (the original uncorrected
track will not play back).
NOTE
• The fader of the destination track — the track to which the
processed vocal track will be recorded — has no effect on the
recorded signal. The source track fader determines the final
balance, so set it with care.
14
If you’re not satisfied with what has been recorded,
press the [UNDO/REDO] key to undo the recording
and go back to step 9.
To set the scale for pitch correction select
PANEL in the CONTROL field and specify
the key in the FIX NOTE field.
For example, if PANEL is selected in the CONTROL
field and CHROMATIC is selected in the FIX NOTE
SCALE field, pitch will be corrected to the nearest
note in the chromatic (semitone) scale. You can also
specify the notes to be used for pitch correction by
selecting CUSTOM in the FIX NOTE SCALE field
and specifying the notes via the on-screen keyboard.
8
Move the cursor to the EXIT button and
press [ENTER].
A popup window will appear asking you to confirm
that it’s OK to exit from the PITCH FIX mode.
Press the RTZ [
to the beginning, then press the PLAY [
key while holding the REC [●] key.
] key to rewind the song
9
]
To return to the Bounce page move the cur-
sor to the OK button and press the [ENTER]
key.
13
Song playback will begin and the processed data will
be recorded to the destination track.
The corrected signal can be monitored via the record
destination track channel.
The PITCH FIX mode will be exited and the Bounce
display will appear.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 15
Track operations and editing
This chapter explains how to use and edit the tracks of the recorder section.
About the AW2400’s tracks
The AW2400 has the following types of track.
● Audio Tracks
● Trigger Tracks
The physical tracks used to record and play back audio
data are called “audio tracks,” or simply “tracks.” The
AW2400 has twenty-four audio tracks.
The “Trigger Track” function allows the track [ON] keys
and faders to be used to start and stop playback of
recorded tracks. When the Trigger Track function is active
pressing a track channel [ON] key begins playback of the
corresponding track from the beginning of the song to the
end of the data recorded on that track.
● Stereo Track
Independently from audio tracks 1–24, the AW2400 has a
“stereo track” that records and plays a stereo audio signal.
The stereo track is used mainly as a dedicated mixdown
track for recording the final mix.
● Virtual Tracks
Each audio track 1–24 and the stereo track consists of
eight tracks. Each of these eight tracks is called a “virtual
track.” For the audio tracks and the stereo track, only one
virtual track can be recorded or played at any time.
The diagram below shows the concept of virtual tracks.
The horizontal rows indicate audio tracks 1–24, and the
vertical columns correspond to virtual tracks 1–8. The
shaded areas indicate the virtual track that is currently
selected for recording or playback.
Audio tracks
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
21 22 23 24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Stereo track
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
127
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio track operations
Audio track operations
This page contains the following items.
About audio tracks
A
G
H
Audio tracks are physical recording areas used to record
and play back audio data.
The AW2400 lets you use 24 audio tracks. In a 16-bit song
you can play back up to 24 tracks simultaneously, and in a
24-bit song you can play back up to 12 tracks simulta-
neously. However, the number of tracks that can actually
be played back simultaneously is limited by the number of
tracks that are currently in record-ready mode. Please note
that putting more tracks in record-ready mode will forc-
ibly mute a corresponding number of playback tracks. The
following table shows the number of tracks that can be
simultaneously recorded/played for a 16-bit or 24-bit
song.
B
C
D
E
F
Max. Simultaneous
Record Tracks
Max. Simultaneous
Play Tracks
Song Bit Depth
1 TRACK
16
:
8
:
Here you can select the track to be controlled in the
screen. Choose from 1–24 (audio tracks 1–24) or ST (ste-
reo track). The number and name of the virtual track
selected for the current track are shown below this field.
16 bits
1
23
24*
4
0*
8
B MUTE button
:
:
24 bits
You can move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key to switch muting on/off for the currently
selected track.
1
11
12*
0*
* For mixdown the number of simultaneous record tracks is two, and the
number of simultaneous playback tracks is 24 for 16-bit songs, or 12
for 24-bit songs.
C RENAME button
You can move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key to access the NAME EDIT popup window,
where you can edit the name of the currently selected
track.
For example in a 16-bit song, each track you place in
record-ready mode will decrease the number of simulta-
neously-playable tracks by one. (Muting will begin with
higher-numbered tracks.) If you’ve placed the maximum
of sixteen tracks in record-ready mode, a maximum of
eight tracks can be played back simultaneously. If you
want to return a muted track to playable condition, you
must first reduce the number of tracks that are in record-
ready mode, and then defeat muting on the track you want
to play back.
D WAVE button
If you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, the waveform of the currently selected
track will be displayed. For details, refer to “Finding a
15
E REMAIN
This indicates the remaining recordable time.
F Metronome button/knob
Here you can switch the metronome on/off and adjust the
volume. The volume can be adjusted in a range of -96 to
Viewing all audio tracks
In the TRACK screen View page you can view all tracks
to see whether they contain data, and switch muting on/off
for each track.
G MUTE indicator
If a track is muted, its MUTE indicator changes to “●”.
To call this page press the Work Navigate section
[TRACK] key as many times as necessary, or press the
[F1] key after pressing the [TRACK] key.
H Track View
This area shows whether tracks 1–24 contain data, and
indicates the marker locations.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio track operations
Muting a specific audio track
Switching the virtual track of
an audio track
Call the TRACK screen View page.
1
Call the TRACK screen Virtual TR page by
Move the cursor to the TRACK field, and
use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC]
keys to select the number of the track you
want to mute.
1
2
either pressing the Work Navigate section
[TRACK] key as many times as necessary,
or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing
the [TRACK] key.
Move the cursor to the MUTE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
3
This page contains the following items.
Muting will be switched on/off.
If a track is muted, the MUTE symbol changes to “●.”
When you press the [ENTER] key once again, muting
will be defeated and the MUTE symbol will change to
A
“
.”
HINT
• This mute function switches muting on or off for the recorder
track playback. This also affects the number of simultaneous
idea to mute all unused tracks.
B
• Since 24-bit songs allow a maximum of 12 playback tracks,
mute cannot be disengaged for tracks 13-24.
• In some cases, depending on the number of tracks that are in
record-ready mode, you won’t be able to un-mute a track. In
this case, decrease the number of tracks that are in record-
ready mode, and then un-mute the desired track.
C
1 Virtual tracks
Indicates the status of virtual tracks 1–8. The virtual
track that is currently selected for each track is indi-
cated by a “●” symbol. Of the virtual tracks that are
currently not selected, those that have been recorded
are indicated by “ ”, and those that have not yet been
recorded are indicated as “–”.
HINT
15
• When the AW2400 is in its default state, virtual track 1 is
selected for every track.
B Virtual track name
This indicates the name of the virtual track selected by
the cursor. This will indicate “-NO REC-” for tracks
on which nothing has been recorded.
C Tracks
Indicates the track number 1–24.
Use the cursor keys to select the virtual
track number that you want to assign to the
desired track.
2
3
Press the [ENTER] key.
The “●” symbol will be displayed at the position of
the newly-selected virtual track. This virtual track will
now be used for recording/playback.
HINT
• To switch the virtual track of the stereo track, use the TRACK
screen Stereo TR page.
129
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Move the cursor to the TRACK field, and
use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC]
keys to select the number of the track
whose name you want to edit.
You can edit the name of the currently-enabled virtual
track for the track you selected in the TRACK field.
2
Editing virtual track names for
an audio track
Here’s how to assign a name to the virtual track that is cur-
rently selected for an audio track.
Move the cursor to the RENAME button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The NAME EDIT popup window will appear, allow-
ing you to assign a name to the virtual track.
Call the TRACK screen View page by either
3
4
1
pressing the Work Navigate section
[TRACK] key as many times as necessary,
or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing
the [TRACK] key.
Edit the name of the virtual track, move the
cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key. (For details on editing a name
TRACK field
The edited name will be applied.
RENAME button
Stereo track operations
This page contains the following items.
15
About the stereo track
A
B
C
D
Independently from audio tracks 1–24, the AW2400 has a
“stereo track” that records and plays a stereo audio signal.
The stereo track is used mainly as a dedicated mixdown
track for recording the final mix.
The signal of the stereo output channel is always con-
nected to the stereo track; you will always be able to
record the signal of the stereo bus simply by putting the
stereo track in record-ready mode.
You cannot record audio tracks while recording the stereo
track. While the stereo track is playing, audio tracks 1–24
will be forcibly muted.
In the TRACK screen Stereo TR page you can check
whether the stereo track contains data, and switch the vir-
tual track for the stereo track. To call this page press the
Work Navigate section [TRACK] key as many times as
necessary, or press the [F3] key after pressing the
[TRACK] key.
F
G
H
I
E
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stereo track operations
1 ST TR MODE ON/OFF button
This switches playback of the stereo track on/off.
Move the cursor to the REC button and
press the [ENTER] key to turn the button
on.
The panel [STEREO SEL] key will blink red. This
blinking indicates that the stereo track is in record-
ready mode.
2
B INPUT CH MIX/MUTE button
This selects whether the signals of the input channels will
be monitored (MIX) or will not be monitored (MUTE)
while the stereo track is playing.
C Track View
This area graphically indicates whether the stereo track
contains data, and indicates the marker locations.
Press the RTZ [
Then hold down the REC [●] key and press
the PLAY [ ] key.
The song will begin playing, and the playback will be
recorded on the stereo track.
] key to rewind the song.
3
4
D Virtual tracks
Here you can select the virtual track that is assigned to the
stereo track. The currently selected virtual track is indi-
cated by a “●” symbol. Of the other virtual tracks, those
that have been recorded are indicated by “ ”, and those
that have not been recorded are indicated by “–”.
When you reach the end of the song, press
the STOP [■] key.
To listen to the recorded result, refer to “Playing back
the stereo track” (following section).
E Level meter
This indicates the output level of the stereo track. The
fader level is numerically indicated at the left of the meter,
and the hold level is numerically indicated at the right.
HINT
• If desired, you can use the [UNDO/REDO] key to cancel the
switch virtual tracks and record another take.
F PRE EQ button
Pre-EQ levels (levels prior to the EQ stage) are displayed
when this button is on.
G PRE FADER button
Pre-fader levels (levels prior to the faders) are displayed
when this button is on.
Playing back the stereo track
Here’s how to play back the stereo track that you’ve
recorded.
H POST FADER button
Post-fader levels (levels after the faders) are displayed
when this button is on.
Call the TRACK screen Stereo TR page by
1
I PEAK HOLD button
This button switches the level meter peak hold function
on/off.
either pressing the Work Navigate section
[TRACK] key as many times as necessary,
or by pressing the [F3] key after pressing
the [TRACK] key.
To play back the stereo track, switch the ST
TR MODE ON/OFF button to ON.
2
15
Recording on the stereo track
When this button is on, the output of the stereo track is
sent to a point immediately before the [STEREO]
fader, and can be monitored from the [STEREO OUT]
jacks, [MONITOR OUT] jacks, and [PHONES] jack.
At this time, record-ready status for all tracks will be
defeated.
Here’s how to send the signals from track channels, input
channels, and effect return channels to the stereo bus, and
record the mixed signal onto the stereo track.
Call the RECORD screen Mixdown page by
1
either pressing the Quick Navigate section
[RECORD] key as many times as necessary,
or by pressing the [F4] key after pressing
the [RECORD] key.
HINT
• If any audio tracks are in record-ready mode, a popup window
will ask you to confirm that record-ready status will be can-
celled.
When you access this page, record-ready status will be
defeated for all audio tracks, and only the stereo track
will be recordable.
• If the INPUT CH MIX/MUTE button is set to MIX, you’ll be
able to monitor the signal of the input channels even while the
stereo track is playing.
Use the Mixdown page to patch the channels that you
want to record on the stereo track to the stereo bus. For
details on patching, refer to page 75.
NOTE
• EQ and dynamics processing are not applied to the stereo
track playback.
REC button
131
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stereo track operations
Press the RTZ [
and press the PLAY [ ] key.
] key to rewind the song,
3
Editing the name of a virtual track
for the stereo track
Here’s how to edit the name of the virtual track currently
selected for the stereo track.
The stereo track will play back. Use the [STEREO]
fader to adjust the monitor level.
To return to normal playback of the audio tracks,
switch the ST TR MODE ON/OFF button back OFF.
HINT
Call the TRACK screen View page by either
1
pressing the Work Navigate section
[TRACK] key as many times as necessary,
or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing
the [TRACK] key.
• If the ST TR MODE ON/OFF button is ON, pressing the
[RECORD] key while the recorder is stopped will display a
popup window asking you to confirm that you want to defeat
stereo track playback mode. If you want to do so, move the
cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
TRACK field
Switching the virtual track of the
stereo track
RENAME button
Call the TRACK screen Stereo TR page by
1
either pressing the Work Navigate section
[TRACK] key as many times as necessary,
or by pressing the [F3] key after pressing
the [TRACK] key.
Use the CURSOR keys to select the virtual
track number that you want to assign.
The currently selected virtual track is indicated by a
“●” symbol. Of the other virtual tracks, those that
have been recorded are indicated by “ ,” and those
that have not yet been recorded are indicated by “–.”
2
3
Move the cursor to the TRACK field, and
use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC]
keys to make it read “ST.”
You can edit the name of the virtual track that is cur-
rently enabled for the stereo track.
2
Press the [ENTER] key.
Move the cursor to the RENAME button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The NAME EDIT popup window will appear, allow-
ing you to assign a name to the virtual track.
3
The “●” symbol will be displayed at the position of
the newly-selected virtual track. This virtual track will
now be used for recording/playback.
15
Edit the name of the virtual track, move the
4
cursor to the OK button, and press the
[ENTER] key. (For details on entering a
The edited name will be finalized.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Trigger Track Function
The Trigger Track Function
Operation of the Trigger Track function is described in this section.
Recorded tracks can be registered in up to four groups (A–
D), and playback of those tracks can then be started and
stopped as a group. In this case pressing the [ON] key for
any track in the group will start playback of the entire
group. Press the [ON] key a second time to stop playback
of the group.
About Trigger Track
The “Trigger Track” function allows the track [ON] keys
and faders to be used to start and stop playback of
recorded tracks. This is ideal for performance situations in
which you want to switch phrases or patterns in real time,
or when you need to start background music on cue, for
example.
Recorded section
Track 1
(Group A)
When the Trigger Track function is active pressing a track
channel [ON] key begins playback of the corresponding
track from the beginning of the song to the end of the data
recorded on that track (blank sections in the middle of the
track will be played normally.) The track is played once.
Track 2
(Group A)
Track 3
(Group A)
Playback start
Playback stop
Track 1
(Group A)
Stop
Play
Track 2
(Group A)
[ON] key out
Stop
Play
[ON] key lit
Track 3
(Group A)
Stop
Play
If you press the [ON] key once again during playback the
playback will be stopped. Pressing the STOP [■] key will
stop playback of all tracks.
Any [ON] key for tracks 1–3
Playback start
Playback stop
The faders can be used to start playback instead of the
[ON] keys (the Fader Start function). Playback of a track
(or group including the track) will start from the beginning
of the song when a track fader for which the Fader Start
function is turned on is raised above the –∞ position.
Playback will stop at the end of the recorded data. Play-
back can be stopped by returning the fader to the –∞ posi-
tion.
15
or
[ON] key lit
[ON] key out
STOP [■] key
Playback start
Playback stop
133
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Trigger Track Function
D FADER START button
NOTE
When this button is on playback of the corresponding
track (or group including the track) will start when the
track fader is raised above the -∞ position. Playback
will stop at the end of the recorded data. Playback can
be stopped by returning the fader to the -∞ position.
This button can only be turned on or off when the
Trigger Track mode is engaged.
• When the Trigger Track function is active the Transport,
Locate, and Locate/Navigate section keys (with the exception
of the STOP [■] key) will not function, and normal record/play-
back operations are not available.
HINT
• The Trigger Track settings are saved individually with each
song.
Move the cursor to theTRIGGER button and
press the [ENTER] key to engage the Trig-
ger Track mode.
A popup window asking you to confirm that you want
to exit from the normal track mode will appear. Move
the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER]
key.
2
3
• When a song is saved with the Trigger Track function active,
the Trigger Track function will still be active and a message
indicating that status will appear when that song is later
recalled.
Using the Trigger Track Function
NOTE
The Trigger Track function can be used as described
below.
• Since a maximum of 12 tracks can be played back for 24-bit
24 and they will remain in the normal track mode.
Call the TRACK screen Trigger page by
1
either pressing the Work Navigate section
[TRACK] key as many times as necessary,
or by pressing the [F4] key after pressing
the [TRACK] key.
To set the group to which each track
belongs move the cursor to the GROUP
field and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/
[DEC] keys.
This page contains the following items.
The Trigger Track mode allows each track to be
assigned to one of four groups A–D so that playback
of entire groups of tracks can be started and stopped
by simply pressing one [ON] key or operating one
fader.
C
A
B
D
HINT
• “_” will be displayed for tracks that are not assigned to a
group, and those tracks will be triggered independently.
• Channel pairs to be used for linked stereo operation should
15
To engage the Fader Start function for a
track move the cursor to the FADER START
button and press the [ENTER] key.
4
When the Fader Start function is on, playback of the
corresponding track (or group including the track) will
start when the track fader is raised above the –∞ posi-
tion. Playback can be stopped by returning the fader to
the –∞ position.
1 NORMAL button
For normal audio track operation this button should be
turned on (normal track mode).
HINT
B TRIGGER button
Turn this button on to engage the Trigger Track mode
(trigger track mode).
• The Fader Start function can be turned off for all tracks by
pressing the [F1] key while holding the [SHIFT] key (“–” will be
displayed for all tracks).
• The Trigger Track group A–D settings can be copied to fader
[SHIFT] key. This can be useful for linking fader start opera-
tion of multiple trigger tracks.
C GROUP
Move the cursor to this field and use the [DATA/JOG]
dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to set the trigger track group
for each track. Groups can only be assigned when the
Trigger Track mode is engaged.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the Layer section [TRACK 1-12] and
[TRACK 13-24] keys to select the mixing
layer to be operated.
Move the cursor to the NORMAL button and
press the [ENTER] key to exit from the Trig-
ger Track mode and return to the normal
mode.
A popup window asking you to confirm that you want
to exit from the Trigger Track mode will appear. Move
the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER]
key.
5
6
7
Start playback of the target track or group
by pressing the appropriate [ON] key or
operating the appropriate fader.
The [ON] keys of triggered tracks will light during
playback. If you press a lit [ON] key playback of that
track or the group that includes that track will stop.
Pressing the STOP [■] key will stop playback of all
tracks.
NOTE
• If you attempt to select the RECORD, EDIT, SOUND CLIP,
CD, AUTOMIX, or USB screen while the Trigger Track mode is
engaged a confirmation popup window will appear.To actually
move to the selected screen move the cursor to the OK button
and press the [ENTER] to switch to the normal track mode.
You cannot select any of the above screens during song play-
back.
NOTE
• If a channel is turned off by pressing the [ON] key before the
Trigger Track mode is engaged, operating the appropriate
[ON] key or fader does not play back the channel.
Editing tracks
This section explains how to edit the audio data recorded on an audio track.
The AW2400 provides various editing commands that let you edit the audio tracks that have
been recorded. Using these commands, you can specify the track or region that you want to edit,
and delete or move data.You can use special commands to import audio data or WAV files from
outside the AW2400, or to export WAV files to an external device.
The AW2400 provides the following editing commands.
● PITCH (Pitch Change)
Adjusts the pitch of the specified region of an audio track
without affecting its length.
● ERASE
Erases the data of the specified region.
● IMPORT CD AUDIO
Imports audio data (CD-DA) from CD-R/RW media in the
CD-RW drive into an audio track of the AW2400.
15
● DELETE
Deletes the data of the specified region. Any data that fol-
lows the deleted region will be moved forward by the cor-
responding distance.
● IMPORT CD WAV
Imports a WAV file from CD-R/RW media in the CD-RW
drive into an audio track of the AW2400.
● INSERT
Inserts blank space into the specified region.
● IMPORT USB WAV
Imports a WAV file copied from a computer into the
“Transport” folder into an audio track of the AW2400.
● COPY
Copies the data from the specified region to the desired
location of the desired track.
● IMPORT TRACK
Imports audio data recorded in another song into an audio
track of the current song.
● MOVE
Moves the data from the specified region to the desired
location of the desired track. The move-source data will be
erased.
● EXPORT
Exports the specified region of an audio track to a WAV
file in the “Transport” folder.
● EXCHANGE
Exchanges data between the specified tracks.
● TIME COMP (Time Compression/Expansion)
Adjusts the length of the specified region of an audio track
without affecting its pitch.
135
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some ways in which you can use these editing
commands.
C Change the structure of the song
You can use the DELETE or COPY commands to delete/
copy entire tracks, changing the structure of the song
itself. Even after all parts of the song have been recorded,
you can use this method to adjust the length of the song,
for example by shortening the number of measures or
increasing the number of choruses.
1 Erase unwanted regions
You can use the ERASE command to erase just a specific
region of a specific track. For example, this provides a
convenient way to erase a few wrong notes from a perfor-
mance, or to eliminate noise that occurred while an instru-
ment was not playing.
D Create special effects
You can also use editing commands to create special
effects. For example, you can copy a guitar or vocal solo
part to another track and use the PITCH CHANGE com-
mand to slightly detune one of these tracks, creating a
chorus effect without using the internal effect processor.
By applying the PITCH CHANGE command to a drum
track to lower the pitch, you can create a unique lo-fi
effect.
B Change the structure of the tracks
You can use the EXCHANGE command to exchange an
entire track with another track. By using this command
you can bring tracks of widely separated track numbers
closer to each other for easier operation during mixdown.
You can use the COPY or MOVE commands to copy/
move the specified region of a track to a different track.
This is convenient when you have recorded a solo part
among two or more virtual tracks, and want to assemble
the best parts into a single track.
Basic procedure for track editing
Here is the basic procedure for using a track editing command. The procedure is essentially the
same for all track editing commands.
1 Editing command
■ Select the editing command
Indicates the currently selected editing command.
Call the EDIT screen Edit page by either
pressing the Work Navigate section [EDIT]
key as many times as necessary, or by
pressing the [F1] key after pressing the
[EDIT] key.
B Locator/marker
1
Indicates the approximate location of the currently set
locate points and markers. This also indicates whether
recorded data exists in the current track of each track.
15
C Parameters
This screen displays the following information.
Sets various parameters (track/virtual track number,
editing region, etc.) required in order to execute the
command. The type of parameters and the ranges of
the settings will depend on the command that is
selected.
A
B
D EXECUTE button
Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]
key to execute the editing command.
Move the cursor to the edit command field,
use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC]
keys to select an editing command, and
press the [ENTER] key.
2
The displayed content of the page will depend on the
edit command you selected.
C
D
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic procedure for track editing
You can set the Start/End parameters in terms of the
counter display format (the value at the left) or in units
of measures/beats (the value at the right). Move the cur-
sor to the digit that you want to change, and use the
[DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to set the value.
■ Select the track(s) to edit
After you choose an editing command, the next step is to
specify the track(s) that will be edited.
To select the track for editing, move the cur-
3
NOTE
sor to the TR (Track) field in the left of the
screen, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or
[INC]/[DEC] keys.
• If you selected the sound clip as the object for editing, the
region from the start point of the sound clip to its end point will
always be the object of editing. If necessary, you should spec-
ify the start point and end point of the sound clip beforehand.
To specify the end of the region to be
edited, move the cursor to the desired digit
of the End field, and use the [DATA/JOG]
dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys.
6
TR field
In the TR field you can select the following types of
data.
HINT
• 1–24..................An audio track
• If you move the cursor to the Start or End parameter and
press the [ENTER] key, the current counter location will be
input. Alternatively, you can recall a locate point or marker to
move to that location in the song, and then press the [ENTER]
key to input that location as the value of the Start or End
parameter.
• 1&2–23&24.......A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/
even-numbered audio tracks
• ST .....................The stereo track
• ALL...................Audio tracks 1–24
• CLIP..................Sound clip
NOTE
Select the virtual track that you want to edit.
• For some commands, you will also need to specify a location
in the editing-destination track. In the same way as described
above, move the cursor to the counter display format field or
the measure/beat field, and specify the location.
4
If you selected an audio track (1–24, 1&2–23&24, ST)
in step 3, the V.TR field will appear at the right, allow-
ing you to select the virtual track number. Move the
cursor to this field and select a virtual track number 1–
8.
■ Execute the command
When you have finished setting parameters, execute the
command.
Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button,
and press the [ENTER] key.
7
V.TR field
15
A popup window will ask you to confirm the opera-
tion.
HINT
• For some commands, you will need to specify both source
and destination tracks.
■ Specify the editing region
For most commands, you will need to set the Start (the
beginning of the edited region) and End (the end of the
edited region) parameters to specify the region that will be
affected by the command.
Move the cursor to the OK button to exe-
8
cute the command, or move the cursor to
the CANCEL button to cancel without exe-
cuting.Then press the [ENTER] key.
To specify the beginning of the region to be
5
edited, move the cursor to the desired digit
of the Start field, and use the [DATA/JOG]
dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys.
HINT
• Even after you press the [ENTER] key to execute the com-
mand, you can press the [UNDO/REDO] key to return to the
state prior to executing the command.You can use this func-
tion to compare the original data with the results produced by
executing the command.
The Start/End parameters are displayed at the right of
the TR field.
Start parameter (beginning of the region to be edited)
NOTE
• If as a result of executing a command, a track no longer con-
tains any recorded data, the name of that track will change to
“-NO REC-“.
End parameter (end of the region to be edited)
137
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of editing command
List of editing command
This section lists all the commands that are provided in the EDIT screen, and explains their
parameters.
ERASE
DELETE
Erases the data in the specified region (between Start and
End) of the specified track(s).
Deletes the data from the specified region of the specified
track(s).
This command is similar to ERASE, but differs in that the
data that follows the specified region will move forward to
fill the gap.
A
B C
D
Start
End
A
B C
D
1
1
2
3
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
Start
End
ERASE
1
1
2
3
4
5
8
6
7
8
2
7
DELETE
2
3
7
■ Parameter list
Parameter
Range
Explanation
■ Parameter list
The parameters are the same as for the ERASE command.
1–24
A single audio track
A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/
even-numbered audio tracks
1&2–23&24
A TR
ST
The stereo track
Tracks 1–24
ALL
1–8
B V.TR *1
C Start
D End
Virtual track number
INSERT
Specify a point Beginning of the edited region
Specify a point End of the edited region
15
Inserts blank space into the specified region. Data follow-
ing the location of the Start parameter will be moved
backward to make room.
*1. V.TR can be selected only if TR=1–24, 1&2–23&24, or ST.
C
A
B
D
Start
1
1
2
3
4
5
INSERT
2
3
4
5
Size
■ Parameter list
The parameters are the same as for the ERASE command.
However instead of D End, use D Size to specify the
region that will be inserted.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of editing command
■ Parameter list
COPY
Parameter
Range
Explanation
Copies the specified region of data to the specified loca-
tion of the specified track.
1–24
A single audio track
A pair of adjacent odd-num-
bered/even-numbered audio
tracks
1&2–23&24
A
B
C D
E F
ST
The stereo track
A From TR
Tracks 1–24 (overwrite onto
the copy-destination)
ALL (OVER)
Tracks 1–24 (insert into the
copy-destination)
ALL (INS)
CLIP
Sound clip contents (the
range is specified by CLIP)
Copy-source virtual track
number
B From V.TR *1
1–8
G
H
I
J
K
C From Start
D From End
Specify a point
Specify a point
Copy-source starting location
Copy-source ending location
Start
End
E Start Measure
Lock *2
On/off
(indicated by
“lock” icon)
From
Switch the measure lock func-
tion for From Start/From End
1
2
3
4
5
6
F
7
8
Track
F End Measure
Lock *2
1–24
A single audio track
To
Track
A
B
C
D
E
G
H
A pair of adjacent odd-num-
bered/even-numbered audio
tracks
G To TR *3
1&2–23&24
To Start
COPY
From
Track
ST
The stereo track
1
2
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
8
H To V.TR *1
I To Start
1–8
Copy-destination virtual track
Copy-destination starting
location
To
Track
Specify a point
A
B
F
G
H
J COPY TIMES 1–99
ON/OFF
Number of copies
(indicated by
highlightedGRID
text when on)
NOTE
K GRID *4
Switch the grid function
• If you set From TR to ALL (INS), the copy-destination track will be
moved backward by the size of the copied region. Note that this
may cause the bar lines specified by the tempo map to change
their location relative to the audio data.
*1. V.TR can be selected only if From TR=1–24, 1&2–23&24, or ST.
*2. Measure lock function
(E Start Measure Lock, F End Measure Lock)
Measure Lock allows a measure/
beat to be specified within a
• If you set From TR to other than ALL (INS), the copy-destination
track will be overwritten, and the data that follows the copied
region will not be moved backward.
region to be copied so that it
15
aligns with the specified mea-
sure/beat in the copy destination.
For example, in a situation in
HINT
which you have an abstract or
rubato segment before the in-
tempo performance begins, you
an audio track by using the COPY command.
• The metronome of the sound clip is independent of the song
tempo. If you record into the sound clip with the intention of copy-
ing it to an audio track, you should match the tempo ahead of time.
can “Measure Lock” the beginning of the in-tempo segment so that it
is copied to the appropriate location in the destination.
To use the measure lock function, move the cursor to the measure
display field of From Start or From End, specify the measure/beat
location that will be the reference point for the matching, and press
the [ENTER] key. A “lock” icon will appear beside the value that you
specified, and the measure lock function will be turned on for From
Start or From End. (This can be turned on for either Start or End, not
both.)
While the measure lock function is on, the value of that measure dis-
play format setting will be fixed, and cannot be modified. In this state
if you use the counter display format field to specify the From Start
and From End locations, and execute the copy, the location you
specified in the measure display format field will be aligned with the
copy-destination To Start setting.
139
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of editing command
● When measure lock = on
MOVE
Measure Lock
Start
End
Moves the specified region of data to the specified loca-
tion of the specified track. This is similar to COPY, but
differs in that the move-source data will be deleted.
From
Track
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
To
A
B
C
D
4
E
F
G
H
A
B
C D
E F
Track
To Start
COPY
From
Track
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
To
Track
A
4
5
6
E
F
G
H
To Start
G
H
I
K
*3. The possible choices for G To TR (copy-destination track) will
depend on your selection for A From TR (copy-source track).
If A From TR is a single audio track 1–24, you will be able to select
only a single audio track 1–24.
Start
End
From
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Track
If A From TR is CLIP, ST, 1&2–23&24 (a pair of adjacent audio
tracks), you will be able to select only ST or 1&2–23&24 (a pair of
adjacent audio tracks).
To
Track
If A From TR is ALL OVER or ALL INS, you cannot select TO TR.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
*4. Grid function (K GRID)
To Start
When this function is on, the To Start location cannot be specified in
counter-display format; it can be specified only in measure/beat
units.
By using the Grid function in conjunction with the Measure Lock
function, you can easily copy measure/beat-length segments of data
whose divisions do not fall precisely on the measure or beat.
MOVE
From
Track
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
To
Track
A
B
F
G
H
■ Parameter list
The parameters are the same as for the COPY command.
However, you cannot select CLIP for A From TR. Also,
there is no J COPY TIMES setting.
15
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of editing command
EXCHANGE
TIME COMP
Exchanges data between the specified tracks.
(Time Compression/Expansion)
A
B
C
Adjusts the length of the specified region of an audio
track, without changing the pitch.
B
A
C
D
D
E
F
E
F
From
Track
1
2
3
4
5
6
● If you set Ratio = 50%
To
Track
A
A
B
B
C
C
D
D
E
F
From Start
From End
EXCHANGE
1
1
2
3
4
A
B
C
D
From
Track
E
F
TIME
COMP/EXP
To
Track
1
2
3
4
5
6
2 3 4
A
B
C
D
To END
■ Parameter list
● If you set Ratio = 200%
Parameter
Range
Explanation
A single audio track
From Start
From End
1–24
A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/
even-numbered audio tracks
1
1
2
3
4
A
B
C
C
D
D
A From TR
1&2–23&24
ST
TIME
The stereo track
COMP/EXP
Exchange-source virtual track
number
B From V.TR
C Name
1–8
2
3
4
Up to eight
alphanumeric
characters
To END
Exchange-source virtual track
name (display only)
15
1–24
A single audio track
■ Parameter list
D To TR *1
A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/
even-numbered audio tracks
1&2–23&24
Parameter
Range
Explanation
A single audio track
Exchange-destination virtual track
number
E To V.TR
F Name
1–8
1–24
Up to eight
alphanumeric
characters
A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/
even-numbered audio tracks
Exchange-destination virtual track
name (display only)
A From TR
1&2–23&24
ST
The stereo track
*1. The items that you can select in D To TR (copy-destination track)
will depend on the A From TR (copy-source track) setting.
If A From TR is a single audio track 1–24, you can select only a sin-
gle audio track 1–24.
B From V.TR
C From Start
D From End
1–8
Virtual track number
Specify a point Beginning of the edited region
Specify a point End of the edited region
If A From TR is ST or 1&2–23&24 (a pair of adjacent audio tracks),
you can select only 1&2–23&24 (a pair of adjacent audio tracks).
Specify the length to which the
Specify a point selected region will be com-
pressed or expanded
E TO END
F To Ratio
NOTE
Specify the percentage by which
50–200%
the selected region will be com-
pressed or expanded
• The track names will not be exchanged.
NOTE
• TO END and To Ratio are linked, so that editing one field will
cause the other field to change.
• You cannot set TO END or To Ratio to a value that would cause
the ratio to exceed 50–200 percent.
• From Start value and From End value must be at least 45 msec
apart. These cannot be set to a shorter interval.
141
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of editing command
PITCH (Pitch Change)
IMPORT USB WAV
Adjusts the pitch of the specified region of an audio track,
without changing the length.
Imports a WAV file copied from a computer into the
“Transport” folder into an audio track of the AW2400.
For details on the parameters and operation of the
A
B
C
D
IMPORT TRACK
Imports audio data recorded in another song into an audio
track of the current song.
For details on the parameters and operation of the
IMPORT TRACK command, refer to “Importing audio
E
F
From Start
From End
PITCH
CHANGE
EXPORT
Exports the specified region of an audio track to a WAV
file in the “Transport” folder.
For details on the parameters and operation of the
From Start
From End
PITCH
CHANGE
MERGE
Audio playback performance can be improved by using
this command to merge a number of separate regions (sec-
tions of audio data created in separate recording passes) in
a specified track into one continuous region.
The merge command creates a continuous region from the
beginning of the track to the end of the last region on the
track, and sections of the track that contained no regions
are replaced with audio silence.
■ Parameter list
Parameter
Range
Explanation
A single audio track
1–24
A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/
even-numbered audio tracks
A From TR
1&2–23&24
ST
The stereo track
15
B From V.TR
C From Start
D From End
1–8
Virtual track number
A
B
Specify a point Beginning of the edited region
Specify a point End of the edited region
-12 to +12
semitones
Specify the amount of pitch
change in semitone units
E NOTE
Specify the amount of pitch
change in one-cent units (1/100th
of a semitone)
-50 to +50
cents
F CENT
IMPORT CD AUDIO
MERGE
Imports audio data (CD-DA) from CD-R/RW media in the
CD-RW drive into an audio track of the AW2400.
For details on the parameters and operation of the
IMPORT CD AUDIO command, refer to “Importing from
■ Parameter list
Parameter
A From TR
B From V.TR
Range
Explanation
1–24
A single audio track
IMPORT CD WAV
A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/
even-numbered audio tracks
1&2–23&24
1–8
Imports a WAV file from CD-R/RW media in the CD-RW
drive into an audio track of the AW2400.
Virtual track number
For details on the parameters and operation of the
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Importing audio data/WAV files
Importing audio data/WAV files
This section explains how to load (import) audio data or WAV files from the CD-RW drive or from
the desired track of a different song.
● WAV files
Importing from the CD-RW drive
• Mixed Mode CD
or CD-R can be imported (loaded) into an AW2400 audio
• ISO9660 Level 1 format CD-ROM, CD-R,
CD-RW*
CD audio data (CD-DA) or a WAV file from a CD-ROM
* The directory name and file name cannot use charac-
track. After being imported, this data can be handled in the
ters other than uppercase alphanumeric characters
same way as any recorded audio track.
and the “_” (underscore) character.
Call the UTILITY screen Preference page by
Call the EDIT screen Edit page by either
pressing the Work Navigate section [EDIT]
key as many times as necessary, or by
pressing the [F1] key after pressing the
[EDIT] key.
1
5
6
either pressing the Work Navigate section
[UTILITY] key as many times as necessary,
or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing
the [UTILITY] key.
Immediately after the AW2400 is powered-on, it will
be set to prohibit digital recording from an external
source or importing from a CD. Before you can
import, you will need to disable this prohibition in the
UTILITY screen Preference page.
Move the cursor to the editing command
field, use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/
[DEC] keys to select the desired editing
command.
Select “IMPORT CD AUDIO” if the import-source is
an audio CD or CD-Extra, or select “IMPORT CD
WAV” if the import-source is a WAV file.
Move the cursor to the CD/DAT DIGITAL
REC button, and press the [ENTER] key.
2
A message will ask you to confirm that you will
observe the applicable copyright laws.
Press the [ENTER] key to confirm the edit
command.
7
The READ CD INFO button will appear in the center
of the display.
The following illustration shows the screen when
you’ve selected IMPORT CD AUDIO as the edit com-
mand.
3
15
and if you accept these terms, move the
cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
The button display will change from DISABLE to
ENABLE, and digital recording and importing from a
CD will be enabled.
NOTE
• If you choose a song whose sample rate is 48 kHz in the
IMPORT CD AUDIO command, a message of “Current Song
is 48kHz Fs Type.” appears, and you won’t be able to load the
audio data.
NOTE
• The CD/DAT DIGITAL REC button will return to the DISABLE
setting each time you turn on the power.
Move the cursor to the READ CD INFO but-
ton and press the [ENTER] key.
The display will indicate “Read CD Info...”, and infor-
mation will be read from the CD inserted in the CD-
RW drive.
Insert a CD into the CD-RW drive.
You can import data from the following types of
media.
8
4
● Audio data (CD-DA)
• Audio CD
Depending on the import-source data, the screen will
change as follows.
• CD-Extra (only the first session of CD-DA)
• Mixed Mode CD (only CD-DA data of the second
and later tracks)
NOTE
• If the CD/DAT DIGITAL REC button is set to “DISABLE” in the
UTILITY screen Preference page, the display will indicate “CD
Import Prohibited!”, and you won’t be able to import from the
CD. If this occurs, refer to steps 1–3 and check your settings
once again.
143
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Importing audio data/WAV files
● When using IMPORT CD AUDIO
● When using IMPORT CD WAV
A
A
B
C
D
E
B
C
D E
G
F
G
H
I
F
H
I
1 Track list
1 File list
This shows each track of the audio CD inserted in the
CD-RW drive, in units of minutes/seconds/frames (1/
75 second). Move the cursor to the list, and use the
[DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to specify
the number of the audio track you want to import.
Operations in the track list are linked with the From
CD TRACK field.
This shows the WAV files and folders (directories)
stored on the CD. Move the cursor to the list, and use
the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to
specify the WAV file that you want to import.
B FILE
This indicates the name of the WAV file or directory.
The displayed icons have the following meaning.
B From CD TRACK
Specifies the audio track number (01–99) of the
import-source CD.
•
•
.........Indicates a WAV file.
.........Indicates a folder in the same level.You
can select this icon and press the
[ENTER] key to move down one level.
C From Start
Specifies the beginning of the data that will be
imported, in minutes/seconds/frames (1/75 second).
•
...........You can select this icon and press the
[ENTER] key to move up one level.
D From End
C TOTAL
Specifies the end of the data that will be imported, in
minutes/seconds/frames (1/75 second).
Indicates the playback length (in units of hours/min-
utes/seconds/milliseconds) of the WAV file. This field
is for display only, and cannot be changed.
HINT
D TYPE
• The “frames” referred to here are the minimum time-axis units
used in CD-DA. Do not confuse them with the frames used in
MTC or SMPTE.
Indicates whether the WAV file is monaural ( ) or
stereo ( ). The numerical value at the right indicates
the bit depth of the WAV file. This field is for display
only, and cannot be changed.
15
E LISTEN button
You can move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key to repeatedly hear the currently selected
region of the CD-DA.
E LISTEN/ENTER/UP button
If a WAV file is selected, the LISTEN button will be
displayed, allowing you to hear the WAV file repeat-
edly. If a folder is selected, the ENTER button will be
displayed, allowing you to move into that folder. If the
button is selected, the UP button will be displayed,
allowing you to move to the next higher folder.
F To TR
Selects the track number into which the data will be
imported. If the import-source is an audio CD or a ste-
reo WAV file, you will only be able to select a pair of
tracks 1&2–23&24.
NOTE
G To V.TR
• You cannot audition WAV files whose bit depth or sample rate
differs from the current song.
Selects the virtual track number (1–8) into which the
data will be imported.
F To TR
H To Start
Selects the track number into which the data will be
imported. If the import-source is a stereo WAV file,
you will only be able to select a pair of tracks 1&2–
23&24.
Specifies the starting location (in counter-display for-
mat) of the import-destination to which the data will
be imported.
I EXECUTE button
Executes the import operation.
G To V.TR
H To Start
I EXECUTE button
These are the same as for IMPORT CD AUDIO.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Importing audio data/WAV files
NOTE
Importing audio data from
• In the case of a Mixed Mode CD, the edit command you use
will depend on the data you’re importing. Use IMPORT CD
AUDIO to import audio data (CD-DA), or use IMPORT CD
WAV to import a WAV file.
another song
Here’s how you can import audio data from another song
saved on the AW2400’s hard disk.
• You cannot import a WAV file whose bit depth or sample rate
differs from the current song.
• When the import source is an audio CD or CD Extra disc and
the song is 24-bit, the audio data will be automatically con-
verted to 24-bit format during the import operation.
Call the EDIT screen Edit page by either
1
pressing the Work Navigate section [EDIT]
key as many times as necessary, or by
pressing the [F1] key after pressing the
[EDIT] key.
• When you move the cursor to the LISTEN button and press
the [ENTER] key, there will be a slight time lag while the data
is read from the CD before you hear it.
Move the cursor to the edit command field,
and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/
[DEC] keys to select IMPORT TRACK.
2
Move the cursor to the track list (file list),
and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/
[DEC] keys to select the track or WAV file
that you want to import.
9
Press the [ENTER] key to conform your
choice of edit command.
3
If you’re using IMPORT CD WAV, and the
is
located at the line enclosed by the dotted line, you can
press the [ENTER] key to move to the next lower
level.
The screen will change as follows.
A
B
C D
E
F
To move to the next higher level, move the cursor to
the
and press the [ENTER] key.
If you’re using IMPORT CD AUDIO, use
From Start/From End to specify the region
that will be imported.
10
11
Use theToTR,To V.TR, andTo Start fields to
specify the track number, virtual track num-
ber, and starting location into which the
data will be imported.
G
H
I
1 Song List
This area lists the songs that are saved on the
NOTE
AW2400’s internal hard disk. In this list, select the
song that contains the track you want to import.
• If the import-destination contains data, it will be overwritten.
Be careful not to overwrite important data by accident.
15
B Song name
When you have finished making settings,
move the cursor to the EXECUTE button
and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm the opera-
tion.
12
13
C Song size
D Song Bit Depth/Sampling Frequency
E Song Protect Status
F SORT
Move the cursor to this box, and use the [DATA/JOG]
dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to choose the order in
which you want the songs in the list to appear.
• NAME...........Song names in alphabetical order.
• SIZE .............Song size, from largest to smallest.
• OLD..............The order in which the songs were
saved, from newest to oldest.
G From TR/From V.TR
To execute the import operation, move the
cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
Importing will begin. If you move the cursor to the
CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key, import-
ing will be cancelled.
Here you can select the desired track number (1–24,
ST) and virtual track number (1–8) of the import-
source song.
145
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Importing audio data/WAV files
H To TR/To V.TR
Here you can select the track number (1–24, ST) and
virtual track number (1–8) of the import-destination
song (the current song).
If From TR is 1–24, you cannot select ST in the To TR
field. If From TR is ST, only ST can be selected.
I EXECUTE button
Executes the import operation.
Move the cursor to the song list, and use
4
the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys
to select the song that includes the track
you want to import.
NOTE
• You cannot import from a song whose bit depth or sample
rate differs from the current song.
Move the cursor to FromTR/From V.TR, and
5
use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC]
keys to select the track number and virtual
track number that you want to import.
The track number and virtual track number of the song
you selected in step 4 will be assigned as the import-
source.
Move the cursor to To TR/To V.TR, and use
6
the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys
to select the track number and virtual track
number of the desired import-destination.
NOTE
• If the import-destination contains data, it will be overwritten.
Be careful that you don’t accidentally overwrite important
data.
15
When you’ve finished making settings,
move the cursor to the EXECUTE button
and press the [ENTER] key.
7
A popup window will ask you to confirm the opera-
tion.
To execute the Import operation, move the
cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
8
Importing will begin. If you decide to cancel the
Import operation, move the cursor to the CANCEL
button and press the [ENTER] key.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16
Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing
In this section we’ll cover operation of the channel pan (or balance), equal-
izer, and dynamics processing controls.
Pan Control
These controls adjust the “pan” position (or balance on stereo channels) of the input, effect
return, track, and stereo output channels. Pan can be adjusted either by using the knobs in the
PAN/EQ screen, or by using the physical pan control in the Selected Channel section.
● PAN/EQ Screen Track Page
■ Pan Control via the PAN/EQ Screen
Pan operation via the dedicated display screen.
Press the Seleceted Channel section [PAN/
EQ] key so that its indicator lights, then
press Selected Channel knob 1 to call the
1
A
PAN/EQ screen.
Press the Display section [F1] (Input/RTN
page) or [F2] (Track page) key.
2
B
The pan operations available via each page are as fol-
lows:
● PAN/EQ Screen Input/RTN Page
1 TRACK field
Pan controls for track channels 1–24.
B STEREO BAL. field
Balance control for the stereo output channel.
HINT
A
16
• You can switch back and forth between the Input and Track
pages while the PAN/EQ screen is showing by pressing the
[PAN/EQ] key.
B
Move the cursor to a knob and use the
[DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to
set the pan as required.
3
The pan value range is from L63 (full left)–C (center)–
R63 (full right).
1 INPUT field
Pan controls for input channels 1–16.
HINT
B EFFECT RETURN field
• Knobs can also be selected via the Layer section keys,
[INPUT SEL] keys, [SEL] keys, and [STEREO SEL] key.
Pan controls for effect return channels 1–4.
• You can alternately select the left and right effect return chan-
nels by repeatedly pressing the effect return channel [SEL]
key.
• The pan “C” (center) setting can be instantly recalled by
pressing the [ENTER] key after moving the cursor to a pan
knob.
147
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pan Control
The panning for paired channels can be
4
adjusted in three different ways: hold the
Display section [SHIFT] key while pressing
the [F1], [F2], or [F3] key.
• [F1] key — INDIVIDUAL
The pan positions of the paired
channels can be adjusted individ-
ually.
• [F2] key — GANG
The pan positions of the paired
channels are adjusted simulta-
neously in the same direction,
maintaining the relative posi-
tions of each channel.
• [F3] key — INV.GANG
The pan positions of the paired
channels are adjusted simulta-
neously in opposite directions.
HINT
• This operation can be accessed via both the Input/RTN and
Track pages, and affects both pages.
■ Pan Control via
the Selected Channel section
Adjusting pan via Selected Channel section knob 1.
Use the Layer section, [INPUT SEL], [SEL],
and [STEREO SEL] keys to select the chan-
nel for which pan is to be controlled.
1
Press the Selected Channel section [PAN/
EQ] key so that its indicator lights.
With the default settings the PAN/EQ screen will
appear automatically. The display will not change if
the UTILITY screen Preference page AUTO DIS-
PLAY button is set to OFF.
2
16
Rotate Selected Channel knob 1 to adjust
the pan of the channel selected in step 1.
3
If the UTILITY screen Preference
page AUTO DISPLAY button is set
to OFF, a popup window showing
the current pan setting will appear
while knob 1 is being operated.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-band EQ
4-band EQ
The AW2400 provides 4-band parametric equalization (LOW, LO-MID, HI-MID, HIGH) on the
channels listed below.
• Input
• Track
• Bus Master
• Effect Return
• Stereo Output
• AUX Send Master
The LO-MID and HI-MID bands provide peaking EQ control, while the LOW and HIGH bands can
be used in shelving, peaking or high-pass filter (LOW)/low-pass filter (HIGH) mode. EQ can be
adjusted either by calling the PAN/EQ screen and using the graphic knobs, or by using the phys-
ical controllers in the Selected Channel section.
The EQ/Att. page includes the following items.
■ EQ Control via the PAN/EQ Screen
1 EQ ON/OFF button
Adjusting equalization via the PAN/EQ screen.
Switches the EQ on/off.
Use the Layer section, [INPUT SEL], [SEL],
and [STEREO SEL] keys to select the chan-
nel for which EQ is to be controlled.
B ATT. (Attenuation) knob
1
2
Attenuates the signal immediately before the EQ stage
over a range of -96 to 12.0 dB. This is used mainly to
prevent the signal from clipping when you use the EQ
to boost a specific frequency region.
Press the Selected Channel section [PAN/
EQ] key so that its indicator lights. Press
Selected Channel knob 2, 3, or 4 and the
PAN/EQ screen will appear.
C TYPE field
Selects the EQ algorithm type. When the TYPE I but-
ton is on the same EQ algorithm that was used in the
02R is selected. The TYPE II button selects the latest
EQ algorithm which provides minimum inter-band
interference. TYPE II can only be selected for the
track channels, stereo output channels, and bus master
channels.
Press the Display section [F3] key, or press
the [PAN/EQ] key as many times as neces-
sary until the EQ/Att. page appears.
3
E
B
A
C
D
D Response curve
Graphically indicates the approximate response of the
EQ.
E Output meter
Indicates the level of the signal after it has passed
through the EQ.
16
F Q knobs
Specify the Q (steepness) at which each band (HIGH,
HI-MID, LO-MID, LOW) will be boosted or cut. The
range is 10–0.10, and higher settings will produce a
steeper curve.
F
G
H
G F (Frequency) knobs
Specify the center frequency of the boost/cut, over a
range of 21.2 Hz–20.0 kHz.
H G (Gain) knobs
Specify the amount of boost/cut, over a range of -18.0
dB to +18.0 dB.
To switch the EQ on, move the cursor to the
EQ ON/OFF button and press the [ENTER]
key.
4
5
When working on a track channel, stereo
output channel, or bus master channel, the
EQ type can be selected via the TYPE field.
149
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-band EQ
Move the cursor to the parameter that you
want to edit, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or
the [INC]/[DEC] keys to adjust the value.
6
7
■ EQ Control via the Selected
Channel section
Using Selected Channel section knobs 2–4 to adjust EQ.
HINT
• If you press the [F1] (FLAT) key while holding the [SHIFT] key
from the PAN/EQ screen EQ/Att. page, all G knobs for the
currently selected channel will be set to 0.0dB (or OFF).
Use the Layer section, [INPUT SEL], [SEL],
and [STEREO SEL] keys to select the chan-
nel for which EQ is to be controlled.
1
Press the Selected Channel section [LOW],
[LO-MID], [HI-MID], or [HIGH] key, according
to the band you want to control.
To switch the LOW band type, move the cur-
sor to the LOW band Q knob and continue
turning the [DATA/JOG] dial toward the left
or right.
If you continue turning the Q knob toward the right,
the Q knob value will indicate “L.SHELF,” and will
switch to the shelving type.
2
The selected key’s indicator will light, as will the
[PAN/EQ] key.
With the default settings the PAN/EQ screen will
appear automatically. The display will not change if
the UTILITY screen Preference page AUTO DIS-
PLAY button is set to OFF.
If you turn the Q knob toward the left, the Q knob
value field will change to a numerical value, and will
switch to the same boost/cut type as the HI-MID and
LO-MID bands.
Rotate Selected Channel knobs 2–4.
The parameters for the channels selected in step 1 and
the band selected in step 2 will change accordingly.
3
If you continue turning the Q knob toward the left, the
Q knob value field will indicate “HPF,” and the LOW
band will function as a high-pass filter. If “HPF” is
selected, you can use the LOW band G knob to switch
the high-pass filter on/off.
The knobs control the following parameters.
Selected Channel
2
3
4
knobs 2–4
Frequency
(center
frequency)
To switch the HIGH band type, move the
cursor to the HIGH band Q knob and con-
tinue turning the [DATA/JOG] dial toward
the left or right.
If you continue turning the Q knob toward the right,
the Q knob value will indicate “H.SHELF,” and will
switch to the shelving type.
8
Parameters
Q
Gain
If the UTILITY screen Preference
page AUTO DISPLAY button is set
to OFF, a popup window showing
the current EQ settings will appear
while Selected Channel knobs 2–4
are being operated.
If you turn the Q knob toward the left, the Q knob
value field will change to a numerical value, and will
switch to the same boost/cut type as the HI-MID and
LO-MID bands.
If you continue turning the Q knob toward the left, the
Q knob value field will indicate “LPF,” and the HIGH
band will function as a low-pass filter. If “LPF” is
selected, you can use the HIGH band G knob to switch
the low-pass filter on/off.
16
HINT
• EQ settings can also be recalled from the EQ library, or your
own settings can be saved for later recall. See “EQ/Dynamics
Processor Library Operation” on page 154 for details.
• If boost in a particular band results clipping on the meters,
use the ATT. knob to reduce the signal level.
• Selected Channel knobs 2, 3, and 4 also function while the
PAN/EQ screen EQ/Att. page is showing.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dynamics Processing
Dynamics Processing
The AW2400 provides gate and compressor facilities for dynamics processing. In this section
operation of the gate and compressor will be explained individually.
C KEYIN SOURCE field
Using the Gates
Selects one of the following trigger sources for the
gate.
The gate attenuates signals below a specified threshold
level, and can be used to eliminate noise in silent sections
of a track. Gates are only provided on input channels.
• SELF button... Selects the signal from the cur-
rently selected channel.
• CHANNEL button
............ Selects the signal from the channel
specified in the box below the but-
ton (CH1–CH16). After selecting a
channel in the channel box, press
the [ENTER] key to confirm the
selection.
Use the Layer section, [INPUT SEL] and
[SEL] keys to select the channel to which
the gate is to be applied.
1
Press the Selected Channel section [DYN]
key so that its indicator lights, then press
Selected Channel knob 1, 2, 3, or 4.
2
• AUX button..... Selects the signal from the AUX
send specified in the box below the
button (AUX1–AUX4). After select-
ing an AUX send in the box, press
the [ENTER] key to confirm the
selection.
The DYNAMICS screen will appear.
Press the Display section [F1] key, or press
the [DYN] key as many times as necessary
until the Gate Edit page appears.
3
D Response curve
This graph indicates the approximate response of the
gate settings. The horizontal axis of the graph is the
input level, and the vertical axis is the output level.
A
C
D
E
E TYPE
Indicates the currently selected gate type. The dis-
played indication has the following meaning.
F
• GATE............... Gate
• DUCKING........ Ducking
HINT
G
H
• You cannot change the gate type via this page. If you want to
use a different gate type, you must recall a library setting that
uses the desired type. For details on recalling library gate set-
16
F GR (Gain Reduction)
B
Indicates the amount of gain reduction produced by
the gate processor over a range of -18 dB to 0 dB.
The Gate Edit Page includes the following items.
G Output meter
Indicates the level of the signal after it has passed
through the gate processor.
1 GATE ON/OFF button
Switches the gate on/off.
B STEREO LINK button
Turning this button on links gate operation for paired
H PARAMETER
Here you can edit the parameters of the gate processor.
The type of parameters and their ranges will differ
depending on the gate type. For details on the types of
parameter and their function, refer to the appendix.
channels.
NOTE
• Gate operation can only be linked for adjacent odd and even
numbered channels that can be paired.
151
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dynamics Processing
Move the cursor to the GATE ON/OFF but-
ton and press the [ENTER] key to turn the
gate on.
4
5
■ Compressor Control via
the DYNAMICS screen
Applying and controlling compression via the dedicated
dynamics screen.
HINT
• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the GATE ON/OFF but-
ton.
Use the Layer section, [INPUT SEL], [SEL],
and [STEREO SEL] keys to select the chan-
nel to which compression is to be applied.
1
Use the STEREO LINK button to turn gate
linking for paired channels on or off, and
the KEYIN SOURCE field to select a trigger
source as required.
Press the Selected Channel section [DYN]
key so that its indicator lights, then press
Selected Channel knob 1, 2, 3, or 4.
2
The DYNAMICS screen will appear.
HINT
• Pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the STEREO LINK button.
Press the Display section [F3] key, or press
the [DYN] key as many times as necessary
until the Comp Edit page appears.
3
Move the cursor to the parameter you want
to edit and use either the [DATA/JOG] dial
or [INC]/[DEC] keys to set the parameter as
required.
6
A
C
D
E
HINT
• You can save your current gate settings in the library as
F
G
H
Using the Compressors
Compression can be used to prevent signals from exceed-
ing a preset level in order to avoid distortion, and to
smooth out the levels of certain instruments or tracks. The
AW2400 provides compression on the following tracks.
B
• Input
• Track
The Comp Edit page includes the following items.
1 COMPT ON/OFF button
Switches the compressor on/off.
• Stereo Output
• Bus Master
• AUX Send Master
• Effect Send Master
16
B STEREO LINK button
Turning this button on links compressor operation for
paired channels.
Compression can be controlled either via the knobs in the
DYNAMICS screen or the physical controllers in the
Selected Channel section.
NOTE
• This item will not appear for the stereo output channel and
bus master channels.
C POSITION field
Specifies the position in the signal chain at which the
compressor will be inserted.
• PRE EQ................ Before the channel’s EQ stage
(except for the effect send mas-
ter)
• PRE FADER......... Immediately before the channel
fader
• POST FADER....... Immediately after the channel
fader
D Response curve
This graph indicates the approximate response of the
compressor settings. The horizontal axis of the graph
is the input level, and the vertical axis is the output
level.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dynamics Processing
E TYPE
■ Compressor Control via
Indicates the currently selected compressor type. The
displayed indication has the following meaning.
the Selected Channel section
• COMP ...................Compressor
• EXPAND ...............Expander
Applying and controlling compression by using knobs 1–
4 in the Selected Channel section.
• COMP.(H)..............Compander (hard)
• COMP.(S)..............Compander (soft)
Use the Layer section, [INPUT SEL], [SEL],
and [STEREO SEL] keys to select the chan-
nel to which compression is to be applied.
1
HINT
• You cannot change the compressor type via this page. If you
want to use a different type, you must recall a library setting
that uses the desired type. For details on recalling library
compression settings, refer to “EQ/Dynamics Processor
Press the Selected Channel section [DYN]
key so that it’s indicator lights.
With the default settings the DYNAMICS screen will
appear automatically. The display will not change if
the UTILITY screen Preference page AUTO DIS-
PLAY button is set to OFF.
2
F GR (Gain Reduction)
Indicates the amount of gain reduction produced by
the compressor, in a range of -18 dB to 0 dB.
Rotate Selected Channel knobs 1–4.
The parameters for the channels selected in step 1 will
change accordingly.
3
G Output meter
Indicates the level of the signal after it has passed
through the compressor.
The knobs control the following parameters.
H PARAMETER
Selected Channel
Here you can edit the parameters of the compressor.
The type of parameters and their ranges will differ
depending on the compressor type. For details on the
types of parameter and their function, refer to the
appendix.
1
2
3
4
knobs 1–4
Parameters
TOTAL* Threshold
Ratio
Gain
* TOTAL: Multiple parameters are changed simultaneously to vary
the compression effect.
Move the cursor to the COMP ON/OFF but-
ton and press the [ENTER] key to turn the
compressor on.
If the UTILITY screen Preference
page AUTO DISPLAY button is set
to OFF, a popup window showing
the current compression settings
will appear while Selected Channel
knobs 1–4 are being operated.
4
5
HINT
• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the ON/OFF button.
Use the STEREO LINK button to turn com-
pressor linking for paired channels on or
off, and the POSITION field to select the
compressor insert point as required.
16
HINT
• Pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the STEREO LINK button.
Move the cursor to the parameter you want
to edit and use either the [DATA/JOG] dial
or [INC]/[DEC] keys to set the parameter as
required.
6
HINT
• You can save your current compressor settings in the library
153
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EQ/Dynamics Processor Library Operation
EQ/Dynamics Processor Library Operation
The AW2400 includes “setup libraries” that contain preset EQ, gate, and compressor settings
that can be recalled and used in a variety of situations. The libraries can also be used to store
your own settings for easy recall as needed.
HINT
• If necessary library recall can be automated using the AW2400’s Automix record/playback
The EQ Lib. page includes the following items.
Accessing the EQ/Dynamics
1 Current Response Curve
A graphic representation of the current EQ curve for
the currently selected channel.
Library screens
This section describes the procedure for accessing the EQ/
Dynamics Library screens and recalling library presets.
Displays the signal level after the EQ stage.
B Output Meter
C EQ Curve
A graphic representation of the EQ curve of the cur-
rently selected EQ setting in the library list.
■ Recalling EQ Library settings
From this library you can recall EQ settings to the cur-
rently selected channel. Of library numbers 001–128,
numbers 001–040 are read-only, and 041–128 can be used
to store your own settings.
D List
A list of all the settings stored in the library. The row
highlighted by a dotted frame is the setting currently
selected for operation. An
library settings.
EQ library operations are performed via the PAN/EQ
screen EQ Lib. page.
icon indicates read-only
Use the Layer section, [INPUT SEL], [SEL],
and [STEREO SEL] keys to select the target
channel.
NOTE
1
• When a TYPE II EQ library preset is recalled to a channel
that only allows TYPE I EQ (the input channels, effect return
channels, and AUX channels), the EQ preset will be recalled
as TYPE I EQ.
Press the Selected Channel section [PAN/
EQ] key so that its indicator lights, then
press Selected Channel knob 2, 3, or 4.
2
E Buttons
These buttons execute the RENAME, RECALL,
STORE, and CLEAR functions. Detailed description
of their operation begins on page 156.
The PAN/EQ screen will appear.
Press the Display section [F2] key, or press
the [PAN/EQ] key as many times as neces-
sary until the EQ Lib. page appears.
3
16
■ Recalling Gate Library settings
E
C
D
A
B
From this library you can recall gate settings to the cur-
rently selected input channel. Of library numbers 001–
128, numbers 001–004 are read-only, and 005–128 can be
used to store your own settings.
Gate library operations are performed via the DYNAM-
ICS screen Gate Lib. page.
Use the Layer section, [INPUT SEL] and
[SEL] keys to select the target channel.
1
Press the Selected Channel section [DYN]
key so that its indicator lights, then press
Selected Channel knob 1, 2, 3, or 4.
2
The DYNAMICS screen will appear.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EQ/Dynamics Processor Library Operation
Press the Display section [F2] key, or press
the [DYN] key as many times as necessary
until the Gate Lib. page appears.
3
■ Recalling Compressor Library Settings
From this library you can recall compressor settings to the
currently selected channel. Of library numbers 001–128,
numbers 001–036 are read-only, and 037–128 can be used
to store your own settings.
F
B
C
Compressor library operations are performed via the
DYNAMICS screen Comp Lib. page.
Use the Layer section, [INPUT SEL], [SEL],
and [STEREO SEL] keys to select the target
channel.
1
A
Press the Selected Channel section [DYN]
key so that its indicator lights, then press
Selected Channel knob 1, 2, 3, or 4.
2
D
E
The DYNAMICS screen will appear.
Press the Display section [F4] key, or press
the [DYN] key as many times as necessary
until the Comp Lib. page appears.
3
The Gate Lib. page includes the following items.
1 Current Type
The currently selected gate type for the currently
F
B
C
selected channel.
B Current Gate Response
A graphic representation of the current gate response
for the currently selected channel. The horizontal axis
represents input level, and the vertical axis represents
output level.
A
C Meter
Displays the signal level after the gate, and the amount
of gain reduction.
D
E
D Gate Curve
A graphic representation of the gate curve of the cur-
rently selected gate setting in the library list.
E List
The Comp Lib. page includes the following items.
A list of all the settings stored in the library. The row
16
highlighted by a dotted frame is the setting currently
1 Current Type
The currently selected compressor type for the cur-
rently selected channel.
selected for operation. An
library settings.
icon indicates read-only
F Buttons
B Current Compression Response
These buttons execute the RENAME, RECALL,
STORE, and CLEAR functions. Detailed description
of their operation begins on page 156.
A graphic representation of the current compression
response for the currently selected channel. The hori-
zontal axis represents input level, and the vertical axis
represents output level.
C Meter
Displays the signal level after the compressor, and the
amount of gain reduction.
D Compression Curve
A graphic representation of the compression curve of
the currently selected compressor setting in the library
list.
E List
A list of all the settings stored in the library. The row
highlighted by a dotted frame is the setting currently
selected for operation. An
library settings.
icon indicates read-only
155
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EQ/Dynamics Processor Library Operation
F Buttons
These buttons execute the RENAME, RECALL,
STORE, and CLEAR functions. For details on their
operation refer to the following explanations.
Recalling EQ/Dynamics Library
settings
The procedure for recalling stored library settings is as
follows.
Access the page containing the library set-
tings to be recalled.
For details on accessing the various library pages refer
1
Changing EQ/Dynamics Library
Names
Here’s how you can change the names of the settings in
the libraries.
NOTE
Rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the
library setting to be recalled.
The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently
selected for recall.
2
• The names of read-only library settings (those marked with an
icon) cannot be changed.
Access the page containing the library to
be edited.
For details on accessing the various library pages refer
1
Move the cursor to the RECALL button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window confirming the recall operation will
appear.
3
The following illustration is an example of when the
RECALL button is pressed in the PAN/EQ screen EQ
Lib. page.
Rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the
library setting to be edited.
2
The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently
selected for editing.
HINT
• The [INC]/[DEC] keys can also be used to select library set-
tings.
Move the cursor to the RENAME button and
press the [ENTER] key.
3
HINT
The NAME EDIT popup window will appear.
• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RECALL button.
To actually recall the selected setting move
the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
4
16
HINT
• The recall confirmation popup window can be disabled if
details.
HINT
• Pressing the [F4] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RENAME button.
Enter a name for the selected library set-
4
ting, move the cursor to the OK button, and
details on name entry).
This confirms and enters the new name.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EQ/Dynamics Processor Library Operation
Storing EQ/Dynamics Library
settings
Erasing EQ/Dynamics Library
settings
The procedure for storing library settings is as follows.
The procedure for erasing unwanted library settings is as
follows.
NOTE
NOTE
• New settings cannot be stored to read-only library settings (those
marked with an
icon).
• Read-only library settings (those marked with an
be erased.
icon) cannot
• If you select and store to a library number that contains previously-
stored data, the previous data will be overwritten.
Access the page containing the library set-
tings to be erased.
For details on accessing the various library pages refer
1
Access the page containing the library to
which the settings are to be stored.
For details on accessing the various library pages refer
1
2
3
Rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the
library setting to be erased.
The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently
selected to be erased.
2
3
Rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the
library number to which the settings are to
be stored.
The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently
selected for storage.
Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window confirming the clear operation will
appear.
Move the cursor to the STORE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The NAME EDIT popup window will appear.
The following illustration is an example of when the
CLEAR button is pressed in the PAN/EQ screen EQ
Lib. page.
HINT
16
• Pressing the [F3] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the CLEAR button.
HINT
• Pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the STORE button.
To actually erase the selected setting move
the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
4
As required, enter a name for the selected
library setting, move the cursor to the OK
button, and press the [ENTER] key (refer to
page 32 for details on name entry).
4
The library setting will be stored.
HINT
• The store NAME EDIT popup window can be disabled if
details.
157
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 17
Scene Memory
In this section we’ll cover the functions and operation of the AW2400’s scene
memory.
About Scene Memory
The AW2400 allows the mix, effect, and other parameters for all channels to be stored in internal
“scene” memory. Up to 99 scenes can be stored for each song. Stored scenes can be recalled at
any time via the AW2400 panel controls or via MIDI program change commands. Scene recall
operations can also be recorded and played back as Automix data.
The main parameters stored with each scene are as follows:
• Fader positions for all channels and buses
• [ON] key settings
• Phase settings
• Routing settings
• Pan settings
• EQ settings
• Dynamics settings
• Attenuation settings
• Pair/group settings
• AUX send settings
• Effect parameter settings
Scene Memory Operation
Scene store and recall operations are carried out from the SCENE screen Library page.
To call this page press the SCENE/AUTOMIX/USB sec-
tion [SCENE] key as many times as necessary, or press the
[F1] key after pressing the [SCENE] key.
1 List
This area lists the data stored in the scene memory. The
line enclosed by the dotted frame indicates the data that is
selected for operation. Read-only data is indicated by a
“lock” icon.
This page contains the following items.
A
B RENAME button
Accesses the NAME EDIT popup window, where you can
edit the name of the scene selected in the list.
17
C RECALL button
Recalls the scene that is selected in the list.
D STORE button
Stores the current settings into the location selected in the
list.
B
C
D
E
F
E CLEAR button
Deletes the scene that is selected in the list.
F PROTECT button
Applies protection to the scene that is selected in the list.
159
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scene Memory Operation
Renaming a scene
Recalling scene data
Entering a new name for a scene.
Here’s how to recall (load) settings from a scene.
Call the SCENE screen Library page by
Call the SCENE screen Library page by
1
1
either pressing the [SCENE] key as many
times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1]
key after pressing the [SCENE] key.
either pressing the [SCENE] key as many
times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1]
key after pressing the [SCENE] key.
Rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the
scene to be renamed.
The dotted frame indicates the currently selected
scene. You can use the [DATA/JOG] dial to scroll
through the list regardless of the position of the cursor.
Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to scroll the list so
that the scene you want to recall is
enclosed in the dotted frame.
2
2
Move the cursor to the RECALL button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm the Recall
operation.
3
HINT
• In addition to the [DATA/JOG] dial, the [INC]/[DEC] keys can
be used to make selections.
Move the cursor to the RENAME button and
press the [ENTER] key.
3
The NAME EDIT popup window will appear.
HINT
• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RECALL button.
To execute the recall operation, move the
cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
4
The scene will be recalled.
HINT
HINT
• Pressing the [F4] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RENAME button.
• The confirmation popup window can be disabled so that it
does not appear when you perform a Recall operation. For
Enter the new name.Then move the cursor
4
to the OK button and press the [ENTER]
key. (For details on entering a name
17
The new name will be applied.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scene Memory Operation
Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to scroll through
the list to select the scene to be deleted
(the selected scene should be enclosed in
the dotted frame).
2
3
Storing scene data
Here’s how to store the current settings in a scene mem-
ory.
NOTE
Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm
the Delete operation.
• Scene 0 is a recall-only scene to which new data cannot be
stored.
• If you select and store to a scene that already contains data, the
previous scene data will be overwritten and lost. Be careful not to
overwrite scene data you want to keep.
Call the SCENE screen Library page by
1
either pressing the [SCENE] key as many
times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1]
key after pressing the [SCENE] key.
Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to scroll through
2
HINT
the list to select the store destination (the
store destination should be enclosed in the
dotted frame).
• Pressing the [F3] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the CLEAR button.
To execute the Delete operation, move the
cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
4
Move the cursor to the STORE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The NAME EDIT popup window will appear, allow-
ing you to assign a name to the data.
3
The scene will be deleted.
Protecting a scene
Applying protection to a scene so that it can’t be edited or
erased.
Call the SCENE screen Library page by
1
either pressing the [SCENE] key as many
times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1]
key after pressing the [SCENE] key.
HINT
Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to scroll through
2
the list to select the scene to be protected
(the selected scene should be enclosed in
the dotted frame).
• Pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the STORE button.
17
Enter the name as required, then move the
4
Move the cursor to the PROTECT button
and press the [ENTER] key.
When protection is turned on the PROTECT button
will appear inverted and a lock icon will appear to the
right of the scene name.
3
cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key. (For details on entering a
The scene will be stored.
Deleting scene data
Here’s how you can delete unwanted scene data.
Call the SCENE screen Library page by
“lock” icon
1
either pressing the [SCENE] key as many
times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1]
key after pressing the [SCENE] key.
161
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Recall Safe function
Using the Recall Safe function
You can specify that specific faders or specific channels will be excluded from Recall operations
when the scene is changed either manually or from an external MIDI device. This function is
called “Recall Safe.”
This is convenient, for example, if you are performing a mixdown while switching scenes, but
want to control specific channels manually.
C EFFECT button
Call the RCL Safe page by either pressing
the [SCENE] key as many times as neces-
sary, or by pressing the [F2] key after
pressing the [SCENE] key.
1
Turn this button on to prevent recall (recall safe) of the
effect settings. The button will appear inverted when
on.
The SCENE screen RCL Safe page will appear.
D CHANNEL field
Selects the recall safe channels. The mix parameters of
selected channels will not be recalled.
D
The CHANNEL field buttons correspond to the fol-
lowing channels.
• INPUT......................... Input channels 1–16
• EFFECT RETURN ..... Effect Return channels 1–4
• TRACK....................... Track channels 1–24
• BUS............................ Bus master 1, 2
A
B
• AUX............................ AUX send master 1–4
• EFFECT SEND .......... Effect send master 1–4
• STEREO..................... Stereo output channel
C
HINT
• All CHANNEL field buttons can be cleared (de-selected) by
pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key.
1 RCL.SAFE button
This button switches Recall Safe between ENABLE
and DISABLE. Move the cursor to this button and
press the [ENTER] key to switch to either ENABLE or
DISABLE.
Select the parameter(s) or channel(s) that
you want to set to Recall Safe, and activate
the corresponding button(s).
2
3
Move the cursor to the RCL.SAFE button
and press the [ENTER] key.
Recall Safe has now been enabled. The selected
parameter(s) and/or channel(s) will not be affected by
scene recall operations until you change this setting.
HINT
• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RCL.SAFE button.
B MODE field
17
The recall safe parameters can be selected from the
following:
HINT
• The RCL Safe page settings are shared by all songs.
• ALL button...........This prevents all parameters in
the scene from being recalled.
The entire scene is “recall safe”
and no change will occur if it is
inadvertently recalled.
• FADER button......Only the fader settings will not
be recalled.
• ON button.............Only the [ON] key settings will
not be recalled.
HINT
• Both the FADER and ON buttons can be on at the same time.
• When the ALL button is turned on the FADER and ON buttons
are automatically turned off.
NOTE
• Effect return settings are not affected by Recall Safe.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Moving scenes
Moving scenes
Scene data stored in any scene number from 1 through 99 can be moved to any other scene
number.
Call the Sort page by either pressing the
[SCENE] key as many times as necessary,
or by pressing the [F3] key after pressing
the [SCENE] key.
Move the cursor to the DESTINATION list
and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the
destination.
The destination will be indicated by the “INSERT
POINT” indication in this list.
1
3
The SCENE screen Sort page will appear.
Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button
and press the [ENTER] key.
A
4
The selected scene will be moved and the SOURCE
and DESTINATION lists will be updated to reflect the
results of the operation.
B
HINT
• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the EXECUTE button.
C
1 SOURCE list
Displays the scenes in their current order. The scene to
be moved is selected from this list.
B DESTINATION list
The move destination for the source scene selected
from the SOURCE list is selected here.
C EXECUTE button
Executes the scene move operation.
Move the cursor to the SOURCE list and
use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the scene
to be moved.
2
17
HINT
• In addition to the [DATA/JOG] dial, the [INC]/[DEC] keys can
be used to make selections.
163
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 18
Song management
This chapter explains how to perform song management operations such as
copying, deleting, backing up, and restoring songs.
About songs
■ Song Organization
■ Song Bit Depth
On the AW2400, your recorded compositions are man-
aged in units called “songs.” When you save a song on the
hard disk, the audio data, scene memories, and the data for
each library are all stored together. By loading a saved
song, you can return it to the original condition at any
time.
The AW2400 allows the bit depth of individual songs to
be set to either 16 or 24 bits. 24-bit songs are capable of
providing higher audio quality than 16-bit songs, but the
following limitations on the number of simultaneous
record/playback tracks apply.
Max. Simultaneous
Record Tracks
Max. Simultaneous
Play Tracks
You can store as many songs on the internal hard disk as
its capacity allows. Songs stored on hard disk are divided
into a song file containing all the basic setup information
for the song, and WAV files containing the audio data.
Song Bit Depth
16
:
8
:
16 bits
1
23
24*
4
0*
8
:
:
24 bits
1
11
12*
0*
* For mixdown the number of simultaneous record tracks is two, and the
number of simultaneous playback tracks is 24 for 16-bit songs, or 12
for 24-bit songs.
Only 24-bit audio data can be used in 24-bit songs. 16-bit
WAV files cannot be imported from a computer or CD-
RW drive. Audio data imported from audio CDs, however,
will be automatically converted to 24-bit format. In the
same way, only 16-bit audio data can be used in 16-bit
songs.
18
165
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About songs
■ Song Folder Organization
Song and related data stored on hard disk can be accessed from a computer
connected via USB in the same way as the hierarchical files and folders on the
computer’s hard disk. The folders are organized as follows:
“AW2400-1” Drive
“AW2400-2” Drive
Song2
002 Song Name.AWS 002 Song Name.AWS
Song1
001 Song Name.AWS 001 Song Name.AWS
0.WAV
1.WAV
2.WAV
3.WAV
0.WAV
1.WAV
2.WAV
3.WAV
Audio
Audio
Render
Render
004 Song Name.AWS
003 Song Name.AWS
005 Song Name.AWS
Transport
File Name1.WAV
File Name2.WAV
AW2400_SYS.BIN
■ “Song1” Folder
■ “Song2” Folder
Songs are stored in either the “Song1” or “Song2” folder.
Songs are stored in either the “Song1” or “Song2” folder.
■ Individual Song Folders
■ “Transport” Folder
Each song is stored in a folder bearing the song’s name
This folder is used to store WAV files for import and export.
(extension .AWS).
Data is stored as 16-bit or 24-bit WAV files.
● Song Files
The following song settings are stored in a file bearing
the name of the song (extension .AWS):
• Recorder section settings (SONG screen, TRACK screen).
• Mixer section settings (channels, effects).
• Library settings.
18
• REMOTE screen settings.
■ “Audio” Folder
The following song audio data is saved in WAV file for-
mat. File names are automatically created in the order of
recording, as in: “0.WAV”, “1.WAV”, “2.WAV”, etc. 24-bit
song data is saved as 32-bit WAV files.
• 24 + 2 (stereo track) audio x 8 virtual tracks.
• Sound clip audio data.
• Audio data for undo and redo operations.
● System File (AW2400_SYS.BIN)
Stores UTILITY screen settings and information for data man-
agement.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following operations are possible by directly access-
ing the data on the internal hard disk from a computer. For
• Specified audio data on the internal hard disk can be
directly edited from a computer using an appropriate
waveform editor application. The song will become
unplayable if you change the sampling frequency or
quantization of the audio data, but you can change the
length of the waveforms without problems.
NOTE
• For 24-bit songs, the audio data contained in the “Audio” folders is
stored in 32-bit WAV format. If your waveform editor application
cannot handle 32-bit data, first export the WAV file(s) to the “Trans-
port” folder. WAV files imported or exported via the “Transport”
folder are automatically converted to 24-bit format that can be
edited using most waveform editor software.
• Song data is created in either the “Song1” or “Song2” folder.You
may have to check both of these folders to locate a specific song.
• If you initialize the AW2400 hard disk from your computer it will
become unreadable by the AW2400. Always use the SONG
screen Song List page to initialize the AW2400 hard disk.
• WAV files transferred from a computer to the “Transport”
folder can be imported to the AW2400 audio tracks as
required, and specified regions of audio data can be
exported to the computer as WAV files which can then
be imported into computer-based DAW applications.
• The song folders also contain audio data for undo and redo opera-
tions that is not normally used.The undo/redo data can be deleted
• The entire contents of the internal hard disk or individual
songs can be backed up to the computer.
Managing Your Songs
Song management operations are accessed via the SONG screen Song List page. This page
also includes the shutdown functions.
To call this page press the [SONG] key in the Work Navi-
gate section a number of times, or press the [F1] key after
pressing the [SONG] key.
1 Song List
The songs stored on the internal AW2400 hard disk are
displayed here.
B LOAD button
This page contains the following items.
Loads a specified song.
A
C SAVE button
Saves a song.
D NEW button
Creates a new song.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
E COPY button
Copies a song.
18
F OPTIMIZE button
Optimizes a song.
G MIXER IMP button
Imports data from another song.
H DELETE button
I
Deletes a song.
I SHUTDOWN button
This function is used when turning the AW2400 power
167
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing Your Songs
Move the cursor toYES (to save the current
song) or NO (if you don’t want to save the
current song) and press the [ENTER] key.
3
J
K
LM
A popup window containing the various settings for
the new song will appear.
O
N
The following settings can be made via this popup
window.
J Song Name
K Song Size
L Song Bit Depth/Sampling Frequency
M Song Protect Status
• Fs ............................... The sample rate of the new
song can be set to either
44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.
N SORT box
Changes the order of songs displayed in the Song List.
• Recbit ........................ The bit depth of the new
song can be set to either 16
or 24 bits.
O The currently-selected song
• Sound Clip Time ....... The record time of the
Sound Clip.
■ Creating a new song
NOTE
In order to begin recording on the AW2400, you must first
create a new song.
• If you set the sample rate to 48 kHz, the song data will not be
able to be written as an audio CD.
Call the Song List page by either pressing
1
When each parameter has been set as
required, move the cursor to the OK button
and press the [ENTER] key.
Next, a popup window will appear allowing you to
specify settings that will be carried over from the cur-
rent song.
4
the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as
many times as necessary, or by pressing
the [F1] key after pressing the [SONG] key.
The SONG screen Song List page will appear. The
currently selected song in the Song List will be high-
lighted (inverted).
Move the cursor to the NEW button and
press the [ENTER] key.
2
A popup window will ask you whether you want to
save the current song.
18
You may choose one or more of the following items.
• SCENE Button .......... Scene memories
• TEMPO button........... Tempo map
• LIBRARY button ....... EQ, dynamics, effects, and
channel libraries
HINT
• Pressing the [F3] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the NEW button.
For example, if you have saved effect settings in a
library for the current song and would like to use these
settings for the new song as well, you would turn on
the LIBRARY button.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing Your Songs
Select the buttons of the items you want to
carry over from the current song, move the
cursor to the OK button, and press the
[ENTER] key.
5
■ Editing the song name
Here’s how to edit the song name that is assigned when
you create a new song.
The NAME EDIT popup window will appear, allow-
ing you to enter a name for the song.
NOTE
• This setting applies only to the current song. Before you perform
this procedure, load the song for which the name is to be edited.
Call the Setting page by either pressing the
1
Work Navigate section [SONG] key as many
times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2]
key after pressing the [SONG] key.
The SONG screen Setting page will appear.
To edit the song name, move the cursor to
the RENAME button and press the [ENTER]
key.
2
The NAME EDIT popup window will appear, allow-
ing you to edit the song name.
Assign a name to the song (for details on
6
7
NOTE
• A new song cannot be given the same name as an existing
song.
To create the new song, move the cursor to
the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
A new song will be created, and you will return to the
SONG screen Song List page.
HINT
• If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button (instead of the
OK button) and press the [ENTER] key, you will return to the
SONG screen Song List page without creating a new song.
Enter the new name.Then move the cursor
to the OK button and press the [ENTER]
key.
3
• You may also edit the song name later.
The new name will be applied, and the popup window
18
169
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing Your Songs
The load operation can be aborted by moving the cur-
sor to the CANCEL button and pressing the [ENTER]
key.
■ Loading and Sorting Songs
Here’s how to load an existing song from the hard disk.
NOTE
Call the Song List page by either pressing
1
the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as
many times as necessary, or by pressing
the [F1] key after pressing the [SONG] key.
• If you select NO, all changes you made after last saving the
current song will be lost.
The SONG screen Song List page will appear. The
currently selected song in the Song List will be high-
lighted (inverted).
■ Saving the current song
Here’s how to save the current song to the hard disk.
To change the order of the songs move the
2
cursor to the SORT box, use the [DATA/
JOG] dial to select the desired sort crite-
rion, and then press the [ENTER] key.
Call the Song List page by either pressing
1
the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as
many times as necessary, or by pressing
the [F1] key after pressing the [SONG] key.
The SONG screen Song List page will appear.
SORT Box
Move the cursor to the SAVE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
2
A popup window will ask you to confirm that you
want to save the current song.
Using the SORT box songs can be sorted according to
the following criteria:
• NAME ........Song names in alphabetical order.
• OLD ...........The order in which the songs were
saved, from newest to oldest.
• SIZE...........Song size, from largest to smallest.
To load a song move the cursor to a loca-
3
tion outside the SORT box, and use the
[DATA/JOG] dial to select the song to be
loaded.
HINT
• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the SAVE button.
The line enclosed by the dotted frame indicates the
selected song.
To save the song, move the cursor to the
OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
3
Move the cursor to the LOAD button in the
screen, and press the [ENTER] key.
4
The song will be saved and the display will revert to
the Song List (step 1). If you move the cursor to the
CANCEL button (instead of the OK button) and press
the [ENTER] key, the Save operation will be can-
celled.
A popup window will ask you whether you want to
save the current song.
18
NOTE
• The song save operation always saves the current song,
regardless of the song that is selected in the list.
• You cannot save a song that is protected. If for example you
have edited the mixer settings and need to save the song, you
must disable the protect setting and then save the song.
HINT
• Pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the LOAD button.
HINT
• If necessary, you can change the name of the song before
Move the cursor to eitherYES (if you want
5
• In the following situations, a popup window will ask whether
you want to save the current song; when you load an existing
song from the hard disk, when you create a new song, or
when you shut-down the AW2400.
to save the current song) or NO (if you do
not want to save the current song), and
press the [ENTER] key.
If you select “YES”, the song will be loaded after the
current song has been saved. If you select “NO”, the
song will be loaded and any changes to the current
song will be discarded.
• We recommend that you frequently save the song you are
safeguard against data loss due to accidents such as the
AW2400’s power cable being inadvertently disconnected.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing Your Songs
■ Deleting a song
Here’s how to delete a song from the hard disk.
■ Copying a song
Here’s how to copy a song in the hard disk.
NOTE
Call the Song List page by either pressing
1
• A deleted song will be lost forever. Use great caution when delet-
ing a song.
the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as
many times as necessary, or by pressing
the [F1] key after pressing the [SONG] key.
The SONG screen Song List page will appear. The
currently selected song in the Song List will be high-
lighted (inverted).
• You cannot delete a song for which protect is on, or delete the cur-
rent song (the highlighted song). In order to delete a protected
song or the current song, you must first turn off the protect setting
or switch to a different song.
Call the Song List page by either pressing
1
Move the cursor to a location outside the
SORT box, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to
select the song to be copied.
The line enclosed by the dotted frame indicates the
selected song to be copied.
2
the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as
many times as necessary, or by pressing
the [F1] key after pressing the [SONG] key.
The SONG screen Song List page will appear. The
currently selected song in the Song List will be high-
lighted (inverted).
Move the cursor to the COPY button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will prompt you to enter new song
name.
3
Move the cursor to a location outside the
SORT box, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to
select the song to be deleted.
2
The line enclosed by the dotted frame indicateds the
selected song to be deleted.
HINT
• If you have selected the current song as the song to be cop-
ied, a popup window will ask you whether you want to save
the current song. Move the cursor to either the YES button (if
you want to save) or the NO button (if you don’t want to save),
and then press the [ENTER] key.
Move the cursor to the DELETE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm the delete
operation.
3
Enter a new song title. (For details on input-
4
When the song name has been entered,
move the cursor to the OK button and press
the [ENTER] key.
5
A popup window will ask you to confirm the copy
operation.
To delete the song, move the cursor to the
OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
4
The song you selected in step 2 will be deleted, and
you will return to step 1. If you move the cursor to the
CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key, the
delete operation will be cancelled.
18
To execute the copy, move the cursor to the
OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
6
The song you selected in step 2 will be copied, and
you will return to step 1. If you move the cursor to the
CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key, the copy
operation will be cancelled.
171
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing Your Songs
■ Song Protection
Songs can be “protected” to prevent unwanted changes to
the data. When a song is protected it can’t be recorded to,
edited, or deleted.
■ Optimizing a song
“Optimize” is an operation that deletes the undo/redo
audio data maintained within the song. When you have
finished recording and editing a song you can Optimize it
to increase the amount of free space on the hard disk.
Call the Setting page by either pressing the
1
NOTE
Work Navigate section [SONG] key as many
times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2]
key after pressing the [SONG] key.
• The deleted undo/redo audio data will be lost forever. Use this
operation with caution.
The SONG screen Setting page will appear.
Call the Song List page by either pressing
1
Move the cursor to a location outside the
SORT box, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to
select the song to be protected.
the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as
many times as necessary, or by pressing
the [F1] key after pressing the [SONG] key.
2
The line enclosed by the dotted frame indicates the
selected song to be protected.
The SONG screen Song List page will appear. The
currently selected song in the Song List will be high-
lighted (inverted).
Move the cursor to the PROTECT button
and press the [ENTER] key.
When protection is turned on the PROTECT button
will be highlighted and a “lock” icon will appear to the
right of the song name.
3
Move the cursor to a location outside the
SORT box, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to
select the song to be optimized.
The line enclosed by the dotted frame indicates the
selected song to be optimized.
2
Lock icon
Move the cursor to the OPTIMIZE button,
and press the [ENTER] key.
3
A popup window will ask you to confirm the optimize
operation.
HINT
• We recommend that you turn protect on for important songs.
and adjust the mixer settings.
HINT
• You may select the current song to be optimized. In this case,
a popup window will ask you whether you want to save the
current song. Move the cursor to the OK button (if you want to
save) or the CANCEL button (if you don’t want to save), and
press the [ENTER] key.
18
To execute the optimize operation, move
the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
4
The undo/redo audio data of the song you selected in
step 2 will be deleted, and you will return to step 1. If
you decide not to execute the optimize operation,
move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the
[ENTER] key.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing Your Songs
■ Importing data from an existing song
Here’s how selected types of data such as scenes or librar-
ies can be imported into the current song from a song
saved on the hard disk.
NOTE
• When you execute this import operation, the previous data for that
item in the current song will be lost. Use this procedure with cau-
tion.
Call the Song List page by either pressing
1
the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as
many times as necessary, or by pressing
the [F1] key after pressing the [SONG] key.
The SONG screen Song List page will appear. The
currently selected song in the Song List will be high-
lighted (inverted).
Move the cursor to a location outside the
SORT box, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to
select the song to be imported.
2
The line enclosed by the dotted frame is the song you
have selected as the import-source.
Move the cursor to the MIXER IMP button,
and press the [ENTER] key.
3
A popup window will appear which allows you to
select the data to be imported.
You can choose one or more of the following items.
• SCENE button .............. Scene memories
• TEMPO button.............. Tempo map
• LIBRARY button........... EQ, dynamics, effects,
and channel libraries
18
Select the button(s) corresponding to the
4
items you want to import to the current
song, then move the cursor to the OK but-
ton and press the [ENTER] key.
Importing will begin. When the data has been
imported, you will return to the screen of step 1.
173
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing various settings for the song
Editing various settings for the song
Here’s how to edit various settings for a song, such as selecting the counter display format and
time code format.
NOTE
• These settings apply only to the current song. Before you perform this procedure, load the song to be
edited.
• The counter display setting will be saved with the song data when the song is saved.
Call the Setting page by either pressing the
Work Navigate section [SONG] key as many
times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2]
1
NOTE
• The counter in the upper right of the display always shows the
current location in measure/beat units, relative to the Start
point.
key after pressing the [SONG] key.
The SONG screen Setting page will appear.
• The measure/beat display will depend on the settings in the
To change the time code frame rate move
the cursor to the 24, 25, 30, or 30D button
and press the [ENTER] key.
3
You can choose one of the following frame rates to
specify the minimum unit of time code.
• 24 ..........24 frames/second
• 25 ..........25 frames/second
• 30 ..........30 frames/second (30 non-drop frame)
• 30D........29.97 frames/second (30 drop-frame)
HINT
• This setting affects both the counter time code display and the
MTC that the AW2400 transmits and receives. If the AW2400
is sending or receiving MTC to or from an external device, you
must set both devices to the same frame rate.
To change the counter display format move
the cursor to the ABS, RELATIVE, SECOND,
or TIME CODE button and press the
[ENTER] key.
2
NOTE
In the Setting page, use the following buttons to select
the display format for the counter that is shown in the
center of the top line in the display.
• The frame rate cannot be changed while the AW2400 is run-
ning.
• ABS (absolute time)
................Displays the current location in
hours/minutes/seconds/millisec-
onds, with the absolute time zero
location as 0.
18
• RELATIVE (relative time)
................Displays the current location in
hours/minutes/seconds/millisec-
onds, with the relative time zero
location as 0.
• SECOND...........Displays the current location in
hours/minutes/seconds/millisec-
onds, with the Start point as 0.
• TIME CODE......Displays the current location in
time code (hours/minutes/sec-
onds/frames), with the Start point
as 0.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a tempo map
Creating a tempo map
The “tempo map” contains data that changes the tempo or time signature at the beginning of the
song or at any measure or beat within the song. The measure/beat display counter, the internal
metronome, and the MIDI clock data generated within the AW2400 are all based on this tempo
map.
HINT
• The Start point of the song corresponds to the starting location of the tempo map.
• The data (“tempo map events”) recorded in the tempo map will continue to apply until the
next event of the same type is encountered.
NOTE
• If you modify the tempo map after recording on an audio track, the measure/beat counter
display values will be affected. For this reason if you want to use MIDI clock to synchro-
nize with an external MIDI device, or if you want to control the song in measure units, you
should create the tempo map before you record. If you modify the tempo map after a
track has already been recorded, a popup window will ask you for confirmation.
This page contains the following items.
■ Editing a tempo map event
1 List
When you create a new song, the following tempo map
This area lists the tempo map events that have been
event will be input at the beginning of the tempo map (the
entered for the current song. The line enclosed by a
first beat of the first measure).
dotted frame is the currently selected tempo map
• Time signature: 4/4
event.
• Tempo: 120.0
B LOCATE button
Here’s how to edit the values of this tempo map event.
By moving the cursor to this button and pressing the
[ENTER] key, you can move the song to the location
of the tempo map event currently selected in the list.
Call the EDIT screen Tempo Map page by
1
either pressing the Work Navigate section
[EDIT] key as many times as necessary, or
by pressing the [F2] key after pressing the
[EDIT] key.
C NEW button
To create an event at the beginning of the measure fol-
lowing the last step, move the cursor to this button and
press the [ENTER] key.
In this page you can input or edit tempo map events
for the current song.
D INSERT button
To insert a blank event at the step preceding the tempo
map event currently selected in the list, move the cur-
sor to this button and press the [ENTER] key.
F
G
H
I
E DELETE button
To delete the tempo map event currently selected in
the list, move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key.
18
A
B
F STEP
Indicates the step number of the tempo map event.
C
D
E
G MEASURE
Indicates the location (measure/beat) of the tempo
map event.
H METER
I TEMPO
These fields show the time signature and tempo of
each tempo map event.
175
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a tempo map
Move the cursor to the item that you want to
edit, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to edit the
value.
If the METER or TEMPO is “–”, move the cursor to
the item and press the [ENTER] key before you edit
the value.
2
■ Adding a tempo map event
Access the Tempo Map page, move the cur-
sor to the NEW button, and press the
[ENTER] key.
1
A blank tempo map event will be created after the last
step that is currently input.
NOTE
HINT
• The METER and TEMPO at the beginning of the song cannot
be set to “–”.
• If you use the INSERT button instead of the NEW button, a
blank tempo map event will be inserted before the currently
selected step. However, you cannot insert an event before the
tempo map event at the beginning of the song (i.e., the tempo
map event that is input when you create the song).
• You cannot change the METER value to other than “–” for a
step that is not located at beat 1.
Event
Range
Content
Specifies the time signature of the
song.
METER
1/4 to 8/4, –
Make sure that the cursor is outside the list,
and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select a
tempo map event that you created.
When the cursor is located outside the list, you can use
the [DATA/JOG] dial to scroll the contents of the list.
2
Specifies the tempo of the song.
You can set the tempo in units of
0.1 over a range of 30.0–250.0
BPM.
TEMPO 30.0 to 250.0, –
HINT
• You cannot delete the tempo map event located at the begin-
ning of the song, or change its location. If you want to change
the tempo or time signature during the song, you can insert a
new event.
Move the cursor to the MEASURE field of
3
the event that is selected in the list, and
turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to specify the
location of the event.
You can adjust the location of a tempo map event in
units of measures or beats. However, you cannot move
an event past the preceding or following event.
Move the cursor to the item that you want to
edit, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to adjust
the value.
4
If necessary, you can play back the song to check that
the tempo map event works as you expect.
In the same way, use the NEW or INSERT
button to add new events, and set their
parameters.
5
■ Deleting a tempo map event
Here’s how to delete an unwanted event from the tempo
map. (However, you cannot delete the event that is located
at the beginning of the song.)
18
Access theTempo Map page, and scroll the
list to select the tempo map event that you
want to delete.
1
Move the cursor to the DELETE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
2
The selected event will be deleted.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing up songs
Backing up songs
Here’s how you can back up songs from the internal hard disk to CD-R/RW media.
NOTE
• To backup AW2400 data to a computer, connect the AW2400 to the computer via a USB cable and copy the
song folders directly from the internal AW2400 hard disk to the computer. For detailed operation refer to
C ALL SET button
Insert CD-R/RW media into the CD-RW
drive.
1
2
Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]
key to select all songs in the list for backup. Pressing
the [F1] key whiled holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same affect as the ALL SET but-
ton.
Call the SONG screen Backup page by
either pressing the Work Navigate section
[SONG] key as many times as necessary, or
by pressing the [F3] key after pressing the
[SONG] key.
D ALL CLEAR Button
Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]
key to deselect all songs so that they won’t be backed
up. Pressing the [F2] key whiled holding the Display
section [SHIFT] key has the same affect as the ALL
CLEAR button.
In this page you can back up songs from the internal
hard disk to CD-R/RW media.
B
A
E AW2400 button / AW2816 button
Selects the backup format. If the songs are to be
restored on a Yamaha AW-series workstation other
than the AW2400 (AW4416, AW2816, AW1600,
AW16G), select the AW2816 button. This mode only
supports 44.1kHz/16-bit songs, and only one song can
be backed up at a time.
C
D
E
F BACKUP button
Executes backup of the selected song(s). Pressing the
[F4] key whiled holding the Display section [SHIFT]
key has the same affect as the BACKUP button.
F
Make sure that the cursor is in the list area,
use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the song
you want to back up, and then press the
[ENTER] key.
The symbol for the selected song will change to the
(●) symbol, indicating that this song has been selected
for backup. You can repeat this step to select multiple
songs for backup.
3
This page contains the following items.
1 List
This area lists the songs that are saved on the hard
disk. The symbols at the right of the list indicate
whether the song has been selected (●) or disabled
(
) for backup.
If you turn on the ALL SET button, you can select all
data in the list in one step.
18
B SORT box
Changes the order of the songs displayed in the song
177
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To execute the backup, move the cursor to
the BACKUP button and press the [ENTER]
key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm the opera-
tion.
Move the cursor to the OK button and press
the [ENTER] key.
Writing to the CD-R/RW media will begin. If you
decide to cancel the backup operation, move the cursor
to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.
4
5
While the backup operation is being executed, a popup
window will indicate the progress of the operation.
When the backup has been completed, you will return
to step 2.
If the backup data does not fit on a single volume of
media, a message of “Number Ejected Media, Insert
Blank Media.” will appear, and the media will be
ejected. Insert a new media volume. Then move the
cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
NOTE
• If previously-recorded CD-RW media is inserted in the CD-
RW drive, a popup window will ask you if it is OK to erase the
media first. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key, and the media will be erased.
NOTE
• You cannot execute the backup operation without selecting
data.
• If you execute the backup operation with the AS AW2400 but-
ton turned on, system data (the settings you make in the
UTILITY screen or the MIDI screen) will be backed up on the
media together with the selected data.
• If a CD-ROM or previously-recorded CD-R media is inserted
in the CD-RW drive, a popup window with a message of
“Change Media, Please” will appear, and the media will be
ejected. Remove the media, and replace it with writable
media.
• If you execute the backup operation with the AS AW2816 but-
ton turned on, data other than audio tracks will not be backed
up. All virtual tracks for tracks 1–16 are backup up. Tracks 17–
24 are not backed up. Only the current track data for stereo
track is backed up. Only 44.1kHz/16-bit songs are supported.
• When you restore data that was backed up to more than one
media volume, you must insert the media in the order in which
it was backed up. Be sure to make a note of the backup
sequence on the label surface of each CD-R/RW disc.
Restoring songs
Here’s how song data that you backed up to CD-R/RW media can be restored to the hard disk of
the AW2400.
Information will be read from the inserted CD-R/RW
media. When the information has been read, a display
like the following will appear.
Insert the CD-R/RW media containing the
backup data into the CD-RW drive.
If the backup data occupies more than one volume of
media, insert the first volume.
1
18
B
A
Call the SONG screen Restore page by
either pressing the Work Navigate section
[SONG] key as many times as necessary, or
by pressing the [F4] key after pressing the
[SONG] key.
2
C
D
In this page, song data that you backed up to CD-R/
RW media can be restored to the internal hard disk.
E
Make sure that the cursor is located at the
READ CD INFO button, and press the
[ENTER] key.
3
F
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Restoring songs
This page contains the following items.
To execute the restore operation, move the
cursor to the RESTORE button and press
the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm the opera-
tion.
6
7
1 List
This area lists the data that has been backed up on the
CD-R/RW media. The symbols at the right of the list
indicate whether an item of data has been selected (●)
or disabled ( ) for restore.
NOTE
• The maximum number of songs that can be displayed is 100.
B SORT box
Changes the order of the songs displayed in the song
Move the cursor to the OK button if you
want to execute the restore operation (or to
the CANCEL button if you decide not to
restore), and press the [ENTER] key.
The current song will be saved automatically, and the
restore operation will begin.
C ALL SET button
Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]
key to select all songs in the list to be restored. Press-
ing the [F1] key whiled holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same affect as the ALL SET but-
ton.
A popup window will indicate the progress of the
restore operation. When the operation is finished, you
will return to step 3.
D ALL CLEAR button
Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]
key to deselect all songs so that they won’t be restored.
Pressing the [F2] key whiled holding the Display sec-
tion [SHIFT] key has the same affect as the ALL
CLEAR button.
If the backup occupied more than one CD-R/RW disc,
a message of “Exchange Next Media #XXX” (where
XXX is a number) will be displayed during the restore
process. Exchange the CD-R/RW media for the media
of the corresponding number. Then move the cursor to
the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
E SYSTEM button
Selects the system data (AW2400 settings you make in
the UTILITY screen) for restoring.
NOTE
F RESTORE button
• When a song with the same name already exists, the name of
the restored song will automatically be changed. For exam-
ple, if “001_Song” already exists, the song name will be
altered as in: “001_Song0”, “001_Song1” ... etc.
Restores of the selected song(s). Pressing the [F4] key
whiled holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has
the same affect as the RESTORE button.
Make sure the cursor is in the list area, use
the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the song you
want to restore, then press the [ENTER]
key.
The symbol at the right will change to the (●) symbol,
indicating that this song data has been selected for
restoring.
4
5
If you turn on the ALL SET button, all data shown in
the list will be selected in one step.
18
If you want to restore the system data,
move the cursor to the SYSTEM button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The button will be turned on, and the system data will
be selected for restoring.
179
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exchanging Song Data With Other AW-series Audio Workstations
Exchanging Song Data With Other AW-series Audio Workstations
You can back up an AW2400 song in a format that is compatible with the other AW-series
(AW4416/AW2816/AW1600/AW16G). Conversely, a song that was backed up by the other AW-
series can be restored into the AW2400.
NOTE
• Only the audio data recorded in a song can be exchanged with the other AW-series workstations.
Mix parameters, libraries, and system data cannot be backed-up/restored in this way.
■ Backing up an AW2400 song in a format
■ Restoring songs from other
compatible with the other AW-series
AW-series workstations
If you turn on the AW2816 button in the Backup page of
the SONG screen, the data will be saved in the AW2816
backup file format.
An AW2816 backup file can be restored into the other
AW-series (version 2.0 or later for AW4416). For the pro-
cedure, refer to “Backing up songs,” earlier in this manual.
Insert the CD-R/RW media containing
songs from other AW-series workstations
to be restored into the AW2400.
1
Call the SONG screen Restore page by
2
either pressing the Work Navigate section
[SONG] key as many times as necessary, or
by pressing the [F4] key after pressing the
[SONG] key.
NOTE
• Backup in the AW2816 backup file format is limited to one song at
a time.
• When you perform a backup in the AW2816 backup file format,
data other than the audio tracks will not be backed up. All virtual
tracks for tracks 1–16 are backup up.Tracks 17–24 are not backed
up. Only the current track data for stereo track is backed up. Only
44.1kHz/16-bit songs are supported.
Make sure that the cursor is located at the
READ CD INFO button, and press the
[ENTER] key.
3
Information will be read from the inserted CD-R/RW
media.
• Depending on the data size, some songs can’t be saved as
AW2816 backup files. If this problem occurs use the Optimize
function to reduce the data size.
Make sure the cursor is in the list area, use
4
the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the song you
want to restore, then press the [ENTER]
key.
A “●” mark will appear for songs selected to be
restored.
NOTE
• The list will show all the songs that were backed up to CD-R/
RW media, but you can execute the restore operation only for
44.1 kHz/16-bit songs.
Repeat step 4 to select all of the other AW-
series songs that you want to restore.
5
18
Move the cursor to the RESTORE button
and press the [ENTER] key.
6
A popup window will ask you to confirm the opera-
tion.
Move the cursor to the OK button if you
want to execute the restore operation, and
press the [ENTER] key.
7
The restore operation will begin. While the song data
is being loaded, a popup window will indicate the
progress.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 19
Automix
Operation of the AW2400 Automix features is described below.
About Automix
Automix allows operations such as fader moves and [ON] switch state changes to be recorded
and played back in real time. For example, you can record complex mixdown/bounce operations
using Automix so that they can be precisely reproduced as many times as necessary.
The parameters that can be recorded by Automix are as follows.
• Fader operation for each channel
• [ON] key operation for each channel
• Pan operation for each channel
• EQ operation for each channel
• AUX and effect send operation for each channel
• Scene and library recall operations
When recording to Automix you can break complex oper-
ations down and record them channel by channel or
parameter by parameter in several takes, and even “punch
in/out” so you can record just a specified region of a song.
Furthermore, the recorded Automix data can be displayed
in a list and edited for precise control.
Up to 16 Automix sequences can be recorded in a dedi-
cated library and recalled whenever needed. The current
Automix data as well as the Library contents are saved
independently with each AW2400 song.
Automix Operation
Automix operation is carried out from the AUTOMIX screen Automix page.
To call this page press the SCENE/AUTOMIX/USB sec-
tion [AUTOMIX] key as many times as necessary, or
press the [F1] key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key.
This page contains the following items.
1 MODE field
Turns Automix on or off, as well as switching between the
record and playback modes.
• ENABLE/DISABLE button
...................Enables or disables Automix.
A
B
C
• STOP button....... Stops Automix recording or playback
(does not affect recorder operation).
Appears inverted when Automix is
stopped.
19
• PLAY button....... While the recorder section is running
and Automix recording/playback is
stopped, pressing this button after
pressing the REC button engages
the Automix record standby mode.
Appears inverted during Automix
recording and playback.
D
181
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automix Operation
• REC button ..........Turning this button on while the
recorder section is stopped engages
the Automix record standby mode.
When the recorder section is run-
ning it is necessary to press the
PLAY button after the REC button to
engage the Automix record standby
mode.
Creating a New Automix
Recording
A new Automix recording must be created before actual
Automix recording can occur.
NOTE
This button is automatically disen-
gaged when recording is completed.
• The contents of the current Automix recording will be erased when
a new Automix recording is created. To save the current Automix
• AUTOREC button
.....................Engages the Automix record
standby mode. Unlike the REC but-
ton, this button remains engaged
after recording is completed and the
record standby mode will remain
engaged until it is manually turned
off.
Use the channel faders, pan controls, EQ,
1
etc., to set up the mix at the beginning of
the current song, and save the mix as a
scene.
The saved “initial” scene will serve as the starting
point for the Automix recording. To use a different
scene as the starting point for the Automix recording,
recall the desired scene. Refer to “Scene Memory
HINT
• Pressing the [F1]–[F4] keys while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the ENABLE/DISABLE ([F1]
key), STOP ([F2] key), PLAY ([F3] key), and REC ([F4] key) but-
tons, respectively.
HINT
B COMMAND field
Allows creation of a newAutomix recording, and provides
an undo function.
• When a new Automix recording is created, a “recall event” for
the last saved or recalled scene is recorded at the very begin-
ning of the Automix recording. This initial scene can be
changed later, as described on page 188.
• NEW button..........Clears the current Automix data to
make way for a new Automix record-
ing.
Call the AUTOMIX screen Automix page by
2
• UNDO button .......Clears the last recorded Automix
data, returning to the state immedi-
ately before the last Automix record-
ing pass.
either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many
times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1]
key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key.
C OVERWRITE field
Selects the parameters to be recorded (or overwritten) by
Automix recording.
The buttons correspond to the parameters as follows.
Move the cursor to the NEW button in the
COMMAND field and press the [ENTER]
key.
A confirmation popup window for the new Automix
recording will appear.
3
• CH ON button ......[ON] key operation for each channel
• FADER button......Fader operation for each channel
• AUX/EFFECT SEND ON button
.....................AUX and effect send operation for
each channel (mute on/off)
• AUX/EFFECT SEND button
.....................AUX and effect send level operation
for each channel
• EQ button.............EQ operation for each channel
• PAN button...........Pan operation for each channel
19
Move the cursor to the OK button and press
the [ENTER] key.
4
HINT
The current Automix data will be erased and a new
Automix recording will be created.
• Using the RETURN TIME field to the right of the FADER button
you can specify how long it will take the faders to return to their
original positions when Automix recording is stopped or punched
Creation of a new Automix recording can be aborted
by moving the cursor to the CANCEL button and
pressing the [ENTER] key.
• Scene and library recall operations are always recorded, regard-
less of the OVERWRITE field settings.
D FREE
Displays the amount of free Automix memory available in
kilobytes (KB) and as a percentage.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automix Operation
Move the cursor to the MODE field and
press the REC button.
The REC button will flash. The Automix record
standby mode is now engaged, and the [AUTOMIX]
key will flash red.
5
Recording the Automix Data
Here’s how to record mix operation data to the newly cre-
ated Automix recording.
Move the song location to just before the
point at which you want to begin recording
the Automix data.
1
Call the AUTOMIX screen Automix page by
2
either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many
times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1]
key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key.
Move the cursor to the
3
HINT
ENABLE/DISABLE button in
the MODE field and press the
[ENTER] key.
• You can also begin recording after engaging the AUTOREC
button rather than the REC button. The REC button is auto-
matically turned off when you stop recording and the record
standby mode is disengaged, but the AUTOREC button
remains on and the record standby mode remains engaged
until it is manually turned off.
The button will switch to
“ENABLE”, and Automix operation
will be enabled.
Use the Layer section keys to select the
mixing layer that includes the channels you
want to operate.
For example, to record operations on the track channel
faders engage either the Layer section [TRACK 1-12]
or [TRACK 13-24] key.
6
Move the cursor to the OVERWRITE field
and engage the buttons corresponding to
the parameters you want to record.
Use the OVERWRITE field buttons to select the types
of data you want to record: CH ON. FADER, AUX/
EFFECT SEND ON, AUX EFFECT SEND, EQ, PAN.
Parameters corresponding to buttons that are not
engaged will not be recorded even if they are operated
during Automix recording.
4
HINT
• You can switch mixing layers even after Automix recording
has been started.
• If you plan to record operations performed in the Selected
Channel section it is a good idea to select the appropriate
parameters before starting recording. For example, if you plan
to record pan changes, engage the Selected Channel section
[PAN/EQ] key before beginning.
Press the top-panel PLAY [ ] key to start
song playback.
The [AUTOMIX] key will light red and Automix
recording will begin. But at this point no channel has
been selected so no data recording will actually take
place.
7
8
Use the [INPUT SEL], [SEL], or [STEREO
SEL] keys to select the channel for which
Automix data is to be recorded.
HINT
19
• Scene and library recall operations will be recorded regard-
less of the OVERWRITE field button selections.
The selected key will flash orange and the correspond-
ing channel’s parameters can be recorded to Automix.
HINT
• Multiple channels can be selected for Automix recording.
• If you press a key that is flashing orange during Automix
recording, the key will light continuously and Automix record-
ing for the corresponding channel will be disengaged
(punched out). Refer to “Punch In and Out of Automix” on
page 185 for details.
183
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automix Operation
Perform the required mix operations.
The specified mix parameters will be recorded for the
specified channel(s).
When all required mix operations have
been recorded, press the top-panel STOP
[■] key to stop the song.
9
10
The [AUTOMIX] key will go out, the MODE field
REC button will be turned off, and the Automix record
standby mode will be disengaged. At the same time a
popup window asking you to confirm whether you
want to update the recorded Automix data will appear.
The parameters specified for recording in step 4 are
actually recorded as follows.
● CH ON/FADER
Operate the channel [ON] key or fader.
● AUX/EFFECT SEND ON
Call the AUX or EFFECT screen, move the cursor to
the channel for which AUX or effect send is to be
turned on or off, and press the [ENTER] key.
● AUX/EFFECT SEND
Call the AUX or EFFECT screen and rotate the appro-
priate Selected Channel knob, 1–4. Alternatively you
can move the cursor to the appropriate on-screen knob
and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to
adjust the send level.
HINT
• Automix recording can be stopped without stopping song
playback by moving the cursor to the STOP button in the
AUTOMIX screen Automix page and pressing the [ENTER]
key (or by pressing the [F2] key while holding the [SHIFT]
key).
NOTE
• Effect parameter operations can not be recorded to Automix.
• If you turn on the AUTOREC button rather than the REC but-
ton in step 5, the Automix record standby mode will remain
engaged even when song playback is stopped. This method
is best when you want to make repeated passes at an Auto-
mix recording.
● EQ
Recall the PAN/EQ screen and use the [LOW], [LO-
MID], [HI-MID], or [HIGH] key to band to be
adjusted, then use Selected Channel knobs 2–4 to
adjust the selected band as required. Alternatively you
can move the cursor to the appropriate knobs in the
PAN/EQ screen EQ/Att. page and use the [DATA/
JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to adjust the EQ. EQ
ON/OFF switching is also recorded.
To confirm and update the recorded data
move the cursor to the OK button and press
the [ENTER] key.
The recorded Automix data will be updated. You can
abort this operation and revert to the previously
recorded Automix data by moving the cursor to the
CANCEL button rather than the OK button and press-
ing the [ENTER] key.
11
NOTE
• ATT. knob operation and EQ type selections are not recorded
to Automix.
HINT
• After confirming and updating the recorded Automix data you
can still undo the operation and revert to the previously
recorded Automix data by moving the cursor to the UNDO
button in the COMMAND field and pressing the [ENTER] key.
Please note that the top-panel [UNDO] key cannot be used to
undo Automix recordings.
● PAN
Recall the PAN/EQ screen and rotate Selected Chan-
nel knob 1. Alternatively you can move the cursor to
the on-screen knobs and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or
[INC]/[DEC] keys to adjust the PAN.
• The current Automix data can be stored to the Automix library
or a preciously stored Automix recording can be recalled from
for details.
NOTE
• When making an Automix recording for multiple channels,
only the last channel selected can be operated via the
Selected Channel controls.
19
• During Automix recording the [INPUT SEL], [SEL], and [STE-
REO SEL] keys are used to punch the corresponding chan-
nels in or out. The safest way to switch the selected channel
during Automix recording is to move the cursor to the appro-
priate location in the PAN/EQ, EFFECT, or AUX screen.
● Scene/Library
Scene, channel, EQ, gate, compressor, and effect set-
ups are recalled via the corresponding library pages.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automix Operation
Automix Playback
Punch In and Out of Automix
Playing back an Automix recording.
Punch-In/Out recording is handy if you want to re-record
just a portion of anAutomix recording. The procedure will
be described in this section, using re-recording of a track
channel fader move as an example.
Call the AUTOMIX screen Automix page by
1
either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many
times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1]
key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key.
Locate the song to a point just before you
want to begin re-recording the Automix
data.
1
Make sure that the ENABLE/DISABLE but-
ton is set to “ENABLE”.
2
Call the AUTOMIX screen Automix page by
2
If it is set to “DISABLE” move the cursor to the but-
ton and press the [ENTER] key. The [AUTOMIX] key
will light green.
either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many
times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1]
key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key.
Press the top-panel PLAY [ ] key to start
song playback.
Automix playback will begin along with song play-
back. During this time the MODE field PLAY button
will appear inverted.
3
Make sure that the MODE field ENABLE/
DISABLE button is set to “ENABLE”.
3
Move the cursor to the OVERWRITE field
and engage the buttons corresponding to
the parameters you want to record.
4
HINT
• If playback of a recorded Automix track is started from a point
other than the beginning of the track, the mix at that point will
be recalled (the parameters immediately prior to the point at
which playback was begun will be recalled). This means that
you will hear the correct mix no matter where you start play-
back.
NOTE
• If you re-record a previously-recorded parameter to the same
channel, the previously recorded data for that parameter will
be overwritten. If the parameter to be recorded has not
already been recorded in the target track, no data will be over-
written.
To stop Automix playback press the top-
panel STOP [■] key.
Both song playback and Automix playback will stop.
4
Set the return time as required by moving
the cursor to the RETURN TIME field and
using the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC].
Return time determines the length of time it will take
for the faders to return to the previously-recorded lev-
els afterAutomix recording has been punched out. The
RETURN TIME range is OFF, 0.0–30.0 seconds.
5
Automix playback will stop automatically if song
playback is continued past the point at which Automix
recording was stopped (song playback will continue).
Return Time
19
● Return Time Operation
No return time
(“0” setting).
Return time
Original data
Original data
Punch in
Punch out
Punch in
Punch out
185
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Move the cursor to the MODE field and turn
the REC button on.
The REC button will flash. This engages the Automix
record standby mode, and the [AUTOMIX] key will
flash red.
Operate the fader as required.
6
10
11
HINT
• If no operations are performed between the punch-in and
punch-out points all data corresponding to the selected
parameter data in the selected channel will be erased. This is
a handy way to erase all occurrences of specified data in a
specified punch-in/out region.
HINT
• The AUTOREC button can be turned on rather than the REC
button to engage the Automix record standby mode.
When the required operations have been
performed press the same key that you
pressed in step 9.
The key will go out and Automix recording will stop
(punch out). The Automix record mode will remain
active, but since no channel is selected no data can
actually be recorded (you can press the key again to
punch in again and continue recording if desired).
Use the Layer section keys to select the
mixing layer that includes the channels you
want to operate.
7
8
Press the top-panel PLAY [ ] key to start
song playback.
The [AUTOMIX] key will light red and Automix
recording will begin. But at this point no channel has
been selected so no data recording will actually take
place.
HINT
• After punching the fader move in and out, the fader will return
to the previously-recorded level at a rate determined by the
specified return time.
When the punch-in point is reached use the
[INPUT SEL], [SEL], or [STEREO SEL] keys
to select the channel for which Automix
data is to be recorded.
The selected key will flash orange and the correspond-
ing channel’s parameters can be recorded to Automix.
9
When all required mix operations have
been recorded, press the top-panel STOP
[■] key to stop the song.
A popup window asking you to confirm whether you
want to update the recorded Automix data will appear.
12
13
To confirm and update the recorded data
move the cursor to the OK button and press
the [ENTER] key.
The recorded Automix data will be updated.
Command Editing Automix data In a Specified Region
This section describes how you can edit specified Automix data within a specified region using
commands.
This page contains the following items.
Call the AUTOMIX screen Edit page by
either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many
times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2]
key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key.
1
19
A
B
C
D
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command Editing Automix data In a Specified Region
The display will change according to the selected edit
command as follows.
1 PARAMETERS field
The following parameters can be selected for editing.
• FADER, CH ON, PAN, EQ buttons
...........Faders, Channel [ON] keys, pan, and
EQ operations.
● When the ERASE command is selected:
B
C
• LIBRARY (CH, GATE, COMP, EQ) buttons
...........Channel library (CH), gate library
(GATE), compressor library (COMP),
and EQ library (EQ) recall.
• SCENE button .................Scene recall.
• EFF LIB 1–4 buttons .......Effect 1–4 library recall.
A
• AUX/ON 1–4 buttons.......AUX 1–4 send level and
on/off switching.
1 The target channel can be selected from
• EFF/ON 1–4 buttons........Effect 1–4 send level
the following.
and on/off switching.
• IN 1–16 ....... Input channels 1–16
B COMMAND
Displays the currently selected edit command.
• TR 1–24 ...... Track channels 1–24
• RTN 1–4...... Effect return channels 1–4
• BUS 1, 2 ..... Bus master channels 1, 2
• AUX 1–4...... AUX send master channels 1–4
• EFF 1–4 ...... Effect send master channels 1–4
• ST ............... Stereo output channel
• ALL............. All channels
C Channel/Region
The channel and region to which the edit command
will apply are specified here. The display will change
according to the command selected in B.
HINT
• The channel selection will be ignored when editing library,
scene or effect settings.
B The start point of the region to be edited is
specified in counter format.
C The end point of the region to be edited is
D EXECUTE button
specified in counter format.
The selected edit command is executed when the cur-
sor is moved to this button and the [ENTER] key is
pressed.
● When the COPY or MOVE command is
selected:
Move the cursor to the button in the
PARAMETERS field corresponding to the
parameter to be edited, and press the
[ENTER] key.
2
3
B
C
A
Multiple parameters can be selected.
Move the cursor to the COMMAND field and
use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC]
keys to select a command, then press the
[ENTER] key.
D
E
1 Specifies the source channel for the copy
or move operation.
The following commands can be selected.
• ERASE........Erase all occurrences of the specified
The channels that can be selected are the same as
for ERASE, above.
parameter(s) in the specified region.
• COPY..........Copy all occurrences of the specified
parameter(s) in the specified region to
the specified position in the specified
destination channel.
B The start point of the source region for the
copy or move operation specified in
counter format.
19
C The end point of the source region for the
copy or move operation is specified in
counter format.
• MOVE..........Move all occurrences of the specified
parameter(s) in the specified region to
the specified position in the specified
destination channel. The original
D Specifies the destination channel for the
copy or move operation.
parameters will be erased.
Depending on the source channel for copy or
move operation, the channels that can be selected
vary.
E The start point of the destination region
for the copy or move operation specified
in counter format.
187
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Move the cursor to the appropriate fields
and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]
keys to selected the channel and/or region.
Move the cursor to the OK button to exe-
4
5
6
cute the command, or move the cursor to
the CANCEL button to cancel without exe-
cuting.Then press the [ENTER] key.
Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button,
and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm the opera-
tion.
Editing Individual Automix Events
Individual Automix events can be moved, erased, or value-edited via an Automix event list.
Call the AUTOMIX screen Event List page
by either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as
many times as necessary, or by pressing
the [F3] key after pressing the [AUTOMIX]
key.
1 SELECTED CH ONLY button
When this button is engaged only events in the cur-
rently selected channel are shown in the list.
1
B PARAM
Selects the type of parameters to be shown in the event
This page contains the following items.
list.
C Event list
A
B
C
Individual events of the parameter type selected in the
PARAM field are shown in the event list. The event
enclosed by a dotted frame is currently selected for
editing.
Move the cursor to the
icon to the left of the list
and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to
scroll through the event list.
D DUPLICATE button
Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]
key to create a duplicate of the selected event at the
same location.
19
E DELETE button
Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]
key to delete the selected event.
D
E
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing Individual Automix Events
To display only events in a specific channel,
move the cursor to the SELECTED CH
ONLY button and press the [ENTER] key,
then select the desired channel.
1 TIME
Specifies the position of the event.
2
3
B CH
Specifies the channel to which the event will apply.
C Value
Move the cursor to the PARAM field and
press the [ENTER] key to select the type of
parameter to be displayed in the event list.
Edits the value of the event type specified in the
PARAM field.
Value
(Display)
The available parameter types are as follows.
Parameter
Description
Display
SCENE/LIB
FADER
Parameter
Scene/library recall
Scene/library type and scene/
library number
SCENE
SCENE/LIB
Fader operation
[ON] key operation
Pan operation
FADER
ON
dB, SEC
ON/OFF
Fader level, return time
Channel on/off status
ON
PAN
L63 (full left)–C (center)–
R63 (full right)
PAN
L-C-R
AUX/EFF
AUX/EFF ON
EQ (ON)
EQ (FREQ)
EQ (Q)
AUX/effect send operation
AUX/effect on/off
EQ on/off
AUX/EFF
AUX/EFF, dB AUX/effect type and send level
AUX/EFF,
ON/OFF
AUX/effect type and on/off
status
AUX/EFF ON
EQ center frequency
EQ bandwidth
EQ (ON)
EQ (FREQ)
EQ (Q)
ON/OFF
EQ on/off status
Hz
Q
EQ center frequency
EQ bandwidth
EQ (GAIN)
EQ gain
EQ (GAIN)
dB
Level of the operated band
Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]
keys to select the type of parameter to be
displayed in the list, then press the
[ENTER] key.
4
5
Move the cursor to the appropriate item in
the even list. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or
[INC]/[DEC] keys to set the value as
required, then press the [ENTER] key.
6
7
The specified events will appear in the event list.
The edited data will change immediately.
Move the cursor to the
icon to the left of
the list and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or
[INC]/[DEC] keys to scroll through the event
list and select the event to be edited.
The event enclosed by a dotted frame is currently
selected for editing.
When you want to add a new event, first
move the cursor to the DUPLICATE button
and press the [ENTER] key.
A copy of the currently selected event will be created
at the same location. You can then edit the time, chan-
nel, or value as required.
HINT
• The cursor can be quickly moved to the
the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key.
icon by pressing
HINT
• Pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the DUPLICATE button.
• When the cursor is inside the event list the cursor keys can
also be used to scroll up and down the event list.
To delete an unneeded event move the cur-
sor to the DELETE button and press the
[ENTER] key.
8
Items that can be edited in the event list are as follows.
A
B
C
The currently selected event will be deleted.
HINT
19
• Pressing the [F3] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the DELETE button.
189
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automix Library Operation
Automix Library Operation
Automix data can be stored to a specialized Automix library and recalled whenever needed. Up
to 16 Automix recordings can be saved for each song, so you can easily create and compare
multiple mixes for the same song.
About the Automix Library Page
Changing Automix Names
Automix data can be saved to and recalled from the Auto-
mix library via the AUTOMIX screen Library page.
To call this page press the SCENE/AUTOMIX/USB sec-
tion [AUTOMIX] key as many times as necessary, or
press the [F4] key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key.
This page contains the following items.
Here’s how you can change the names of the data in the
Automix library.
Call the AUTOMIX screen Library page by
1
either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many
times as necessary, or by pressing the [F4]
key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key.
A
Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]
keys to select the Automix data to be
edited.
2
The data highlighted by a dotted frame is currently
selected for editing.
B
C
D
E
F
Move the cursor to the RENAME button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The NAME EDIT popup window will appear.
3
HINT
• Pressing the [F4] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RENAME button.
G
Enter a name for the selected Automix data,
4
move the cursor to the OK button, and
details on name entry).
1 List
A list of all the Automix data stored in the library. The
Automix data enclosed in a dotted frame is the one cur-
rently selected for operation. A “lock” icon indicates pro-
tected Automix data.
This confirms and enters the new name.
B RENAME button
Accesses the NAME EDIT popup window, where you can
edit the name of the Automix selected in the list.
C RECALL button
Recalls the Automix data that is selected in the list.
D STORE button
Stores the current Automix settings into the location
selected in the list.
19
E CLEAR button
Deletes the Automix data that is selected in the list.
F PROTECT
Applies protection to the Automix data that is selected in
the list.
G FREE
Displays the amount of free Automix memory available in
kilobytes (KB), as a percentage, and as a graph.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automix Library Operation
Storing Automix settings
Recalling Automix settings
Storing the current Automix data to the Automix library.
Recalling stored Automix data from the library.
NOTE
Call the AUTOMIX screen Library page by
1
• If you select and store to a library number that contains previously-
stored data, the previous data will be overwritten.
either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many
times as necessary, or by pressing the [F4]
key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key.
Call the AUTOMIX screen Library page by
1
Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]
keys to select the library data to be
recalled.
either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many
times as necessary, or by pressing the [F4]
key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key.
2
The data highlighted by a dotted frame is currently
selected for recall.
Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]
keys to select the library number to which
the data is to be stored.
The data highlighted by a dotted frame is currently
selected for storage.
2
Move the cursor to the RECALL button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window confirming the recall operation will
appear.
3
Move the cursor to the STORE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
3
HINT
• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RECALL button.
The NAME EDIT popup window will appear.
HINT
To actually recall the selected data move
the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
• Pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the STORE button.
4
The library data will be recalled.
As required, enter a name for the selected
4
Automix data, move the cursor to the OK
button, and press the [ENTER] key (refer to
page 32 for details on name entry).
Erasing Automix settings
The automix setting will be stored.
Erasing unneeded Automix data from the library.
NOTE
• Erased Automix data cannot be recovered. Use this function with
caution.
Call the AUTOMIX screen Library page by
1
either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many
times as necessary, or by pressing the [F4]
key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key.
Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]
keys to select the Automix data to be
erased.
2
19
The data highlighted by a dotted frame is currently
selected to be erased.
Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and
press the [ENTER] key.
3
A popup window confirming the clear operation will
appear.
HINT
• Pressing the [F3] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the CLEAR button.
To actually erase the selected data move
the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
4
191
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automix Library Operation
Protecting Automix Data
Applying protection to Automix data to prevent accidental
erasure.
Call the AUTOMIX screen Library page by
1
either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many
times as necessary, or by pressing the [F4]
key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key.
Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]
keys to select the Automix data to be pro-
tected.
2
The data highlighted by a dotted frame is currently
selected for operation.
Move the cursor to the PROTECT button
and press the [ENTER] key.
3
When protection is turned on the PROTECT button
will appear inverted and a lock icon will appear to the
right of the Automix name.
19
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 20
MIDI
This section will describe the basic MIDI settings as well as the various MIDI
features and capabilities provided.
What you can do using MIDI
On the AW2400, you can use MIDI to do the following things.
• Example: recording/playing scene selections and
mix parameter operations on a MIDI sequencer
(computer)
● Synchronize operation with an external
device
You can synchronize an AW2400 song with playback of
an external device (such as a MIDI sequencer) by
exchanging synchronization messages such as MTC
(MIDI Time Code) or MIDI Clock with the external
device.
Control changes
Program changes
MIDI OUT/
THRU connector
MIDI IN
AW2400
MIDI IN
connector
MIDI OUT
● Remote control of AW2400 transport func-
tions
Control changes
Program changes
You can transmit MMC (MIDI Machine Control) mes-
sages from a MIDI sequencer or other external MIDI
device to the AW2400 to remotely control the AW2400’s
transport functions. Conversely, you can also transmit
MMC from the AW2400 to an external device for remote
transport control.
or
External MIDI
device
(e.g., computer)
MY16-mLAN
USB cable
or
• Example: using MTC/MMC to synchronize the oper-
ation of the AW2400 and a MIDI sequencer (com-
puter).
IEEE1394 cable
MIDI OUT/
THRU connector
MTC
● MIDI Remote
AW2400
MIDI IN
“MIDI Remote” is a function that lets you use the
AW2400 as a physical controller for an external device.
You can assign the desired MIDI messages to the top-
panel faders and [ON] keys, and use them to remotely
control a MIDI device or computer program.
MIDI IN
connector
MMC
MIDI OUT
or
MTC/MMC
External MIDI
device
(e.g., computer)
• Example: using the AW2400 as a physical control-
ler for a MIDI sound module
USB cable
MY16-mLAN
or
Control changes
System exclusive messages, etc.
MTC/MMC
AW2400
IEEE1394 cable
MIDI OUT/THRU
connector
MIDI IN
20
or
● Automate scene changes and mix parame-
ters
External MIDI
device
(e.g., computer)
When you recall a scene on the AW2400 or operate its
mix parameters, the corresponding messages (program
change or control change) can be transmitted to an exter-
nal device.
USB cable
MY16-mLAN
or
If you record these messages on a MIDI sequencer that is
synchronized to the AW2400, the scene recall operations
or mix parameter operations can be precisely reproduced
at any time.
IEEE1394 cable
193
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic MIDI Settings
Basic MIDI Settings
The MIDI screen Setting 1 page lets you specify the connector/port to be used for MIDI message
transmission and reception to and from external MIDI devices.
To call this page press the Work Navigate section [MIDI]
key as many times as necessary, or press the [F1] key after
pressing the [MIDI] key.
C PROGRAM CHANGE field
Turns program change transmission and reception on or
off. When program change reception is on, the corre-
sponding scene will be recalled when a program change
message is received via the AW2400 MIDI IN connector
(or USB connector or digital I/O card input port). When
program change transmission is on, when a scene is
recalled on the AW2400 the corresponding program
change message is transmitted via the MIDI OUT/THRU
connector (or USB connector or digital I/O card output
port).
G
H
A
B
C
D
The following items are available:
• ON/OFF button (TX)......Turns program change trans-
mission on or off.
• ECHO button (TX).........Received program change
messages are re-transmitted
(“echoed”) via the MIDI OUT/
THRU connector (or USB con-
nector or digital I/O card out-
put port).
E
F
This page contains the following items.
• ON/OFF button (RX) .....Turns program change recep-
tion on or off.
1 PORT field
Selects the connector(s)/port(s) to be used for MIDI mes-
sage transmission and reception. Press the [ENTER] key
to confirm your selection.
• OMNI button (RX)..........Program change messages
can be received on all MIDI
channels, regardless of the
MIDI receive channel setting.
The connectors/ports that can be selected for MIDI trans-
mission (TX) and reception (RX) are as follows:
HINT
• In the SCENE screen PGM Assign page you can specify the
scene number that will correspond to each program change num-
Items
TX (Transmission)
RX (Reception)
MIDI
[MIDI OUT/THRU] connector [MIDI IN] connector
USB 1 USB connector output port 1 USB connector input port 1
USB 2 USB connector output port 2 USB connector input port 2
USB 3 USB connector output port 3 USB connector input port 3
D CONTROL CHANGE field
Specifies how MIDI control change messages will be
transmitted and received. If control change transmission
and reception are enabled, the corresponding control
change message will be transmitted when you operate any
of the AW2400’s channel mix parameters (fader, pan,
effect send, etc.). When a control change message is
received, the corresponding AW2400 mix parameter will
change.
SLOT
Digital I/O card output port
Digital I/O card output port
NOTE
• It may be necessary to install an appropriate USB MIDI driver in
order to use the USB connector for MIDI communication on com-
• To connect to a computer using the MY16-mLAN digital I/O card,
install the MY16-mLAN card in the digital I/O slot and select
“SLOT”. The appropriate mLAN driver must be installed on the
computer.
The following items are available:
• ON/OFF button (TX)......Turns control change trans-
mission on or off.
20
B CHANNEL field
• ECHO button (TX).........Received control change
messages are re-transmitted
(“echoed”) via the MIDI OUT/
THRU connector (or USB con-
nector or digital I/O card out-
put port).
Selects the MIDI channel that will be used to transmit and
receive MIDI messages such as program changes and con-
trol changes. This area contains the following two items.
• TX .......... Selects the transmit MIDI channel, in a range
of 1–16.
• ON/OFF button (RX) .....Turns control change recep-
• RX.......... Selects the receive MIDI channel, in a range
tion on or off.
of 1–16.
• OMNI button (RX)..........Control change messages
can be received on all MIDI
channels, regardless of the
MIDI receive channel setting.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic MIDI Settings
E CONTROL CHANGE MODE box
Selects the channels via which MIDI control change mes-
sages will be transmitted and received. The following
choices are available:
• 1...........Control change messages will be transmitted
and received on MIDI channels 1–16. (MIDI
channels 1–16 will correspond to AW2400
track channels 1–16.)
• 2...........Control change messages will be transmitted
and received only on the MIDI channel that is
selected in the CHANNEL field.
• 3...........This is the same as 2 in that control change
messages are only received and transmitted
via one MIDI channel, but the parameter map-
ping differs from 2.
HINT
• For details on the mix parameters that correspond to each control
change message, refer to the tables that follow.
● When CONTROL CHANGE MODE = 1
MIDI CH
CC#
7
PARAMETER
MIDI CH
CC#
7
PARAMETER
FADER
PAN
FADER
PAN
10
91
93
7
10
91
93
7
1
TRACK CHANNEL 1
TRACK CHANNEL 2
TRACK CHANNEL 3
TRACK CHANNEL 4
TRACK CHANNEL 5
TRACK CHANNEL 6
TRACK CHANNEL 7
TRACK CHANNEL 8
9
TRACK CHANNEL 9
TRACK CHANNEL 10
TRACK CHANNEL 11
TRACK CHANNEL 12
TRACK CHANNEL 13
TRACK CHANNEL 14
TRACK CHANNEL 15
TRACK CHANNEL 16
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
10
91
93
7
PAN
10
91
93
7
PAN
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
10
91
93
7
PAN
10
91
93
7
PAN
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
10
91
93
7
PAN
10
91
93
7
PAN
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
10
91
93
7
PAN
10
91
93
7
PAN
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
10
91
93
7
PAN
10
91
93
7
PAN
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
10
91
93
7
PAN
10
91
93
7
PAN
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
20
10
91
93
PAN
10
91
93
PAN
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
195
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic MIDI Settings
● When CONTROL CHANGE MODE = 2
CC#
0
PARAMETER
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
MASTER
CC#
64
PARAMETER
CHANNEL
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INPUT 8
INPUT 9
INPUT 10
INPUT 11
INPUT 12
INPUT 13
INPUT 14
INPUT 15
INPUT 16
1
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INPUT 8
INPUT 9
INPUT 10
INPUT 11
INPUT 12
INPUT 13
INPUT 14
INPUT 15
INPUT 16
65
CHANNEL
2
66
CHANNEL
3
67
CHANNEL
4
68
CHANNEL
5
69
CHANNEL
6
70
CHANNEL
7
71
CHANNEL
8
72
CHANNEL
9
73
CHANNEL
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
74
CHANNEL
75
CHANNEL
76
CHANNEL
77
CHANNEL
78
CHANNEL
79
CHANNEL
80
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
81
82
83
84
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
RETURN 1
RETURN 2
STEREO OUT
AUX 1
85
86
87
MASTER
88
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
RETURN 1L
RETURN 1R
RETURN 2L
RETURN 2R
STEREO OUT
MASTER
AUX 2
89
CHANNEL
MASTER
AUX 3
90
CHANNEL
MASTER
AUX 4
91
CHANNEL
MASTER
EFF 1
92
BALANCE
MASTER
EFF 2
93
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
MASTER
EFF 3
94
MASTER
EFF 4
95
NO ASSIGN
MASTER
96
FADER
FADER
BUS 1
BUS 2
97
MASTER
98
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
MASTER
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INPUT 8
INPUT 9
INPUT 10
INPUT 11
INPUT 12
INPUT 13
INPUT 14
INPUT 15
INPUT 16
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INPUT 8
INPUT 9
INPUT 10
INPUT 11
INPUT 12
INPUT 13
INPUT 14
INPUT 15
INPUT 16
20
ON
ON
ON
RETURN 1
RETURN 2
STEREO OUT
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic MIDI Settings
● When CONTROL CHANGE MODE = 3
CC#
0
PARAMETER
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
MASTER
CC#
64
PARAMETER
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
BALANCE
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
TRACK 1
TRACK 2
1
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
TRACK 1
TRACK 2
TRACK 3
TRACK 4
TRACK 5
TRACK 6
TRACK 7
TRACK 8
TRACK 9
TRACK 10
TRACK 11
TRACK 12
TRACK 13
TRACK 14
TRACK 15
TRACK 16
TRACK 17
TRACK 18
TRACK 19
TRACK 20
RETURN 1
RETURN 2
STEREO OUT
AUX 1
65
2
66
TRACK 3
3
67
TRACK 4
4
68
TRACK 5
5
69
TRACK 6
6
70
TRACK 7
7
71
TRACK 8
8
72
TRACK 9
9
73
TRACK 10
TRACK 11
TRACK 12
TRACK 13
TRACK 14
TRACK 15
TRACK 16
TRACK 17
TRACK 18
TRACK 19
TRACK 20
TRACK 21
TRACK 22
TRACK 23
TRACK 24
RETURN 1L
RETURN 1R
RETURN 2L
RETURN 2R
STEREO OUT
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
MASTER
88
MASTER
AUX 2
89
MASTER
AUX 3
90
MASTER
AUX 4
91
MASTER
EFF 1
92
MASTER
EFF 2
93
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
MASTER
EFF 3
94
MASTER
EFF 4
95
NO ASSIGN
MASTER
96
FADER
FADER
BUS 1
BUS 2
97
MASTER
98
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
MASTER
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
TRACK 1
TRACK 2
TRACK 3
TRACK 4
TRACK 5
TRACK 6
TRACK 7
TRACK 8
TRACK 9
TRACK 10
TRACK 11
TRACK 12
TRACK 13
TRACK 14
TRACK 15
TRACK 16
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
TRACK 1
TRACK 2
TRACK 3
TRACK 4
TRACK 5
TRACK 6
TRACK 7
TRACK 8
TRACK 9
TRACK 10
TRACK 11
TRACK 12
TRACK 13
TRACK 14
TRACK 15
TRACK 16
TRACK 17
TRACK 18
TRACK 19
TRACK 20
RETURN 1
RETURN 2
STEREO OUT
20
197
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F OTHER field
H THRU box
MIDI messages other than program change and control
change messages are set up here.
Specifies the connector/port for “THRU” output of MIDI
messages received via the MIDI IN connector (or USB
connector or digital I/O card input port). If “MIDI” and
“USB 1” are selected for the two THRU boxes, THRU
output will be as follows:
• ECHO button (TX)........Received MIDI messages
other than program and control
change are re-transmitted
(“echoed”) via the MIDI OUT/
THRU connector (or USB con-
nector or digital I/O card output
port).
• Messages received at the MIDI IN connector will be
THRU output via the USB output port 1.
• Messages received at the USB input port 1 will be
THRU output via the MIDI OUT/THRU connector.
G REMOTE OUT box
MIDI messages generated by the AW2400 itself are not
transmitted via connectors/ports selected for THRU out-
put.
Selects the connector/port via which MIDI messages will
be transmitted when the MIDI Remote function is active
(when the REMOTE screen is showing). Refer to
NOTE
NOTE
• The same connector/port cannot be specified for both boxes.
• The same connector/port as selected in the PORT field or
REMOTE OUT box cannot be selected here.
• The same connector/port as selected in the PORT field or THRU
box cannot be selected here.
MIDI Synchronization Message Setup
The MIDI screen Setting 2 page allows selection of MIDI messages used for synchronization
with external equipment (MTC and MIDI clock) as well as messages used for remote control.
To call this page press the Work Navigate section [MIDI]
key as many times as necessary, or press the [F2] key after
pressing the [MIDI] key.
This page contains the following items.
1 MMC field
Specifies how MMC will be transmitted/received.
B MMC OFF button
C
B
A
F G H
I J
Engage this button (it will appear inverted) to disable
MMC transmission and reception.
C MMC MASTER button
When this button is turned on the AW2400 functions as
MMC master, and the appropriate MMC commands will
be output via the MIDI OUT/THRU connector (or USB
connector or digital I/O card output port) when the trans-
port is operated. Turn this button on when you want to
remotely control external equipment from the AW2400.
D MMC SLAVE button
When this button is turned on the AW2400 functions as
MMC slave, and will respond to appropriate MMC com-
mands received via the MIDI IN connector (or USB con-
nector or digital I/O card input port). Turn this button on
when you want to remotely control the AW2400 from
external equipment.
20
D
E
K
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Synchronization Message Setup
E DEVICE NO. box
J OFFSET
Specifies the MMC device number (1–127) that the
AW2400 will receive.
When using the AW2400 as an MTC slave, this parameter
shifts the absolute time of the AW2400 forward or back-
ward relative to the incoming MTC. The range is
-24:00:00:00.00 to +24:00:00:00.00.
NOTE
• The MMC device number is an identifying number used to distin-
guish devices that transmit and receive MMC commands. When
using MMC, the AW2400 and the external MIDI device must be set
to the same MMC device number.
OFFSET = 00:00:00:00.00
Incoming time
00:00:10:00.00
00:00:10:00.00
00:00:15:00.00
00:00:15:00.00
00:00:20:00.00
00:00:20:00.00
code
• When transmitting MMC data from the AW2400, the MMC device
number is always set to “128” (allowing control of all MMC-com-
patible devices).
Time code
display (ABS)
Song
F MTC field
Specifies how the AW2400 operates when synchronized
with an external MIDI device using MTC (MIDI Time
Code).
OFFSET = +00:00:05:00.00
Incoming time
00:00:10:00.00
code
00:00:15:00.00
00:00:20:00.00
00:00:20:00.00
00:00:25:00.00
G MTC MASTER button
Time code
display (ABS)
00:00:15:00.00
When this button is on the AW2400 functions as MTC
master. Turn this button on when you want external equip-
ment to synchronize to the AW2400.
Song
H MTC SLAVE button
OFFSET = –00:00:05:00.00
When this button is turned on the AW2400 functions as
MTC slave, and will follow MTC received via the MIDI
IN connector (or USB connector or digital I/O card input
port). Turn this button on when you want to synchronize
two AW2400 units, or synchronize the AW2400 to an
external device that can only function in MTC master
mode.
Incoming time
code
00:00:10:00.00
00:00:15:00.00
00:00:10:00.00
00:00:20:00.00
00:00:15:00.00
Time code
display (ABS)
00:00:05:00.00
Song
HINT
I SYNC AVERAGE box
• The OFFSET setting has no effect on MTC output via the MIDI
OUT/THRU connector (or USB connector or digital I/O card output
port).
Select one of the following to specify how closely the
AW2400 will follow the incoming MTC data when func-
tioning as an MTC slave.
• 0............. The AW2400 will synchronize to the incoming
MTC data with the highest precision. If the
incoming MTC has significant instability, syn-
chronization may be interrupted or become
unreliable with this setting.
K SYNC OUT field
Selects the type of MIDI message to be used for synchro-
nization.
• OFF button........Engage this button (it will appear
inverted) to disable transmission of
• 1............. This setting provides more tolerance to MTC
MIDI synchronization messages.
instability than the OFF setting.
• MTC button .......When this button is ON MTC will be
transmitted while the recorder is run-
ning.
• 2............. This setting allows the maximum tolerance.
Use this setting if the MTC master is an exter-
nal MIDI device that has significant instability.
• MIDI CLOCK Button
...............When this button is ON the MIDI clock
will be transmitted while the recorder
is running. Also, appropriate START,
STOP, CONTINUE and SONG POSI-
TION messages will be transmitted
when the transport is operated.
HINT
• If the accuracy of the incoming MTC becomes unstable when the
AW2400 is functioning as an MTC slave and is synchronized to an
external MIDI device, the AW2400 will make slight adjustments in
playback pitch in an attempt to maintain synchronization. The
SYNC AVERAGE parameter specifies the range of MTC variance
that will be tolerated.
20
HINT
• MIDI clock operation is based on the tempo specified in the Tempo
199
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to External Equipment
Connecting to External Equipment
This section will provide some examples of how the AW2400 can be connected to and used with
external MIDI devices.
● Example settings for synchronization using
MTC and MMC
Synchronizing the AW2400 With
External MIDI Devices
Using MTC AW2400 song playback and recording can be
synchronized to external MIDI devices such as a com-
puter-based sequencer application or a workstation type
synthesizer with a built-in sequencer. Furthermore, MMC
can be used to allow remote control of the AW2400 trans-
port functions from the external MIDI device.
Refer to the following diagram, and connect
the AW2400 to your workstation synthe-
sizer or computer.
1
MIDI OUT/
THRU
MIDI
IN
MTC
Workstation synthesizer
with a built-in sequencer
AW2400
Move the cursor to the DEVICE No. field,
and set the value to match the device num-
ber of the external MIDI device.
When using MMC, you must set the AW2400 and the
external MIDI device to the same MMC device num-
ber. For details on the device numbers that your MIDI
device can use, refer to its owner’s manual.
5
6
MIDI
IN
MIDI
OUT
MMC
or
MTC/MMC
MY16-mLAN
USB cable
or
Use the Work Navigate section [SONG] key
to access the SONG screen Setting page.
Select a frame rate.
Computer-based
sequencer application
MTC/MMC
IEEE1394 cable
Use the Work Navigate section [MIDI] key to
access the MIDI screen Setting 1 page.
Select the connector(s)/port(s) to be used
for MIDI message transmission and recep-
tion in the PORT field.
2
3
Frame rate
Use the Work Navigate section [MIDI] key to
access the MIDI screen Setting 2 page.Turn
on the MASTER button in the MTC field, and
turn on the MTC button in the SYNC OUT
field.
HINT
• When using MTC with an external device be sure to set both
the AW2400 and the external device to the same frame rate.
• The frame rate you specify here will affect not only synchroni-
zation with the external device, but also the time code that is
displayed in the counter, etc.
This sets the AW2400 to function as MTC master.
20
Turn on the SLAVE button in the MMC field.
This sets the AW2400 to function as MMC slave.
4
Set the external MIDI device to function as
MMC master and MTC slave, and set its
MMC device number and MTC frame rate to
the same settings as the AW2400.
7
For details on how to make these settings, refer to the
owner’s manual provided with the device.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to External Equipment
C Scene
Play back the external MIDI device.
8
Move the cursor to this area and use the [DATA/JOG]
dial to select the scene that you want to assign to the
corresponding program number.
When you play back the external MIDI device, the
corresponding MMC commands will be sent to the
AW2400, and the AW2400 will begin running.
At the same time, the AW2400 will transmit MTC to
the external MIDI device, and the external MIDI
device will run in synchronization with it.
D INITIALIZE button
Returns the program change assignments to their ini-
tial state.
HINT
HINT
• You can synchronize using MIDI Clock and Start/Stop/Con-
tinue messages instead of using MTC and MMC. For details
on the settings used in this case, refer to “Recording/playing
• In the initial state Program change numbers 1–99 correspond
to scenes 1–99, program change number 100 = Initial Data
(all scene parameters in their initial state), and program
change numbers 101–128 are “NO ASSIGN” (unassigned).
Move the cursor to the program change
number, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to
select the program change number for
which you want to change the assignment.
2
Switching AW2400 scenes from
an external MIDI device
Here’s how you can transmit program changes from an
external MIDI device to switch scenes on the AW2400.
HINT
• The [INC]/[DEC] keys can also be used to select program
change numbers.
Move the cursor to the scene in the list, and
use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the scene
that you want to assign to the correspond-
ing program change number.
3
4
■ Assign scenes to program changes
In the Scene/Automix/USB section, use the
[SCENE] key to access the SONG screen
PGM Assign page.
1
Repeat steps 2–3 to assign the desired
scenes to other program change numbers.
This page lets you assign a scene number to each pro-
gram change number.
HINT
• The PGM Assign page settings apply to all songs.
• If you want to reset the scene assignments to the initial set-
ting, move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button and press the
[ENTER] key.
A
B
C
D
1 List
This lists the scenes of the current song. The line
enclosed by a dotted frame is the scene currently
selected for operation.
20
B Program change number
This indicates the program change number (001–128).
Move the cursor to this number and use the [DATA/
JOG] dial to scroll the list upward or downward.
201
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to External Equipment
■ Transmit program
Recording/playing AW2400 mix oper-
ations on an external sequencer
Here’s how you can synchronize the AW2400 and your
external sequencer, and use the sequencer to record/play
the fader and pan operations you perform on the AW2400.
Since operating the AW2400’s mix parameters will cause
a large number of control change messages to be transmit-
ted, we will use MIDI Clock (which uses less data) as the
synchronization signal rather than MTC.
changes to switch scenes
Connect the AW2400 and your sequencer
as shown in the diagram below.
1
Workstation synthesizer
AW2400
with a built-in sequencer
Program
changes
MIDI
IN
MIDI
OUT
or
Connect the AW2400 and your sequencer
as shown in the following diagram.
1
MY16-mLAN
USB cable
MIDI Clock
Control
or
Computer-based
sequencer application
changes
MIDI OUT/
THRU
MIDI
IN
Workstation synthesizer
with a built-in sequencer
AW2400
IEEE1394 cable
MIDI
IN
MIDI
OUT
Control
changes
Use the Work Navigate section [MIDI] key to
access the MIDI screen Setting 1 page.
2
3
or
Set the connector/port and channel to be
used for program change message recep-
tion in the RX PORT and CHANNEL fields.
USB cable
MY16-mLAN
or
Turn the PROGRAM CHANGE (RX) field ON/
OFF button on.
Computer-based
sequencer application
4
If you want to receive program change messages on all
channels regardless of the MIDI receive channel set-
ting, also turn the OMNI (RX) button on.
IEEE1394 cable
Use the Work Navigate section [MIDI] key to
access the MIDI screen Setting 2 page.Turn
on the MASTER button in the MTC field, and
turn on the MIDI CLOCK button in the SYNC
OUT field.
2
This sets up the AW2400 to receive MIDI program
change messages.
Transmit a program change message from
your sequencer to the AW2400 on the MIDI
channel that you selected.
The scene assigned to that program change number
will be recalled.
5
● Example settings for synchronization
using MIDI Clock and Start/Stop/Con-
tinue
HINT
• If you insert program changes into the appropriate locations
of your sequencer track, scenes will be recalled automatically
as the AW2400 and your sequencer run in synchronization.
20
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to External Equipment
Use the Work Navigate section [MIDI] key to
access the MIDI screen Setting 1 page.
Select the connector(s)/port(s) to be used
for MIDI message transmission and recep-
tion.
Play back the AW2400 song from the begin-
ning.
When the AW2400 begins playback, it will transmit a
Start message and MIDI Clock messages to the
sequencer, and the sequencer will begin running in
synchronization with the AW2400.
3
8
9
Turn the CONTROL CHANGE field ON/OFF
buttons (TX and RX) on.
This sets the AW2400 to transmit and receive control
change messages.
4
5
Operate the AW2400’s mix parameters
(fader, pan, etc.) as required.
The control changes assigned to each parameter will
be recorded on the sequencer.
Select a CONTROL CHANGE MODE (1–3).
The type of mix parameters that can be recorded will
depend on the setting of the CONTROL CHANGE
The CONTROL CHANGE MODE lets you choose
one of three combinations (1–3) that specify how con-
trol changes will correspond to the mix parameters of
the AW2400. (For details on the contents of each
When you are finished recording, stop play-
back of the AW2400 song.
10
11
If you want to transmit and receive messages via sepa-
rate MIDI channels for each of the AW2400’s track
channels, choose 1. If you want all track channels to
be controlled via a single MIDI channel, choose 2 or 3.
Set the sequencer to the playback standby
mode, recall the previously stored scene,
and start AW2400 playback from the begin-
ning of the song.
The recorded control changes will be transmitted to
the AW2400, and the corresponding mix parameters
will change accordingly. If necessary, you can use the
editing functionality of your sequencer to edit the val-
ues and timing of the control changes that were
recorded.
If you chose 2 or 3, you will also need to set the
CHANNEL field to specify the MIDI channel that will
be used to transmit and receive the control changes.
Make the appropriate settings on your
sequencer so that it will follow external
MIDI Clock messages. Also set the
sequencer to record-ready mode.
For details on how to make these settings, refer to the
manual for your sequencer.
6
7
NOTE
• If you set CONTROL CHANGE MODE to 1, operating track
channels 1–16 will transmit control changes via the corre-
sponding MIDI channel (1–16). For this reason, you should
normally record operations only for a single channel at a time,
unless your sequencer is able to record multiple MIDI chan-
nels simultaneously.
NOTE
• If your sequencer has a function by which MIDI messages
received at its MIDI IN connector are retransmitted from its
MIDI OUT connector (a function called “MIDI Echo” or “MIDI
Thru”), be sure to turn it off. If this function is turned on while
you are recording, the control change messages transmitted
when you operate the AW2400 will be immediately returned
to the AW2400, causing improper operation.
Store the initial fader, pan, and mix parame-
ters as a scene at the beginning of the
song.
When the following operations are performed this
scene will always be recalled at the beginning. Also, if
you record a program change number corresponding
to this scene at the beginning of a sequencer track the
scene will automatically be recalled each time the
details).
20
203
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the MIDI Remote function
Using the MIDI Remote function
Control change
number 64 (value= 127)
Control change
number 64 (value= 0)
About the MIDI Remote function
transmit
transmit
The AW2400 provides a MIDI Remote function that lets
you use the top-panel controls to transmit the desired
MIDI messages.
By using the MIDI Remote function, you can use the
AW2400 as a physical controller for a computer program
or MIDI tone generator.
MIDI messages can be assigned to the following controls.
Alternatively, you can specify that a MIDI message with a
fixed value is transmitted only when you press the [ON]
key to turn it on (indicator lit). For example if you assign
program change #1, that program change number will be
transmitted each time you turn on the [ON] key.
● Mixer section
• Faders 1–12, 13–16
• [ON] keys 1–12, 13–16
● Transport section
Program change
number 1
Program change
number 1
• RTZ [
] key
• REW [
] key
• FF [
] key
• STOP [ ■ ] key
• REC [ ● ] key
transmit
transmit
• PLAY [ ] key
Of these, MIDI messages assigned to the faders and [ON]
keys can be freely reassigned. You can assign the follow-
ing types of message.
■ Messages that can
be assigned to faders
A MIDI message whose value
changes over a range of 0–127 can
be assigned to each fader. For
example if you assign control
change #7 (volume) to a fader, you
can use the fader to control the vol-
ume of a MIDI tone generator.
Control change
number 7
Using the MIDI Remote function
presets
The REMOTE screen 1–12 page and 13–16 page provide
14 different MIDI Remote presets (ten factory presets and
four user presets). These presets have been created with
specific devices and computer sequencer programs in
mind, and assign the necessary messages to the AW2400’s
faders and [ON] keys. You can use the MIDI Remote func-
tion immediately, just by selecting a preset in this page
and connecting the appropriate external MIDI device.
transmit
Value = 127
Value =0
Sequencer programs that are supported
● Windows
● Macintosh
■ Messages that can be
• Cubase SX 3.0.1
• Logic Platinum 5.5.1(*1)
• Nuendo 3.0.1
• Cubase SX 3.0.1
• Logic Pro 7.0.1(*1)
• Nuendo 3.0.1
assigned to the [ON] keys
A MIDI message whose value changes between the two
states, 0 and 127, can be assigned to each [ON] key. For
example if you assign control change #64 (hold) to an
[ON] key and specify that the control change value alter-
nates between 0 and 127, pressing the [ON] key to turn it
on (indicator lit) will transmit control change #64 with a
value of 127 (Hold on), and turning it off (indicator out)
will transmit control change #64 with a value of 0 (Hold
off).
• Sonar 4.0.1 Producer
Edition
• Protools TDM 6.7(*2)
20
*1 Use the setting file from the included CD-ROM to map the
AW2400’s faders/[ON] keys/transport keys to the Logic key com-
mands. Track assignments must be made within Logic as appro-
priate for your system.
*2 Select the CS-10 settings as the MIDI controller type. For details
on the CS-10 settings, ask Digidesign.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the MIDI Remote function
The MIDI channels corresponding to the faders and [ON]
keys appears as follows when the REMOTE screen 1–12
and 13–16 pages are selected.
■ When the 1–12 page is showing.
Fader/[ON] Key
MIDI Channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
■ When the 13–16 page is showing.
Fader/[ON] Key
MIDI Channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
N/A
To call the REMOTE screen 1–12 page press the Layer
section [REMOTE] key as many times as necessary, or
press the [F1] key after pressing the [REMOTE] key.
The AW2400 provides the following presets.
● Cubase
● Logic
● Sonar
B
● Protools
These presets let you use the AW2400 as a physical con-
troller for various software sequencers.
• [ON] key operations will control mute on/off opera-
tions on the sequencer software.
A
C
• Fader operations will control the volume of the
sequencer software tracks.
You will need to install the appropriate setting file into
your sequencer software, and make the necessary settings.
For details, refer to the “About the CD-ROM included
D
● Volume/Rec TR
Use this preset to control the volume of an external tone
generator or the record tracks of an external recorder.
To call the REMOTE screen 13–16 page press the Layer
section [REMOTE] key as many times as necessary, or
press the [F2] key after pressing the [REMOTE] key
(Operation of the 13–16 page is the same as the 1–12
page).
• [ON] key operations will transmit MMC commands to
select recording tracks.
• Fader operations will transmitVolume control changes
(CC#=07).
HINT
● Volume
• The MIDI Remote function will automatically be on while the
REMOTE screen is displayed. The channel faders and [ON] keys
will not perform their usual functions, but will work as specified by
the preset you have selected in the REMOTE screen.
Use this preset to control the volume of an external tone
generator.
• When you turn an [ON] key off (indicator out), volume
= 0 will be transmitted.
This page contains the following items.
• When you turn an [ON] key on (lit green), the volume
value corresponding to the fader position will be trans-
mitted.
1 MODE box
Selects one of the ten presets. Move the cursor to a box
and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to
select the corresponding preset for instantaneous MIDI
message assignment.
• When an [ON] key is on, operating the fader will trans-
mit Volume control change messages (CC#=07).
20
205
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the MIDI Remote function
● XG 1–16
● XG 17–32
● XG 33–48
● XG 49–64
Using User-defined Remote
function
The REMOTE screen 1–12 page and 13–16 page let you
assign your own MIDI messages to each fader and [ON]
key.
These presets let you use the AW2400 as a volume con-
troller for an XG tone generator. Each preset will control
the XG-compatible tone generator’s parts 1–16, 17–32,
33–48, and 49–64 respectively.
To call the REMOTE screen 1–12 page (or 13–16 page)
press the Layer section [REMOTE] key as many times as
necessary, or press the [F1] key (or [F2] key) after press-
ing the [REMOTE] key.
• [ON] key operations will switch the part on/off.
• Fader operations will control the volume of the part.
● USER1
● USER2
NOTE
● USER3
● USER4
• USER1–USER4 must be selected in the MODE box in order to set
up user-defined assignments.
These 4 presets can be set up by the user. Refer to “Using
B
C
D
E
B TRANSPORT field
Select one of the following to specify how the transport
section keys will function while using the MIDI Remote
function.
• NORMAL button ...... The transport keys will perform
their normal functions: play, stop,
or locate etc. for the current
song. MTC/MMC/MIDI Clock
A
messages will be transmitted and
received as specified in the MIDI
screen Setting 2 page.
• LOCAL button.......... The transport keys will play, stop,
or locate the current song. How-
ever, MTC/MMC/MIDI Clock
messages will not be transmitted
or received.
1 Fader/[ON] key function name
Displays the name that is assigned to the currently dis-
played fader or [ON] key.
• REMOTE button....... The transport keys will not oper-
ate the recorder, but will only
transmit the MIDI messages that
have been preset for each key.
B RENAME button
Edits the name that is assigned to the fader/[ON] key.
Move the cursor to the button and press the [ENTER] key,
and the NAME EDIT popup window will appear.
HINT
• These settings will also apply if you use a foot switch to operate
the song transport.
C LATCH/UNLATCH button
Selects one of the following types of operation for the
[ON] keys.
C ON field
D FADER field
This field is used when setting up a user-defined preset.
• LATCH............. The setting will alternate on/off each
time you press the [ON] key.
MIDI data transmitted
(SW=7F)
MIDI data
transmitted (SW=00)
20
on
off
off
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the MIDI Remote function
• UNLATCH........The [ON] key will be engaged only
while held, and will turn off when
released.
HINT
• The MIDI message assigned to a single fader or key cannot be
longer than sixteen bytes.
MIDI data
transmitted (SW=7F)
MIDI data
transmitted (SW=00)
• If a SW byte is not assigned to an [ON] key, the MIDI message you
enter will be transmitted only when you turn the key on. (In this
case you will normally use the UNLATCH setting.)
on
• When you use the LEARN button to assign a control change mes-
sage to a fader, the END byte will automatically be entered at the
end of the MIDI message.
off
off
• When you use the LEARN button to assign a control change mes-
sage to a fader, the FAD byte will be automatically entered as the
variable value.
NOTE
D LEARN button
When this button is on, the MIDI message received from
an external device will be assigned to the currently
selected fader or [ON] key. This is a convenient way to
assign MIDI messages quickly.
• If you assign a MIDI message manually, be sure to enter END at
the end of the message.
• When you assign a MIDI message to a fader, FAD must be
entered for one of the bytes. If FAD is not entered the fader will not
function.
HINT
• If you enter the values manually, it is possible that an invalid MIDI
message will be entered. For this reason, you should use the
LEARN button to assign MIDI messages whenever possible.
• If two or more MIDI messages are received while the LEARN but-
ton is on, the last-received MIDI message will be entered in the
MIDI message field.
• If a system exclusive message longer than sixteen bytes is
received, the first sixteen bytes will be displayed.
Remotely controlling
NOTE
• The [ON] key and fader LEARN buttons cannot be engaged simul-
taneously.
a tone generator module
Here’s how you can use the AW2400’s MIDI Remote
function to remotely control a tone generator module.
E MIDI message
This area displays the MIDI message that is assigned to
the currently selected fader or [ON] key in hexadecimal
form.
Connect the AW2400 to your tone generator
module as shown in the following diagram.
1
You can move the cursor to each number box and use the
[DATA/JOG] dial to edit the value of each byte (two-digi-
tal hexadecimal number).You can select the following val-
ues.
AW2400
MIDI messages
Tone generator
MIDI OUT/
THRU
MIDI
IN
module
• 00–FF (hexadecimal)
............ Corresponds to the actual value of the MIDI
message that is transmitted.
• END ....... Indicates the end of the MIDI message.When
you operate a fader or [ON] key, the MIDI
message starting with the first byte and end-
ing with the byte that precedes END will be
transmitted.
Use the Layer section [REMOTE] key to call
the REMOTE screen 1–12 page or 13–16
page.
2
This enables the Remote function.
• SW ([ON] key only)
............ Indicates the on/off status of the [ON] key.
The byte you specify as SW will be transmit-
ted as 7F (hexadecimal) when the key is
turned on, or 00 (hexadecimal) when the key
is turned off.
HINT
• While the REMOTE screen is displayed, the functions of the faders
and [ON] keys will be disabled; the faders and keys will function as
controllers that transmit MIDI messages.
20
• When the MIDI Remote function is enabled, the MIDI messages
are transmitted via the connector/port selected in the MIDI screen
Setting 1 page REMOTE OUT box.
• FAD........ Indicates the current position of the fader. If
the message is assigned to a fader, the byte
you specify as FAD will be transmitted as a
value of 00–7F (hexadecimal) corresponding
to the fader position when you operate the
fader. If the message is assigned to an [ON]
key, this byte will be transmitted as a value
corresponding to the current position of the
fader when the [ON] key is turned on, and will
be transmitted as a value of 00 (hexadecimal)
when the [ON] key is turned off.
207
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the MIDI Remote function
Select the preset you want to use in the
MODE box and press the [ENTER] key.
3
For example if you select preset “XG 1-16”, the
AW2400’s faders will control the volume of parts 1–
16 of your XG tone generator, and [ON] keys 1–16
will control the on/off status of parts 1–16.
If necessary, select the REMOTE screen 1–
4
12 or 13–16 pages and set the MIDI channel
assignments to the faders and [ON] keys as
required.
The MIDI channel assignments on each page are
Operate the AW2400 faders and [ON] keys.
5
The messages assigned to the faders and [ON] keys
will be transmitted via the MIDI OUT/THRU connec-
tor, and the parameters of your tone generator module
will change accordingly.
20
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 21
Utility functions
This chapter explains the AW2400’s various utility functions.
Using the test tone oscillator
The Oscillator page of the UTILITY screen lets you send the signal of the AW2400’s built-in test
oscillator to the desired bus.
To call this page press the Work Navigate section [UTIL-
ITY] as many times as necessary, or press the [F1] key
after pressing the [UTILITY] key.
C WAVEFORM
Selects one of the following oscillator signals.
• 100Hz button................... 100 Hz sine wave
• 1kHz button..................... 1 kHz sine wave
• 10kHz button................... 10 kHz sine wave
• PINK NOISE button ........ Pink noise
A
H
• BURST NOISE button..... Burst noise (20-millisecond
pink-noise bursts as 4-sec-
ond intervals)
D BUS1 L/R, BUS2 L/R buttons
Sends the oscillator output to the Bus 1 L/R or Bus 2 L/R.
E AUX1–4 buttons
Send the oscillator output to AUX buses 1–4.
D
E
F
G
F EFFECT1–4 buttons
Send the oscillator output to effect buses 1–4.
G STEREO L/R buttons
Sends the oscillator output to the stereo bus.
B
C
H Level Meter
Displays the BUS 1–2, AUX 1–4, and EFFECT BUS 1–4
output levels.
This page contains the following items.
NOTE
1 OSC ON button
• Sine waves and white noise have a higher actual sound pressure
level than perceived by the ear, and may damage your speakers if
played at a high volume. Please use caution.
When you turn this button on, the oscillator output will
immediately be sent to the specified bus. Use the D–G
buttons to specify the bus to which the signal will be sent.
HINT
• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT]
key has the same affect as the OSC ON button.
B LEVEL knob
Adjusts the output level of the oscillator.
NOTE
21
• Be sure to lower the setting of the LEVEL knob before turning on
the oscillator to prevent sudden high-volume output.
209
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AW2400 Preferences
AW2400 Preferences
The UTILITY screen Preference page provides a number of basic “preference” parameters for the
AW2400 operating environment, including digital input/output setup, copy protection, and others.
To call this page press the Work Navigate section [UTIL-
ITY] key as many times as necessary, or press the [F2] key
after pressing the [UTILITY] key.
B CD/DAT DIGITAL REC button
Enables or disables digital recording from the DIGITAL
STEREO IN jack, and importing of digital audio data
from an audio CD or WAV file inserted in the CD-RW
drive.
G
L
When this parameter is ON, the following message will be
displayed.
A
B
H
M
C
D
If you agree to the conditions stipulated in the “Copyright
digital audio data will be enabled when you select [OK].
E
F
N
HINT
JK
I
• The CD/DAT DIGITAL REC button will always be set to the default
DISABLE setting when you turn on the power.
This page contains the following items.
1 DIGITAL OUT COPYRIGHT button
Specifies whether SCMS (Serial Copy Management Sys-
tem) copy protect flags will be written into the digital sig-
nal that is output from the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack.
Protect is enabled if the button is set to ENABLE, and dis-
abled if the button is set to DISABLE.
If copy protect is enabled, you will be able to copy the sig-
nal from the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack to an MD or
DAT recorder, but it will not be possible to make a second-
generation digital copy from that data.
C NUDGE PLAY MODE
Selects the playback method that will be used by the
Nudge function (a function that lets you use the [JOG ON]
key and [DATA/JOG] dial to search for a location). Press
the [ENTER] key to confirm your selection.
• AFTER ..........Play repeatedly for the duration specified
by the NUDGE TIME, starting at the cur-
rent location.
• BEFORE .......Play repeatedly for the duration specified
by the NUDGE TIME, ending at the cur-
rent location.
● When copy protect is enabled
MODE: BEFORE
MODE: AFTER
AW2400
Current location
Current location
DIGITAL OUT COPYRIGHT= ENABLE
D NUDGE TIME
Specifies the duration (Nudge Time) of each repeat played
by the Nudge function. The nudge time can be set from 25
to 800 ms in 1 ms (millisecond) steps.
21
DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack
Digital recording
possible
E PREROLL TIME
Specifies the duration of the preroll (the amount of play-
back time before the punch-in point) when you use Auto
Punch-in from 0 to 20 seconds.
Digital recording
not possible
DAT or MD, etc.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AW2400 Preferences
F POSTROLL TIME
L AUTO SAVE button
Specifies the duration of postroll (the amount of playback
time after the punch-out point) when you use Auto Punch-
out from 0 to 20 seconds.
Enables or disables the Auto Save function. When the
Auto Save function is enabled the current song state will
be backed up to temporary memory when one of the fol-
lowing occurs. If the power is accidentally turned off
before the unit is properly shut down, the song will be
restored from the backup data in temporary memory the
next time the power is turned on.
G DIRECT OUT EXTRACT POSITION
Selects the point in the input channel or track channel
from which the signal will be taken when using DIRECT
OUT. Press the [ENTER] key to confirm your selection.
• Recording is stopped.
• PRE FADER..........the signal prior to the channel fader
• POST FADER.......the signal after the channel fader
• Track editing is ended.
• Import from the CD-RW drive is completed.
• Import of a WAV file is completed.
H STORE CONFIRMATION button
Specifies whether the NAME EDIT popup window
(allowing you to assign a name) will appear when you
store a scene/library.
M AUTO DISPLAY button
Determines whether the display screen related to a key or
knob operated in the Selected Channel section will appear
automatically (ON), or whether the display will remain as
it is and a popup window for the corresponding parameter
will appear (OFF).
I RECALL CONFIRMATION button
Specifies whether a popup window will ask you for confir-
mation when recalling a scene or library.
J SYNC CAUTION DIGITAL ST IN button
N CD/ST TR PLAY MODE MUTE/MIX button
Determines whether the input channels will be output
together with CD or stereo playback (MIX), or whether
only the CD or stereo track signal will be output (MUTE).
Determines whether an error message will be displayed
when a signal that is not synchronized with the word clock
source appears at the DIGITAL STEREO IN connector.
K SYNC CAUTION SLOT IN button
Determines whether an error message will be displayed
when a signal that is not synchronized with the word clock
source appears at a digital input on an I/O card installed in
the I/O slot.
21
211
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initializing the internal hard disk
Initializing the internal hard disk
The UTILITY screen Format page lets you initialize the internal hard disk. Prior to exporting and
importing WAV files to or from a Macintosh computer (Mac OS X 10.3) it may be necessary to ini-
tialize the hard disk in order to change the hard disk cluster size.
NOTE
• Executing the Format operation will erase all data from the internal hard disk, and the data cannot be recov-
ered. We recommend that you backup all data on the internal hard disk to a computer before executing the
Format operation.
• You cannot abort the Format operation once it has been started.
• Never turn off or disconnect the power during formatting, since this may damage the hard disk and cause
malfunctions.
To call this page press the Work Navigate section [UTIL-
ITY] key as many times as necessary, or press the [F3] key
after pressing the [UTILITY] key.
1 CLUSTER field
Set the disk cluster size to either 32K or 64K.
If you will be using Mac OS X 10.3 for WAV file transfer
operations, set the cluster size to 32K. Select the 64K
cluster size for maximum speed if you will be using Win-
dows, or Mac OS X 10.4 or higher. When the AW2400 is
shipped from the factory, the cluster size is set to 64K.
A
B EXECUTE button
Execute the disk initialization. A popup window will show
the progress of the initialization operation.
The popup window will close when initialization has been
completed.
B
21
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
212
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 22
Creating an audio CD
This chapter explains how you can use the CD-RW drive to create an audio
CD, and how to play back an audio CD.
Creating an audio CD
You can select one or more songs on the AW2400 hard disk, and write the audio data from the
stereo track of each song to a CD-R/RW disc in CD-DA format. The CD-R/RW media to which
you write this data can be played by a CD-RW drive or a conventional CD player in the same way
as a standard audio CD.
NOTE
• Some CD players do not support CD-R/RW media, and may not be able to play back CDs created by the
AW2400.
In order to create a CD, you must first register one or more
songs in a “track list,” and then write the virtual track cur-
rently selected for the stereo track of each song (the “cur-
rent track”) to the CD in the order specified by the track
list.
A maximum of 99 tracks (areas on CD media to which
audio data can be written individually) can be written to
one CD-R/RW disc, and each track must be at least four
seconds long. The maximum length of audio that can be
written to a single disc is approximately 74 minutes for
650 MB discs, or approximately 80 minutes for 700 MB
discs.
HINT
• The total size of audio data that can be written to a single disc is
746 MB (approximately 74 minutes) for 650 MB discs, or 807 MB
(approximately 80 minutes) for 700 MB discs.
Types of media that you can use with the CD-RW drive
The AW2400 CD-RW drive can use two types of media: “CD-R” which lets you record and
append data, and “CD-RW” which can be erased and rewritten as required. These types of
media have the following characteristics.
● CD-R
● CD-RW
You can write data to a new CD-R disc, and append addi-
tional data later on. You cannot erase data that has already
been written and rewrite the disc. Once you perform a pro-
cess known as “finalizing the disc,” the audio data written
to the CD-R can be played by a CD-RW drive or by most
CD players.
In addition to writing and appending data, this type of
media lets you erase all recorded data and write new data
to the disc. Audio data written to a CD-RW can be played
back by a CD-RW drive or by CD players that support
CD-RW media.
22
213
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Writing an audio CD
Writing an audio CD
There are two ways in which you can write audio data to CD-R/RW media.
When using Disc At Once to write a CD, you can use the
● Track At Once
start point, end point and markers that were assigned
within the AW2400 song to divide a single continuous
song into multiple tracks.
This method writes the data one CD track at a time. The
advantage of this method is that you can add new data to a
disc that already contains data.
This is convenient, for example, when you have recorded
a live performance as a single song and want to assign
track numbers while leaving playback in continuous form.
With the Track At Once method, the data from the begin-
ning to the end of a song’s stereo track is written to the CD
as one track. (Even if there is a portion during the song
that contains no data, it will be written as silent audio.)
Since each track is written individually, an interval of
approximately two seconds will be created between each
track.
Start
1
2
End
Song A
Marker = on
Start
1
2
End
Start
Song A
End
Song B
Marker = off
Start
End
Audio CD
Song B
Track 1 Track 2 Track 3
Track 4
Audio CD
NOTE
• Tracks shorter than four seconds cannot be written to an audio
Track 1
Track 2
interval (2 seconds)
CD. If you use start point/end point/markers to divide a song into
multiple tracks, make sure that each track is at least four seconds
long.
• If the length of the stereo track exceeds the writable length of the
media, you can create an audio CD by adjusting the start point/
end point so that the region is within the allowable length. (→
In order for a disc written using Track At Once to be play-
able by the AW2400 CD-RW drive or a CD player, you
must perform a process known as “finalizing” to write
track information to the disc. Once you have finalized a
disc, no more data can be written to it.
Media written using Disc At Once will be finalized auto-
matically, and can be played back by a CD-RW drive or
CD player that supports that type of media. However, no
further data can be written to a disc that was written using
Disc At Once.
● Disc At Once
This method writes all tracks at once. As when using the
Track At Once method, the data from the beginning to the
end of the stereo track of each song is written to the CD as
one track.
However since writing does not stop until all data has been
written, there does not necessarily have to be gaps
between the tracks.
Start
End
Song A
Marker = off
Start
End
Song B
Marker = off
Audio CD
22
Track 1
Track 2
no gap
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
214
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic settings for the CD-RW drive
Basic settings for the CD-RW drive
Before you actually write data to a CD, you will need to make basic settings for the CD-RW drive.
Call the Setting page by either pressing the
Work Navigate section [CD] key as many
times as necessary, or by pressing the [F3]
key after pressing the [CD] key.
Move the cursor to the AUDIO WRITE
SPEED field, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial
to select the write speed.
You can select either x8 (eight times audio playback
speed) or x4 (four times audio playback speed). Nor-
mally you should use x8, and reduce the speed to x4
only if errors occur during writing.
1
2
The CD screen Setting page will appear.
B
F
A
HINT
• In addition to the [DATA/JOG] dial, the [INC]/[DEC] keys can
be used to make selections.
Use the TEST and WRITE buttons of the
AUDIO WRITE TYPE field to select the write
operation(s).
3
The combination of buttons will determine the opera-
tion(s) that will occur, as follows.
• Only the TEST button On
...........Only a write test will be performed.
• Only the WRITE button On
...........Writing will occur immediately.
• Both the WRITE and TEST buttons On
...........First a write test will be performed, and
then the actual writing will be performed.
C
D
E
1 AUDIO WRITE SPEED
Depending on the media and the state of the hard disk,
it is possible that an error may occur while the data is
being written. (If you are using a CD-R, this will make
the media unusable.)You can turn on the TEST button
to check whether an error will occur before you actu-
ally write the disc. If an error occurs during the test,
halt the procedure, and either reduce the write speed or
set the UNDERRUN PROTECT button to ENABLE.
Selects the speed at which audio data will be written to
CD-R/RW media.
B AUDIO WRITE TYPE
Selects the write method to be used when writing
audio data to CD-R/RW media.
C UNDERRUN PROTECT button
Enables/disables the function that prevents buffer
underrun (an error that can occur when data transfer
cannot keep up with write speed).
If desired, set the UNDERRUN PROTECT
button to ENABLE.
The AW2400 CD-RW drive has a function to prevent
“buffer underrun” errors that can occur if data transfer
cannot keep up with the write speed.
4
D DATA WRITE SPEED
This indicates the speed at which data other than CD
audio (e.g., backup data or WAV files) is written to
CD-R/RW media. Normally this will indicate x8, but
may be x4 if the media supports a maximum write
speed of x4. This field is for display only, and cannot
be edited.
Switch the UNDERRUN PROTECT button to the
“ENABLE” setting to prevent buffer underruns.
HINT
E DATA WRITE TYPE
Selects the write method to be used when writing
backup data to CD-R/RW media.
• The CD-RW drive factory settings can be restored from the
CD screen CD Setting page by pressing the [F3] key
(DEFAULT) while holding the [SHIFT] key.
If the COMPARE button is on, the original data will
be compared with the backed-up data or the exported
WAV file after a backup or export operation, to check
whether any errors occurred while writing the data.
NOTE
22
• If the UNDERRUN PROTECT button is set to ENABLE, the
TEST button will automatically be turned off. Also, if the TEST
button is turned on, the UNDERRUN PROTECT button will
automatically be set to DISABLE.
tion on backup procedures.
F CD-RW MEDIA ERASE
Erases the data that was written to CD-RW media. For
215
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Writing audio data
Writing audio data
Here’s how to write the audio data from the stereo track of each song to a CD-R/RW disc in CD-
DA format.
Audio data write operations are accessed via the CD
screen Write page.
F DELETE button
Deletes the selected song from the list.
To call this page press the Work Navigate section [CD]
key as many times as necessary, or press the [F1] key after
pressing the [CD] key.
G WRITE button
Executes the actual CD write operation.
H FINALIZE button
This page contains the following items.
(only displayed for TRACK AT ONCE)
Finalizes the disc so that it can be played on a CD-RW
drive or standard audio CD player.
■ If you turn on
the TRACK AT ONCE button
■ If you turn on the DISC AT ONCE button
B
C
A
D
E
F
I
G
H
I MARKER button
(only displayed for DISC AT ONCE)
For each stereo track, this enables or disables the markers
1 Track list
This is a list of the songs containing stereo tracks that will
be written to the CD-R/RW media. The line enclosed by a
dotted frame is currently selected for operations. If no
songs have been registered, this will indicate “-NO
TRACK-”.
If audio data has already been written to the inserted CD-
R/RW media but the media has not yet been finalized,
“--EXIST--” will be displayed for the already-written data.
that have been set within that song.
When you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, the start point, end point and markers
within the currently selected stereo track will be enabled.
(A “flag” icon will appear at the right of the list.) If mark-
ers are enabled for a stereo track, a track number will be
written to the CD at the location of each marker. Regard-
less of any areas of silence, the entire region from the Start
point to the End point will be written.
B TRACK AT ONCE button
Turn this button on to create an audio CD using the Track
At Once method.
C DISC AT ONCE button
Turn this button on to create an audio CD using the Disc
At Once method.
D ADD button
Adds a song at the end of the track list.
E INSERT button
Inserts a new song in front of the song currently selected
in the list.
22
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Writing audio data
Move the cursor to the dotted frame in the
5
Writing Track At Once
track list, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or
the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the song that
will be written to track 1.
Here’s how to use the Track At Once method to write ste-
reo tracks from songs saved on the hard disk to CD-R/RW
media. Use this method if you expect to be adding tracks
to the disc later, or if you want an automatic two-second
gap between tracks.
Make sure that the appropriate virtual track
is selected for the stereo track of the
song(s) you want to write.
1
Only the virtual track that can be played by the stereo
track (i.e., the “current track”) will be written to disc.
If the correct virtual track is not selected, load the
desired song, use the TRACK screen Stereo TR page
to switch to the correct virtual track, and then save the
song.
Call the CD screen Write page by either
2
pressing the Work Navigate section [CD]
key as many times as necessary, or by
pressing the [F1] key after pressing the
[CD] key.
or
Insert a CD-R/RW disc in the drive, move
the cursor to the TRACK AT ONCE button,
and press the [ENTER] key.
3
HINT
• Songs in which data has not been recorded on the virtual
tracks selected for the stereo track will not be displayed. A
current song that was not saved after the stereo track was
recorded will also not be displayed.
The inserted CD-RW will be automatically checked.
HINT
• If data has already been written on the inserted CD-RW disc,
a popup window will appear immediately after step 3 asking
whether you want to erase the data. If you want to erase the
entire disc move the cursor to the OK button. If you want to
cancel the audio CD write operation, move the cursor to the
CANCEL button. Then press the [ENTER] key.
• Songs with a stereo track shorter than four seconds will not
be displayed.
• Songs with the sampling frequency of 48 kHz will not be dis-
played.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to select the songs
that will be written to track 2 and following.
6
Move the cursor to the ADD button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The track list will show information (track number/
song name/size of the stereo track) for the song that
will be written to track 1 of the CD.
4
HINT
• Pressing the [F1]–[F3] keys while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the ADD ([F1] key),
INSERT ([F2] key), and DELETE ([F3] key) buttons, respec-
tively.
HINT
• When you move the cursor to the ADD button and press the
[ENTER] key, a new song will be added following the existing
songs.
NOTE
• When you add a song to the track list, the added song will
always be initially selected. Change this as required.
• By using the INSERT button instead of the ADD button, you
can insert a new song immediately before the song that is
selected in the list.
• You can use the DELETE button to delete the currently
selected song from the track list.
22
217
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Writing audio data
Move the cursor to the WRITE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm.
7
Writing Disc At Once
Here’s how to use the Disc At Once method to write stereo
tracks from songs saved on the hard disk to CD-R/RW
media. Use this method if you do not want to create
silence between each track of the CD, or if you want to
write a single song divided into multiple tracks on the CD.
Make sure that the appropriate virtual track
is selected for the stereo track of the
song(s) you want to write.
1
HINT
If you want to divide the song into CD
2
• Pressing the [F4] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the WRITE button.
tracks at the marker locations specified
within the song, check that markers have
been set at the appropriate locations.
To begin writing the disc, move the cursor
to the OK button and press the [ENTER]
key.
A popup window will indicate “CD Writing...” while
data is being written to the disc. When writing is com-
pleted, a popup window will ask you whether you
want to finalize.
8
Call the CD screen Write page by either
3
pressing the Work Navigate section [CD]
key as many times as necessary, or by
pressing the [F1] key after pressing the
[CD] key.
Move the cursor to DISC AT ONCE and
press the [ENTER] key.
4
The CD-RW disc inserted in the drive will automati-
cally be checked.
HINT
• If data has already been written on the CD-RW disc that you
insert, a popup window will appear immediately after step 4
asking whether you want to erase the data. Move the cursor
to the OK button if you want to erase the entire disc, or to the
CANCEL button if you want to cancel execution. Then press
the [ENTER] key.
NOTE
• A “BUFFER UNDERRUN!” error message will appear if a
buffer underrun occurs while writing. In this case, either
decrease the writing speed to 4x or set the UNDERRUN
Move the cursor to the ADD button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The track list will show information (track number/
song name/size of the stereo track) for the song that
will be written to track 1 of the CD.
5
data is actually written. An error message will appear if a
problem occurs during the write test.
• Copy-prohibit data will automatically be written into the CD
that is created.
HINT
• When you move the cursor to the ADD button and press the
[ENTER] key, a new song will be added following the existing
songs.
To finalize the disc, move the cursor to the
OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
9
If you do not want to finalize the disc, move the cursor
to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.
• By using the INSERT button instead of the ADD button, you
can insert a new song immediately before the song that is
selected in the list.
This completes the writing process.
• You can use the DELETE button to delete the currently
selected song from the track list.
22
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
218
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Writing audio data
Move the cursor to the dotted frame in the
track list, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or
the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the song that
will be written to track 1.
Repeat steps 5–7 to select the songs that
will be written to track 2 and following.
6
8
9
HINT
• Pressing the [F1]–[F3] keys while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the ADD ([F1] key),
INSERT ([F2] key), and DELETE ([F3] key) buttons, respec-
tively.
NOTE
• When you add a song to the track list, the added song will
always be initially selected. Change this as required.
Move the cursor to the WRITE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm.
or
HINT
• Pressing the [F4] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the WRITE button.
HINT
• Songs in which data has not been recorded on the virtual
tracks selected for the stereo track will not be displayed. A
current song that was not saved after the stereo track was
recorded will also not be displayed.
To begin writing the disc, move the cursor
to the OK button and press the [ENTER]
key.
A popup window will indicate “CD Writing...” while
data is being written to the media. When writing is
completed, the CD-R/RW media will be ejected, and
the following popup window will appear.
10
• Songs with a stereo track shorter than four seconds will not
be displayed.
• Songs with the sampling frequency of 48 kHz will not be dis-
played.
If you want the stereo track of the selected
song to be divided into CD tracks at the
location of each marker, move the cursor to
the MARKER button and press the [ENTER]
key.
7
Markers will be enabled for that song, and a “flag”
icon will appear at the right of the list.
NOTE
HINT
data is actually written. An error message will appear if a
problem occurs during the write test.
• Markers can be enabled/disabled independently for each
song.
• When you use markers to divide a stereo track, the location of
the divisions will be specified in units of 1/75 second.
• Copy-prohibit data will automatically be written to the CD.
NOTE
If you want to create another CD with identi-
cal contents, insert a new disc, and move
the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
Writing will begin again. Alternatively, you can move
the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the
[ENTER] key to exit the write operation.
11
• Note that if markers are enabled, the track numbers shown in
the list will not match the number of tracks written to the CD.
• A maximum of 99 tracks can be written to an audio CD. If, for
example, markers are enabled for the song you write to CD
track 1, and this song contains 98 markers, it will not be possi-
ble to write any more songs to that CD-R/RW disc.
22
219
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finalizing CD-R/RW media
Finalizing CD-R/RW media
Here’s how to finalize CD-R/RW media created using Track At Once so that the disc can be
played by a CD-RW drive or a CD player.
HINT
• CD-R/RW media written by the AW2400 using Track At Once (and not yet finalized) can-
not be played by another CD-RW drive or a CD player, but it can be played by the
Insert the CD-R/RW disc that you want to
finalize into the CD-RW drive.
Move the cursor to the FINALIZE button,
and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm the finalize
operation.
1
2
4
5
Call the CD screen Write page by either
pressing the Work Navigate section [CD]
key as many times as necessary, or by
pressing the [F1] key after pressing the
[CD] key.
Move the cursor to the TRACK AT ONCE
button, and press the [ENTER] key.
The track list will show the tracks that have been writ-
ten to that CDR/RW disc. Already-recorded tracks will
be displayed as “--EXIST--”.
3
To finalize the disc, move the cursor to the
OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
If you decide not to finalize the disc, move the cursor
to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.
NOTE
• The finalize operation cannot be halted once it has been
started. Perform this operation with care.
22
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
220
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Erasing CD-RW media
Erasing CD-RW media
Here’s how to erase all data that has been written to CD-RW media so that the CD-RW disc can
be used to record new data.You will need to perform this operation on a disc that has been used
to store data from a computer or other equipment if you want to use that disc with the AW2400.
HINT
• Since data is erased as necessary when you back up AW2400 data to CD-RW media or
when you write audio data to CD-RW media, you do not need to perform the following
procedure each time you re-use the disc.
NOTE
• The erased data cannot be recovered. Perform this operation with care.
● If you turn on the SIMPLY button
Call the CD screen Setting page by either
pressing the Work Navigate section [CD]
key as many times as necessary, or by
pressing the [F3] key after pressing the
[CD] key.
1
2
Move the cursor to the CD-RW MEDIA
ERASE field, and press the [ENTER] key to
select the desired erasure method.
The buttons select the following erasure methods.
● If you turn on the PERFECTLY button
• SIMPLY button...........Only the TOC (Table Of Con-
tents) data written to the CD-
RW disc will be erased. This
is the quickest way to erase
a CD-RW disc.
• PERFECTLY button...All data written to the CD-
RW disc will be erased com-
pletely. This method erases
all data from the media and
thus will take longer than the
SIMPLY option.
HINT
• Pressing the [F1]–[F2] keys while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the SIMPLY ([F1] key) and
PERFECTLY ([F2] key) buttons, respectively.
Move the cursor to the appropriate button and press
the [ENTER] key. A popup window will ask you to
confirm the erasure.
To execute the erasure move the cursor to
the OK button. If you decide not to erase
the disc move the cursor to the CANCEL
button.Then press the [ENTER] key.
3
Erasure will begin if you selected the OK button. (This
operation cannot be halted.)
22
221
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing an audio CD
Playing an audio CD
The AW2400 CD Play function lets you play back a conventional audio CD or CD-R/RW media to
which audio data has been written via the CD-RW drive.
HINT
• The CD Play function can also be used to play mixed-mode CDs (tracks 2 and above)
and CD Extra CDs (1st session only).
• CD-R/RW discs can also be played prior to finalization.
Call the CD screen Play page by either
pressing the Work Navigate section [CD]
key as many times as necessary, or by
pressing the [F2] key after pressing the
[CD] key.
Insert the audio CD that you want to play
into the CD-RW drive.
1
2
3
Move the cursor to the CD PLAY MODE but-
ton and press the [ENTER] key.
The CD Play function will be activated, and the CD
track data will be read.
In this page you can play back an audio CD inserted in
the CD-RW drive.
HINT
• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section
[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the CD PLAY MODE but-
ton.
To play the CD tracks, press the PLAY [
key.To stop, press the STOP [■] key.
During playback the audio output of the CD-RW drive
will be sent directly to the stereo output channel. Use
the STEREO fader to adjust the volume.
]
4
5
A
B
C
When the CD Play function is on, the transport section
keys have the following functions.
Key
Operation
PLAY [
STOP [■] key
REW [ ] key/FF [
] key
Play
Stop
1 CD PLAY MODE button
Switches the CD Play function on/off.
] key
Rewind/Fast-forward
Select tracks
B INPUT CH MUTE/MIX button
[DATA/JOG] dial
] key/[ ] key
(Press the [ENTER] key
to confirm the selection)
Use this button to specify whether the signals from
input channels 1–16 will be output together with CD
playback (MIX button), or whether only the CD signal
will be output (MUTE button).
[
Select tracks
To exit the CD Play function, move the cur-
sor to the CD PLAY MODE button and press
the [ENTER] key.
C List
Displays the tracks on the audio CD that is inserted in
the CD-RW drive.
NOTE
• The CD PLAY MODE button can be switched on/off only while
CD playback is stopped.
• While the CD PLAY MODE button is on, the CD-RW drive will
be locked and it will not be possible to eject the disc.
22
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
222
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 23
Digital Input/Output & Optional Card Settings
This section covers settings that apply to digital I/O and optional I/O cards.
Wordclock and Cascade Settings
Wordclock source selection and settings for Vari-pitch and cascade connection are made via the
DIO screen Setting page.
To call this page press the Work Navigate section [DIO]
key as many times as necessary, or press the [F1] key after
pressing the [DIO] key.
Select the Wordclock Source
“Wordclock” refers to the clock signal that provides the
basic timing for all digital audio signals. When transfer-
ring digital audio signals between the AW2400 and an
external device such as a computer-based DAW (Digital
Audio Workstation) or HDR (Hard-Disk Recorder) it is
necessary to ensure that both devices are synchronized to
the same wordclock signal. If the wordclock used by the
two devices is not perfectly synchronized the digital audio
cannot be accurately transferred and severe noise will
often be the result.
A
B
C
The normal procedure is to designate one device that will
be the source of the wordclock signal for the entire system
as the “wordclock master,” or simply “clock master”, and
all devices that receive and synchronize to the wordclock
master as “wordclock slaves”. The AW2400 can be set to
function either as the wordclock master or slave.
Call the DIO screen Setting page by either
1
This page includes the following items.
pressing the Work Navigate section [DIO]
key as many times as necessary, or by
pressing the [F1] key after pressing the
[DIO] key.
Wordclock settings are made in the WORDCLOCK
SOURCE field.
1 WORDCLOCK SOURCE field
Selects the wordclock source to which the AW2400 will
synchronize. The condition of the received wordclock and
synchronization status are also displayed here.
B VARI field
Provides fine adjustment of the internal clock in order to
control the Vari-pitch function.
C
B
D
EF
A
C STEREO BUS CASCADE field
Provides settings that allow an external device connected
to the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector to cascade-con-
nected to the AW2400 stereo bus.
23
223
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wordclock and Cascade Settings
D SLOT
1 INT button
When an I/O card is installed in the rear-panel slot a
graphic symbol that indicates the type of card will
appear here. “NO CARD” will appear when no card is
installed.
When this button is on the AW2400’s internal clock is
selected as the wordclock source. Use this setting
when using the AW2400 on it’s own, or when using
the AW2400 as the wordclock master for other
devices.
E IN, OUT
Indicates the number of input channels (IN) and output
channels (OUT) available on an I/O card installed in
the rear-panel slot.
HINT
• When the internal clock is selected the sampling frequency of
the current song becomes the sampling frequency for the
entire system.
F Fs
Indicates the sampling frequency of the wordclock
signal currently selected as the wordclock source.
B D.ST IN button
When this button is turned on the clock signal
included in the digital audio signal received at the
[DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector is used as the
wordclock source.
NOTE
• When using the AW2400 as wordclock slave, check that the
sampling frequency of the current song matches the sampling
frequency shown in the Fs filed. For example, a song that was
recorded with a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz will play back
with the wrong pitch and tempo if slaved to a 48 kHz word-
clock signal.
Use this setting when you want the AW2400 to func-
tion as a wordclock slave that synchronizes to the sig-
nal received via the [DIGITAL STEREO IN]
connector. Choose this setting when, for example, you
will be cascade-connecting the digital audio from an
external device to the AW2400 stereo bus, or when
receiving digital audio from a DAT recorder or similar
digital audio source.
• “Unlock” in the Fs field indicates that proper synchronization
with the wordclock source has not been achieved. In such
cases check that an appropriate wordclock signal has been
selected as the source.
C 1/2–15/16 buttons
When one of these buttons is turned on the clock sig-
nal included in the corresponding digital audio signal
received via the rear-panel slot is used as the word-
clock source (i.e. the clock signal included in one ste-
reo pair: 1/2, 3/4–15/16).
Use one of these settings when using an external HDR
or other digital audio source as the wordclock master
to which the AW2400 will be synchronized as the
wordclock slave.
The CLOCK and SYNC rows show the condition of
the received wordclock signal and the synchronization
status, respectively.
• CLOCK ... A “●” symbol will appear when an appro-
priate wordclock signal is detected.
• SYNC...... A “●” symbol will appear when the
AW2400 is properly synchronized to the
incoming wordclock signal. A “ ” symbol
will appear when an appropriate word-
clock signal is not detected.
NOTE
• Buttons that appear gray indicate that an appropriate digital
signal is not available at the corresponding connector or slot,
and cannot be used.
23
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
224
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wordclock and Cascade Settings
Select a wordclock source via the WORDCLOCK SOURCE field.
The wordclock source setting will depend on how the AW2400 is being used. Here are a few
examples.
2
● AW2400 As Wordclock Master
When the AW2400 is used on its own, or when it is used as the wordclock master for an external
HDR, DAW, or similar digital audio device, turn the INT button on. The external device(s) must
be set to synchronize to the master wordclock from the AW2400.
[DIGITAL STEREO OUT]
connector
Wordclock
[DIGITAL STEREO IN]
connector
or
Wordclock
I/O slot
HDR
(Wordclock slave)
AW2400
Digital I/O card
(Wordclock master)
WORDCLOCK SOURCE=INT
● Using an HDR or DAW As Wordclock Master
Set the HDR or DAW to use it’s internal clock in order to function as wordclock master so that
the AW2400 can synchronize to the digital signal received at a digital input on an I/O card. Select
the 1/2–15/16 button corresponding to the digital input at which the master signal is being
received.
I/O slot
Wordclock
Digital I/O card
HDR
(Wordclock master)
AW2400
(Wordclock slave)
WORDCLOCK SOURCE=1/2–15/16
● Using an MD or DAT Recorder as Wordclock Master
Connect the digital audio output of the MD or DAT recorder to the AW2400 [DIGITAL STEREO
IN] connector, and turn the D.ST IN button on so that the AW2400 can synchronize to the
received digital signal.
[DIGITAL STEREO OUT]
connector
Wordclock
[DIGITAL STEREO IN]
connector
DAT recorder, etc.
(Wordclock master)
AW2400
(Wordclock slave)
WORDCLOCK SOURCE=D.ST IN
Move the cursor to the appropriate button and press the [ENTER] key.
The AW2400 clock source will change accordingly, and the sampling frequency of the selected
clock source will appear in the Fs field.
3
23
225
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wordclock and Cascade Settings
To disable the Vari-pitch function move the
cursor to the FIX button and press the
[ENTER] key.
The Vari-pitch function will be turned off and the sam-
pling frequency will be fixed at the value shown to the
right of the FIX button.
6
Fine Adjustment Of Overall Song
Pitch (Vari-pitch)
When the AW2400 is set to use it’s own internal clock as
the wordclock source it is possible to adjust the sampling
frequency over a small range to adjust the pitch and tempo
of song playback (Vari-pitch). This function can be useful
to match the playback pitch of an AW2400 song to an
acoustic instrument, or to adjust the length of a song.
NOTE
• When the Vari-pitch function is enabled and sampling fre-
quency is adjusted, any external devices slaved to the
AW2400 wordclock signal will be affected. Some slave
devices may not be able to synchronize properly to the
AW2400 wordclock signal when it is adjusted using the Vari-
pitch function.
Call the DIO screen Setting page by either
1
pressing the Work Navigate section [DIO]
key as many times as necessary, or by
pressing the [F1] key after pressing the
[DIO] key.
Cascade-connecting External
Devices
Move the cursor to the WORDCLOCK
SOURCE field INT button and press the
[ENTER] key.
2
Digital audio signals received at the AW2400 [DIGITAL
STEREO IN] connector can be mixed directly into the
AW2400’s stereo bus (cascade connection). The output
from a digital mixer could be cascade-connected in this
way to allow the mixer’s inputs to be mixed to stereo
along with the AW2400’s own inputs.
This selects the AW2400 internal clock as the word-
clock source.
Move the cursor to the VARI field.
Vari-pitch settings are made via the VARI field.
3
● AW2400 Cascade Connection
A
C
External device
(Wordclock master)
B
AW2400
(Wordclock slave)
Stereo bus
Digital audio
output
Input channels
1 FIX button
Track channels
When this button is turned on the sampling frequency
is fixed at the sampling frequency shown to the right of
the button (default).
[DIGITAL STEREO IN]
connector
Effect return channels
Stereo output channel
B VARI button
The Vari-pitch function is active when this button is
turned on.
Stereo track
[STEREO OUT] jack, etc.
C VARI knob
Adjusts the sampling frequency of the current song in
a range of -5.97 to +6.00%.
Connect the digital output from the device
to be cascade connected to the AW2400
[DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector.
1
2
Move the cursor to the VARI button and
press the [ENTER] key.
This activates the Vari-pitch function.
4
Call the DIO screen Setting page by either
pressing the Work Navigate section [DIO]
key as many times as necessary, or by
pressing the [F1] key after pressing the
[DIO] key.
Move the cursor to the VARI knob and use
the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to
set the sampling frequency as required.
5
Move the cursor to the D.ST IN button in the
WORDCLOCK SOURCE field and press the
[ENTER] key.
3
This selects the signal received at the [DIGITAL STE-
REO IN] connector as the wordclock source.
23
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
226
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Move the cursor to the STEREO BUS CAS-
CADE field.
Cascade connection settings are made in the STEREO
BUS CASCADE field.
Move the cursor to the STEREO BUS CAS-
CADE button and press the [ENTER] key.
This connects the digital audio signal received from
the external device directly to the AW2400 stereo bus.
4
5
6
Use the ATT knob to adjust the level of the
received digital signal as required.
You can now mix and record the signals from the
AW2400’s own inputs along with the digital audio
received at the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector to
the AW2400 stereo track.
B
A
1 STEREO BUS CASCADE button
Enables or disables the cascade connection.
NOTE
• In order to record the signal received at the [DIGITAL STE-
REO IN] connector the UTILITY screen Preference page CD/
DAT DIGITAL REC button must be set to ENABLE.
B ATT knob
Adjusts the level of the signal received at the [DIGI-
TAL STEREO IN] connector.
Check the Status Of the Digital Input Signal
You can visually check the status of the signals received at the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector
as well as signals received via an I/O card installed in the rear-panel slot in the DIO screen Sta-
tus page.
To call this page press the Work Navigate section [DIO]
key as many times as necessary, or press the [F2] key after
pressing the [DIO] key. This is a display-only page that
does not include any editable settings.
This page contains the following items.
1 Status
Indicates the status of received digital signals. The mean-
ings of the displays are as follows:
NOTE
A
B
D
C
• The following status displays will appear as “----” when a MY8-AT,
MY8-TD, MY16-AT, or MY16-TD I/O card is installed.
• Fs (Sampling Frequency)
Indicates the sampling frequency of the received digital
signal.
Parameter values
Description
Sampling frequency = 44.1kHz
Sampling frequency = 48kHz
Unknown sampling frequency
44.1k
48k
None
No input signal, or inappropriate input
signal.
UNLOCK
• EMPHASIS
Indicates whether emphasis is on or off for the received
digital signal.
Parameter values
Description
On
Off
Emphasis ON
Emphasis OFF
Unknown
23
???
227
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• CATEGORY
• COPY
Indicates the status of “Category Code Bit” included in
the IEC958 Part 2 (S/PDIF-Consumer) format. This
parameter can display the following values:
Indicates the status of copy protection information
included in the IEC958 Part2 (S/PDIF-Consumer) for-
mat signals.
Parameter values
General
Description
Temporarily used.
Parameter values
Description
OK
Copy allowed
Copy prohibited
Laser Optical
Laser optical device
Prohibit
Digital - Digital converter and signal pro-
cessing device
D/D Conv
B [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector status
Indicates the status of the digital audio signal received at
the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector.
Magnetic tape device and magnetic disk
device
Magnetic
D.Broadcast
Instrument
Digital broadcast reception
C SLOT
Musical instrument, microphone, and
sources that generate string signals
When an I/O card is installed in the rear-panel slot a
graphic symbol that indicates the type of card appears
here. “NO CARD” will appear when no card is installed.
A/D converter
(without copyright information)
AD Conv
A/D converter
(with copyright information)
AD Conv with (c)
D Digital I/O card status
Displays the status of the digital audio signal received via
a digital I/O card.
Solid Memory
Experiment
Unknown
Solid memory device
Experimental device
Unknown device
HINT
• The status of digital signals received via a digital I/O card is dis-
played in odd/even channel pairs.
NOTE
• “AES/EBU” appears in the Category row when you are moni-
toring IEC958 Part 3 (AES/EBU-Professional) format signals
(that do not include Category Code Bit).
Plug-in Card Settings
Settings for plug-in DSP cards installed in the rear-panel slot are made via the DIO screen Plug-
in page.
To call this page press the Work Navigate section [DIO]
key as many times as necessary, or press the [F3] key after
pressing the [DIO] key.
The content of the display will depend on the plug-in card
installed. Refer to the plug-in card owner’s manual for
details.
As of July 2005 the available plug-in card is:
• Waves .................. Y96K
Check the following Yamaha website for the latest infor-
mation on plug-in cards.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
23
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
228
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 24
USB
This chapter explains operation and use of the AW2400 USB interface.
What You Can Do With USB
The AW2400 USB interface can be connected to a personal computer to allow data transfer
between the AW2400 and the computer. The following types of operation are possible.
● MIDI Message Transfer (Normal Mode)
● WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode)
In this type of operation the USB connector performs the
functions of the three MIDI connectors usually used for
MIDI data transfer, allowing efficient MIDI communica-
tion with the computer. The USB port is normally in this
mode immediately after the AW2400 power is turned on.
Audio data recorded on the AW2400 can be transferred to
the computer in the form of WAV files for storage or fur-
ther manipulation. Conversely, WAV files can be trans-
ferred to the AW2400 from the computer.
For example, you might transfer a recording made on the
AW2400 to the computer and use a computer-based wave-
form editing program to edit the waveform. Once edited
the WAV file can be transferred back to the AW2400
where it can be processed and mixed with other audio
data. It is also possible to directly access data on the inter-
nal AW2400 hard disk from the computer and directly edit
the data “in place”.
NOTE
• In order to use the USB connector for MIDI communication the
MIDI port settings must be correct. Refer to “Basic MIDI Settings”
on page 194 for details on the MIDI port settings.
• Before connecting the AW2400 USB connector to the computer
the appropriate USB-MIDI driver must be properly installed on the
NOTE
• Either the Windows XP SP1 or Mac OS X 10.3 or higher operating
system is required for computer WAV file management with the
AW2400.
● USB Storage mode
WAV files
WAV files
(Direct audio data
editing is also possible.)
Computer
AW2400
24
229
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode)
WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode)
In this mode you can directly access the AW2400 hard disk from the computer to manipulate and
manage the audio data (WAV files). The following two methods can be used.
■ Using the Transport Folder
This method uses the “Transport” folder on the AW2400
as the transit point for transferring files to and from the
computer.
■ Directly Accessing AW2400 Audio Data
In this case the AW2400 and computer are connected via a
USB cable, and the target WAV files in specific folders on
the AW2400 hard disk are directly accessed from the com-
puter. Waveform editing software running on the computer
can be used to directly edit WAV files residing on the
AW2400 hard disk, and complete songs can be backed up
(copied to) the computer hard disk. Refer to “Song Folder
Organization” on page 166 for details on how the folders
are organized.
WAV files are first exported to the “Transport” folder on
the AW2400 hard disk from the audio tracks. The
AW2400 is then connected to the computer via a USB
cable, the “Transport” folder is accessed and opened from
the computer, and the WAV files are copied to the com-
puter hard disk. Files to be moved from the computer to
the AW2400 are first copied from the computer to the
AW2400 “Transport” folder, and then imported into the
audio tracks from there.
● Directly Accessing Audio Data
● Transfer to Computer via the “Transport” Folder
Computer
Backup of Song Data etc.
(USB)
Direct Editing of
Audio Data (USB)
Computer
AW2400
WAV file transfer (USB)
Audio tracks/
stereo track
“Transport” folder
AW2400
Audio tracks/
stereo track
Export
“Transport” folder
Switching to the USB Storage
Mode
HINT
• Files in the “Transport” folder can also be directly accessed and
manipulated from applications running on the computer.
To directly access files on the AW2400 internal hard disk,
first follow the procedure outlined below to switch to the
USB Storage Mode.
● Transfer to AW2400 via the “Transport” Folder
Make sure that your computer meets the
following requirements.
1
• OS ...........................Windows XP Professional/
Home Edition SP1 or higher, or
Computer
Mac OSX 10.3 or higher.
• USB Interface.........USB 2.0
WAV file transfer (USB)
NOTE
AW2400
• A USB 1.1 interface can also be used, but in that case file
transfer will occur at USB 1.1 speed.
Audio tracks/
stereo track
• To use Mac OS X 10.3 you will need to re-initialize the
AW2400 hard disk and set the hard disk cluster size to 32K
Import
“Transport” folder
Make sure the POWER switch on the
AW2400 is set to OFF, then connect the
AW2400 to the computer via a USB cable.
2
24
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
230
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode)
Turn on the AW2400.
Display the AW2400 internal hard disk on
the computer screen.
3
4
7
No driver installation is necessary for WAV file trans-
fer. If it is the first time you have connected a USB
cable on a Windows machine, however, you may see a
message prompting you to install a USB MIDI driver.
Even if you will not send and receive MIDI messages
via the USB cable, install the USB MIDI driver as
● In the case of Windows XP:
The two windows will appear.
Call the USB screen USB page by pressing
the SCENE/AUTOMIX/USB section [USB]
key.
NOTE
• If the windows shown above do not appear, choose to display
the “AW2400-1” and “AW2400-2” drives from the Windows
Start → My Computer menu.
CONNECT button
● In the case of Mac OS X:
The “AW2400-1” and “AW2400-2” drive icons will
appear on the desktop.
Move the cursor to the CONNECT button,
and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you whether you want to
save the current song.
5
NOTE
• If the icons are not displayed properly, use the Disk Utility to
temporarily un-mount the appropriate volume, and then
mount it again.
NOTE
• Before turning the USB Storage Mode on, make sure that no
MIDI data is being transferred via the USB connection with
your computer.
Move the cursor toYES (to save the current
song) or NO (if you don’t want to save the
current song) and press the [ENTER] key.
6
The AW2400 USB Storage Mode will be engaged, and
the button will change to “CANCEL”. Most of the
AW2400 functions are temporarily disabled while this
mode is engaged.
24
231
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode)
Open the appropriate drive/folder and copy
8
Exiting the USB Storage Mode
the required WAV files or directly edit the
WAV files using a waveform editor applica-
tion.
Use the following procedure to exit from the USB Storage
Mode.
To access the Transport folder open the “AW2400-2”
drive.
Be sure the “unmount” the AW2400 hard
disk from your computer after closing all
AW2400 windows.
1
To directly access WAV files on the AW2400 open the
“Song1” folder on the “AW2400-1” drive and the
“Song2” folder on the “AW2400-2” drive. These fold-
ers contain folders bearing the names of the recorded
songs (extension .AWS), and those folders further con-
tain folders labeled “Audio” that contain the actual
audio data.
● In the case of Windows XP:
Click the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon in the task-
bar and remove the corresponding two “USB mass
storage devices”.
To backup a complete song to the computer simply
copy the folder bearing the name of the song you want
to backup to the computer.
information on how the folders are organized.
NOTE
HINT
• If an error message appears, execute “Safely Remove Hard-
ware” one or two more times.You should then be able to
remove the device without seeing an error message.
• Verification and repair of the internal hard disk can be carried
out from the computer. From a Windows computer enter the
“chkdsk” command at the command prompt, or from a Macin-
tosh computer running OS X use the Disk Utility First Aid
function.
● In the case of Mac OSX:
Drag the “AW2400-1” and “AW2400-2” icons from
the desktop to the trash.
NOTE
• For 24-bit songs, the audio data contained in the “Audio” fold-
ers is stored in 32-bit WAV format. If your waveform editor
application cannot handle 32-bit data, first export the WAV
file(s) to the “Transport” folder.WAV files imported or exported
via the “Transport” folder are automatically converted to 24-bit
format that can be edited using most waveform editor soft-
ware.
In the AW2400 screen, move the cursor to
the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER]
key.
A popup window confirming whether the AW2400 has
been safely removed from the computer will appear.
2
• Do not change the names of any folders/files other than those
in the Transport folder. Any folder/file names that have been
added or changed outside the Transport folder from the com-
puter will be automatically deleted. Be especially careful not
to change a song folder or song file name.
• Files larger than 4 GB cannot be copied.
Be sure to carry out the steps outlined in “Exiting the
USB Storage Mode” when disconnecting the AW2400
from the computer.
To return to the normal mode move the cur-
sor to the OK button and press the [ENTER]
key.
3
24
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
232
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode)
1 From TR
Selects the source track for the export operation (1–24,
1&2–23&24, ST, ALL).
Copying Exported WAV Files To
the Computer
B From V.TR
The WAV files corresponding to the audio tracks you want
to transfer to a computer must first be exported to the
“Transport” folder on the internal hard disk drive. Once
these files have been exported they can be edited using
appropriate waveform editing software, or imported into a
DAW application for further processing or integration
with other projects.
Selects the source virtual track for the export operation
(1–8).
C From Start
Specifies the start point of the data to be exported in
counter format.
D From End
Specifies the end point of the data to be exported in
counter format.
Call the EDIT screen Edit page by either
1
pressing the Work Navigate section [EDIT]
key as many times as necessary, or by
pressing the [F1] key after pressing the
[EDIT] key.
E File Name
Displays the name of the WAV file to be exported. The
default name is the name of the virtual track (the odd-
numbered virtual track in track pairs) to be exported.
F EXECUTE button
Executes the export operation.
Edit commands
Move the cursor to the From TR field, and
select the audio track that you want to
export.
If you select “ALL,” the current tracks 1–24 will be
exported as separate monaural WAV files.
4
5
If you select “1”–“24,” the single specified track will
be exported as a monaural WAV file.
If you select “1&2”–“23&24” or ST, the specified pair
of tracks (or the Stereo track) will be exported as a ste-
reo WAV file.
Move the cursor to the From V.TR, From
Start, and From End fields, and specify the
virtual track number and region to be
exported.
Move the cursor to the edit command field
and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]
keys to select EXPORT.
2
NOTE
• If you selected “ALL” as the export source, all the recorded
tracks will be exported automatically. It is not possible to spec-
ify the virtual track number for each.
Press the [ENTER] key to confirm the
selected edit command.
3
The display will appear as follows.
C
A
B
D
E
F
24
233
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode)
When you have finished setting the param-
eters, move the cursor to the EXECUTE but-
ton and press the [ENTER] key.
6
Importing Copied WAV Files
From the Computer
This procedure allows you to import WAV files transferred
from a computer to the “Transport” folder to be imported
into specified audio tracks.
If a source other than “ALL” is selected the NAME
EDIT popup window will appear, allowing you to
enter a file name.
If you select “ALL” as the source the NAME EDIT
popup window will appear, allowing you to enter a
folder name. The WAV files (“TRACK_01.WAV”–
“TRACK_24.WAV”) will be stored in the new folder,
which will be created inside the “Transport” folder.
and display the AW2400 internal hard disk
on the computer screen.
1
Copy the WAV files from the computer to
the AW2400 “Transport” folder.
2
The “Transport” folder is located in the “AW2400-2”
drive.
When the files have been copied, discon-
nect the AW2400 from the computer and
3
Call the EDIT screen Edit page by either
4
pressing the Work Navigate section [EDIT]
key as many times as necessary, or by
pressing the [F1] key after pressing the
[EDIT] key.
Enter an appropriate file or folder name via
the NAME EDIT popup window, as required.
7
For details on how to enter a name, refer to page 32.
To execute the export operation, move the
cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
Move the cursor to the edit command field
and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]
keys to select IMPORT USB WAV.
8
5
The export operation will begin. If you move the cur-
sor to the CANCEL button (instead of the OK button)
and press the [ENTER] key, the export operation will
be cancelled. (However, it is not possible to abort the
export process once it has been started.)
Press the [ENTER] key to confirm the
selected edit command.
The display will appear as follows.
6
C
D
E
NOTE
• Since the AW2400 does not keep track of the date and time,
dummy values will be written as the file creation date and time
of the WAV files.
• Tracks that do not contain data in the specified region will not
be exported.
B
A
and display the AW2400 internal hard disk
on the computer screen.
9
Open the “AW2400-2” drive to access the
“Transport” folder.
10
Copy the WAV files exported to the “Trans-
port” folder to the computer.
11
F
G
H
I
WAV files in the “Transport” folder can also be
directly accessed from computer applications.
When the files have been copied, discon-
nect the AW2400 from the computer and
12
24
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
234
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode)
1 File list
Move the cursor to the file list and use the
[DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to
select the WAV file that you want to import.
7
This shows the WAV files and folders (directories) in
the “Transport” folder. Move the cursor to the list, and
use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to
specify the WAV file that you want to import.
When a
is included in the field enclosed by the
dotted frame you can press the [ENTER] key to move
down one level. To move up one level display the
icon and press the [ENTER] key.
B FILE
This indicates the name of the WAV file or folder. The
icons shown here have the following meaning.
NOTE
•
•
.............Indicates a WAV file.
• Only 16-bit or 24-bit, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz, mono or stereo
WAV files can be imported. Also, WAV files having a different
bit depth or sample rate from the song cannot be imported.
.............Indicates a folder in the same level.You
can select this icon and press the
[ENTER] key to move down one level.
•
..............You can select this icon and press the
[ENTER] key to move up one level.
Use theToTR,To V.TR, andTo Start fields to
specify the track number, virtual track num-
ber, and starting location into which the
WAV file will be imported.
8
9
C TOTAL
Indicates the playback length (in units of hours/min-
utes/seconds/milliseconds) of the WAV file selected
for importing. This field is for display only, and cannot
be changed.
NOTE
• Any existing data at the import destination will be overwritten.
Be careful not to accidentally overwrite important data.
D TYPE
Indicates whether the WAV file selected for importing
is monaural ( ) or stereo ( ). The numerical value
at the right indicates the bit depth of the WAV file.
This field is for display only, and cannot be changed.
When you have finished making the
required settings, move the cursor to the
EXECUTE button and press the [ENTER]
key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm the opera-
tion.
E LISTEN/ENTER/UP button
This display will change according to the selected file
or folder in the file list.
• LISTEN ......If a WAV file is selected, you can move
the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key to repeatedly hear the
currently selected WAV file.
• ENTER.......If a folder is selected, you can move the
cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key to move into that folder.
• UP..............If the
icon is selected, you can
move the cursor to this button and
press the [ENTER] key to move up one
folder.
To execute the import operation, move the
cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
10
F To TR
The import operation will begin. If you move the cur-
sor to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER]
key, the import operation will be cancelled.
Selects the track number into which the WAV file will
be imported. If the import source is a stereo WAV file,
only tracks 1&2–23&24 can be selected.
G To V.TR
Selects the virtual track number (1–8) into which the
WAV file will be imported.
H To Start
Specifies the start location (in counter-display and
measure/beat format) to which the WAV file will be
imported.
I EXECUTE button
Executes the import operation.
24
235
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
236
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Mastering library list
No.
Name
Initial Data
Description
00
Initialize to a state in which EQ and DYN are not applied.
Standard mastering effect that enhances the overall loudness, creating a mix with extended low and high ranges.
Use on the two-track mix for any type of song.
01
02
03
VITAL MIX
Soft compressor that enhances the overall loudness without greatly changing the original nuances (dynamics).
Ideal for songs in which the mid and low ranges are important.
SOFT COMP
HARD ATTACKY
Limiter that emphasizes the attacks and produces an overall “flattened” feel. Ideal for songs that emphasize the
rhythm.
Soft compressor that enhances the overall loudness and emphasizes the attacks without greatly changing the origi-
nal nuances (dynamics). Ideal for songs in which the low and mid ranges are important, and that emphasize the
rhythm.
04
SOFT ATTACKY
05
06
LO-FI
Limiter that produces a “lo-fi” character.
Soft limiter that produces the slightly flattened feel characteristic of the 60’s and 70’s.
(Ideal for Beatles-type rock of the 60’s and 70’s, or more recently for a Vincent Gallo feel.)
DARK/SOFT
Hard limiter that produces a strongly flattened feel characteristic of the 60’s and 70’s.
(Ideal when you want to make the song sound like 60’s or 70’s rock such as the Beatles.)
07
DARK/HARD
08
09
10
11
12
13
BRIGHT
Compressor that produces a boosted high range.
LO BOOST
HARD LIMIT
LIMITER
NARROW
DIST
Compressor that produces a boosted low range.
Limiter that produces an extremely flattened feel. Ideal for hard-edged songs.
Limiter without EQ. Ideal when you need only limiting.
Limiter that produces a sound like that of a small AM radio.
Limiter that distorts the sound within the effect.
237
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EQ Parameter list
EQ Parameter list
Parameter
L-MID H-MID
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
Parameter
L-MID H-MID
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
#
Title
#
Title
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
G
F
+3.5 dB
100 Hz
1.2
-3.5 dB
265 Hz
10
0.0 dB
1.06 kHz
0.9
+4.0 dB
5.30 kHz
—
G
F
+2.0 dB
265 Hz
0.18
-5.5 dB
400 Hz
10
+0.5 dB
1.32 kHz
6.3
+2.5 dB
4.50 kHz
—
01 Bass Drum 1
02 Bass Drum 2
03 Snare Drum 1
04 Snare Drum 2
05 Tom-tom 1
06 Cymbal
15 E. G. Clean
Q
Q
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
LPF
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G
F
+8.0 dB
80 Hz
1.4
-7.0 dB
400 Hz
4.5
+6.0 dB
2.50 kHz
2.2
ON
G
F
+4.5 dB
140 Hz
8
0.0 dB
1.00 kHz
4.5
+4.0 dB
1.90 kHz
0.63
+2.0 dB
5.60 kHz
9
16 E. G. Crunch 1
17 E. G. Crunch 2
18 E. G. Dist. 1
19 E. G. Dist. 2
20 A. G. Stroke 1
21 A. G. Stroke 2
22 A. G. Arpeg. 1
23 A. G. Arpeg. 2
24 Brass Sec.
12.5 kHz
—
Q
Q
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G
F
-0.5 dB
132 Hz
1.2
0.0 dB
1.00 kHz
4.5
+3.0 dB
3.15 kHz
0.11
+4.5 dB
5.00 kHz
—
G
F
+2.5 dB
125 Hz
8
+1.5 dB
450 Hz
0.4
+2.5 dB
3.35 kHz
0.16
0.0 dB
19.0 kHz
—
Q
Q
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G
F
+1.5 dB
180 Hz
—
-8.5 dB
335 Hz
10
+2.5 dB
2.36 kHz
0.7
+4.0 dB
4.00 kHz
0.1
G
F
+5.0 dB
355 Hz
—
0.0 dB
950 Hz
9
+3.5 dB
3.35 kHz
10
0.0 dB
12.5 kHz
—
Q
Q
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G
F
+2.0 dB
212 Hz
1.4
-7.5 dB
670 Hz
10
+2.0 dB
4.50 kHz
1.2
+1.0 dB
6.30 kHz
0.28
G
F
+6.0 dB
315 Hz
—
-8.5 dB
1.06 kHz
10
+4.5 dB
4.25 kHz
4
+4.0 dB
12.5 kHz
—
Q
Q
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G
F
-2.0 dB
106 Hz
—
0.0 dB
425 Hz
8
0.0 dB
1.06 kHz
0.9
+3.0 dB
13.2 kHz
—
G
F
-2.0 dB
106 Hz
0.9
0.0 dB
1.00 kHz
4.5
+1.0 dB
1.90 kHz
3.5
+4.0 dB
5.30 kHz
—
Q
Q
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G
F
-4.0 dB
95 Hz
—
-2.5 dB
425 Hz
0.5
+1.0 dB
2.80 kHz
1
+0.5 dB
7.50 kHz
—
G
F
-3.5 dB
300 Hz
—
-2.0 dB
750 Hz
9
0.0 dB
2.00 kHz
4.5
+2.0 dB
3.55 kHz
—
07 High Hat
Q
Q
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G
F
-4.5 dB
100 Hz
—
0.0 dB
400 Hz
4.5
+2.0 dB
2.80 kHz
0.56
0.0 dB
17.0 kHz
—
G
F
-0.5 dB
224 Hz
—
0.0 dB
1.00 kHz
4.5
0.0 dB
4.00 kHz
4.5
+2.0 dB
6.70 kHz
0.12
08 Percussion
09 E. Bass 1
10 E. Bass 2
11 Syn. Bass 1
12 Syn. Bass 2
13 Piano 1
Q
Q
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G
F
-7.5 dB
35.5 Hz
—
+4.5 dB
112 Hz
5
+2.5 dB
2.00 kHz
4.5
0.0 dB
4.00 kHz
—
G
F
0.0 dB
180 Hz
—
-5.5 dB
355 Hz
7
0.0 dB
4.00 kHz
4.5
+4.0 dB
4.25 kHz
—
Q
Q
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G
F
+3.0 dB
112 Hz
0.1
0.0 dB
112 Hz
5
+2.5 dB
2.24 kHz
6.3
+0.5 dB
4.00 kHz
—
G
F
-2.0 dB
90 Hz
2.8
-1.0 dB
850 Hz
2
+1.5 dB
2.12 kHz
0.7
+3.0 dB
4.50 kHz
7
Q
Q
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G
F
+3.5 dB
85 Hz
0.1
+8.5 dB
950 Hz
8
0.0 dB
4.00 kHz
4.5
0.0 dB
12.5 kHz
—
G
F
-0.5 dB
190 Hz
0.11
0.0 dB
1.00 kHz
4.5
+2.0 dB
2.00 kHz
0.56
+3.5 dB
6.70 kHz
0.11
25 Male Vocal 1
26 Male Vocal 2
27 Female Vo. 1
28 Female Vo. 2
Q
Q
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G
F
+2.5 dB
125 Hz
1.6
0.0 dB
180 Hz
8
+1.5 dB
1.12 kHz
2.2
0.0 dB
12.5 kHz
—
G
F
+2.0 dB
170 Hz
0.11
-5.0 dB
236 Hz
10
-2.5 dB
2.65 kHz
5.6
+4.0 dB
6.70 kHz
—
Q
Q
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G
F
-6.0 dB
95 Hz
—
0.0 dB
950 Hz
8
+2.0 dB
3.15 kHz
0.9
+4.0 dB
7.50 kHz
—
G
F
-1.0 dB
118 Hz
0.18
+1.0 dB
400 Hz
0.45
+1.5 dB
2.65 kHz
0.56
+2.0 dB
6.00 kHz
0.14
Q
Q
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G
F
+3.5 dB
224 Hz
5.6
-8.5 dB
600 Hz
10
+1.5 dB
3.15 kHz
0.7
+3.0 dB
5.30 kHz
—
G
F
-7.0 dB
112 Hz
—
+1.5 dB
335 Hz
0.16
+1.5 dB
2.00 kHz
0.2
+2.5 dB
6.70 kHz
—
14 Piano 2
Q
Q
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
238
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EQ Parameter list
Parameter
L-MID H-MID
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
#
Title
LOW
HIGH
G
F
-2.0 dB
90 Hz
2.8
-1.0 dB
850 Hz
2
+1.5 dB
2.12 kHz
0.7
+3.0 dB
4.50 kHz
7
Chorus &
Harmo
29
Q
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G
F
-0.5 dB
95 Hz
7
0.0 dB
950 Hz
2.2
+3.0 dB
2.12 kHz
5.6
+6.5 dB
16.0 kHz
—
30 Total EQ 1
31 Total EQ 2
32 Total EQ 3
33 Bass Drum 3
34 Snare Drum 3
35 Tom-tom 2
36 Piano 3
Q
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G
F
+4.0 dB
95 Hz
7
+1.5 dB
750 Hz
2.8
+2.0 dB
1.80 kHz
5.6
+6.0 dB
18.0 kHz
—
Q
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G
F
+1.5 dB
67 Hz
—
+0.5 dB
850 Hz
0.28
+2.0 dB
1.90 kHz
0.7
+4.0 dB
15.0 kHz
—
Q
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G
F
+3.5 dB
118 Hz
2
-10.0 dB
315 Hz
10
+3.5 dB
4.25 kHz
0.4
0.0 dB
20.0 kHz
0.4
Q
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G
F
0.0 dB
224 Hz
—
+2.0 dB
560 Hz
4.5
+3.5 dB
4.25 kHz
2.8
0.0 dB
4.00 kHz
0.1
Q
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G
F
-9.0 dB
90 Hz
—
+1.5 dB
212 Hz
4.5
+2.0 dB
5.30 kHz
1.2
0.0 dB
17.0 kHz
—
Q
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G
F
+4.5 dB
100 Hz
8
-13.0 dB
475 Hz
10
+4.5 dB
2.36 kHz
9
+2.5 dB
10.0 kHz
—
Q
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G
F
-5.5 dB
190 Hz
10
+1.5 dB
400 Hz
6.3
+6.0 dB
6.70 kHz
2.2
0.0 dB
12.5 kHz
—
37 Piano Low
38 Piano High
39 Fine-EQ Cass
40 Narrator
Q
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G
F
-5.5 dB
190 Hz
10
+1.5 dB
400 Hz
6.3
+5.0 dB
6.70 kHz
2.2
+3.0 dB
5.60 kHz
0.1
Q
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G
F
-1.5 dB
75 Hz
—
0.0 dB
1.00 kHz
4.5
+1.0 dB
4.00 kHz
1.8
+3.0 dB
12.5 kHz
—
Q
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G
F
-4.0 dB
106 Hz
4
-1.0 dB
710 Hz
7
+2.0 dB
2.50 kHz
0.63
0.0 dB
10.0 kHz
—
Q
239
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dynamics Parameters
Dynamics Parameters
Dynamics processors are generally used to correct or control signal levels. However, you can
also use them creatively to shape the volume envelope of a sound. The AW2400 features com-
prehensive dynamics processors for all the input channels, tape returns, and the bus and stereo
outputs. These processors allow you to compress, expand, compress-expand (compand), gate,
or duck the signals passing through the mixer, giving you unparalleled sonic quality and flexibil-
ity.
• Out Gain — sets the compressor’s output signal level.
■ Compressor
Compression tends to reduce the average signal level. Out
Gain can be used to counter this level reduction and set an
appropriate level for the next stage in the audio path.
dB
+20
+10
0
• Knee — sets the transition of the signal at the threshold.
With a hard knee, the transition between uncompressed
and compressed signal is immediate. With the softest
knee, knee5, the transition starts before the signal reaches
the threshold and gradually ends above the threshold.
Compression ratio = 2:1
–10
–20
–30
–40
–50
–60
–70
Threshold = –20dB
Knee = hard
• Release — determines how soon the compressor returns
to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below
the threshold. If the release time is too short, the gain will
recover too quickly causing level pumping-noticeable gain
fluctuations. If it is set too long, the compressor may not
have time to recover before the next high level signal
appears, and it will be compressed incorrectly.
dB
–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10
0
+10 +20
Input Level
A compressor provides a form of automatic level control.
By attenuating high levels, thus effectively reducing the
dynamic range, the compressor makes it much easier to
control signals and set appropriate fader levels. Reducing
the dynamic range also means that recording levels can be
set higher, therefore improving the signal-to-noise perfor-
mance.
Compressor (CMP) parameters:
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Ratio
Value
-54 to 0 (541 points)
1.0, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 5.0,
6.0, 8.0, 10, 20, ∞ (16 points)
Attack (ms)
Outgain (dB)
Knee
0 to 120 (121 points)
0 to +18 (181 points)
hard,1,2,3,4,5 (6 points)
6 ms to 46.1 sec (160 points)
Release (ms)
• Threshold — determines the level of input signal
required to trigger the compressor. Signals at a level below
the threshold pass through unaffected. Signals at and
above the threshold level are compressed by the amount
specified using the Ratio parameter. The trigger signal is
determined using the KEYIN SOURCE parameter.
• Ratio — controls the amount of compression-the change
in output signal level relative to change in input signal
level. With a 2:1 ratio, for example, a 10 dB change in
input level (above the threshold) results in a 5 dB change
in output level. For a 5:1 ratio, a 10 dB change in input
level (above the threshold) results in a 2 dB change in out-
put level.
• Attack — controls how soon the signal is compressed
once the compressor has been triggered. With a fast attack
time, the signal is compressed almost immediately. With a
slow attack time, the initial transient of a sound passes
through unaffected.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
240
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dynamics Parameters
■ Expander
■ Compander
dB
dB
+20
+10
0
+20
+10
0
Expansion ratio = 2:1
Width
Knee = knee5
–10
–20
–30
–40
–50
–60
–70
–10
–20
–30
–40
–50
–60
–70
Threshold = –10dB
Threshold
dB
dB
–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10
0
+10 +20
–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10
0
+10 +20
Input Level
Input Level
An expander is another form of automatic level control.
By attenuating the signal below the threshold, the
expander reduces low-level noise and effectively increases
the dynamic range of the recorded material.
A compander is a compressor-expander-a combination of
signal compression and expansion. The compander attenu-
ates the input signal above the threshold as well as the
level below the width. For very dynamic material, this
program allows you to retain the dynamic range without
having to be concerned with excessive output signal levels
and clipping.
Expander (EXP) parameters:
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Ratio
Value
-54 to 0 (541 points)
CompanderH (CPH) and
CompanderS (CPS) parameters:
1.0, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 5.0,
6.0, 8.0, 10, 20, ∞ (16 points)
Attack (ms)
Outgain (dB)
Knee
0 to 120 (121 points)
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Ratio
Value
0 to +18 (181 points)
-54 to 0 (541 points)
hard,1,2,3,4,5 (6 points)
6 ms to 46.1 sec (160 points)
1.0, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 5.0,
6.0, 8.0, 10, 20 (15 points)
Release (ms)
Attack (ms)
Outgain (dB)
Width (dB)
0 to 120 (121 points)
-18 to 0 (181 points)
1 to 90 (90 points)
• Threshold — determines the level of input signal
required to trigger the expander. Signals above the thresh-
old pass through unaffected. Signals at and below the
threshold level are attenuated by the amount specified
using the Ratio parameter. The trigger signal is deter-
mined using the KEYIN SOURCE parameter.
Release (ms)
6 ms to 46.1 sec (160 points)
• Threshold — determines the level of input signal
required to trigger the compander. Signals above the
threshold pass through unaffected. Signals at and below
the threshold level are attenuated by the amount specified
using the Ratio parameter. The trigger signal is deter-
mined using the KEYIN SOURCE parameter.
• Ratio — controls the amount of expansion-the change in
output signal level relative to change in input signal level.
With a 1:2 ratio, for example, a 5 dB change in input level
(below the threshold) results in a 10 dB change in output
level. For a 1:5 ratio, a 2 dB change in input level (below
the threshold) results in a 10 dB change in output level.
• Ratio — controls the amount of companding-the change
in output signal level relative to change in input signal
level. With a 2:1 ratio, for example, a 10 dB change in
input level (above the threshold) results in a 5 dB change
in output level. The hard compander (CPH) has a fixed
ratio of 5:1 for expansion and the soft compander (CPS)
has a fixed ratio of 1.5:1 for expansion.
• Attack — controls how soon the signal is expanded once
the expander has been triggered. With a fast attack time,
the signal is expanded almost immediately. With a slow
attack time, the initial transient of a sound passes through
unaffected.
• Attack — controls how soon the signal is companded
once the compander has been triggered. With a fast attack
time, the signal is companded almost immediately. With a
slow attack time, the initial transient of a sound passes
through unaffected.
• Out Gain — sets the expander’s output signal level.
• Knee — sets the transition of the signal at the threshold.
With a hard knee, the transition between unexpanded and
expanded signal is immediate. With the softest knee,
knee5, the transition starts before the signal reaches the
threshold and gradually ends above the threshold.
• Out Gain — sets the compander’s output signal level.
• Width — is used to determine the distance, in decibels,
between the expander and the compressor. With a width of
90 dB, the expander is effectively switched off and the
compander is simply a compressor-limiter. With a smaller
width (30 dB) and a high threshold (0 dB), the compander
is an expander-compressor-limiter.
• Release — determines how soon the expander returns to
its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below
the threshold.
• Release — determines how soon the compander returns
to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below
the threshold.
241
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dynamics Parameters
• Range — controls the level to which the gate closes. It
can be used to reduce the signal level rather than cut it
completely. At a setting of -70 dB, the gate closes com-
pletely when the input signal falls below the threshold. At
a setting of -30 dB, the gate only closes so far allowing an
attenuated signal through. At a setting of 0 dB, the gate
has no effect. When signals are gated abruptly, the sudden
cutoff can sound odd.
■ Gate and Ducking
dB
+20
+10
0
Threshold = –10dB
–10
–20
–30
–40
–50
–60
–70
For ducking, a setting of -70 dB causes the signal to be
virtually cutoff. At a setting of -30 dB the signal is ducked
by 30 dB. At a setting of 0 dB, the duck has no effect.
Range = –30dB
Range = –70dB
dB
• Attack — determines how fast the gate opens when the
signal exceeds the threshold level. Slow attack times can
be used to remove the initial transient edge of percussive
sounds. Too slow an attack time makes some signals
sound backwards.
For ducking, this controls how soon the signal is ducked
once the duck has been triggered. With a fast attack time,
the signal is ducked almost immediately. With a slow
attack time, ducking fades the signal. Too fast an attack
time may sound abrupt.
–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10
0
+10 +20
Input Level
dB
+20
+10
0
–10
–20
–30
–40
–50
–60
–70
Threshold = –20dB
• Hold — sets how long the gate stays open or the ducking
remains active once the trigger signal has fallen below the
threshold level.
Range = –30dB
dB
–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10
0
+10 +20
• Decay — controls how fast the gate closes once the hold
time has expired. A longer decay time produces a more
natural gating effect, allowing the natural decay of an
instrument to pass through.
For ducking, this determines how soon the ducker returns
to its normal gain after the hold time has expired.
Input Level
A gate, or noise gate is an audio switch used to mute sig-
nals below a set threshold level. It can be used to suppress
background noise and hiss from valve (tube) amps, effects
pedals, and microphones.
Ducking is used to automatically reduce the levels of one
signal when the level of a source signal exceeds a speci-
fied threshold. It is used for voice-over applications
where, for example, level of background music is auto-
matically reduced, allowing an announcer to be heard
clearly.
Gate (GAT) and Ducking (DUK) parameters:
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Range (dB)
Attack (ms)
Hold (ms)
Value
-54 to 0 (541 points)
-70 to 0 (701 points)
0 to 120 (121 points)
0.02 ms to 2.14 sec (216 points)
6 ms to 46.1 sec (160 points)
Decay (ms)
• Threshold — sets the level at which the gate closes, cut-
ting off the signal. Signals above the threshold level pass
through unaffected. Signals at or below the threshold
cause the gate to close.
For ducking, trigger signal levels at and above the thresh-
old level activate ducking, and the signal level is reduced
to a level set by the Range parameter.
The trigger signal is determined using the KEYIN
SOURCE parameter.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
242
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gate Parameter list
(fs = 44.1 kHz)
#
Title
Type
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Range (dB)
Attack (ms)
Hold (ms)
Value
-26
#
Title
Type
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Range (dB)
Attack (ms)
Hold (ms)
Value
-11
-53
0
-56
1
Gate
GATE
0
3
A. Dr. BD
GATE
2.56
331
-19
1.93
400
-8
Decay (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Range (dB)
Attack (ms)
Hold (ms)
Decay (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Range (dB)
Attack (ms)
Hold (ms)
-22
-23
1
2
Ducking
DUCKING
93
4
A. Dr. SN
GATE
1.20 S
6.32 S
0.63
238
Decay (ms)
Decay (ms)
Compressor Parameter list
(fs = 44.1 kHz)
#
Title
Type
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Value
-8
#
Title
Type
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Value
-23
2
2.5
60
0.0
2
0
1
Comp
COMP
8
A. Dr. SN
EXPAND
0.5
2
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
250
-23
1.7
1
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
151
-8
1.7
11
2
3
4
5
6
7
Expand
EXPAND
9
A. Dr. SN
COMPAND-S
3.5
2
0.0
10
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
70
-10
3.5
1
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
128
-20
2
2
Compander
(H)
COMPAND-H
10 A. Dr. Tom
EXPAND
0.0
6
5.0
2
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
250
-8
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
749
-24
2
4
25
0.0
24
180
-24
3
38
Compander (S) COMPAND-S
11 A. Dr. OverTop COMPAND-S
-3.5
54
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
842
-12
2
9
15
A. Dr. BD
A. Dr. BD
A. Dr. SN
COMP
12 E. B. Finger
13 E. B. Slap
14 Syn. Bass
COMP
COMP
COMP
5.5
2
4.5
2
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
58
-11
3.5
1
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
470
-12
1.7
6
COMPAND-H
-1.5
7
4.0
hard
133
-10
3.5
9
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
192
-17
2.5
8
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
COMP
3.5
2
3.0
hard
250
Release (ms)
12
Release (ms)
243
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compressor Parameter list
#
Title
Type
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Value
-9
#
Title
Type
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Value
-18
4
2.5
17
8
15 Piano1
COMP
26 Sampling SN
27 Hip Comp
28 Solo Vocal1
29 Solo Vocal2
30 Chorus
COMP
1.0
hard
238
-18
3.5
7
8.0
hard
354
-23
20
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
15
16 Piano2
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMPAND-S
COMP
COMPAND-S
6.0
2
0.0
15
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
174
-8
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
163
-20
2.5
31
3.5
7
17 E. Guitar
18 A. Guitar
19 Strings1
20 Strings2
21 Strings3
22 BrassSection
23 Syn. Pad
24 SamplingPerc
25 Sampling BD
COMP
2.5
4
2.0
1
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
261
-10
2.5
5
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
342
-8
2.5
26
COMP
1.5
2
1.5
3
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
238
-11
2
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
331
-9
1.7
39
33
COMP
1.5
2
2.5
2
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
749
-12
1.5
93
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
226
-33
2
1
31 Click Erase
32 Announcer
33 Limiter1
EXPAND
COMPAND-H
COMPAND-S
COMP
1.5
4
2.0
2
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
1.35 S
-17
1.5
76
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
284
-14
2.5
1
2.5
2
-2.5
18
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
186
-18
1.7
18
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
180
-9
3
20
4.0
1
-3.0
90
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
226
-13
2
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
3.90 s
0
∞
58
0
34 Limiter2
2.0
1
0.0
hard
319
-18
3.5
94
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
238
-18
1.7
8
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
35 Total Comp1
COMP
-2.5
18
2.5
hard
447
-16
6
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
238
-14
2
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
2
11
36 Total Comp2
COMP
3.5
4
6.0
1
Release (ms)
35
Release (ms)
180
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
244
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effects Parameters
Effects Parameters
■ REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM, REVERB STAGE, REVERB PLATE
One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate reverb simulations, all with gates.
Parameter
REV TIME
Range
Description
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
HI. RATIO
LO. RATIO
DIFF.
0.0–500.0 ms
0.1–1.0
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)
Reverb density
0.1–2.4
0–10
DENSITY
E/R DLY
E/R BAL.
HPF
0–100%
0.0–100.0 ms
0–100%
Delay between early reflections and reverb
Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections)
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
OFF, -60 to 0 dB
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Level at which gate kicks in
Gate opening speed
LPF
GATE LVL
ATTACK
HOLD
0–120 ms
*1
Gate open time
*2
DECAY
Gate closing speed
*1. 0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs=48 kHz)
*2. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
■ EARLY REF.
One input, two output early reflections.
Parameter
Range
Description
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
TYPE
Type of early reflection simulation
Reflection spacing
ROOMSIZE
LIVENESS
INI. DLY
DIFF.
0.1–20.0
0–10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
Initial delay before reverb begins
Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread)
Reflection density
0.0–500.0 ms
0–10
DENSITY
ER NUM.
FB.GAIN
HI. RATIO
HPF
0–100%
1–19
Number of early reflections
-99 to +99%
0.1–1.0
Feedback gain
High-frequency feedback ratio
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
LPF
■ GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE
One input, two output early reflections with gate, and early reflections with reverse gate.
Parameter
TYPE
Range
Type-A, Type-B
Description
Type of early reflection simulation
Reflection spacing
ROOMSIZE
LIVENESS
INI. DLY
DIFF.
0.1–20.0
0–10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
Initial delay before reverb begins
Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread)
Reflection density
0.0–500.0 ms
0–10
DENSITY
HI. RATIO
ER NUM.
FB.GAIN
HPF
0–100%
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
Number of early reflections
1–19
-99 to +99%
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Feedback gain
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
245
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effects Parameters
■ MONO DELAY
One input, two output basic repeat delay.
Parameter
DELAY
Range
0.0–2730.0 ms
Description
Delay time
FB. GAIN
HI. RATIO
HPF
-99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio
0.1–1.0
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
■ STEREO DELAY
Two input, two output basic stereo delay.
Parameter
DELAY L
Range
0.0–1350.0 ms
Description
Left channel delay time
DELAY R
FB. G L
0.0–1350.0 ms
-99 to +99%
Right channel delay time
Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
FB. G R
-99 to +99%
HI. RATIO
HPF
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
LPF
■ MOD. DELAY
One input, two output basic repeat delay with modulation.
Parameter
DELAY
Range
0.0–2725.0 ms
Description
Delay time
FB. GAIN
HI. RATIO
FREQ.
DEPTH
WAVE
HPF
-99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
Modulation speed
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
Modulation depth
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
OFF, ON
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Tempo parameter sync on/off
LPF
SYNC
■ DELAY LCR
One input, two output 3-tap delay (left, center, right).
Parameter
DELAY L
Range
0.0–2730.0 ms
Description
Left channel delay time
Center channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Feedback delay time
DELAY C
DELAY R
FB. DLY
LEVEL L
LEVEL C
LEVEL R
FB. GAIN
HI. RATIO
HPF
0.0–2730.0 ms
0.0–2730.0 ms
0.0–2730.0 ms
-100 to +100%
-100 to +100%
-100 to +100%
-99 to +99%
Left channel delay level
Center channel delay level
Right channel delay level
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio
0.1–1.0
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
246
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effects Parameters
■ ECHO
Two input, two output stereo delay with crossed feedback loop.
Parameter
DELAY L
Range
0.0–1350.0 ms
Description
Left channel delay time
DELAY R
FB.DLY L
FB.DLY R
0.0–1350.0 ms
0.0–1350.0 ms
0.0–1350.0 ms
Right channel delay time
Left channel feedback delay time
Right channel feedback delay time
Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
FB. G L
-99 to +99%
-99 to +99%
-99 to +99%
-99 to +99%
Right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
FB. G R
Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
L->R FBG
R->L FBG
Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
HPF
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
LPF
■ CHORUS
Two input, two output chorus effect.
Parameter
FREQ.
Range
0.05–40.00 Hz
Description
Modulation speed
AM DEPTH
PM DEPTH
MOD. DLY
WAVE
0–100%
Amplitude modulation depth
Pitch modulation depth
0–100%
0.0–500.0 ms
Sine, Tri
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0–0.10
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
LSH G
EQ F
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ G
EQ Q
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
HSH G
■ FLANGE
Two input, two output flange effect.
Parameter
FREQ.
Range
0.05–40.00 Hz
Description
Modulation speed
DEPTH
MOD. DLY
FB. GAIN
WAVE
0–100%
Modulation depth
0.0–500.0 ms
-99 to +99%
Modulation delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0–0.10
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
LSH G
EQ F
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ G
EQ Q
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
HSH F
HSH G
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
247
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effects Parameters
■ SYMPHONIC
Two input, two output symphonic effect.
Parameter
FREQ.
Range
0.05–40.00 Hz
Description
Modulation speed
DEPTH
MOD. DLY
WAVE
LSH F
LSH G
EQ F
0–100%
Modulation depth
0.0–500.0 ms
Sine, Tri
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0–0.10
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
EQ G
EQ Q
HSH F
HSH G
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
■ PHASER
Two input, two output 16-stage phaser.
Parameter
FREQ.
Range
0.05–40.00 Hz
Description
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
DEPTH
FB. GAIN
OFFSET
PHASE
STAGE
LSH F
0–100%
-99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset
Left and right modulation phase balance
Number of phase shift stages
0–100
0.00–354.38 degrees
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
Low shelving filter gain
HSH F
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
High shelving filter gain
■ AUTO PAN
Two input, two output autopanner.
Parameter
FREQ.
Range
0.05–40.00 Hz
Description
Modulation speed
DEPTH
DIR.
0–100%
*1
Modulation depth
Panning direction
WAVE
LSH F
LSH G
EQ F
Sine, Tri, Square
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0–0.10
Modulation waveform
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ G
EQ Q
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
HSH F
HSH G
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
*1. L<->R, L—>R, L<—R, Turn L, Turn R
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
248
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effects Parameters
■ TREMOLO
Two input, two output tremolo effect.
Parameter
FREQ.
Range
0.05–40.00 Hz
Description
Modulation speed
DEPTH
WAVE
LSH F
LSH G
EQ F
0–100%
Modulation depth
Sine, Tri, Square
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0–0.10
Modulation waveform
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
EQ G
EQ Q
HSH F
HSH G
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
■ HQ. PITCH
One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter (Available for internal effects 1 and 2.).
Parameter
PITCH
Range
-12 to +12 semitones
-50 to +50 cents
0.0–1000.0 ms
-99 to +99%
Description
Pitch shift
FINE
Pitch shift fine
Delay time
DELAY
FB. GAIN
MODE
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Pitch shift precision
1–10
■ DUAL PITCH
Two input, two output pitch shifter.
Parameter
PITCH 1
Range
-24 to +24 semitones
-50 to +50 cents
-100 to +100%
L63 to R63
Description
Channel #1 pitch shift
FINE 1
Channel #1 pitch shift fine
LEVEL 1
PAN 1
Channel #1 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase)
Channel #1 pan
DELAY 1
0.0–1000.0 ms
Channel #1 delay time
Channel #1 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
FB. G 1
-99 to +99%
PITCH 2
FINE 2
-24 to +24 semitones
-50 to +50 cents
-100 to +100%
L63 to R63
Channel #2 pitch shift
Channel #2 pitch shift fine
LEVEL 2
PAN 2
Channel #2 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase)
Channel #2 pan
DELAY 2
0.0–1000.0 ms
Channel #2 delay time
Channel #2 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
FB. G 2
MODE
-99 to +99%
1–10
Pitch shift precision
■ ROTARY
One input, two output rotary speaker simulator.
Parameter
ROTATE
Range
STOP, START
Description
Rotation stop, start
SPEED
SLOW
FAST
SLOW, FAST
0.05–10.00 Hz
0.05–10.00 Hz
0–100
Rotation speed (see SLOW and FAST parameters)
SLOW rotation speed
FAST rotation speed
DRIVE
ACCEL
LOW
Overdrive level
0–10
Acceleration at speed changes
Low-frequency filter
0–100
HIGH
0–100
High-frequency filter
249
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effects Parameters
■ RING MOD.
Two input, two output ring modulator.
Parameter
SOURCE
Range
OSC, SELF
Description
Modulation source: oscillator or input signal
Oscillator frequency
OSC FREQ
FM FREQ.
FM DEPTH
0.0–5000.0 Hz
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
Oscillator frequency modulation speed
Oscillator frequency modulation depth
■ MOD. FILTER
Two input, two output modulation filter.
Parameter
FREQ.
Range
0.05–40.00 Hz
Description
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
DEPTH
PHASE
TYPE
0–100%
0.00–354.38 degrees
LPF, HPF, BPF
0–100
Left-channel modulation and right-channel modulation phase difference
Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass
Filter frequency offset
Filter resonance
OFFSET
RESO.
LEVEL
0–20
0–100
Output level
■ DISTORTION
One input, two output distortion effect.
Parameter
Range
Description
DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2,
CRUNCH
DST TYPE
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
DRIVE
0–100
Distortion drive
Master volume
Tone
MASTER
TONE
0–100
-10 to +10
0–20
N. GATE
Noise reduction
■ AMP SIMULATE
One input, two output guitar amp simulator.
Parameter
Range
Description
*1
AMP TYPE
Guitar amp simulation type
DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2,
CRUNCH
DST TYPE
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
DRIVE
MASTER
BASS
0–100
Distortion drive
0–100
Master volume
0–100
Bass tone control
MIDDLE
TREBLE
CAB DEP
EQ F
0–100
Middle tone control
0–100
High tone control
0–100%
100–8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0–0.10
0–20
Speaker cabinet simulation depth
Parametric equalizer frequency
Parametric equalizer gain
Parametric equalizer bandwidth
Noise reduction
EQ G
EQ Q
N. GATE
*1. STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
250
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effects Parameters
■ DYNA. FILTER
Two input, two output dynamically controlled filter.
Parameter
SOURCE
Range
INPUT, MIDI
Description
Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity
Sensitivity
SENSE
DIR.
0–100
UP, DOWN
*1
Upward or downward frequency change
Filter frequency change decay speed
Filter type
DECAY
TYPE
LPF, HPF, BPF
0–100
OFFSET
RESO.
LEVEL
Filter frequency offset
0–20
Filter resonance
0–100
Output Level
*1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
■ DYNA. FLANGE
Two input, two output dynamically controlled flanger.
Parameter
SOURCE
Range
INPUT, MIDI
Description
Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity
Sensitivity
SENSE
DIR.
0–100
UP, DOWN
*1
Upward or downward frequency change
Decay speed
DECAY
OFFSET
FB.GAIN
LSH F
LSH G
EQ F
0–100
Delay time offset
-99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0–0.10
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ G
EQ Q
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
HSH F
HSH G
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
*1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
■ DYNA. PHASER
Two input, two output dynamically controlled phaser.
Parameter
SOURCE
Range
INPUT, MIDI
Description
Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity
Sensitivity
SENSE
DIR.
0–100
UP, DOWN
*1
Upward or downward frequency change
Decay speed
DECAY
OFFSET
FB.GAIN
STAGE
LSH F
0–100
Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Number of phase shift stages
-99 to +99%
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
HSH F
HSH G
Low shelving filter gain
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
*1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
251
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effects Parameters
■ REV+CHORUS
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel.
Parameter
REV TIME
Range
Description
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
HI. RATIO
DIFF.
0.0–500.0 ms
0.1–1.0
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
0–10
DENSITY
HPF
0–100%
Reverb density
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
0–100%
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
REV/CHO
FREQ.
Reverb and chorus balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all chorus)
Modulation speed
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
AM DEPTH
PM DEPTH
MOD. DLY
WAVE
Amplitude modulation depth
Pitch modulation depth
0–100%
0.0–500.0 ms
Sine, Tri
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
■ REV->CHORUS
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in series.
Parameter
REV TIME
Range
Description
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
HI. RATIO
DIFF.
0.0–500.0 ms
0.1–1.0
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
0–10
DENSITY
HPF
0–100%
Reverb density
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
0–100%
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
REV.BAL
FREQ.
Reverb and chorused reverb balance (0% = all chorused reverb, 100% = all reverb)
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
Modulation speed
AM DEPTH
PM DEPTH
MOD. DLY
WAVE
Amplitude modulation depth
Pitch modulation depth
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
0–100%
0.0–500.0 ms
Sine, Tri
■ REV+FLANGE
One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel.
Parameter
REV TIME
Range
Description
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
HI. RATIO
DIFF.
0.0–500.0 ms
0.1–1.0
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
0–10
DENSITY
HPF
0–100%
Reverb density
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
0–100%
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
REV/FLG
FREQ.
Reverb and flange balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all flange)
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
Modulation speed
DEPTH
MOD. DLY
FB. GAIN
WAVE
Modulation depth
0.0–500.0 ms
-99 to +99%
Sine, Tri
Modulation delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Modulation waveform
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
252
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effects Parameters
■ REV->FLANGE
One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in series.
Parameter
REV TIME
Range
Description
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
HI. RATIO
DIFF.
0.0–500.0 ms
0.1–1.0
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
0–10
DENSITY
HPF
0–100%
Reverb density
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
0–100%
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
REV.BAL
FREQ.
Reverb and flanged reverb balance (0% = all flanged reverb, 100% = all reverb)
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Modulation delay time
DEPTH
MOD. DLY
FB. GAIN
WAVE
0.0–500.0 ms
-99 to +99%
Sine, Tri
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Modulation waveform
■ REV+SYMPHO.
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel.
Parameter
REV TIME
Range
Description
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
HI. RATIO
DIFF.
0.0–500.0 ms
0.1–1.0
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
0–10
DENSITY
HPF
0–100%
Reverb density
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
0–100%
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
REV/SYM
FREQ.
DEPTH
MOD. DLY
WAVE
Reverb and symphonic balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all symphonic)
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
0.0–500.0 ms
Sine, Tri
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
■ REV->SYMPHO.
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in series.
Parameter
REV TIME
Range
Description
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
HI. RATIO
DIFF.
0.0–500.0 ms
0.1–1.0
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
0–10
DENSITY
HPF
0–100%
Reverb density
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
0–100%
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
REV.BAL
FREQ.
DEPTH
MOD. DLY
WAVE
Reverb and symphonic reverb balance (0% = all symphonic reverb, 100% = all reverb)
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
0.0–500.0 ms
Sine, Tri
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
253
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effects Parameters
■ REV->PAN
One input, two output reverb and autopan effects in parallel.
Parameter
REV TIME
Range
Description
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
HI. RATIO
DIFF.
0.0–500.0 ms
0.1–1.0
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
0–10
DENSITY
HPF
0–100%
Reverb density
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
0–100%
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
REV.BAL
FREQ.
DEPTH
DIR.
Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = all panned reverb, 100% = all reverb)
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Panning direction
Modulation waveform
0–100%
*1
WAVE
Sine, Tri, Square
*1. L<–>R, L–>R, L<–R, Turn L, Turn R
■ DELAY+ER.
One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in parallel.
Parameter
DELAY L
Range
0.0–1000.0 ms
Description
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Feedback delay time
DELAY R
FB. DLY
FB. GAIN
HI. RATIO
HPF
0.0–1000.0 ms
0.0–1000.0 ms
-99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio
0.1–1.0
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
0–100%
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
DLY/ER
Delay and early reflections balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all early reflections)
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
TYPE
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE
LIVENESS
INI. DLY
0.1–20.0
0–10
Reflection spacing
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
Initial delay before reverb begins
Spread
0.0–500.0 ms
0–10
DIFF.
DENSITY
ER NUM.
0–100%
1–19
Reverb density
Number of early reflections
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
254
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effects Parameters
■ DELAY->ER.
One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in series.
Parameter
DELAY L
Range
0.0–1000.0 ms
Description
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Feedback delay time
DELAY R
FB. DLY
FB. GAIN
HI. RATIO
HPF
0.0–1000.0 ms
0.0–1000.0 ms
-99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio
0.1–1.0
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
0–100%
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
DLY.BAL
Delay and early reflected delay balance (0% = all early reflected delay, 100% = all delay)
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
TYPE
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE
LIVENESS
INI. DLY
0.1–20.0
0–10
Reflection spacing
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
Initial delay before reverb begins
Spread
0.0–500.0 ms
0–10
DIFF.
DENSITY
ER NUM.
0–100%
1–19
Reverb density
Number of early reflections
■ DELAY+REV
One input, two output delay and reverb effects in parallel.
Parameter
DELAY L
Range
0.0–1000.0 ms
Description
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Feedback delay time
DELAY R
FB. DLY
FB. GAIN
DELAY HI
HPF
0.0–1000.0 ms
0.0–1000.0 ms
-99 to +99%
0.1–1.0
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Delay high-frequency feedback ratio
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Delay and reverb balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all reverb)
Reverb time
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
0–100%
LPF
DLY.BAL
REV TIME
INI. DLY
REV HI
DIFF.
0.3–99.0 s
0.0–500.0 ms
0.1–1.0
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
0–10
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
■ DELAY->REV
One input, two output delay and reverb effects in series.
Parameter
DELAY L
Range
0.0–1000.0 ms
Description
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Feedback delay time
DELAY R
FB. DLY
FB. GAIN
DELAY HI
HPF
0.0–1000.0 ms
0.0–1000.0 ms
-99 to +99%
0.1–1.0
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Delay high-frequency feedback ratio
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Delay and delayed reverb balance (0% = all delayed reverb, 100% = all delay)
Reverb time
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
0–100%
LPF
DLY.BAL
REV TIME
INI. DLY
REV HI
DIFF.
0.3–99.0 s
0.0–500.0 ms
0.1–1.0
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
0–10
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
255
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effects Parameters
■ DIST->DELAY
One input, two output distortion and delay effects in series.
Parameter
Range
Description
DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2,
CRUNCH
DST TYPE
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
DRIVE
0–100
Distortion drive
MASTER
TONE
0–100
Master volume
-10 to +10
0–20
Tone control
N. GATE
DELAY
Noise reduction
0.0–2725.0 ms
-99 to +99%
0.1–1.0
Delay time
FB. GAIN
HI. RATIO
FREQ.
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
Modulation speed
DEPTH
DLY.BAL
Modulation depth
0–100%
Distortion and delay balance (0% = all distortion, 100% = all delayed distortion)
■ MULTI FILTER
Two input, two output 3-band multi-filter (24 dB/octave).
Parameter
TYPE 1
Range
HPF, LPF, BPF
Description
Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
TYPE 2
HPF, LPF, BPF
HPF, LPF, BPF
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
0–100
Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
Filter 1 frequency
TYPE 3
FREQ. 1
FREQ. 2
FREQ. 3
LEVEL 1
LEVEL 2
LEVEL 3
RESO. 1
RESO. 2
RESO. 3
Filter 2 frequency
Filter 3 frequency
Filter 1 level
0–100
Filter 2 level
0–100
Filter 3 level
0–20
Filter 1 resonance
0–20
Filter 2 resonance
0–20
Filter 3 resonance
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
256
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effects Parameters
■ GATE
This is a 2-in/2-out gate that attenuates signals below the specified threshold level.
Parameter
GATE ON
Range
Description
ON, OFF
Turns the gate function on or off.
THRESH
RANGE
ATTACK
DECAY
HOLD
-54 to 0 dB
-70 to 0 dB
Sets the threshold level at which the gate begins to affect the input signal.
Sets the level when the gate is closed.
0–120 ms
*1
Sets the time it take for the gate to actually open after the threshold level is exceeded.
Sets the time it takes for the gate to close completely after it begins closing.
*2
Sets the time it takes for the gate to begin closing after the signal drops below the threshold level.
*1. 6–46.0 s (fs=44.1kHz), 5–42.3 s (fs=48kHz)
*2. 0.02–2.13 s (fs=44.1kHz), 0.02–1.96 s (fs=48kHz)
■ M.BAND DYNA.
Two input, two output 3-band dynamics processor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band.
Parameter
LOW GAIN
MID GAIN
HI. GAIN
Range
-96.0 to +12.0 dB
-96.0 to +12.0 dB
-96.0 to +12.0 dB
Description
Low band level
Mid band level
High band level
For positive values, the threshold of the high band is lowered and the threshold of the low band is
increased. For negative values, the opposite will occur. When set to 0, all three bands are affected
the same.
PRESENCE
-10 to +10
CMP. THRE
CMP. RAT
CMP. ATK
CMP. REL
CMP. KNEE
LOOKUP
24.0 to 0.0 dB
1:1 to 20:1
Compressor threshold
Compressor ratio
0–120 ms
*1
Compressor attack
Compressor release time
Compressor knee
0–5
0.0–100.0 ms
OFF, ON
Lookup delay
CMP. BYP
L–M XOVR
M–H XOVR
SLOPE
Compressor bypass
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
-6 to -12 dB
Low/mid crossover frequency
Mid/high crossover frequency
Filter slope
CEILING
-6.0 to 0.0 dB, OFF
-54.0 to -24.0 dB
Specifies the maximum output level
Expander threshold
EXP. THRE
EXP. RAT
EXP. REL
EXP. BYP
LIM. THRE
LIM. ATK
1:1 to ∞:1
Expander ratio
*1
Expander release time
Expander bypass
OFF, ON
-12.0 to 0.0 dB
Limiter threshold
0–120 ms
*1
Limiter attack
LIM. REL
Limiter release time
LIM. BYP
OFF, ON
0–5
Limiter bypass
LIM. KNEE
SOLO LOW
SOLO MID
SOLO HIGH
Limiter knee
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
If this is on, only the low-frequency band will be output.
If this is on, only the mid-frequency band will be output.
If this is on, only the high-frequency band will be output.
*1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
257
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
■ Input sound is not output
Power does not turn on, operation not
possible
• Is the signal from the external device being input?
• The connection cable from the external device may be
broken.
■ Power does not turn on
• Is the power cord connected to an AC outlet of the correct
voltage?
• Are cables connected to both the MIC/LINE INPUT XLR
connector and the TRS phone connector?
• Is the POWER switch turned ON?
• Is the [GAIN] knob set to an appropriate level?
• Is the input channel fader raised? Is it turned on?
• The input channel may have been set to DIGITAL IN.
• If the power still does not turn on, please contact your
Yamaha dealer.
• When recording, is the recording-destination track fader
(which adjusts the monitor level) raised?
■ LCD display is dim or dark
• Use the contrast knob located at the lower right of the
screen to adjust the contrast.
→ If you are recording, the sound of that input channel will not
be heard during playback.
■ Can’t use the [DATA/JOG] dial to control on-
screen parameters
• The [JOG ON] key may be on.
■ Recorded sound is not output
• Has audio data been recorded on the recorder?
• Is the virtual track set to the track that was recorded?
• Some parameters cannot be operated in certain states,
such as while the recorder is running.
• A recorded region shorter than 10 msec will not be played
back.
• Tracks 1–24 will not play back if the AW2400 is in Stereo
Track, Sound Clip, or Audio CD playback mode.
No sound
■ No sound, or sound is too faint
■ Can’t play back the STEREO track
• Is the ST TR MODE turned on in the TRACK screen Ste-
reo TR page?
• Are speakers or headphones connected correctly?
• Is your amp and other external devices turned on?
• Are you using connection cables with built-in resistors?
• Does the stereo output channel meter move?
■ Metronome cannot be heard
• The metronome sound is normally sent only to the MONI-
TOR OUT and headphones.
• Is the stereo output channel fader raised? Is it turned on?
• The EQ gain may be set to an extremely low value.
• The metronome will not sound while the recorder is
stopped.
• The dynamics processor may be set to an extreme thresh-
old or ratio.
• In Sound Clip mode, the metronome will sound only dur-
ing recording.
• Is an electric guitar connected to a MIC/LINE INPUT jack
directly?
• Is the attenuator of the EQ screen or CH VIEW screen
raised?
Can’t record, something is wrong with
the recorded sound
→ Check the level (meter movement) in the METER screen.
→ If you move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button and press
the [ENTER] key in the CH VIEW screen View page, that
channel will be initialized to default values that allow sound
to be output.
→ If DIGITAL IN is enabled in the TRACK screen, and no signal
is being input to the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack, a message
of “WRONG WORD CLOCK” will appear, and sound will not
be output.
■ Can’t record
• Is there sufficient free space on the internal hard disk?
→ You can check the remaining recordable time in the TRACK
screen View page.
• The song may be protected.
• The stereo track may be in playback mode.
• Is the input signal routed appropriately to the recorder?
• Check the recording-source and recording-destination in
the RECORD screen.
• Is CD/DAT DIGITAL REC set to ENABLE in the UTIL-
ITY screen Preference page?
before using digital input signals.
■ Can’t record on the STEREO track
• It is not possible to record on the STEREO track while
recording on other tracks.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
258
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
■ Noise is present in the recorded signal
• The oscillator may be functioning.
■ Pairing was specified, but the signal is mon-
aural
• Is the odd-numbered channel panned far left and the even-
numbered channel panned far right?
• Does the word clock setting match for the AW2400 and
the external device(s)?
• Go to the RECORD screen and check the recording-
source and recording-destination.
■ Pairing was specified, but the signal phase
does not match
• Even when channels are paired, the phase setting is not
linked.
■ Can’t select a record track
• The number of 24-bit song tracks that can be recorded or
played simultaneously is limited.
■ Signal is delayed
• An effect such as delay may be inserted.
Something wrong with the sound
■ Can’t use the internal effects
• Effect BYPASS may be turned ON.
■ Sound is distorted
• Is the [GAIN] knob set correctly?
• The effect may have been inserted into a different channel.
• Are the level of effect return channel faders raised?
• HQ. Pitch can be used only with EFFECT 1 or 2.
• The connection cable from the external device may be
broken.
• The fader of the input channel or monitor channel may be
raised excessively.
• These do not affect the stereo track, sound clip, or audio
CD playback.
• The stereo output channel fader may be raised excessively.
■ Playback pitch is wrong
• The stereo output channel attenuator may be raised exces-
sively.
• VARI PITCH may be adjusted.
• Is the synchronized external device operating on the same
sampling frequency (44.1 kHz or 48 kHz)?
• The EQ or dynamics processor may have been set to pro-
duce an extreme gain boost.
• Is the master device operating in a stable way?
• Did you record at an appropriate level?
• You may have executed the EDIT screen PITCH com-
mand.
→ Go to the METER screen and check the level (meter move-
ment).
• Is an effect such as HQ.Pitch or Dual Pitch selected for a
monitor channel?
• Is the word clock setting correct for both the AW2400 and
the external device(s)?
• An effect such as Distortion or Amp Simulate may be in
use.
■ A small amount of noise is produced when a
song is played back on a different AW2400
unit
• A small amount of noise may be heard at the beginnings
and ends of audio regions when a song created on an
AW2400 unit with Version 1.1 firmware is played back on
an AW2400 with Version 1.0 firmware. Please update all
AW2400 units you are using to the latest firmware ver-
sion. Information on the latest firmware version as well as
update procedure can be found at the internet address
below.
■ The volume of a particular channel
increases or decreases
• Are the dynamics processor settings appropriate?
• Is the Automix function engaged?
■ Can’t store a scene
• The store-destination scene or song may be protected.
• A scene cannot be stored in scene number 00.
http://www.yamahasynth.com/
■ Can’t reproduce a scene
• One or more channels may be set to Recall Safe.
■ The sound and displays of some effects are
different when a song is played back on a
different AW2400 unit
■ Can’t save to a library
• It is not possible to save to the factory-preset libraries.
• When songs that include scenes or effect library using a
Gate effect are loaded into an AW2400 with Version 1.0
firmware, Gate effects may be replaced by a Reverb Hall
effect and some displays may not appear as expected.
Please update all AW2400 units you are using to the latest
firmware version. Information on the latest firmware ver-
sion as well as update procedure can be found at the inter-
net address below.
• Is the song you are trying to save protected?
■ Meters move even though the faders are
lowered
• The meter display may be set to PRE FADER or PRE EQ.
■ Moving a fader does not change the level
• Have you selected the correct mixing layer via the Layer
section keys?
http://www.yamahasynth.com/
• The fader may be set to PRE FADE or PRE EQ.
259
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Recorder operations
MIDI operations
■ When you press the [PLAY] key it blinks,
and playback does not occur
• Is the AW2400 set to MTC SLAVE?
■ Can’t exchange MIDI data
• Are the MIDI cables or USB cables connected correctly?
• A MIDI cable or USB cable may be broken.
→ Access the MIDI screen Setting 2 page, and check the set-
ting.
• Is the power turned on for the transmitting and receiving
devices?
■ Can’t edit a recorded track
• The song may be protected.
• Do the channel settings match for the transmitted and
receiving devices?
• Have you selected the virtual track that you recorded?
• Have the appropriate settings been made in the MIDI
screen Setting 1/2 pages?
■ Editing results are not heard in the sound
• Have you selected the virtual track that you recorded?
→ Select the connector and port to be used (MIDI connector,
USB connector port 1-3, or slot) in the Setting 1 page.
• Are you using the appropriate editing command?
• Is a scene assigned to the program change number being
transmitted?
■ Counter display is not 0 when you return to
the beginning of the song
• If the display mode is set to RELATIVE (relative time),
the start point may be specified.
• If a USB connection is being used, is the required USB-
MIDI driver properly installed on your computer?
■ MTC messages are not transmitted
• In the MIDI screen Setting 2 page, has the MTC button
been turned on?
→ Go to the SONG screen Setting page and TRACK screen
View page and check the settings.
• Is MTC MASTER turned on?
■ Display indicates DISK FULL or REGION
FULL, and you cannot record or edit
• There is insufficient free space, or too many recording
regions. Erase unneeded tracks and then perform the Opti-
mize operation to obtain more free space.
■ The AW2400 does not synchronize to
incoming MTC messages
• Is the MIDI cable connected to the MIDI IN connector?
• In the MIDI screen Setting 2 page, is MTC SLAVE turned
on?
• If the “DISK FULL” message appears, erase unneeded
songs or WAV files located under the “Transport” folder.
The WAV files under the “Transport” folder can be erased
from your computer when the USB Storage mode is
engaged.
• Is the connector and port to be used (MIDI connector,
USB connector port 1-3, or slot) selected in the MIDI
screen Setting 1 page?
■ MTC synchronization drifts
• Is a large amount of MIDI data (notes etc.) being received
together with the MTC messages?
■ The display indicates DISK BUSY during
playback
• The recorded data might be so fragmented that the read
speed is significantly reduced. It might be necessary to
backup all hard disk data to your computer and then re-ini-
tialize the hard disk.
• Does the frame rate match between the AW2400 and the
external device?
• In the MIDI screen Setting 2 page, OFFSET may have
been set.
• If you’re using the AW2400 with a Windows (or Mac OS
X 10.4 or higher) computer, access performance can be
improved by setting the cluster size to 64K when initializ-
ing the AW2400 internal hard disk. This reduces the
occurrence of DISK BUSY.
• If jumps occur in the synchronized time, change the
SYNC AVERAGE setting in the MIDI screen Setting 2
page, and try again.
■ MMC messages is not transmitted
• Is the MIDI cable connected to the MIDI OUT connector?
• In the MIDI screen Setting 2 page, is MMC MASTER
turned on? Does the DEVICE NO. match?
■ Can’t receive MMC messages
• Is the MIDI cable connected to the MIDI IN connector?
• In the MIDI screen Setting 2 page, is MMC SLAVE
turned on? Does the DEVICE NO. match?
■ Can’t use the preset remote settings
• Depending on the sequencer that you want to control, you
may need to make settings on the sequencer. For details,
• Select the connector and port to be used (MIDI connector,
USB connector port 1-3, or slot) in the MIDI screen Set-
ting 1 page.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
260
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Song operations
WAV File Transfer To and From a
Computer
■ Can’t save a file
• Is there sufficient space on the internal hard disk to create
a new song?
■ The computer doesn’t recognize the
AW2400 hard disk
• Is the USB cable properly connected?
• Did you perform the correct shut-down procedure when
you last turned off the power?
• Is your computer running the appropriate operating sys-
tem?
→ Disconnecting the power without performing the shutdown
operation will shorten the lifespan of the hard disk and CD-
RW drive, may damage the hard disk and CD-RW drive and
disc, and may result in loss of data.
→ Windows XP Professional/Home Edition SP1 or higher, or
Mac OS X 10.3 or higher. Operation is not guaranteed with
other operating systems.
• Is the internal hard disk be subjected to strong physical
shock?
• To use a Macintosh computer (running Mac OS X 10.3) it
is necessary to first initialize the AW2400 hard disk with
the cluster set to 32K.
■ AW2816 backup files cannot be saved
• Songs with a large data size cannot be saved. Try execut-
ing the Optimize function from the SONG screen Song
List page.
• Is the USB storage mode turned ON?
■ Can’t find WAV files copied from the com-
puter to the Transport folder
■ Song file size is unnaturally large
• Even after you use recorder editing operations to erase a
track or other data, that sound file will remain on the disk.
Execute the Optimize command in the SONG screen LIST
page.
• Have you copied WAV files with a different bit depth from
the song? Have you copied WAV files with a different
sampling frequency from the song?
■ Can’t find WAV files copied from the com-
puter to the Audio folder
• Did you change the bit depth of the WAV file when editing
it with waveform editing software?
CD operations
→ For 24-bit songs audio data is saved in the Audio folder in
32-bit WAV file format.
■ Can’t create an audio CD
• Is CD-R/RW media inserted?
• Have you changed the file name?
• The inserted CD-R may have already been finalized.
• Is a signal recorded on the stereo track?
• Did you copy the file(s) to a different folder?
■ Can’t copy files from the computer
• Files larger than 4 GB cannot be copied.
• The stereo track must be at least four seconds long.
• Have you saved a song after the stereo track has been
recorded?
• When connecting to a USB 2.0 connector of your com-
puter, use a cable specified for USB 2.0.
• Audio CDs cannot be created using data recorded at the
48kHz sampling rate.
■ An error message appears when discon-
necting the AW2400 from a Windows com-
puter
• Before turning the USB storage mode OFF, remove the
device via the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon in the
taskbar.
■ An audio CD you created does not play back
on a conventional player
• An audio CD you created you not play back on a conven-
tional player unless the disc has been finalized.
• Close all AW2400 windows before removing the device
via the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon.
■ Audio recorded on CD-RW media does not
play back on some players
• In order for audio data recorded on CD-RW media to be
played back, the player must support CD-RW. Contact the
manufacturer of the player regarding CD-RW support.
• If an error message still appears, execute “Safely Remove
Hardware” one or two more times. You should then be
able to remove the device without seeing an error mes-
sage.
■ The sound skips while playing an audio CD
that you created
• Depending on the CD-R media you use, there may be dif-
ferences in the quality of the completed CD.
261
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Pitch Fix operations
■ Can’t hear any pitch change?
• Make sure that RATE is NOT set to 0.
• Make sure that BYPASS is off.
■ The voice is not recognized
• When the voice is high, set TYPE to FEMALE; when it is
low, set TYPE to MALE.
■ Pitch correction doesn’t sound right
• In some cases, pitch correction may sound unnatural —
especially for parts sung with vibrato. To make the pitch-
corrected vocal sound more natural and subtle, set
DETECT to a relatively short value and set RATE to a rel-
atively slow value.
Automix operations
■ Can’t record Automix operations
• Is ENABLE selected in the AUTOMIX page?
• Is the REC or AUTO REC button on?
• Is the type of data to be recorded (fader, EQ, etc.) selected
in the OVERWRITE field?
• Is the [INPUT SEL], [SEL], or [STEREO SEL] key of the
target channel flashing?
Trigger Track operations
■ Playback sound is interrupted at the bound-
aries of the recorded data
• Use the EXPORT command to export the required section
of audio data as a WAV file, then use the IMPORT USB
WAV command to re-import the WAV file to the track.
■ Operating the [ON] key or fader doesn’t start
playback
• The channel may be turned off before the Trigger Track
mode is engaged.
→ Call the CH VIEW screen and turn on the channel.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
262
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display message list
Display message list
■ Messages
A/B POINTS NOT FOUND
AUTOMIX ABORTED!
AUTOMIX DISABLED!
AUTOMIX MEMORY FULL!
AUTOMIX RUNNING!
Repeat Playback cannot be performed because A/B points are not specified.
Automix recording has been aborted.
Automix is currently disabled. Please set to ENABLE.
Not enough memory available for automix.
That operation cannot be performed while automix is running.
Mute cannot be disengaged because the simultaneous playback limit will be
exceedced.
CANNOT DEFEAT MUTE
CANNOT REDO
Redo (re-execution of an operation) is not possible.
CANNOT SET MARK
It is not possible to specify a marker at an already-specified position.
Undo (cancellation of an operation) is not possible.
CANNOT UNDO
CD PLAY MODE NOW
CH. PARAMETER INITIALIZED
DIFFERENT TC FRAME TYPE
DIGITAL-ST-IN REC PROHIBIT.
Since the AW2400 is in CD Play mode, this operation cannot be executed.
The mixer parameters of the channel have been initialized.
MTC of a different frame type than the internal setting is being received.
Recording of digital input signals is prohibited.
The reading speed of the internal hard disk is not fast enough, or the reading
speed has slowed down because the recorded data has become fragmented.
DISK BUSY!!
DISK FULL!!
There is insufficient space on the internal hard disk.
Auto-punch recording cannot be performed because in/out points are not speci-
fied.
IN/OUT POINTS NOT FOUND
IN/OUT POINTS REVERSE ORDER
IN/OUT POINTSTOO CLOSE
In/out points are set in wrong order.
The auto punch-in/out interval is too short. It cannot be set less than approxi-
mately 100 msec.
LOCATE POINT ERASED
LOCATE POINT SET
The locate point has been erased.
The locate point has been set.
MARK POINT ERASED
MARK POINT SET
The marker has been erased.
The marker has been set.
MIDI IN: DATA FRAMING ERROR!
MIDI IN: DATA OVERRUN!
MIDI: RX BUFFER FULL!
MIDI:TX BUFFER FULL!
MTC SLAVE MODE NOW
NO DATA TO COPY!
Invalid MIDI data may have been received.
Invalid MIDI data may have been received.
Receiving more MIDI data than it can handle.
Attempting to transmit more MIDI data than it can handle.
Since the AW2400 is in MTC Slave mode, this operation cannot be executed.
There is no data to be copied.
NO MARK LEFT
The allowable number of marks has been exceeded.
Not data available for undo.
NOTHING TO UNDO!
RECORD TRACK NOT SELECTED
RECORDER BUSY!
Recording cannot be performed because you have not selected a record track.
The operation cannot be executed because the recorder is operating.
Since the recorder is recording or playing, this operation cannot be executed.
Redo (re-execution of the previous operation) has been completed.
The repeat interval is too short. It cannot be set to less than one second.
The selected channel is not available.
RECORDER RUNNING NOW
REDO COMPLETED
REPEAT POINTS TOO CLOSE
SELECTED CH IS NONE.
Please specify the automix parameters to be overwritten in the OVERWRITE
field.
SET OVERWRITE!
SOUND CLIP MODE NOW
STEREO TRACK PLAYBACK MODE
Since the AW2400 is in Sound Clip mode, this operation cannot be executed.
Since the AW2400 is in Stereo Track Playback mode, this operation cannot be
executed.
263
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display message list
THIS SONG IS PROTECTED.
TOO MANY REGIONS!!
This song is protected, and cannot be edited or recorded.
The maximum allowable number of regions* has been exceeded.
Since the AW2400 is in Trigger Track mode, this operation cannot be executed.
Undo (cancellation of the previous operation) has been executed.
Since the AW2400 is in USB Storage mode, this operation cannot be executed.
TRIGGER TRACK MODE NOW
UNDO COMPLETED
USB STORAGE MODE NOW
An inappropriate word clock is being received from the connected device to
which you are synchronizing.
WRONG WORD CLOCK
Y96K COULDN’T RECALL
Y96K COULDN’T STORE
Scene memory numbers 97 or higher cannot be recalled when using aY96K
card.
Scene memory numbers 97 or higher cannot be stored when using aY96K
card.
* A region is a continuous segment of audio data recorded on one track.
■ Popup messages
Buffer Underrun!
A buffer underrun error was encountered while writing to the CD.
The current song cannot be selected for this operation.
Can’t Select
Current Song!
CD Import Prohibited!
Enable DIGITAL REC.
Can’t import from a CD because DIGITAL REC is prohibited.
An error was encountered while accessing the internal hard disk or CD-RW
drive.
CD or HD Access Error!
CD-RW Drive Not Found!
A problem occurred with the CD-RW drive.
Change Media, Not 1st Media.
Wrong media order. Please insert media number 1.
Change Media,
Different Archive ID!
The medium contains the wrong backup file. Insert the correct medium.
Please exchange the media. The order of media volumes is incorrect.
Change Media,
Wrong Media Order!
Compare Error!
The data was not written correctly.
The file is corrupt.
Corrupt File!
Data Mismatch Found!
End of Archive File Not Found!
A data mismatch has been found in the song.
The end of the backup file cannot be located.
The operation could not be executed, since the end of the song would be later
than 24 hours.
End Range Over!
File in Use!
Can’t save, erase, or edit the title because the file is in use.
The file list is full and cannot be appended.
File List Full!
File Name Already Exists!
The specified file name already exists. Use a different file name.
No more songs can be created or restored, since this would exceed the maxi-
mum number of files.
File Number Full!
File Size Exceeds Limit!
For Effect 1 or 2 Only!
HD Full!
The file is too large to be saved.
The selected effect type is for use with Effect 1 or Effect 2 only.
The internal hard disk is full and can accept no more data.
The hard disk reliability status (the number of past errors) has exceeded the
HD Status is Out of Range!
threshold. Back up your data and have the hard disk replaced as soon as possi-
ble.
HDD Error!
A problem occurred with the internal hard disk.
An unrecognized or unsupported medium has been inserted.
The parameter setting exceeds the allowable range.
An invalid region has been specified.
Illegal/Unsupported Media!
Invalid Parameter!
Invalid Region!
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
264
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display message list
Since the song length divided by the markers would be less than four seconds,
you cannot divide it with a marker.
Marker Interval Under 4 sec!
Media Too Small. Cannot Save!
No Data to Backup!
No Data to Restore!
No Data!
The medium does not have enough space available to save the data.
No data is selected for backup.
No data is selected for restore.
No data exists, or there is no data (region*) in the selected area.
Can’t save, erase, or edit the title because no file is found.
Media has not been inserted.
No File!
No Media!
No Region!
No region* is found.
No Song to Write!
No Stereo Track!
Not 44.1kHz/16Bit Song!
No songs to write to the CD have been selected.
There is no song that includes a master track longer than four seconds.
The song cannot be restored since it is not a 44.1 kHz/16-bit song.
Number Ejected Media,
Insert Blank Media.
Make a note of the number of the medium which has been writen to, then insert
a blank medium.
The maximum numberof media that can be handled at the same time has been
exceeded.
Number of Media Exceeds Limit!
Protected!
Can’t edit the file because it is protected.
Read Only File!
Read Only!
Can’t save, erase, or edit the title because the file is read-only.
Read-only library! This library cannot be saved, erased, or title-edited.
The selected library data cannot be poperly loaded into the specified channel.
Recall Channel Data Conflict!
Recognized AW2816-
Formatted Media!
The media is written in AW2816 format.
The media is written in AW4416 format.
Recognized AW4416-
Formatted Media!
Region Full!
The maximum allowable number of regions* has been exceeded.
There is no compressor on the selected channel.
There is no EQ on the selected channel.
Selected Channel has no Comp!
Selected Channel has no EQ!
Selected Channel has no Gate!
Song Too Large to Export!
System Error!
There is no gate on the selected channel.
The song file is too large to be exported.
An internal system error has occurred.
This Song is Protected!
Can’t save, erase, or edit the title because the song is protected.
No more data can be written because the capacity of the CD has been
exceeded.
Too Long Data!
No new tracks can be added because the maximum number of allowable tracks
has been exceeded.
Too Many CD Tracks!
Track Not Recorded!
Used As Effect Insert!
Wave File Link Error!
Wrong Bit Depth!
The track you selected does not contain any recorded data.
This port is already in use as an effect insert.
A WAV file link error has been found.
The bit depth of the selected file is incorrect.
The selected file is not PCM format.
Wrong File Format!
The internal hard disk is incorrectly formatted. The disk cannot be formatted
from a computer.
Wrong HD Format!
Wrong Number of Channels!
Wrong Sampling Frequency!
Wrong Wav Chunk Data!
Wrong Wav File!
The number of channels in the selected file is incorrect.
The sampling rate of the selected file is incorrect.
The WAV file’s chunk data is incorrect.
The WAV file cannot be used.
* A region is a continuous segment of audio data recorded on one track.
265
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the CD-ROM included with the AW2400
About the CD-ROM included with the AW2400
Special Notices
• The software and this owner’s manual are the exclusive
copyrights of Yamaha Corporation.
Installing USB MIDI driver
If you are connecting the AW2400 to your computer via a
USB cable for MIDI message transmission and reception,
you need to install the Yamaha USB MIDI driver.
• Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual
in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden
without the written consent of the manufacturer.
■ System Requirements
• Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with
regard to the use of the software and documentation and
cannot be held responsible for the results of the use of
this manual and the software.
OS: Windows XP Professional/Home Edition SP1 or
higher, or Mac OS X 10.3 or higher
■ Installing on Windows XP
• This disk is a CD-ROM. Do not attempt to play the disk
on an audio CD player. Doing so may result in irrepara-
ble damage to your audio CD player.
Start your computer to launch Windows, then
log in as Administrator.
1
• Future upgrades of application and system software and
any changes in specifications and functions will be
announced separately.
Click the [Start] button, and then click [Con-
trol Panel].
2
If the control panel appears as “Pick a category”, click
“Switch to Classic View” in the upper left of the win-
dow. All control panels and icons will be displayed.
Contents of the CD-ROM
Go to [System Hardware] ➝ [Driver signa-
3
The included CD-ROM contains a backup file that you
can use to restore the AW2400 to its factory-set condition,
setting files that let you use the AW2400’s MIDI Remote
function with various DAW software, and a USB MIDI
driver that is necessary to allow MIDI message transmis-
sion and reception via the USB connector.
tures] ➝ [Driver signature options], select
“Ignore — Install software without asking for
confirmation,” and then click [OK].
Click [OK] to close the “System Properties”
window, and then click the Close button to
close the “Control Panel” window.
4
Folder/
file name
Software name
Contents
Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM
drive.
5
Backup file for restoring the
internal hard disk to its fac-
tory-set condition.
AW24_000.TAR
Demo song
First, make sure the POWER switch on the
6
Setting file for remotely con-
trolling the Cubase/Nuendo
software from the AW2400.
AW2400 is set to STANDBY, then use a USB
cable to connect the USB connector of the
computer to the USB connector of the
AW2400. When the AW2400 is turned on, the
computer automatically displays the “Found
New Hardware Wizard.”
Cubase/Nuendo
remote setup file
Setting file for remotely con-
Remote
Logic preference file trolling the Logic software
from the AW2400.
Setting file for remotely
SONAR template file
controlling the SONAR soft-
(Windows only)
ware from the AW2400.
If the “Can Windows connect to Windows
7
Update to search for software?” is displayed,
select “No, not this time”, and then click
[Next].
Driver file for exchanging
Yamaha USB MIDI
Driver
MIDI messages between
the AW2400 and a com-
puter via a USB cable.
USBdrv_
Select “Install software automatically (recom-
mended) (I),” and then click [Next].
8
The system starts the installation.
NOTE
• Some computers may take a few minutes to show this screen.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
266
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the CD-ROM included with the AW2400
When the installation is complete, the system
displays “Completing the Found New Hard-
ware Wizard.” Click [Finish].
Click [Continue].
The “Select a Destination” is displayed.
9
5
NOTE
• Some computers may take about a few minutes to show this
screen after the installation is complete.
Restart the computer.
The driver has been installed.
10
■ Installing on Macintosh computer
Start your computer, then log in as Adminis-
trator.
1
To confirm that the Administrator account is available,
select [System Preferences], then [Users (Account)].
Select a destination for the driver installation,
then click [Continue].
The message “Installing this software requires 100MB
of disk space” may appear. However, the actual
required free disk space is 2MB.
6
7
Double-click the “USBdrv_” folder on the
included CD-ROM.
2
Double-click “YAMAHA USB-MIDI Driver
v1.*****.mpkg” (***** represents the version
number).
An “Authenticate” window opens, prompting the pass-
word.
3
A window opens, displaying the message
“Click install to perform a basic installation of
this software.” Click [Install].
If the driver has already been installed, the [Upgrade]
button is displayed instead of the [Install] button.
If the window does not prompt you to enter the pass-
word, click the lock icon.
The driver is installed, and message “The software
was successfully installed” is displayed.
Click the [Close] button.
The driver installation is complete.
8
You can check the following locations to confirm that
the driver has been installed:
• Library ➝ Audio ➝ MIDI Drivers ➝
YAMAHAUSBMIDIDriver.plugin
• Library ➝ PreferencePanes ➝
YAMAHAUSBMIDIPatch.prefPane
Enter the password for the Administrator’s
account. If you have not set the password,
click [OK].
4
The “Welcome to the YAMAHA USBMIDI Driver
Installer” window is displayed.
267
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the CD-ROM included with the AW2400
Move the cursor to the RESTORE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
5
6
Restoring the internal hard disk to the
factory-set condition
In order to restore the internal hard disk to the factory-set
condition, you will need to perform the following two pro-
cedures.
A popup window will ask you for confirma-
tion, so move the cursor to the OK button or
CANCEL button, and press the [ENTER] key.
While the Restore operation is being executed, the
state of progress will be shown in a popup window.
When this popup window closes, the operation has
been completed.
A Initialize the internal hard disk
B Load the demo song
■ Initializing the internal hard disk
When you initialize the internal hard disk, the system set-
tings will return to their factory-set state.
Installing a remote file
■ Supported DAW software
• Windows
NOTE
• Executing this operation will erase all data from the internal hard
disk, and the data cannot be recovered. We recommend you to
backup all data on the internal hard disk to a computer before exe-
cuting this operation.
(*1)
• Logic Platinum 5.5.1
• Cubase SX 3.0.1
• Nuendo 3.0.1
• Sonar 4.0.1 Producer Edition
• Macintosh
■ Loading the demo song
(*1)
• Logic Pro 7.0.1
You can load the demo song from the included CD-ROM
to restore the AW2400 to its factory-set condition.
• Cubase SX 3.0.1
• Nuendo 3.0.1
(*2)
• Protools TDM 6.7
Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-RW
1
drive of the AW2400.
*1 Use the setting file from the included CD-ROM to map the
AW2400’s faders/[ON] keys/transport keys to the Logic key
commands. Track assignments must be made within Logic
as appropriate for your system.
Call the SONG screen Restore page by either
pressing the Work Navigate section [SONG]
key as many times as necessary.
2
*2 Select the CS-10 settings as the MIDI controller type. For
details on the CS-10 settings, ask Digidesign.
Make sure that the cursor is located at the
READ CD INFO button, and press the
[ENTER] key.
3
Loading from the CD-ROM will begin. When loading
is finished, the contents of the display will change as
follows.
Move the cursor to the list and press the
[ENTER] key.
4
The symbol at the left of the list will change to “●”.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
268
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the CD-ROM included with the AW2400
Click the [Import] button.
5
6
■ Windows users
A dialog box like the following will appear.
Select the Cubase/Nuendo remote setup file
(Yamaha AW2400 Remote.xml) from the
included CD-ROM, and click the [Open] but-
ton.
NOTE
• In order to use a remote file, the corresponding software must be
installed.
• Please be aware that the menu names and screens that appear in
the explanation below may differ depending on the software you
are using.
● Installing the Cubase/Nuendo remote
setup file
Start up Cubase/Nuendo.
1
2
In the menu bar, select [Devices] menu ➝
[Device Setup...].
The Device Setup window will appear. Select
[Add Device] ➝ [Generic Remote].
3
Close the Device Setup window.
7
Fader and [ON] key operations can be used to control
Cubase/Nuendo audio tracks. Create new projects with
more than 16 audio tracks.
● Installing the Logic preference file
Start up Logic.
1
In the menu bar, select [Options] menu ➝
[Preferences] ➝ [Key Commands...].
2
The Generic Remote setting display will
appear. Set the “MIDI Input” and “MIDI Out-
put” filed.
The Key Commands window will open. In the
menu bar, select [Options] ➝ [Import Key
Commands...].
4
3
MIDI Output : your MIDI output device
MIDI Input : your MIDI input device
A dialog box will appear. Select the Logic
4
preference file (Logic32.prf) from the included
CD-ROM, and click the [Open] button.
When you import the file, the following settings will
be made.
NOTE
• The content that is shown for “MIDI Input” and “MIDI Output”
will depend on the MIDI device(s) you are using. For details,
refer to the owner’s manual for the MIDI device(s) you are
using.
* Please note that all the previously-specified key com-
mands will be initialized. If you do not want to change
your existing user key command settings, you can manu-
ally make the MIDI channel and CC# settings shown
above.
269
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the CD-ROM included with the AW2400
● Installing the SONAR template file
■ Macintosh users
Copy the SONAR template file from the
included CD-ROM to the folder in which
SONAR is installed.
1
NOTE
• In order to use a remote file, the corresponding software must be
installed.
Start up SONAR.
• Please be aware that the menu names and screens that appear in
the explanation below may differ depending on the software you
are using.
2
3
4
In the menu bar, select [File] menu ➝ [Open].
The “Open file” dialog box will appear.
● Installing the Cubase/Nuendo remote
Choose Cakewalk template files as the type of
file to be loaded. From the list in the dialog
box, choose “Yamaha AW2400 Remote” and
click the [OK] button.
setup file
For Cubase/Nuendo, the procedure is the same as for
In the menu bar, select [Option] ➝
[MIDI Devices].
5
● Installing the Logic Pro preference file
Start up Logic Pro.
1
2
The MIDI Ports window will open. In the Input
Ports field, assign the MIDI device that you
are using.
6
In the menu bar, select [Logic Pro] menu ➝
[Preferences] ➝ [Key Commands...].
The Key Commands window will open. In the
menu bar, select [Options] ➝ [Import Key
Commands].
3
If you changed the track structure from the
default settings of the template ...
With the Yamaha AW2400 Remote template started,
click the [CONFIG] button in the StudioWare panel
window. A cluster will open at the right.
Drag the [SET MIDI First Track] knob to the first
track number of the MIDI tracks.
A dialog box will appear. Select the Logic
preference file (Logic Preferences) from the
included CD-ROM, and click the [Open] but-
ton.
When you import the file, the following settings will
be made.
4
* If you use this template, you will not be able to control
the tracks correctly from the AW2400 unless the MIDI
tracks are continuous from 1–16.
* If you set the value to an invalid track (an unused track),
the panel knobs, buttons, or sliders may be shaded. If
this occurs, set the value back to the correct track.
* Please note that all the previously-specified key com-
mands will be initialized. If you do not want to change
your existing user key command settings, you can manu-
ally make the MIDI channel and CC# settings shown
above.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
270
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the CD-ROM included with the AW2400
● Setting Pro Tools remote control
You can remotely control the Pro Tools software from the
AW2400. No special setting file is required. Use the fol-
lowing procedure to make settings.
In the menu bar, select [Setup] ➝
[Peripherals...].
1
The Peripherals window will open. Click the
[MIDI Controllers] button.
2
In the MIDI Controllers window, make the following
settings. In the Receive From field and the Send To
field, specify the MIDI device you are using.
Type
Receive From
Send To
#ch’s
Your MIDI input
device
Your MIDI output
device
#1
CS-10
16
This completes preparations for using the AW2400’s
MIDI Remote function to control the Pro Tools software.
271
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI data format
MIDI data format
1. Functions
2. MIDI data flow diagram
1.1. Scene Change
The settings of the [MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE] specify
the scene that is recalled when a Program Change message is
received.
MTC SLAVE
USB-1 IN
USB-2 IN
USB-3 IN
MIDI IN
MTC (MTC Slave)
EFF MIDI
NOTE ON/OFF (Effect Control)
PROGRAM CHANGE (Scene Recall
SLOT IN
The settings of the [MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE] specify
the program number that is transmitted when a scene is recalled. If
more than one program number has been assigned to that scene
memory number, the lowest-numbered program number will be
transmitted.
PGM CHG
CTRL CHG
)
CONTROL CHANGE (Parameter Edit
ECHO OUT
)
ECHO
MMC SLAVE
MMC (Transport Control)
1.2. MMC Control
LEARN
These messages allow basic recorder operations such as STOP/
PLAY/REC/LOCATE.
Channel Message/Exclusive Message
(MIDI REMOTE Learn)
USB-1 OUT
THRU
If you select the MIDI SETUP menu item MMC MASTER, MMC
commands will be transmitted according to the operation of the
transport. If you select MMC SLAVE, the internal recorder will oper-
ate according to the received MMC commands.
USB-2 OUT
USB-3 OUT
MIDI OUT
SW2
REMOTE Transport
REMOTE Fader/Sel
PROGRAM CHANGE
CONTROL CHANGE
SLOT OUT
SW3
SW1
PGM CHG
CTRL CHG
1.3. Effect Control
Depending on the type of effect, note-on/off messages can be used
for control.
These settings are made for the parameters of each effect.
MMC MASTER
SW4
MMC
1.4. Pitch Fix Control
When the Pitch Fix mode is engaged, note-on/off messages can be
used to control pitches.
MIDI SYNC (MTC)
MTC
MIDI SYNC (CLK)
MIDI CLOCK
1.5. MIDI Clock transmission
If you set MIDI OUT to MIDI CLOCK, MIDI clock messages can be
transmitted during playback or recording.
ECHO ON
ECHO OUT
In MIDI Clock transmission mode, Song Position Pointer and Start/
Stop/Continue commands will also be issued, and during playback or
recording, MIDI Clock will be transmitted according to the MIDI
Tempo Map.
SW1 : REMOTE OFF
SW2 : REMOTE ON (Remote)
SW3 : REMOTE ON
SW4 : REMOTE OFF or REMOTE ON (Normal)
1.6. MTC transmission (MTC Master)
If you set MIDI OUT to MTC, MTC can be transmitted during play-
back or recording.
3. AW2400 settings and operation
3.1. MIDI Setup
Set basic MIDI operation.
1.7. MTC reception (MTC Slave)
If you set MTC MODE to SLAVE, the internal recorder will operate
in synchronization with MTC messages received from the MIDI IN
connector.
3.1.1.Tx PORT
Specify the output port for MIDI communication.
3.1.2. Rx PORT
1.8. Realtime control of parameters
Control changes can be used to send/receive internal parameters in
realtime.
Specify the input port for MIDI communication.
3.1.3. MIDI Tx Ch
This sets the MIDI channel that will be used for transmission.
1.9. MIDI Remote
3.1.4. MIDI Rx Ch
This sets the MIDI channel that will be used for reception.
The faders, ON keys, and RTZ / FF / REW / STOP / PLAY / REC
keys can be used to control an external MIDI device.
In PRESET mode, operating the above controllers will transmit
MIDI data according to the preset settings of the AW2400.
In USER mode, operating the above controllers will transmit the
MIDI data that you specify.
3.1.5. PROGRAM CHANGE MODE
Enable/disable reception and transmission. If MIDI Rx Ch is set to
OMNI, these messages will be received regardless of their MIDI
channel. If MIDI Tx Ch is set to ECHO, the received messages will
be echoed at the transmission port.
3.1.6. CONTROL CHANGE MODE
Enable/disable reception and transmission. If this is enabled, you can
specify the correspondence between control numbers and operations
of the mixer section. Three modes are available for correspondence
with control numbers. For mode 1, transmission and reception will
occur without regard to the MIDI Tx Ch and MIDI Rx Ch settings.
For modes 2 and 3, reception will occur without regard to MIDI
channel if you set MIDI Rx Ch to OMNI.
If MIDI Tx Ch is set to ECHO, the received messages will be echoed
at the transmission port.
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
272
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI data format
3.1.7. OTHER
4.4. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE
4.4.1. REALTIME SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE
4.4.1.1. MMC
If this is set to ECHO, the received MIDI data will be echoed at the
transmission port. However, Program Change and Control Change
will follow their own settings.
Command
Rx/Tx
Rx/Tx
Rx
function
Transport stop
3.1.8. REMOTE PORT
Specify the output port when the MIDI remote function is engaged.
01 STOP
02 PLAY
Transport play
03 DEFERRED PLAY
04 FAST FORWARD
05 REWIND
Rx/Tx
Rx/TX
Rx/Tx
Rx
Transport play
3.1.9.THRU
Transport fast-forward
Transport rewind
Transport punch-in record
Transport punch-out
MMC reset
Set the MIDI through function.
06 RECORD STROBE
07 RECORD EXIT
0F RESET
3.1.10. MMC MODE
Select whether the AW2400 will be the MMC MASTER or SLAVE.
Rx
Rx/Tx
Rx/Tx
3.1.11. MMC Dev.
44 LOCATE
Transport locate
Specify the ID number that will be used when transmitting or receiv-
ing MMC commands.
5. MIDI format details
5.1. NOTE OFF (8n)
3.1.12. MTC SYNC MODE
Select whether the AW2400 will be the MTC MASTER or SLAVE.
< Reception >
Received when [Rx CH] matches.
3.1.13. MTC SYNC AVERAGE
When the AW2400 is functioning as a MTC SLAVE, this setting
specifies how it will follow the MTC data. Set this to 0 if the incom-
ing MTC data has a highly accurate timing; set this to 1 or 2 if the
timing of the incoming MTC data is not as accurate (such as when
receiving MTC from a software sequencer).
Used to control Effects/Pitch Fix. Refer NOTE ON for details.
Note Off Message
Note No.
STATUS
DATA
1000nnnn 8n
0nnnnnnn nn
0vvvvvvv vv
Velocity (ignored)
3.1.14. MTC SYNC OFFSET
5.2. NOTE ON (9n)
< Reception >
Received when [Rx CH] matches.
Used to control Effects/Pitch Fix. Refer below for details.
Velocity of 0x00 is equivalent to Note-Off.
When the AW2400 is functioning as a MTC SLAVE, this setting
adds an offset to the received MTC data. The received time code
value shifted by this amount will correspond to the location indicated
by the internal time code of the AW2400.
3.1.15. SYNC OUT
Turn on/off the output of MTC/MIDI CLOCK.
Note On Message
Note No.
STATUS
DATA
1001nnnn 9n
0nnnnnnn nn
0vvvvvvv vv
Velocity (1-127:On, 0:Off)
4. MIDI format list
4.1. CHANNEL MESSAGE
* Effect control by Note
1: Dynamic Flange/Dynamic Phase/Dynamic Filter
When the SOURCE parameter is set to MIDI, the note velocity (both
note-on and note-off) is used to control the Modulation frequency
width.
Command
Rx/Tx
function
Control the internal effect
Control the internal effect
Edit parameters
8n NOTE OFF
Rx
9n NOTE ON
Rx
Bn CONTROL CHANGE
Cn PROGRAM CHANGE
Rx/Tx
Rx/Tx
5.3. CONTROL CHANGE (Bn)
Switch scene memories
< Reception >
If [Control Change Rx] is On, control change messages will be
recevied when [MIDI Rx Ch] matches. However, if [MIDI Rx Ch] is
OMNI or [Control Change Mode] is 1, reception will occur regard-
less of MIDI channel.
4.2. SYSTEM COMMON MESSAGE
Command
Rx/Tx
function
MTC transmission
Song position transmission
F1 MIDI TIME CODE
Rx/Tx
F2 SONG POSITION POINTER Tx
< Transmission >
If [Control Change Tx] is On, control change messages will be trans-
mitted on the [MIDI Tx Ch] channel when you operate a parameter.
4.3. SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE
Command
Rx/Tx
function
Control Change
STATUS
DATA
1011nnnn Bn
0ccccccc cc
0vvvvvvv vv
F8 TIMING CLOCK
Tx
MIDI Clock transmission
Start command transmission
Continue command transmission
Stop command transmit
Check MIDI cable connections
Clear running status
Control No. (0-95, 102-119)
Control Value (0-127)
FA START
Tx
Tx
Tx
Rx
Rx
FB CONTINUE
FC STOP
FE ACTIVE SENSING
FF RESET
The control value is converted into a parameter value according to
the following equation.
S= total number of steps in the parameter’s variable range
128 / S = X remainder Y
INT((Y+1)/2) = Z
If (MIDI DATA - Z) < 0, then Value = 0
If ((MIDI DATA - Z)/X) > MAX, then Value = MAX
Otherwise, Value = INT ((MIDI DATA -Z)/X)
273
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI data format
5.4. PROGRAM CHANGE (Cn)
5.10. STOP (FC)
< Reception >
< Transmission >
If [Program Change Rx] is On, program change messages will be
received when [MIDI Rx Ch] matches. However, if [MIDI Rx Ch] is
OMNI, this message is received regardless of the channel.
A scene memory will be recalled according to the [PROGRAM
CHANGE TABLE] settings.
If [SYNC OUT] is MIDI CLOCK, this message is transmitted when
the recorder stops.
Stop
11111100 FC
STATUS
5.11. ACTIVE SENSING (FE)
< Reception >
Once this message is received, subsequent failure to receive any mes-
sage for a period of 300 ms will cause Running Status to be cleared,
and MIDI communications to be initialized.
< Transmission >
If [Program Change Tx] is On, a program change will be transmitted
on the [MIDI Tx Ch] according to the [PROGRAM CHANGE
TABLE] settings when you recall a memory. If the recalled memory
number has been assigned to more than one program number, the
lowest-numbered program number will be transmitted.
Active Sensing
11111110 FE
STATUS
Program Change
STATUS
DATA
1100nnnn Cn
0nnnnnnn nn
5.12. RESET (FF)
< Reception >
Program No. ( 0-127)
When a Reset message is received, MIDI communications will be
initialized by clearing Running Status etc.
5.5. MIDI TIME CODE QUARTER FRAME (F1)
< Transmission >
Reset
11111111 FF
If [SYNC OUT] is set to MTC, Quarter Frame messages will be
transmitted according to the time code movements of the recorder
when the recorder is playing or recording.
STATUS
5.13. EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE (F0-F7)
5.13.1. MMC
5.13.1.1. MMC STOP
< Transmission >
When the STOP key is pressed, this message is transmitted with a
< Reception >
This message is received if [MTC SYNC MODE] is set to SLAVE.
Quarter Frame messages received in realtime are internally assem-
bled into time code that controls the recorder.
Quarter Frame Message
STATUS
DATA
11110001 F1
0nnndddd dd
device number of 7F.
nnn = message type (0-7) dddd = data
< Reception >
If the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave, the transport will stop
when this message is received with a matching device number or a
device number of 7F.
5.6. SONG POSITION POINTER (F2)
< Transmission >
If [SYNC OUT] is MIDI CLOCK, a song position message will be
transmitted when STOP or LOCATE is performed on the recorder, to
indicate the song position from which the song should start at the
next START or CONTINUE message.
System Exclusive Message
Real Time System Exclusive
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id
Stop (MCS)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0
01111111 7F
Device ID 0ddddddd dd
Command
00000110 06
00000001 01
11110111 F7
Song Position Pointer
STATUS
DATA
11110010 F2
0ddddddd dd0
0ddddddd dd1
data ( H) high 7 bits of 14 bits data
data ( L) low 7 bits of 14 bits data
End Of Exclusive
EOX
5.13.1.2. MMC PLAY
< Reception >
If the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave, the transport will
begin playback when this message is received with a matching
device number or a device number of 7F.
5.7. TIMING CLOCK (F8)
< Transmission >
If [SYNC OUT] is MIDI CLOCK, this message is transmitted
according to the MIDI Tempo Map from when the recorder begins
playing or recording, until it stops.
System Exclusive Message
Real Time System Exclusive
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id
Play (MCS)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0
01111111 7F
Timing Clock
11111000 F8
STATUS
Device ID 0ddddddd dd
Command
00000110 06
00000010 02
11110111 F7
5.8. START (FA)
< Transmission >
If [SYNC OUT] is MIDI CLOCK, this message is transmitted when
the recorder begins playing or recording at a location other than the
first measure.
End Of Exclusive
EOX
5.13.1.3. MMC DEFERRED PLAY
< Transmission >
This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when the
Start
11111010 FA
STATUS
PLAY key is pressed.
5.9. CONTINUE (FB)
< Transmission >
< Reception >
If the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave, the transport will
begin playback when this message is received with a matching
device number or a device number of 7F.
If [SYNC OUT] is MIDI CLOCK, this message is transmitted when
the recorder begins playing or recording at a location other than the
first measure.
System Exclusive Message
Real Time System Exclusive
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id
Deferred play (MCS)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0
01111111 7F
Continue
11111011 FB
STATUS
Device ID 0ddddddd dd
Command
00000110 06
00000011 03
11110111 F7
End Of Exclusive
EOX
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
274
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI data format
5.13.1.4. MMC FAST FORWARD
< Transmission >
5.13.1.8. MMC RESET
< Transmission >
This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when the FF
This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when song
key is pressed and the Cue mode is engaged.
loading is finished.
< Reception >
< Reception >
If the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave, the transport will
begin fast-forward when this message is received with a matching
device number or a device number of 7F.
This message is received if the AW2400 is operating as an MMC
Slave and the device number matches or is 7F. MMC-related internal
settings will be reset to the power-on state.
System Exclusive Message
Real Time System Exclusive
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id
Fast Forward (MCS)
System Exclusive Message
Real Time System Exclusive
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id
Reset
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0
01111111 7F
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0
01111111 7F
Device ID 0ddddddd dd
Device ID 0ddddddd dd
Command
EOX
00000110 06
00000110 04
11110111 F7
Command
EOX
00000110 06
00001101 0D
11110111 F7
End Of Exclusive
End Of Exclusive
5.13.1.5. MMC REWIND
< Transmission >
5.13.1.9. MMC LOCATE (TARGET)
< Transmission >
This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when the
REWIND key is pressed and the Review mode is engaged.
This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when a
locate-related key such as MARK SEARCH/IN/OUT is pressed, a
FF/REW operation is performed, when the transport returns to the
auto-punch pre-roll point, or when repeating.
< Reception >
If the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave, the transport will
begin rewind when this message is received with a matching device
number or a device number of 7F.
< Reception >
This message is received if the AW2400 is operating as an MMC
Slave and the device number matches. The transport will locate to the
time code position specified within the command data.
System Exclusive Message
Real Time System Exclusive
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id
Rewind (MCS)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0
01111111 7F
System Exclusive Message
Real Time System Exclusive
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id
Locate
Device ID 0ddddddd dd
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0
01111111 7F
Command
00000110 06
00000101 05
11110111 F7
Device ID 0ddddddd dd
End Of Exclusive
EOX
Command
00000110 06
01000100 44
00000110 06
00000001 01
0hhhhhhh hh
0mmmmmmm mm
0sssssss ss
0fffffff ff
0sssssss ss
11110111 F7
byte count
5.13.1.6. MMC RECORD STROBE
< Reception >
This message is received if the AW2400 is operating as an MMC
Slave and the device number matches or is 7F. If the transport is
stopped, then recording will begin. If the transport is playing, then
punch-in will occur.
“target” sub command
hour (Standard Time Code)
minute
second
frame
sub-frame
End Of Exclusive
EOX
System Exclusive Message
Real Time System Exclusive
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id
Record strobe
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0
01111111 7F
Device ID 0ddddddd dd
Command
EOX
00000110 06
00000110 06
11110111 F7
End Of Exclusive
5.13.1.7. MMC RECORD EXIT
< Reception >
This message is received if the AW2400 is operating as an MMC
Slave and the device number matches or is 7F. If the transport is
recording, then punch-out will occur.
System Exclusive Message
Real Time System Exclusive
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id
Record Exit
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0
01111111 7F
Device ID 0ddddddd dd
Command
00000110 06
00000111 07
11110111 F7
End Of Exclusive
EOX
275
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Implementation Chart
MIDI Implementation Chart
YAMAHA
[ Professional Audio Workstation ]
Model AW2400 MIDI Implementation Chart
Date :21-JUL-2004
Version : 1.0
Transmitted
Recognized
Remarks
Function...
Default
Basic
1 - 16
1 - 16
1 - 16
1 - 16
Memorized
Memorized
Channel Changed
Default
x
1, 3
Mode
Note
Messages x
Altered
x
x
**************
x
0 - 127
x
Number : True voice **************
Velocity Note ON
x
x
x
Note OFF x
After
Touch
Key's
Ch's
x
x
x
x
Pitch Bend
x
x
1-16 o
21-27 o
33-34 o
41-56 o
63-79 o
91-93 o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Assignable Cntrl
Assignable Cntrl
Assignable Cntrl
Assignable Cntrl
Assignable Cntrl
Assignable Cntrl
Assignable Cntrl
Control
Change
102-117 o
Prog
o 0 - 127
o 0 - 127
Assignable
Change : True #
**************
System Exclusive
o
o
*1
*2
: Song Pos. o
Common : Song Sel. x
x
x
x
: Tune
x
System :Clock
Real Time:Commands o
o
x
x
*2
*2
:All Sound Off x
x
x
x
x
o
o
Aux :Reset All Cntrls x
:Local ON/OFF
x
Mes- :All Notes OFF x
sages:Active Sense
:Reset
x
x
Notes:
MTC quarter frame message is transmitted.
MTC quarter frame message is recognized.(When MTC Slave mode)
*1 :MMC
*2 :When BCLK Sync mode
For MIDI remote, ALL messages can be transmitted.
Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO
o : Yes
x : No
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
276
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Specifications
Master Section (Total 16 Bus)
■ General Specifications
Frequency Response
0 +1/-3 dB @20 Hz–20 kHz
(MIC/LINE INPUT to STEREO OUT, GAIN: max.)
BUS
: 4 CH (stereo x 2)
AUX
: 4 CH
STEREO : 2 CH (stereo x 1)
SOLO : 2 CH (stereo x 1)
Total Harmonic Distortion
(measured with 20 kHz LPF)
EFFECT : 4 CH
Less than 0.05 % @20 Hz to 20 kHz/+4 dBu
(MIC/LINE INPUT to STEREO OUT, GAIN: min.)
Built-in Hard Disk Drive
40 GB, 3.5" IDE
Dynamic Range (measured with IHF-A)
115 dB typ. : DA Converter (STEREO OUT)
Maximum Number of Songs
100 Songs
109 dB min. : DA Converter (STEREO OUT,
INPUT CH SEL: all off)
Recording Resolution
16-bit/24-bit
110 dB typ. : AD+DA (MIC/LINE INPUT to
STEREO OUT)
Maximum Number of Simultaneous Recording/
Playback Tracks
16 Recording Tracks/24 Playback Tracks (16-bit)
104 dB min. : AD+DA (MIC/LINE INPUT to
STEREO OUT, GAIN: min.)
8 Recording Tracks/12 Playback Tracks (24-bit)
AD Converter
24-bit Linear, 128-times Oversampling
Number of Tracks
208 Tracks
(24 Tracks + Stereo Tracks) x 8 Virtual
DA Converter
24-bit Linear, 128-times Oversampling
Faders
100 mm x 13 (motorized)
Internal Processing
32-bit
Display
Sampling Frequency
320 x 240 dot LCD (with contrast control)
Internal : 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz (-6%–+6%)
External : 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz (-10%–+6%)
MIDI
MTC (Master/Slave), MIDI Clock (Master),
MMC (Master/Slave), Program Change,
Control Change
Audio Input Section
MIC/LINE INPUT
: 8 CH (XLR & phone)
DIGITAL STEREO IN : 2 CH (coaxial stereo x 1)
Memory
Mini-YGDAI SLOT
: 16 CH
Scene Memory, EQ Library, Compressor Library,
Gate Library, Effect Library, Channel Library
Audio Output Section
MONITOR OUT
: 2 CH (stereo x 1)
Power Consumption
85 W
PHONES
: 2 CH (stereo x 1)
: 2 CH (stereo x 1)
: 4 CH
STEREO OUT
OMNI OUT
Dimensions (W x H x D)
533 x 153 x 503 mm
DIGITAL STEREO OUT : 2 CH (coaxial stereo x 1)
Mini-YGDAI SLOT
: 16 CH
Net Weight
11.5 kg
Audio Insert I/O Section
INSERT I/O
: 2 CH
Operating Temperature
5–35 °C
Mixer Input Section (Total 48 CH)
MIC/LINE INPUT
Internal Effect Return
Track
: 16 CH
Optional Accessories
Foot switch Yamaha FC5
: 8 CH (stereo x 4)
: 24 CH
Internal Effect Section
4 Built-in Multi-Effect Processors
277
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
● Digital Mixing Functions
■ Mixer Section
● Input/Output
Input Channels (INPUT 1–16)
Phase (Normal/Reverse), Gate, Compressor,
Attenuation, Equalizer (4-Band PEQ), Pan,
Bus Assign (STEREO, SOLO, BUS 1–2, AUX 1–4,
EFF 1–4)
MIC/LINE INPUT 1–8 (balanced XLR & phone)
Phantom Power Supply : +48 3 V
Input Impedance
: 3 kΩ
Nominal Input Level
Minimum Input Level
Maximum Input Level
: -46 dBu to + 4 dBu
: -56 dBu
Track Channels (TRACK 1–24)
Attenuation, Phase (Normal/Reverse),
Equalizer (4-Band PEQ), Compressor, Pan,
Bus Assign (STEREO, BUS 1–2, AUX 1–4, EFF 1–4)
: +24 dBu
INSERT I/O 1, 2 (unbalanced phone)
Input Impedance
: 10 kΩ
: 0 dBu
: +20 dBu
: 600 Ω
: 0 dBu
Internal Effect Return Channels
(EFFECT RETURN 1-4 (stereo))
Equalizer (4-Band PEQ), Pan,
Bus Assign (STEREO, AUX 1–4)
Nominal Input Level
Maximum Input Level
Output Impedance
Nominal Output Level
Master Channels
STEREO L, R
: Attenuation,
Equalizer (4-Band PEQ),
Compressor, Balance
Maximum Output Level : +20 dBu
STEREO OUT L, R (balanced phone)
Output Impedance
Nominal Load Impedance : 600 Ω
Nominal Output Level : +4 dBu
: 75 Ω
BUS 1 L/R, 2 L/R : Attenuation, Equalizer (4-Band
PEQ), Compressor, Balance
AUX 1–4
: Attenuation, Equalizer (4-Band
PEQ), Compressor, Balance
Maximum Output Level : +24 dBu
EFF 1–4
: Compressor
MONITOR OUT L, R (balanced phone)
Output Impedance
Nominal Load Impedance : 600 Ω
Nominal Output Level : +4 dBu
: 75 Ω
■ Recorder Section
Overview
Maximum Output Level : +24 dBu
Recording Resolution : 16-bit/24-bit
Sampling Frequency : 44.1 kHz/48 kHz
OMNI OUT 1–4 (unbalanced phone)
Output Impedance
Nominal Load Impedance : 10 kΩ
Nominal Output Level : +0 dBu
: 150 Ω
Edit Functions
Song Edit : OPTIMIZE, DELETE, COPY, IMPORT
Track Edit : ERASE, DELETE, INSERT,
COPY, MOVE, EXCHANGE,
Maximum Output Level : +20 dBu
TIME COMP/EXPAND,
PITCH CHANGE, IMPORT CD AUDIO,
IMPORT CD WAV, IMPORT USB WAV,
IMPORT TRACK, EXPORT
PHONES (unbalancedTRS phone)
Load Impedance
: 8–40 Ω
Maximum Output Level : 25 mW (8 Ω load)
75 mW (40 Ω load)
Other Functions
Locate point/Marker
DIGITAL STEREO IN/OUT (coaxial)
Locate
: RTZ, A/B, LAST REC IN/OUT,
Quick Locate 1–9
Mini-YGDAI Cards
MY8-AT, MY8-TD, MY8-AE, MY4-AD, MY8-AD,
MY4-DA, MY16-AT, MY16-TD, MY16-AE, MY8-AE96,
MY8-AE96S, MY8-AD24, MY8-AD96, MY8-DA96,
MY16-mLAN, Y96K
MARK
: 1–99
Punch-In/Out : Manual, Auto
Pitch Fix
CD-RW Drive
* 0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms
Data Backup, Audio CD Burning and Playback,
Audio CD Import, WAV File Import
■ External Control
MIDI IN
: 5-pin DIN
MIDI OUT/THRU : 5-pin DIN
FOOT SW
USB
: phone
: USB 2.0
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
278
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dimensions
Dimensions
153
145
13
533
Unit: mm
* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only.
Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time
without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every
locale, please check with yourYamaha dealer.
For European models
Purchaser/User Information specified in EN55103-1 and EN55103-2.
Inrush Current: 35A
Conforms to Environments: E1, E2, E3 and E4
279
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
G
H
EFFECT screen
I
M
MASTERING LIBRARY
J
F
K
L
Library
281
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
P
PAN/EQ screen
MIDI screen
S
SCENE screen
MONITOR screen
Q
N
R
SONG screen
O
RECALL CONFIRMATION
RECORD screen
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
282
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
TRACK screen
U
STORE CONFIRMATION
SYNC CAUTION
SYNC CAUTION
UTILITY screen
T
V
W
283
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Block diagram
Block diagram
[
]
U
A
T
[SREOUT]
1
2
3
4
L
R
L
R
S E L E C T
O U T P U T P A T C H
O U T P U T P A T C H
AT
ON
CODER
C-WDRIVE
TNROME
E F F E C T 1 - 4
A U X 1 - 4
S O L O R
S O L O L
S T E R E O R
S T E R E O L
B U S 2 R
B U S 2 L
B U S 1 R
B U S 1 L
AT
NBALE
L
R
SICLATOR
D
(BUSCADE)
D
(BUSCADE)
S E L E C T
[LSOT]
[GDALSTREOIN]
[
)
]
(1-2ONLY)
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
284
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
285
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
AW2400 Owner’s Manual
286
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha
representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführ-
ten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den
jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à
Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la
liste suivante.
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más
cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
POLAND
NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
ASIA
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce
ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa,
Poland
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF
CHINA
Yamaha Music & Electronics (China)
Co.,Ltd.
25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road
(West), Jingan, Shanghai, China
Tel: 021-6247-2211
Tel: 022-868-07-57
Tel: 416-298-1311
THE NETHERLANDS/
BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Benelux
Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen,
The Netherlands
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park,
Calif. 90620, U.S.A.
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend.
Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577
Tel: 714-522-9011
Tel: 0347-358 040
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
MEXICO
Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.
Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,
Col. Guadalupe del Moral
FRANCE
Yamaha Musique France
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8
Yoido-dong, Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 02-3770-0660
ITALY
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.
Combo Division
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México
Tel: 55-5804-0600
MALAYSIA
BRAZIL
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 3-78030900
Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.
Av. Reboucas 2636-Pinheiros CEP: 05402-400
Sao Paulo-SP. Brasil
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A.
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain
Tel: 91-639-8888
Tel: 011-3085-1377
SINGAPORE
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Sucursal de Argentina
Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 1-4371-7021
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
#03-11 A-Z Building
140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015
Tel: 747-4374
SWEDEN
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1
Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
TAIWAN
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.
Taiwan 104, R.O.C.
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización
Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
DENMARK
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 6A
DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
Tel: 02-2511-8688
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 floor
Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan
Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: +507-269-5311
NORWAY
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1
N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
Tel: 02-215-2626
EUROPE
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
Germany
Tel: 01908-366700
Tel: +81-53-460-2317
GERMANY
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
Germany
Tel: +49-4101-3030
OCEANIA
AUSTRALIA
AFRICA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
Victoria 3006, Australia
Tel: 04101-3030
Yamaha Corporation,
SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Switzerland
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland
Tel: 01-383 3990
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: 3-9693-5111
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
Tel: +81-53-460-2313
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
MIDDLE EAST
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
Germany
Tel: +81-53-460-2313
CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/
HUNGARY/SLOVENIA
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Austria, CEE Department
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-602039025
Tel: 04101-3030
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone
P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.
Tel: +971-4-881-5868
HEAD OFFICE
Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2441
PA13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Yamaha Web Site (English only)
http://www.yamahasynth.com/
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/
U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation
© 2005 Yamaha Corporation
WE25170 507POCP15.2-02B0
Printed in Japan
This document is printed on chlorine free (ECF) paper with soy ink.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Weslo Treadmill 83129502 User Manual
Westcott Camera Accessories 1822 User Manual
Western Digital Computer Drive WD20NPVX User Manual
Westinghouse Outdoor Ceiling Fan mh10 User Manual
Whirlpool Air Conditioner ACP102PS2 User Manual
Wright Manufacturing Lawn Mower 31897 User Manual
Yamaha Electronic Keyboard DJX User Manual
Yamaha Speaker 900SW User Manual
ZALMAN Computer Accessories CNPS9500 AT User Manual
Zanussi Ventilation Hood 640033 User Manual